advertisement
Software User’s Manual
DNA Fusion™ is a trademark of Open Options, Inc.
The DNA Fusion™ Access Control and Security Management System uses equipment that generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with this installation manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference. In which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the user’s expense.
The DNA Fusion™ Access Control and Security Management System shall be installed in accordance with this installation manual and in accordance with the National Electric Code (N.E.C),
ANSI and NFPA 70 Regulations and recommendations.
This manual is proprietary information of Open Options, Inc.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this manual is strictly forbidden without the written consent of Open Options, Inc.
The information contained within this manual is for informational purposes only and is subject to change at any time without notice.
Open Options, Inc. assumes no responsibility for incorrect or outdated information that may be contained in this publication.
This manual has been written for DNA Fusion™ version 5.
4 or higher
Print Date:
August 27, 2014
Manual Number:
UM-6.0
©Copyright 2002-20 14 Open Options, Inc. All rights reserved.
Warranty
All Open Options products are warranted against defect in materials and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment. Open Options will repair or replace products that prove defective and are returned to Open Options within the warranty period with shipping prepaid. The warranty of Open Options products shall not apply to defects resulting from misuse, accident, alteration, neglect, improper installation, unauthorized repair, or acts of God. Open Options shall have the right of final determination as to the existence and cause of the defect. No other warranty, written or oral is expressed or implied.
3440 Sojourn | Suite 2
30
Carrollton, TX 75006
Phone: (972) 818-7001
Fax (972) 818-7003 www.openoptionsinc.com
Open Options, Inc. Software License Agreement and Warranty
THE ENCLOSED SOFTWARE PACKAGE IS LICENSED BY OPEN OPTIONS, INC. TO CUSTOMERS FOR
THEIR NON-EXCLUSIVE USE ON A COMPUTER SYSTEM PER THE TERMS SET FORTH BELOW.
DEFINITIONS: Open Options shall mean Open Options, Inc., which has the legal right to license the computer application known as DNA Fusion™ herein known as the Software. Documentation shall mean all printed material included with the Software. Licensee shall mean the end user of this Open Options Software. This Software Package consists of copyrighted computer software and copyrighted user reference manual(s).
LICENSE: Open Options, Inc., grants the licensee a limited, non-exclusive license (i) to load a copy of the Software into the memory of a single (one) computer as necessary to use the
Program, and (ii) to make one (1) backup or archival copy of the Software for use with the same computer. The archival copy and original copy of the Software are subject to the restrictions in this Agreement and both must be destroyed or returned to Open Options if your continued possession or use of the original copy ceases or this Agreement is terminated.
RESTRICTIONS: Licensee may not sub license, rent, lease, sell, pledge or otherwise transfer or distribute the original copy or archival copy of the Software or the Documentation. Licensee agrees not to translate, modify, disassemble, decompile, reverse engineer, or create derivative works based on the Software or any portion thereof. Licensee also may not copy the
Documentation. The license automatically terminates without notice if Licensee breaches any provision of this Agreement.
TRANSFER RIGHTS: Reseller agrees to provide this license and warranty agreement to the end user customer. By installation and acceptance of the software package, the end user customer and reseller agree to be bound by the license agreement and warranty.
LIMITED WARRANTY: Open Options warrants that it has the sole right to license the Software to licensee. Open Options further warrants that the media on which the Software is furnished will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days following the delivery of the Software to the licensee. Open Options’ entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be the replacement of the Software if the media on which the Software is furnished proves to be defective. This warranty is void if the media defect has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Open Options does not warrant that the Software will meet the end user customer requirements or that operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or that the
Software will be error-free.
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE THE ONLY WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. NEITHER OPEN OPTIONS, NOR ITS VENDORS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS, NOR FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHETHER UNDER THIS AGREEMENT
OR OTHERWISE.
IN NO CASE SHALL OPEN OPTIONS’ LIABILITY EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE SOFTWARE.
The disclaimers and limitations set forth above will apply regardless of whether you accept the
Software.
TERMINATION: Open Options may terminate this license at any time if licensee is in breach of any of its terms or conditions. Upon termination, licensee will immediately destroy the Software or return all copies of the Software to Open Options, along with any copies licensee has made.
APPLICABLE LAWS: This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of Texas, including patent and copyright laws. This Agreement will govern any upgrades, if any, to the program that the licensee receives and contains the entire understanding between the parties and supersedes any proposal or prior agreement regarding the subject matter hereof.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction
Introduction to DNA Fusion ..........................................................................................................1-3
What is DNA Fusion? ................................................................................................................1-3
DNA Advantages .....................................................................................................................1-3
System Configuration Overview .................................................................................................1-3
DCOM ...............................................................................................................................1-3
TCP/IP ..............................................................................................................................1-3
Services ............................................................................................................................1-3
Requirements & Specifications ......................................................................................................1-5
Installation Types ....................................................................................................................1-5
Network Requirements for DNA .................................................................................................1-5
Server Specifications ...............................................................................................................1-5
DNA Server (Stand Alone) w/SQL Express Database ................................................................1-5
DNA Server PC w/SQL Express Database 1 to 4 Clients* ..........................................................1-6
DNA Enterprise Server PC w/SQL Server Database ..................................................................1-6
Client Specifications .................................................................................................................1-7
DNA Client Workstation .......................................................................................................1-7
DNA Client Workstation w/Photo ID .......................................................................................1-7
Open Options Resources ..............................................................................................................1-9
World Wide Web ......................................................................................................................1-9
Chapter 2: Getting Started
Starting DNAFusion.....................................................................................................................2-1
Logging In ..............................................................................................................................2-1
Initial Workstation Logon .............................................................................................................2-2
Changing Operators .................................................................................................................2-2
The Fusion Environment ..............................................................................................................2-3
Main Menu ..............................................................................................................................
2-4
Toolbars .................................................................................................................................2-4
Standard Toolbar ................................................................................................................2-4
Secondary Toolbars .............................................................................................................2-5
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons ...................................................................................2-5
Explorer (Browser Panes) .........................................................................................................2-6
Data Windows .........................................................................................................................2-6
Status Bar ..............................................................................................................................2-7
The Customize Dialog..................................................................................................................2-8
Commands .............................................................................................................................2-8
Toolbars .................................................................................................................................2-8
Tools .....................................................................................................................................2-9
Keyboard ...............................................................................................................................2-9
Menu ...................................................................................................................................2-10
Fusion Tech Manual Page TOC-1
Table of Contents
Mouse ..................................................................................................................................2-10
Options ................................................................................................................................2-10
Customizing the DNA Environment ..............................................................................................2-11
Changing the Desktop Appearance ...........................................................................................2-11
Changing the Data Window Appearance ....................................................................................2-11
Hiding a Main Menu Item ........................................................................................................2-11
Adding Toolbar Buttons ..........................................................................................................2-11
Hiding Toolbar Buttons ...........................................................................................................2-11
Modifying Toolbar Buttons .......................................................................................................2-12
Downloading ............................................................................................................................2-13
Chapter 3: DNA Properties
The Properties Dialog ..................................................................................................................3-1
Station Settings ......................................................................................................................3-2
Station Settings ..................................................................................................................3-2
Appearance: Information Bar ...............................................................................................3-3
Tooltip Settings ..................................................................................................................3-3
DNA Properties .......................................................................................................................
3-4
Miscellaneous DNA Properties ...............................................................................................
3-4
Alarms & Events .................................................................................................................3-4
Situation Manager ...................................................................................................................3-7
Situation Manager Settings ..................................................................................................3-7
Edit Operators.........................................................................................................................3-8
Operator Statistics ..............................................................................................................3-8
Options .............................................................................................................................3-8
Operator Profiles .....................................................................................................................3-9
Options .............................................................................................................................3-9
E-Mail Enable ........................................................................................................................3-10
Settings ..........................................................................................................................3-10
SMTP Properties ...............................................................................................................3-10
E-Mail Recipients List.........................................................................................................3-11
E-Mail Editor ....................................................................................................................3-11
Watchbar Settings .................................................................................................................3-12
Tab Captions ....................................................................................................................3-12
Grid Lines ........................................................................................................................3-12
Personnel Properties ..............................................................................................................3-13
Operation ........................................................................................................................3-13
New Cards .......................................................................................................................3-13
Custom Fields ..................................................................................................................
3-14
Personnel Custom Fields Setup ...........................................................................................
3-14
Advanced Properties..........................................................................................................
3-14
Drivers License Scanner Fields ............................................................................................3-14
Photo Recall ..........................................................................................................................3-15
Displayed Text ..................................................................................................................3-15
Photo Sizing .....................................................................................................................3-15
Text Attributes .................................................................................................................3-15
Cycling ............................................................................................................................3-16
Text Colors ......................................................................................................................3-16
Page TOC-2 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
Display On .......................................................................................................................3-16
Tree Properties ......................................................................................................................3-17
Personnel Tree Tooltips ......................................................................................................3-17
Personnel Tree Defaults .....................................................................................................3-17
Refresh from Client Updates ...............................................................................................3-17
Personnel Tree Search Tabs ................................................................................................3-17
Personnel SQL Builder .......................................................................................................3-18
Tenant Settings .....................................................................................................................3-19
Photo ID ..............................................................................................................................3-21
Photo Name Configuration .................................................................................................3-21
Photo ID Settings .............................................................................................................3-21
Custom Fields and Types ........................................................................................................3-22
Personnel Custom Fields (Embedded) ..................................................................................3-22
Custom Personnel Types ....................................................................................................3-22
Custom Access Levels .......................................................................................................3-22
Edit Card Types ................................................................................................................3-22
Edit Disable Reasons .........................................................................................................3-22
Hardware Tree Behavior .........................................................................................................3-23
Personnel Tree Tooltips ......................................................................................................3-23
Hardware Tree Tabs ..........................................................................................................3-23
“All Objects” Tree Items .....................................................................................................3-23
Refresh from Current Updates ............................................................................................3-24
Miscellaneous Properties ....................................................................................................
3-24
DNA Video Window Settings ....................................................................................................3-25
Video Window 1-4 .............................................................................................................3-25
ASSA Settings .......................................................................................................................3-26
Credential Settings ...........................................................................................................3-26
Magnetic Encoding Minimum Lengths ..................................................................................3-26
Chapter 4: DNA Operators
Configuring Operators ................................................................................................................4-1
Adding an Operator ................................................................................................................
4-1
Removing an Operator ............................................................................................................
4-3
Changing Operator’s Password .................................................................................................4-3
Configuring Operator Profiles ......................................................................................................4-5
Adding a Profile ......................................................................................................................4-5
Removing a Profile ..................................................................................................................4-6
Editing a Profile ......................................................................................................................4-6
Configuring a Profile ...............................................................................................................4-7
Operator Privileges .................................................................................................................
4-9
Hardware .........................................................................................................................4-9
Access Levels ...................................................................................................................4-10
Personnel .......................................................................................................................
4-11
Alarms ...........................................................................................................................
4-12
Reports ..........................................................................................................................
4-12
Views .............................................................................................................................4-13
Actions ...........................................................................................................................
4-13
Graphics .........................................................................................................................
4-14
Page TOC-3 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
Direct Commands ............................................................................................................
4-14
Schedules .......................................................................................................................
4-14
Station Levels ..................................................................................................................4-14
Alarm Routing ..................................................................................................................
4-14
Operator Filters ................................................................................................................
4-15
Operator Settings .............................................................................................................
4-15
Operator Import Settings ...................................................................................................
4-15
Custom Personnel Permissions ...................................................................................................
4-16
Importing Operators .........................................................................................................
4-17
Installing the AD Sync Plugin ..................................................................................................
4-17
AD Sync Plugin Configuration ..................................................................................................4-17
Options ...........................................................................................................................
4-17
Queries ...........................................................................................................................4-18
Configure Import Settings ......................................................................................................4-18
Setting Up the Operator Environment ..........................................................................................4-19
Local Registry .......................................................................................................................4-19
Database View ......................................................................................................................4-19
Configuring a New Environment .........................................................................................4-19
Modifying an Environment .................................................................................................4-20
Operator Features ....................................................................................................................
4-21
Operator Browser .................................................................................................................4-21
Leave Message .....................................................................................................................4-21
Locate ................................................................................................................................4-22
Journal ...............................................................................................................................
4-23
Creating a New Entry .......................................................................................................4-23
Viewing an Entry .............................................................................................................4-23
Audit Report ........................................................................................................................
4-24
Operator SSP Options ..............................................................................................................
4-25
Profile SSP List .....................................................................................................................4-25
Chapter 5: Time & Holiday Schedules
Time Schedules ..........................................................................................................................5-1
Adding a Time Schedule ...........................................................................................................5-1
Editing a Time Schedule ...........................................................................................................5-4
Deleting a Time Schedule .........................................................................................................
5-4
Downloading Time Schedules ....................................................................................................5-4
Where Used Report ..................................................................................................................5-4
Controlling Time Schedules .......................................................................................................5-5
Controlling a Time Schedule .................................................................................................5-5
Controlling Individual Time Schedules from the Hardware Browser ............................................5-6
Time Schedule Sets ....................................................................................................................5-7
Creating a Time Schedule Set ...................................................................................................5-7
Adding Time Schedules to a Set ................................................................................................5-7
Copy a Default Time Schedule ..............................................................................................5-7
Drag and Drop a Default Time Schedule .................................................................................5-8
Create a Set Specific Time Schedule ......................................................................................5-8
Removing Time Schedules from a Set ........................................................................................5-8
Deleting a Time Schedule Set ....................................................................................................5-8
Page TOC-4 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
Holidays ....................................................................................................................................5-9
How do Holidays & Time Schedules Work ....................................................................................5-9
Adding a Holiday .....................................................................................................................5-9
Deleting a Holiday .................................................................................................................5-10
Holiday Shortcuts ..................................................................................................................5-10
Holiday Sets ............................................................................................................................5-11
Adding a Holiday Set ..............................................................................................................5-11
Adding Holidays to a Set ........................................................................................................5-11
Removing Holidays from a Set .................................................................................................5-11
Chapter 6: Access Levels
Access Levels .............................................................................................................................6-1
Creating a Basic Door Access Level ............................................................................................6-3
Creating a Basic Elevator Access Level .......................................................................................6-5
Creating a Floor Group ........................................................................................................6-5
Creating the Elevator Access Level ........................................................................................6-6
Escort Required Access Level ....................................................................................................6-7
Auto Expiring Access Level ........................................................................................................6-9
Editing an Access Level ..........................................................................................................6-10
Editing a Floor Group .............................................................................................................6-10
Deleting an Access Level ........................................................................................................6-10
Deleting a Floor Group ...........................................................................................................6-10
Access Level Groups .................................................................................................................6-11
Creating an Access Level Groups .............................................................................................6-11
Adding an Access Level to a Group ..........................................................................................6-11
Editing an Access Level Group .................................................................................................6-12
Deleting an Access Level Group ...............................................................................................6-12
Precision Access Levels..............................................................................................................6-13
Setting Up Precision Access Levels ...........................................................................................6-13
Assigning Precision Access Levels ............................................................................................6-13
Access Level Features ...............................................................................................................6-15
Access Level Members ...........................................................................................................6-15
Journal Entries ......................................................................................................................6-15
Creating a New Entry ........................................................................................................6-15
Viewing an Entry ..............................................................................................................6-16
Chapter 7: Cardholders
Personnel Browser ......................................................................................................................7-1
Configuring the Browser ...........................................................................................................7-2
Personnel Toolbar .......................................................................................................................7-2
Adding a Cardholder ...................................................................................................................7-3
Using a Drivers License Scanner to Add Cardholder ......................................................................7-3
Saving & Downloading Records..................................................................................................7-4
Saving a Record .................................................................................................................
7-4
Downloading Records ..........................................................................................................7-4
Verifying the Last Download .................................................................................................7-4
Employee Info Tab ...................................................................................................................7-5
Employee ..........................................................................................................................7-5
Employment ......................................................................................................................7-5
Page TOC-5 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
Employee Photos ................................................................................................................7-5
Company Editor ..................................................................................................................7-6
Employee Info: (Page 2) Tab .....................................................................................................7-7
Personnel Information .........................................................................................................7-7
Other Personal Information ..................................................................................................7-7
ID Badging ........................................................................................................................7-7
Card Tab ................................................................................................................................7-9
Advanced Access Control ...................................................................................................7-10
Other Options ..................................................................................................................7-10
Access Levels ...................................................................................................................7-10
Managing Cardholders ...............................................................................................................7-11
Opening a Cardholder’s Record ................................................................................................7-11
Editing Multiple Cardholders / Cards .........................................................................................7-11
Removing a Cardholder ..........................................................................................................7-11
Adding Cards ........................................................................................................................7-11
Deactivating a Card ...............................................................................................................7-12
Activating a Card ...................................................................................................................7-12
Deleting a Card .....................................................................................................................7-12
Setting a Card in Vacation Mode ..............................................................................................7-12
Adding a Card Block...............................................................................................................7-12
Assigning and Removing Access Levels ........................................................................................7-13
Individual Card .....................................................................................................................7-13
From the Context Menu .....................................................................................................7-13
Cardholder Record ............................................................................................................
7-14
Drag & Drop an Access Level to an Individual .......................................................................7-14
Copy Card Access ..................................................................................................................7-15
Copy Another Cardholder’s Access ......................................................................................7-15
Copy Active Card Access Information ...................................................................................7-16
Temporary Access Level Upgrade .............................................................................................7-17
Editing a Temporary Access Level ........................................................................................7-18
Precision Access Levels ..........................................................................................................7-19
Removing a Cardholders Access ..............................................................................................7-21
Individual Card .................................................................................................................7-21
Remove All Access Levels ...................................................................................................7-21
Deactivate and Remove Access Level Information when a New Card is Added ...........................7-21
From the Access Level Members Dialog ................................................................................7-22
Personnel Groups .....................................................................................................................7-23
Creating a Personnel Group ....................................................................................................7-23
Editing the Personnel Records of a Personnel Group ...............................................................7-24
Deleting a Personnel Group ................................................................................................
7-24
Adding & Removing Cardholders to a Personnel Group ................................................................7-25
Drag and Drop .................................................................................................................7-25
Add User(s) to Group ........................................................................................................7-25
Adding a New Cardholder ...................................................................................................7-25
Adding a New Card to a Cardholder Assigned to a Personnel Group .........................................7-26
Using the Find Cardholders Feature .....................................................................................7-26
Removing Cardholders from a Personnel Group .....................................................................7-26
Managing Personnel Groups and Access Levels ..........................................................................7-27
Page TOC-6 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
Assigning a Default Access Level .........................................................................................7-27
Adding Access Levels to Cardholders in a Personnel Group .....................................................7-28
Removing Access Levels from a Personnel Group...................................................................7-29
Viewing Cardholders .................................................................................................................7-31
Sorting the Personnel Browser ................................................................................................7-31
Custom Repeatable Queries (CRQs) .........................................................................................7-31
Running a Query...............................................................................................................7-31
Creating Custom Queries ...................................................................................................7-32
Using the Find Cardholders Feature ..........................................................................................7-32
Deleting the Find Cardholders Group ...................................................................................7-32
Cardholder Features ..................................................................................................................7-33
Individual Cardholder Features ................................................................................................7-33
Card Flags .......................................................................................................................7-33
Has Access To ..................................................................................................................7-33
Trace History ....................................................................................................................7-33
User Membership ..............................................................................................................7-34
Journal ............................................................................................................................
7-34
Individual Card Features .........................................................................................................7-35
Use Limit .........................................................................................................................7-35
Activate/Deactivate a Card .................................................................................................7-35
Reassign a Card ...............................................................................................................7-35
Remove Card ...................................................................................................................7-35
All Cardholders/All Cards Features ...........................................................................................7-36
Last Used ........................................................................................................................7-36
Non Use ..........................................................................................................................7-36
Utilizing Photos ........................................................................................................................7-37
Importing Photos to a Record ..................................................................................................7-37
Removing a Photo .................................................................................................................7-37
Arranging Photos ...................................................................................................................7-38
Photo Recall .............................................................................................................................7-39
Photo Recall Toolbar ...............................................................................................................7-39
Opening a Photo Recall Window ...............................................................................................7-39
Personnel Features ............................................................................................................7-39
Configuring the Photo Recall Window ...................................................................................7-40
Assigning Specific Doors ....................................................................................................7-40
Chapter 8: Hardware Features
The Hardware Browser ................................................................................................................8-1
Configuring the Browser ...........................................................................................................8-2
Hardware Toolbar .......................................................................................................................8-2
Controlling Doors ........................................................................................................................8-3
Door Modes ............................................................................................................................8-3
Door Options ..........................................................................................................................8-5
Door Modes Toolbar .................................................................................................................8-5
Door Mode Override Feature .....................................................................................................8-5
Direct Control Dialog ................................................................................................................8-6
Immediate Control ..............................................................................................................8-6
Scheduling Doors (Timed Control) .............................................................................................8-7
Page TOC-7 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
One Time Scheduling ..........................................................................................................8-7
Repeating Events ................................................................................................................8-8
Controlling Multiple Doors .........................................................................................................8-8
Configuring a Door to Follow a Time Schedule .............................................................................8-9
Controlling Elevators .................................................................................................................8-11
Door Modes Toolbar ...............................................................................................................8-11
Elevator Options ....................................................................................................................8-11
Elevator Mode Override Feature ...............................................................................................8-12
Direct Control Dialog ..............................................................................................................8-13
Immediate Control ............................................................................................................8-13
Scheduling Elevators (Timed Control) .......................................................................................8-14
One Time Scheduling ........................................................................................................
8-14
Repeating Events ..............................................................................................................8-14
Controlling Multiple Elevators ..................................................................................................8-15
Configuring an Elevator to Follow a Time Schedule .....................................................................8-15
ACM Features ...........................................................................................................................8-17
Status ..................................................................................................................................8-17
Trace History ........................................................................................................................8-17
Who Has Access ....................................................................................................................8-17
Who Does Not Have Access .....................................................................................................8-17
Where Used ..........................................................................................................................8-18
Journal Entries ......................................................................................................................8-18
Creating a New Entry ........................................................................................................8-18
Viewing an Entry ..............................................................................................................8-18
ACM Status Report ................................................................................................................8-19
Generating an ACM Status Report .......................................................................................8-19
Formatting a Report ..........................................................................................................8-19
Saving a ACM Status Report ...............................................................................................8-20
Opening a Saved ACM Status Report ...................................................................................8-20
ACM Status Features ..............................................................................................................8-20
Controlling an ACM ...........................................................................................................8-20
Info ................................................................................................................................8-20
Controlling Input/Output Points ..................................................................................................8-21
Input / Output Options ...........................................................................................................8-21
Direct Control Dialog ..............................................................................................................8-21
Immediate Control ............................................................................................................8-22
Scheduling Input & Output Points (Timed Control) .....................................................................8-23
One Time Scheduling .............................................................................................................8-23
Repeating Events ..................................................................................................................8-23
Controlling Multiple Points ......................................................................................................
8-24
Trace History ........................................................................................................................
8-24
Where Used ..........................................................................................................................8-24
Site Options .............................................................................................................................8-25
Channel Options .......................................................................................................................8-25
SSP Options .............................................................................................................................8-26
Properties ............................................................................................................................8-26
Promote SSP ........................................................................................................................8-26
Status ..................................................................................................................................8-26
Page TOC-8 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
Controller Commands ............................................................................................................8-27
Add .....................................................................................................................................8-27
Journal Entries ......................................................................................................................8-27
Creating a New Entry ........................................................................................................8-27
Viewing an Entry ..............................................................................................................8-28
Delete ..................................................................................................................................8-28
Card Formats ........................................................................................................................8-28
Download .............................................................................................................................8-28
Reports ................................................................................................................................8-28
Homepage ............................................................................................................................8-28
Refresh Status ......................................................................................................................8-28
Subcontroller Options ................................................................................................................8-29
Properties ............................................................................................................................8-29
Delete ..................................................................................................................................8-29
Download .............................................................................................................................8-29
Reload Firmware ...................................................................................................................8-29
Status ..................................................................................................................................8-29
Journal ................................................................................................................................8-29
Refresh Status ......................................................................................................................8-29
Where Used ..........................................................................................................................8-29
ACM Options ............................................................................................................................8-30
Properties ............................................................................................................................8-30
Control ................................................................................................................................8-30
Add Door/Elevator .................................................................................................................8-30
Door Follows Time Schedule ....................................................................................................8-30
Delete ..................................................................................................................................8-30
Download .............................................................................................................................8-30
Reports ................................................................................................................................8-30
Info .....................................................................................................................................8-30
Journal ................................................................................................................................8-30
Watch Item ..........................................................................................................................8-30
Refresh Status ......................................................................................................................8-30
Where Used ..........................................................................................................................8-30
Input and Output Options ..........................................................................................................8-31
Properties ............................................................................................................................8-31
Control ................................................................................................................................8-31
Download .............................................................................................................................8-31
Reports ................................................................................................................................8-31
Journal ................................................................................................................................8-31
Trace History ........................................................................................................................8-31
Watch Item ..........................................................................................................................8-31
Defaults ...............................................................................................................................8-31
Templates ............................................................................................................................8-31
Where Used ..........................................................................................................................8-31
Viewing & Controlling DVR/NVR and IP Cameras ...........................................................................8-33
The DVR Browser ..................................................................................................................8-33
Using Video Tooltips ..........................................................................................................8-33
Creating Camera Groups ....................................................................................................8-33
Page TOC-9 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
Adding Recordings ............................................................................................................
8-34
Video Manager ......................................................................................................................8-35
Displaying Video ...............................................................................................................8-35
Video View Manager Toolbar ...............................................................................................8-35
Video Manager Features ....................................................................................................8-36
Recalling from the Events and Alarms Grids ..............................................................................8-37
Direct Commands .....................................................................................................................8-39
Creating a Direct Command ....................................................................................................8-39
Executing a Direct Command ..................................................................................................8-40
Adding a Direct Command to a Toolbar .....................................................................................8-40
Hardware Properties .................................................................................................................8-41
Site Properties ......................................................................................................................
8-41
Channel Properties ................................................................................................................
8-42
SSP (Controller) Properties .....................................................................................................
8-43
Controller Properties .........................................................................................................
8-43
Stored Quantities ..............................................................................................................8-45
Cards & Dual Comm ..........................................................................................................
8-47
Subcontrollers Properties ........................................................................................................8-49
Sub-Controller ..................................................................................................................8-49
Advanced ........................................................................................................................8-50
Door Properties .....................................................................................................................8-51
Common Properties ..........................................................................................................8-51
Door Objects ....................................................................................................................8-53
Advanced ........................................................................................................................8-55
Macros ............................................................................................................................8-57
Follows Schedule ..............................................................................................................8-58
Elevator Properties ................................................................................................................8-59
Common Properties ..........................................................................................................8-59
Elevator Objects ...............................................................................................................8-61
Elevator Parameters ..........................................................................................................8-63
Follows Schedule ..............................................................................................................8-64
Reader Properties ..................................................................................................................8-65
Common Properties ..........................................................................................................8-65
Reader Properties .............................................................................................................8-66
Input Point Properties ............................................................................................................8-67
Common Properties ..........................................................................................................8-67
Input Properties ...............................................................................................................8-69
Output Point Properties ..........................................................................................................8-71
Common Properties ..........................................................................................................8-71
Output Properties .............................................................................................................8-72
DVR Properties ......................................................................................................................8-73
Server Properties ..............................................................................................................8-73
DVR Camera Properties .....................................................................................................8-73
IP Camera Properties .............................................................................................................
8-74
Card Formats ...........................................................................................................................8-75
Creating a Card Format ..........................................................................................................8-75
Creating a New Card Format ...................................................................................................8-75
Copying a Card Format...........................................................................................................8-75
Page TOC-10 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
Editing a Card Format ............................................................................................................8-75
Gathering Card Format Information .........................................................................................8-76
Assigning a Card Format to the SSP .........................................................................................8-76
Chapter 9: Situation Level Manager
Setting the Situation Level ...........................................................................................................9-1
Configuring Situation Manager .....................................................................................................9-2
Enabling Hardware Objects ..........................................................................................................9-3
Doors & Elevators ....................................................................................................................9-3
Input Points ............................................................................................................................9-3
Output Points ..........................................................................................................................9-3
Secured Areas ........................................................................................................................
9-4
Access Areas ..........................................................................................................................
9-4
Configuring Time Schedules .........................................................................................................9-5
Establishing Card Access .............................................................................................................9-6
Configuring Operator Privileges ....................................................................................................9-7
Chapter 10: Triggers & Macros
Macros ....................................................................................................................................10-1
Creating a Macro ...................................................................................................................10-1
Triggers...................................................................................................................................10-5
Adding a Basic Trigger ............................................................................................................10-5
Advanced Configuration Options ..............................................................................................10-6
Trigger Codes .......................................................................................................................10-9
Creating Trigger Codes ......................................................................................................10-9
Adding Trigger Codes to a Trigger .......................................................................................10-9
Adding Trigger Codes to a Cardholder’ Record. ......................................................................10-9
Trigger Variables ................................................................................................................. 10-10
Working with Existing Macros & Triggers .................................................................................... 10-11
Deleting a Macro or Trigger ................................................................................................... 10-11
Editing a Macro or Trigger ..................................................................................................... 10-11
Copying Trigger & Macro Combinations ................................................................................... 10-11
Adding a Macro to a Door ..................................................................................................... 10-12
Host Based Macros ................................................................................................................. 10-13
Creating a Host Based Macro ................................................................................................ 10-13
Adding the Host Based Macro to the Controlling Object ............................................................. 10-14
Host Based Macros Table ...................................................................................................... 10-15
Internal Time Schedules ....................................................................................................... 10-19
Creating Internal Time Schedules .......................................................................................... 10-19
Adding Internal Holidays ...................................................................................................... 10-19
Editing Internal Time Schedules ............................................................................................ 10-20
Deleting Internal Time Schedules .......................................................................................... 10-20
Editing Internal Time Schedule Holidays ................................................................................. 10-20
Deleting Internal Time Schedule Holidays ............................................................................... 10-20
Chapter 11: Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back
Access Areas ............................................................................................................................11-1
What is an Access Area? .........................................................................................................11-1
Creating an Access Area .........................................................................................................11-1
Page TOC-11 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
Adding an Access Area to a Door .............................................................................................11-3
Adding an Access Area to an Elevator .......................................................................................11-4
Access Areas Features ...............................................................................................................11-5
Enable/Disable an Area ..........................................................................................................11-5
Set Occupancy Level ..............................................................................................................11-5
Deleting an Access Area .........................................................................................................11-5
Anti-Pass Back .........................................................................................................................11-7
Types of Anti-Pass Back ..........................................................................................................11-7
Reader-Based ...................................................................................................................11-7
Area-Based ......................................................................................................................11-7
Configuring DNA to use Anti-Pass Back .....................................................................................11-7
Implementing General Anti-Pass Back for a Door .......................................................................11-9
Implementing Timed Anti-Pass Back for a Door ....................................................................... 11-10
Implementing General Anti-Pass Back for an Elevator ............................................................... 11-11
Implementing Timed Anti-Pass Back for an Elevator ................................................................. 11-12
Anti-Pass Back Areas Features .................................................................................................. 11-13
Enable/Disable an Area ........................................................................................................ 11-13
Issue Free Pass ................................................................................................................... 11-13
Chapter 12: Secured Areas
Creating a Secured Area ............................................................................................................12-1
Setting Up the MPG ...............................................................................................................12-1
Setting Up the Secured Area ...................................................................................................12-3
Secured Areas ..................................................................................................................12-3
Area Points ......................................................................................................................
12-4
Building Arm/Disarm Triggers ..................................................................................................12-5
Arm the System (Trigger #1) .............................................................................................12-5
Disarm the System (Trigger #2) .........................................................................................12-5
Building a Chime Macro & Trigger ............................................................................................12-7
Adding Macro Commands ...................................................................................................12-7
Creating the Chime Trigger ................................................................................................12-8
Hardware Configuration .............................................................................................................12-9
Doors ..................................................................................................................................12-9
Setting Entry & Exit Delays ................................................................................................... 12-10
Controlling Secured Areas ........................................................................................................ 12-11
Secured Area Direct Control .................................................................................................. 12-11
Secured Area Control ........................................................................................................... 12-11
Object Direct Control ........................................................................................................... 12-11
Keypad Commands ................................................................................................................. 12-13
Adding Commands .............................................................................................................. 12-13
Executing Keypad Commands ............................................................................................... 12-13
Basic Keypad Operation ........................................................................................................... 12-14
Arming the System ..............................................................................................................
12-14
Disarming the System ..........................................................................................................
12-14
Chapter 13: Tenants
Setting Up Tenants ...................................................................................................................13-1
Enabling Tenants ...................................................................................................................13-1
Filter on SSP List ..............................................................................................................13-2
Page TOC-12 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
Creating Tenant SSP Groups ......................................................................................................13-3
Assigning Tenants to Operators ..................................................................................................13-5
Assigning Cardholders to a Tenant ..............................................................................................13-7
Chapter 14: Events & Alarms
Events ....................................................................................................................................14-1
Events Toolbar ......................................................................................................................14-1
Events Filters Toolbar .............................................................................................................14-3
Events Manager ....................................................................................................................14-5
Multiple Event Windows .....................................................................................................14-5
Filtering Data ...................................................................................................................
14-5
Index Filter ......................................................................................................................14-5
Exporting the Event Grid ....................................................................................................14-6
Events Grid Setup .............................................................................................................14-6
Accessing Hardware & Cardholders from the Events Grid ............................................................14-7
Controlling Hardware.........................................................................................................14-7
Accessing Cardholders .......................................................................................................
14-7
Access Denied Codes .............................................................................................................
14-9
Alarms ..................................................................................................................................
14-11
Alarms Toolbar .................................................................................................................... 14-11
The Alarm Grid....................................................................................................................
14-13
Alarm Grid Features .............................................................................................................
14-13
Using the Alarms Grid .......................................................................................................... 14-15
Grouping the Alarm Grid.......................................................................................................
14-15
Arranging the Columns .........................................................................................................
14-15
Grid Sounds........................................................................................................................
14-15
Alarm Grid Colors ................................................................................................................
14-16
Handling Alarms ..................................................................................................................
14-17
Alarm Status ......................................................................................................................
14-18
Dispatch Text ...................................................................................................................... 14-19
Free Hand Text Entry ........................................................................................................... 14-19
Predefined Text Entry ........................................................................................................... 14-19
Accessing Hardware from the Alarms Grid ............................................................................... 14-21
Controlling Hardware ........................................................................................................... 14-21
Configuring the Alarms & Events Logging ................................................................................... 14-23
Event Filtering and Alarm Escalation .......................................................................................... 14-25
Configuring Event Filtering .................................................................................................... 14-25
Setting Up Event Filters ........................................................................................................ 14-25
Applying the Event Filters ..................................................................................................... 14-25
Setting Up Alarm Escalation .................................................................................................. 14-26
Chapter 15: Watch Window
Using the Watch Windows ..........................................................................................................15-1
Naming the Watch Windows ....................................................................................................15-1
Adding Watch Objects ...............................................................................................................15-3
Watched Object Options .........................................................................................................15-3
Removing Watch Objects ...........................................................................................................15-3
Configuring a Watched Object ....................................................................................................15-4
Page TOC-13 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
Chapter 16: HTML Viewer
Using the HTML Viewer ..............................................................................................................16-3
Adding Pages & URLs ................................................................................................................16-3
New Root Pages ....................................................................................................................16-3
New Child Pages ....................................................................................................................16-4
Edit HTML Page .....................................................................................................................16-4
Remove HTML Page ...............................................................................................................16-4
Chapter 17: Reports
Reports ...................................................................................................................................17-1
Report Types ........................................................................................................................17-1
Access ............................................................................................................................17-1
Alarms ............................................................................................................................17-1
Events.............................................................................................................................17-1
Hardware Settings ............................................................................................................17-1
Personnel ........................................................................................................................17-2
Restored Archive Data .......................................................................................................17-2
System ...........................................................................................................................17-2
Custom Reports ................................................................................................................17-2
Generating a Report ..................................................................................................................17-3
Reports Toolbar .....................................................................................................................17-3
Navigating the Report ............................................................................................................
17-4
Creating a Custom Report ..........................................................................................................17-5
Generating a Custom Report ...................................................................................................17-6
Printing a Report ......................................................................................................................17-7
Exporting a Report ....................................................................................................................17-7
Scheduling a Report ..................................................................................................................17-8
Chapter 18: Graphic Maps
Graphics ..................................................................................................................................18-1
Graphics Toolbar ...................................................................................................................18-1
Graphics Alignment Toolbar ....................................................................................................18-3
Creating a New Graphics Map .....................................................................................................18-5
Linking to Hardware ...............................................................................................................18-7
Drag & Drop.....................................................................................................................18-7
Manually Link ...................................................................................................................18-7
Linking to Hyperlinks .............................................................................................................18-9
Linking to Other DNA Pages ...............................................................................................18-9
Linking to External Programs ..............................................................................................18-9
Linking to a Web Site ........................................................................................................18-9
Page Conversion Utility......................................................................................................... 18-10
Linked Page Objects............................................................................................................. 18-11
Buttons .............................................................................................................................. 18-11
Hi-Lite Tool ......................................................................................................................... 18-11
Point Tool ........................................................................................................................... 18-11
Pushpin Tool Icon ................................................................................................................ 18-12
Viewing Cameras on a Graphic Map ....................................................................................... 18-12
Working with Existing Maps ...................................................................................................... 18-13
Opening a Map .................................................................................................................... 18-13
Page TOC-14 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
Editing a Map ...................................................................................................................... 18-13
Using the Graphics Map ........................................................................................................... 18-15
Live Graphics Toolbar ........................................................................................................... 18-15
Object Status ...................................................................................................................... 18-15
Controlling a Linked Object ................................................................................................... 18-15
Acknowledging/Dismissing an Alarm ...................................................................................... 18-15
Arming/Disarming Linked Objects .......................................................................................... 18-16
Object Properties ................................................................................................................. 18-16
Chapter 19: Scheduling
Schedules ................................................................................................................................19-1
Archive Data ............................................................................................................................19-3
Creating a New Schedule ........................................................................................................19-3
Editing a Schedule .................................................................................................................19-4
Deleting a Schedule ...............................................................................................................
19-4
Copying a Schedule ...............................................................................................................
19-4
Batch Files ...............................................................................................................................19-5
Creating a New Schedule ........................................................................................................19-5
Editing a Schedule .................................................................................................................19-5
Deleting a Schedule ...............................................................................................................19-5
Copying a Schedule ...............................................................................................................19-6
Downloads ...............................................................................................................................19-7
Creating a New Schedule ........................................................................................................19-7
Editing a Schedule .................................................................................................................19-7
Deleting a Schedule ...............................................................................................................19-8
Copying a Schedule ...............................................................................................................19-8
Reports ...................................................................................................................................19-9
Creating a New Schedule ........................................................................................................19-9
Printing a Scheduled Report .................................................................................................. 19-10
Exporting a Scheduled Report ............................................................................................... 19-10
Editing a Schedule ............................................................................................................... 19-10
Deleting a Schedule ............................................................................................................. 19-11
Copying a Schedule ............................................................................................................. 19-11
Chapter 20: System Maintenance
System Settings .......................................................................................................................20-1
Configuring Directories ...........................................................................................................20-1
Driver Setup .........................................................................................................................20-3
Setting up Email Authentication ..........................................................................................20-3
Download on Demand .......................................................................................................20-3
System Maintenance .................................................................................................................20-5
Archiving Data ......................................................................................................................20-5
All Data ...........................................................................................................................20-5
By Event Type .......................................................................................................................20-5
Retrieving Archived Data ........................................................................................................20-6
Backup & Restore .....................................................................................................................20-7
SQL Server 2008 Express .......................................................................................................20-7
Restore ...........................................................................................................................20-8
SQL Server Maintenance Plan ..................................................................................................20-9
Page TOC-15 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
System Backup Files ............................................................................................................ 20-10
Software Upgrades ................................................................................................................. 20-11
Firmware Updates .................................................................................................................. 20-13
Controller ........................................................................................................................... 20-13
Subcontrollers ..................................................................................................................... 20-13
Batch Processing .................................................................................................................... 20-14
Chapter 21: Fusion Web
Installation & Configuration ........................................................................................................21-1
Pre-Requisites .......................................................................................................................21-1
Installing Fusion Web .............................................................................................................21-1
Setting Up Fusion Web ...........................................................................................................21-3
Configuring the Windows IIS Application ...................................................................................21-5
Opening & Logging In to Fusion Web ...........................................................................................21-7
Setting Operator Permissions ..................................................................................................21-7
Opening Fusion Web ..............................................................................................................21-7
Logging into Fusion Web .........................................................................................................21-7
Monitoring Events .....................................................................................................................21-9
Handling Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 21-11
The Alarm Grid.................................................................................................................... 21-11
Managing Alarms ................................................................................................................. 21-11
Alarm Status ...................................................................................................................... 21-12
Responding to an Alarm ....................................................................................................... 21-12
Managing Cardholders ............................................................................................................. 21-13
Opening a Cardholder’s Record .............................................................................................. 21-13
Adding Cardholders ............................................................................................................. 21-15
Adding Cards ...................................................................................................................... 21-15
Removing Cards .................................................................................................................. 21-16
Removing a Cardholder ........................................................................................................ 21-16
Employee Info Tab .................................................................................................................. 21-17
Employee ........................................................................................................................... 21-17
Employment ....................................................................................................................... 21-17
Personal Information Tab ......................................................................................................... 21-18
Custom Fields Tab .................................................................................................................. 21-18
Photos Tab ............................................................................................................................. 21-18
Access Control Tab .................................................................................................................. 21-19
Cardholder Features ................................................................................................................ 21-21
Direct Control ..................................................................................................................... 21-21
Use Limit ............................................................................................................................ 21-21
Issue Free Pass ................................................................................................................... 21-21
Activate a Card ................................................................................................................... 21-21
Deactivate a Card ................................................................................................................ 21-21
More Info ........................................................................................................................... 21-21
InfoReady Reports ............................................................................................................... 21-22
Has Access To ..................................................................................................................... 21-22
Trace History ...................................................................................................................... 21-22
Assigning & Removing Access Levels ...................................................................................... 21-23
Assigning an Access Level ..................................................................................................... 21-23
Page TOC-16 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
Removing an Access Level .................................................................................................... 21-24
Controlling Hardware .............................................................................................................. 21-25
Controllers............................................................................................................................. 21-26
Doors ................................................................................................................................... 21-27
Changing Door Modes .......................................................................................................... 21-29
Momentary Unlock ............................................................................................................... 21-29
Arm Door Held/Door Forced .................................................................................................. 21-29
Disarm Door Held/Door Forced .............................................................................................. 21-29
Reports .............................................................................................................................. 21-30
Who Has Access .................................................................................................................. 21-30
Trace History ...................................................................................................................... 21-30
Elevators ............................................................................................................................... 21-31
Floors ................................................................................................................................ 21-31
Changing the Elevator Mode ................................................................................................. 21-32
Reports .............................................................................................................................. 21-33
Who Has Access .................................................................................................................. 21-33
Trace History ...................................................................................................................... 21-33
Handling Time Schedules ......................................................................................................... 21-35
Controlling Time Schedules ................................................................................................... 21-36
Accessing Subcontrollers ......................................................................................................... 21-37
Subcontroller Objects .............................................................................................................. 21-39
Arming / Disarming Inputs ...................................................................................................
21-40
Activating / Deactivating Outputs ..........................................................................................
21-40
Reports ..............................................................................................................................
21-41
Trace History ......................................................................................................................
21-41
Chapter 22: ID Badging
Badge Designer ........................................................................................................................22-3
Opening Badge Designer ........................................................................................................22-3
The Badge Designer Environment ............................................................................................22-3
Main Menu .......................................................................................................................
22-4
Control Toolbar .................................................................................................................22-5
Insert/Component Toolbar .................................................................................................22-6
Designing a Badge Template ......................................................................................................22-7
Adding a Color Block ..............................................................................................................22-7
Adding a Photo Placeholder .....................................................................................................22-8
Adding a Text Placeholder .......................................................................................................22-8
Adding Static Graphics ...........................................................................................................22-9
Adding Static Text .................................................................................................................22-9
Adding a Bar Code ............................................................................................................... 22-10
Adding a Background Image ................................................................................................. 22-10
Configuration Dialogs .............................................................................................................. 22-11
Text Editor Dialogs............................................................................................................... 22-11
Text Style ........................................................................................................................... 22-11
Options .............................................................................................................................. 22-12
Concatenate Wizard ............................................................................................................. 22-12
Image Editor Dialogs ........................................................................................................... 22-13
Image Settings ................................................................................................................... 22-13
Page TOC-17 Fusion Tech Manual
Table of Contents
Image Options ....................................................................................................................
22-14
Object Inspectors ................................................................................................................ 22-15
Date Time Format ............................................................................................................... 22-15
Print Background ................................................................................................................. 22-17
Sample Value Property ......................................................................................................... 22-17
Scripting ............................................................................................................................ 22-17
Size To Fit .......................................................................................................................... 22-18
Signature Settings ............................................................................................................... 22-18
Configuring the Badge Type ..................................................................................................... 22-19
Saving a Badge Template ........................................................................................................ 22-19
Badge Manager ...................................................................................................................... 22-21
The Badge Manager Environment .......................................................................................... 22-21
Setup Dialogs ..................................................................................................................... 22-23
Printer Setup ...................................................................................................................... 22-23
Camera Setup ..................................................................................................................... 22-23
Advanced Setup .................................................................................................................. 22-23
Taking a Photo .................................................................................................................... 22-25
Release Control ................................................................................................................... 22-25
Camera .............................................................................................................................. 22-25
Crop .................................................................................................................................. 22-26
About ................................................................................................................................ 22-26
Previewing a Badge ............................................................................................................. 22-26
Printing a Badge .................................................................................................................. 22-26
Page TOC-18 Fusion Tech Manual
Introduction
1
In This Chapter
√
√
√
Manual Overview
Introduction to DNAFusion
System Specifications
This manual is designed to introduce you to DNAFusion and explain the configuration, and setup of the system.
H
ow
T
His
s
ecTion is
o
rganized
This manual contains seven parts:
Part One: Introduction & Overview:
Chapter 1, “Introduction,” gives an overview of the manual and system specification information.
Chapter 2, “Getting Started,” gives you a overview of the DNA Fusion software.
Part Two: DNA Configuration
Chapter 3, “DNA Properties,” provides you with the information to setup the DNA software.
Chapter 4, “DNA Operators,” covers adding & configuring operators in the system.
Chapter 5, “Time & Holiday Schedules,” provides you instructions for adding time and holiday schedules.
Chapter 6, “Access Levels,” covers setting up access levels.
Chapter 7, “Cardholders,” gives you information for adding, editing, configuring, and deleting cardholders.
Chapter 8, “Hardware Features” covers how to control hardware within the DNA Fusion software.
Part Three: System Management
Chapter 9, “Situation Manager,” covers enabling and configuring the Situation Manager feature.
Chapter 10, “Triggers & Macros,” explains triggers and macros in an easy-to-understand manner.
Chapter 11, “Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back,” provides basic set up instructions for access areas and antipass back options.
Chapter 12, “Secured Areas,” covers setting up secured areas.
Chapter 13, “Tenants,” covers configuring the tenants feature.
Part Four: System Monitoring
Chapter 14, “Events & Alarms,” explains the various events and alarms presented by DNA.
Chapter 15, “Watch Windows,” gives you a overview of watch windows and their function.
Chapter 16, “HTML Viewer,” covers setting up custom HTML pages.
Chapter 17, “Reports,” lists the various reports available from DNA and instructions for creating custom reports.
Chapter 18, “Graphic Maps,” provides information on setting up graphic maps.
Fusion User Manual Page 1-1
Introduction
Part Five: Data Management
Chapter 19, “Scheduling,” covers the scheduling of automated tasks.
Chapter 20, “System Maintenance,” provides instructions for archiving information and backing up the system.
Part Six: Web Interface
Chapter 21, “DNA Web,” explains the DNA Fusion web interface.
Part Seven: Badging
Chapter 22, “ID Badging,” covers designing badging templates and badge management.
Part Seven: Appendixes
Appendix A - Menu Structure
Appendix B - Process Diagrams
Appendix C - Shortcut Keys
Appendix D - Replacement Text
Appendix E - Glossary
i
cons and
c
onvenTions
U
sed in
T
His
M
anUal
This manual uses the following icons to help you find useful or important information easily:
This icon highlights time-saving hints, helpful shortcuts, and advice that you’ll find especially helpful.
This icon marks information that is important enough for you to keep it filed in an easily accessible portion of your gray matter.
!
If something you’re doing could damage the system, end up costing big bucks, lock you out of the system, or otherwise bring an end to civilization as we know it, you’ll find it highlighted with the icon.
In addition to these icons, this manual uses several other conventions that make the instructions easy to understand:
Small icons - such as , , etc.: These icons indicate buttons and/or symbols that you can select or click to make something happen.
A Special Font: Text that look like this indicates a menu item, toolbar selection, button, or a message from the system.
Boldface
: Boldface text, which usually appears in numbered steps, tells you about specific actions that you should take.
Page 1-2 Fusion User Manual
Introduction
Introduction to DNA Fusion
DNA Fusion™ is built using the very latest technology in software development by Microsoft®. DNA Fusion is designed for the extended enterprise taking full advantage of the Distributed Network Architecture model, which allows for total flexibility and control.
DNA Fusion proves to revolutionize the access control industry by removing many of the limitations to enterprise deployment inherent in the typical access control application.
DNA Fusion is designed with 100% InfoReady architecture. This means that your information is always right at your fingertips, eliminating the need to run a report or several reports to get the data you need.
What is DNA Fusion?
● DNA Fusion™ is a Windows 32-bit application that is built on Microsoft’s Distributed InterNetwork
Architecture platform to deliver complete enterprise wide solutions.
● DNA Fusion provides full network connectivity of clients and SSP controller’s via TCP/IP. Server and client applications are intranet/Internet enabled.
● DNA Fusion contains an advanced graphical user interface (GUI) utilizing standard Windows conventions. Dockable toolbars and user configuration of the software environment allow for rich, fully customizable workstations tailored to the individual needs of the user.
● DNA Fusion is designed to work in conjunction with a common access control processor and delivers seamless integration to a variety of CCTV and other access control devices.
DNA Advantages
● Multi-Document Interface - DNA Fusion allows for multiple windows to be open at once. You can also arrange the windows and toolbars.
● Drag & Drop Functionality - The multi-document interface allows for drag and drop functions that greatly simplify and improve the way things get done.
● Personnel Groups - Create logical groups for personnel.
● Dynamic Event Filters - Filter events by specific criteria and then toggle back to all events.
● Advanced Alarm Handling - DNA streamlines the alarm handling process by providing a counter on multiple alarms from the same point. Multiple alarms can be acknowledged and cleared with a single keystroke.
System Configuration Overview
DNA Fusion is built using Windows standard and tools, and uses DCOM to support communication among software objects on different computers as well as TCP/IP for communication between the driver and the host. The very nature of an access control software platform demands that a certain amount of network security is inherent in the application and, as a result, DNA has certain network requirements that must be met for successful deployment on the customer’s network.
DCOM
DNA utilizes a Microsoft architecture known as DCOM (Distributed Component Object Model) as the main communication infrastructure in the client/server environment. The DCOM model provides improved network bandwidth utilization, allows communication across multiple network protocols, and is inherently secure using the extensible security framework of Windows NT.
TCP/IP
TCP/IP is used to support communication between the driver and the host. TCP/IP uses the client/server model of communication.
Services
After DNA has been installed, there are certain utility programs called services, that are necessary for DNA
Fusion to operate properly. Typically these services are installed only on the server workstation.
However, in a system that is configured for a client/server relationship, the services would typically reside on the machine designated as the server. Although, it is possible that each service may reside on a different designated server from the others.
Fusion User Manual Page 1-3
Introduction
DNA typically utilizes three services: the driver service, the DNAAgent service and the SQL Server service.
The driver service, referred to as the DNA Driver, is run by the DNADRVR32.exe application. It runs as a
Windows service and acts as a communications nexus for the DNA Fusion application. The driver communicates with controllers in the field to collect event information and transmit configuration data regarding cardholders and field hardware. Event data collected from the field controllers is stored in the database via DNA Fusion
COM objects.
Event data is also transmitted to each subscribed client allowing “live” event data to display on the client’s event grid. Clients can view the configuration data and send changes to the driver to be transmitted to the appropriate field hardware assuming that the requesting DNA operator has sufficient privileges.
The DNAAgent service is started when a client opens. If the driver service is not running, the DNAAgent will automatically start the driver service.
The SQL Server service is used to communicate to the database. There is one SQL Server service for each instance of SQL server running on the computer.
Page 1-4 Fusion User Manual
Introduction
Requirements & Specifications
The following requirements and specifications are meant to serve as a baseline and do not take into account all the variables of a system. They are subject to change without notice.
Installation Types
There are two types of installation covered in this chapter:
● Server - The PC that will host the DNA Fusion database and run the DNA driver.
The Servers role may be separated into: a Database Server & an Application Server.
● Client - A PC that is connected to the DNA system via the LAN/WAN but retrieves and saves data to and from the DNA server.
Each installation has its own requirements, specifications, and tasks.
Network Requirements for DNA
DNA has certain network requirements that must be met for successful deployment in the client/server environment.
Any of the following network scenarios are acceptable for this operation:
● All DNA computers (servers and client workstations) MUST be members of the same Windows domain regardless of what other applications are operating on the domain.
● All DNA computers are members of a dedicated Windows domain.
● DNA computers can be members on different Windows domains, but each domain MUST have an established bi-directional trust in place.
● DNA computers can be members on different Windows domains, but each domain MUST be managed under Windows Active Directory Service or a master domain.
● All DNA computers are members of a single dedicated workgroup without a Windows domain. A few things to consider with this option are:
The absence of domain authentication requires that all passwords and users are managed at each individual PC in the DNA workgroup.
If SQL Server is being used for data storage, all passwords will be required to be managed at the
SQL Server level.
Server Specifications
The DNA server in this instance refers to the PC that will host your DNA database.
DNA Server (Stand Alone) w/SQL Express Database
P araMeTers r ecoMMended
s
PecificaTion
Processor Speed
System Memory (RAM)
Network Card
Hard Drive Size
Graphics Card
Video Memory
Backup Device
CD-RW Drive
Intel Core i5 2.8 GHz or greater
4 GB
10/100 Ethernet Network Card
250 GB
VGA Support for 1024x768 Resolution
256 MB
YES
YES
Operating System
Optional
Windows XP Professional/2003, 2008, 2012/R2 Server/Windows 7/
Windows 8 (32 & 64-bit OS)
UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply)
● This specification is ideal for systems with less than 20 doors, 200 cardholders, or 1,000 transactions
per day.
● DNA ships with a Microsoft SQL 2008 Express database for both 32 and 64-bit systems. SQL Express
has a limit of 10 GB database size.
Fusion User Manual Page 1-5
Introduction
DNA Server PC w/SQL Express Database 1 to 4 Clients*
P araMeTers r ecoMMended
s
PecificaTion
Processor Speed
System Memory (RAM)
Network Card
Hard Drive Size
Graphics Card
Video Memory
Backup Device
Intel Core i5 2.8 GHz or greater
4 GB
10/100 Ethernet Network Card
250 GB
VGA Support for 1024x768 Resolution
256 MB
YES
CD-RW Drive
Operating System
YES
Windows XP Professional/2003, 2008, 2012/R2 Server/Windows 7/
Windows 8 (32 & 64-bit OS)
Optional Mirrored Hard Drives
Multi-Processor
UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply)
● DNA ships with a Microsoft SQL 2008 Express database for 32 and 64-bit systems. SQL Express has a
limit of 10 GB database size.
* Concurrent client workstations connected to the system at any given time.
DNA Enterprise Server PC w/SQL Server Database
P araMeTers r ecoMMended
s
PecificaTion
Processor Speed
Dual Processor
System Memory (RAM)
Network Card
Hard Drive Size
Graphics Card
Video Memory
Backup Device
3.4 GHz
Yes
4 GB+
10/100 Ethernet Network Card
250 GB
VGA Support for 1024x768 Resolution
128 MB
YES
CD-RW Drive
Operating System
YES
Windows XP Professional/2003, 2008, 2012/R2 Server/Windows 8 (32
& 64-bit OS)
Optional
Separate Database & Application Servers*
UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply)
Isolated DB Server/App Server
Multi-Processor
● This specification is designed for high traffic (transaction) systems and systems requiring multiple
client database connections.
● MS SQL Server is required to be installed on the PC prior to installing DNA Fusion.
*MS SQL Server may be installed on another (dedicated) computer prior to the installation of DNA Fusion
and identified during the DNA Fusion install.
!
DNAFusion is not supported on any Home or Mobile version of Windows Operating Systems.
For Windows 8 installations, the Enterprise edition is the only supported version.
DNA Fusion will run on the following SQL Server Editions: 2000, 2005, 2008, 2008 R2 and 2012.
Page 1-6 Fusion User Manual
Introduction
Client Specifications
A client workstation is defined as a PC that is connected to the DNA system via the LAN/WAN but retrieving and saving data to and from the DNA Server.
DNA Client Workstation
P araMeTers
Processor Speed
System Memory (RAM)
Network Card
Hard Drive Size
Graphics Card
Video Memory
Backup Device
CD-ROM Drive
Operating System
Monitor
Optional
r ecoMMended
s
PecificaTion
Intel Core i3 2.4 GHz or greater
4 GB
10/100 Ethernet Network Card
250 GB
VGA Support for 1024x768 Resolution
512 MB
NO
YES
Windows XP Professional/Windows 7/Windows 8 (32 & 64-bit OS)
17 inch color (capable of 1024x768)
UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply)
DNA Client Workstation w/Photo ID
P araMeTers r ecoMMended
s
PecificaTion
Processor Speed
System Memory (RAM)
Network Card
Hard Drive Size
Graphics Card
Video Memory
Video Capture Device
USB Port
Backup Device
CD-ROM Drive
Operating System
Intel Core i3 2.4 GHz or greater
2 GB
10/100 Ethernet Network Card
250 GB
VGA Support for 1024x768 Resolution
512 MB
YES (TWAIN Compliant)
YES (if using USB capture device)
NO
YES
Windows XP Professional/Windows 7/Windows 8 (32 & 64-bit OS)
Monitor
(Badge Production is not supported on Windows Server Operating Systems)
17 inch color (capable of 1024x768)
Optional UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply)
NOTE: If Photo ID Client is to be installed on a LAPTOP computer, ensure the unit is equipped with a minimum of one printer port and one serial port.
Additional USB and/or COM ports may be required when using badge printers featuring smart chip technology. Please see printer documentation for more information.
● TWAIN devices must be complaint with DirectX 9.
Fusion User Manual Page 1-7
Introduction
NOTES:
Page 1-8 Fusion User Manual
Introduction
Open Options Resources
World Wide Web
The Open Options web site is www.openoptionsinc.com. This site is made up of resources that are not available to the general public, but offered to our customers as an added service. After you open the site, click Login and log in to the website (log in information may be obtained from your dealer).
A menu will appear with the following option:
● DNA Fusion Test Drive
This link provides a demonstration of our security management software that guides you through a step-bystep process of the selected feature. Including the following features:
● Multi-Document Interface
● Custom User Commands (Direct Commands)
● Watch Window
● Event Filtering
● Access Level Groups
● ACM Status Report
● Alarm Handling
● Customizing DNA
● Hardware Features
● Personnel Groups
● Personnel Features
● Scheduling Events
● Situation Level Manager
● Global Hardware Edit & Control
● DNA Environment
● Photo Recall/Verification
Fusion User Manual Page 1-9
Introduction
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 1-10 Fusion User Manual
Getting Started
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
√
√
Starting DNAFusion
Logging On
Changing Users
The DNAFusion Environment
Customizing Fusion
Download Manager
Starting DNAFusion
To open Fusion:
1. After you install DNAFusion, double click on the
DNAFusion icon on the desktop.
Or
Locate the application in the following default location.
Start\All Programs\Open Options, Inc\DNA Fusion
The Log In dialog will appear.
Logging In
When DNA starts, the DNA Fusion Password Verification (Logon) dialog will display.
DNA uses the operator and the password from the dialog box for several purposes:
● The Operator Logon tells DNA which desktop configuration to use.
● DNA matches the operator against an Operator Profile.
Allows you to assign permissions / privileges to certain users.
1. From the Log In dialog, enter the User Name and Password.
2
2. Click the Login button.
The default operator is Admin with no password.
Fusion User Manual Page 2-1
Getting Started
Initial Workstation Logon
The first time you open DNA Fusion, you will be prompted to configure the station.
1. Open
DNA Fusion.
The
Station Configuration Dialog box appears.
The workstation name will pre-populate with the
Windows Computer Name. This information appears in the DNA Properties dialog as well as on the Status Bar.
2. Select a unique
Station Number from the drop down list and click OK.
The
Station Name and Number must be exclusive to that workstation. No other machine should have the same name and number.
The Logon dialog box will appear.
3. Continue to logon as described on page 2-1.
Changing Operators
DNA Fusion tracks each operators actions so it is important to log out each time an operator has completed a session.
To change users:
1. Select
File / Log Out from the Main Menu.
Or
Double click the Operator status at the bottom of the window.
2. Enter the new
Operator Name and Password.
Page 2-2 Fusion User Manual
The Fusion Environment
The DNA Fusion program has been designed to provide the user with an extraordinary amount of navigation and capability through a very simple and user-friendly interface.
While it is possible to navigate numerous pathways, the user never leaves the environment of the Main
Screen. Consequently, there are only a few operations to learn and most of these are fairly intuitive as the
DNA Fusion interface uses standard Windows conventions.
The Main Screen consists of the following principal elements:
● Main Menu
● Standard Toolbar
● Explorers (Browser Panes)
● Hidden Explorers
● Data Windows
● Data Window Tab
● Status Bar
Hidden Browser
Explorer
(Browser Pane)
Main Menu
Data Window
Tabs
Standard
Toolbar
Data Windows
}
Getting Started
Status Bar
Browser Tabs
Fusion User Manual Page 2-3
Getting Started
Main Menu
As with any principal menu, the
Main Menu is an initial launch point to commence navigation to any task.
Click on a menu heading to display an item list.
Deactivated listings (items which are not applicable under the current configuration or selection) are indicated by “ghost items” (an absence of the distinct bolding of the text).
Items in the list may be further broken down into additional item lists for more specific navigation. Items that can be further exploded are indicated by the presence of an arrow to the right of the item listed.
Toolbars
Toolbars provide a convenient way to open explorers or perform tasks that normally may require navigating the
Main Menu. The DNA Fusion toolbars consist of the principal toolbar called the Standard Toolbar and the secondary toolbars associated with the various explorers.
Standard Toolbar
The
Standard Toolbar is the series of large buttons located at the top of the screen just under the Main Menu.
The
Standard Toolbar provides quick access to some of the most used features.
Click any of the menu buttons to open a pane containing an explorer window of items related to the toolbar button category. The buttons labelled
Alarms Manager and Events Manager populate the data window. While the remaining buttons open explorers or browser windows, allowing the user to perform tasks related to specific information.
DNA Properties Icon Opens the Host Settings dialog box.
Personnel Icon
Hardware Icon
Toggles the
Toggles the
Personnel Browser open and closed.
Hardware Browser open and closed.
Access Levels Icon
Toggles the
Access Levels Browser open and closed.
Time Schedule Icon Toggles the Time Schedule Browser open and closed.
Trigger & Macro Icon Toggles the Trigger & Macro Browser open and closed.
Alarm Icon
Opens the
Alarm Window.
Events Manager Icon Opens the Events Manager window.
DVR Manager Icon Toggles the DVR Manager Browser open and closed.
Video Manager Icon Toggles the Video Manager window open and closed.
Page 2-4 Fusion User Manual
Secondary Toolbars
Secondary Toolbars are launch points to perform given tasks. Each Secondary toolbar will be discussed in the appropriate section.
1. To display the list of toolbars, right-click the gray area to the right of the
Main Menu.
2. To display a given toolbar, check the box to the left of the desired toolbar.
Active buttons will have icons with color; deactivated buttons that are not applicable to the current configuration will appear as “ghost icons” and lack color.
Getting Started
3. To hide a toolbar, simply uncheck the box.
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons
1. Click on the small down-arrow to the right of the
Toolbar and select Add or Remove Buttons / Toolbar.
The
Toolbar menu appears.
2. To configure the toolbar buttons:
● If a check is next to the item, it will appear on the toolbar.
● Unchecking an item will remove it from the toolbar.
● Clicking the Reset Toolbar option will return the toolbar to its original settings and any changes will be lost.
Fusion User Manual Page 2-5
Getting Started
Explorer (Browser Panes)
Explorers are launched from the Standard Toolbar or the View / Explorers drop down in the Main Menu. The explorer windows are all organized into a hierarchical tree view. Some of the explorer windows also have tabs at the bottom of the window. The
Hardware Browser is one such explorer window, with tabs to show all hardware, all controllers, sub-controllers, points, readers, etc.
Hidden
Browser
Browsers can be hidden by clicking the Stick Pin located in the right corner . To recall the browser hover over it and the browser will slide out; when the mouse is moved out of the browser it will auto hide again. Click the
Stick Pin once more to dock the Browser permanently.
Items in browsers with a plus sign beside them indicate that there are sub-items under the heading. Clicking the plus (+) sign in explorer lists, called “parent objects,” will display subheaders (if applicable), “called child objects.” Clicking
the minus (-) sign will hide the sub-items.
Browser windows may be undocked from the DNA Fusion environment to take advantage sites with multiple monitors.
Data Windows
Data windows are windows that contain information. Like the explorers, data windows can be launched from the Standard Toolbar. Typically, these windows are either spreadsheets that are generated by the DNA Fusion program or form dialog boxes populated partially by the user.
Unlike the explorers, data windows cannot be closed by clicking the same button that opened them. The
Data Window are be closed by clicking the X located on the specific tab. The Data Window tabs can be placed at the bottom of the window. See page 3-3 for more information.
Data Window
Close Button
Page 2-6 Fusion User Manual
Getting Started
Status Bar
The
Status Bar is the box at the bottom of the DNA window and provides useful information including site status, station identification, IP address, current operator, and alarm status.
● The first field shows the Site Status. If Connected is displayed, the DNA driver is running. If
Disconnected is displayed, the DNA driver is not communicating with the application. See page A-7 in the DNA Fusion Tech Manual.
● The second field shows the Station Identification (Client) information which was entered when the workstation was brought online the first time. This information can also be found in the Host Settings dialog.
● The third field indicates the workstation’s IP address.
● The fourth field displays the operator’s name currently logged into the workstation.
● The fifth field indicates the number of alarms in the Alarm Window. The field will also change colors depending on the state of the alarms: Red = Active Alarms, Blue = Return to Normal, Black = No
Current Alarms
# of current alarms # of acknowledged alarms
# of alarms returned to the normal state
The Status Bar also includes a few interactive features:
● Change Operators - Double-click the Operator field
● Open the Alarms Window - Double-click the Alarm Status field
Fusion User Manual Page 2-7
Getting Started
The Customize Dialog
Besides selecting which toolbars display and which are hidden, toolbars may be customized to provide more efficiency for the user or create a profile for other users, using only those buttons desired or most frequently used. New toolbars may even be created and customized according to the desires of the user.
1. To display the
Customize dialog box, click on the small down-arrow to the right of the Standard Toolbar
select
Main Menu.
Add or Remove Buttons / Customize or click Customize from the bottom of the View / Toolbars
The
Customize menu will appear.
The following tabs are available:
● Commands - Shows all commands and allows for customization of commands.
● Toolbars - Shows all toolbars and allows for customization and addition of toolbars.
● Tools - Shows all the available tools and allows for configuration of new tools.
● Keyboard - Shows the shortcut key for the selected command and allows for configuration of new shortcut keys.
● Menu - Allows you to reset a selected menu and add commands to context menus.
● Mouse - Allows for the customization of mouse controls.
● Options - Allows you to configure the view options.
2.
After customizing DNA, close the application to save the settings.
Commands
1. Select the
Commands tab.
2. Select a Category from the list.
3. Locate the desired command and drag it to the desired toolbar.
The command will appear on the toolbar.
4. Click
Close to close the dialog.
Toolbars
1. Select the
Toolbars tab.
2. Click the New button.
3. Enter a
Name for the new toolbar and click OK.
A toolbar box will appear.
4. Click the
Commands tab.
5. Drag the desired commands from the list under the command tab to the new toolbar box.
Or
Drag buttons from displayed toolbars to the new toolbar box.
6. Close the
Customize dialog box.
The new toolbar is now created and can be placed anywhere on the desktop.
Page 2-8 Fusion User Manual
Getting Started
Tools
The tools menu item on the Main Menu displays a partially user-defined menu. The operator/administrator can place a menu item that will perform virtually any desired functionality, including a repetitive task, a destination file or graphic, an external program, or a hyperlink. The text for the menu item is also defined by the operator.
1. Select the Tools tab.
2. Click the
New button.
3. Enter the text for the menu item in the
Menu Contents panel.
This is the text that will appear when the
Tool Dropdown on the Main Menu is selected.
4. In the
Command field, enter a link, file name and path, or use the Browse button to find the desired link or file.
5. In the
Argument field, enter the desired argument characters (optional).
6. In the
Initial Directory field, enter the directory for which the file should execute (optional if the pathway is included in the
Command field).
7. Click the
Close button to save changes and exit.
The menu item will now appear in the Tools drop down on the Main Menu.
Keyboard
See Appendix D for a list of default shortcut keys.
1. Select the
Keyboard tab.
2. Select the
Category from the drop-down list.
3. Select the
Command from the list.
If a shortcut key is already assigned to the command, it will be displayed in the
Current Keys field.
4. Press the new shortcut key or combination on the keyboard that you wish to assign to the selected
command.
The combination will appear in the field. If the shortcut has been assigned to another command, it will appear below the Press New Shortcut Key field.
5. Click
Assign to assign the shortcut to the selected command.
6. Click Close to close the dialog box.
Fusion User Manual Page 2-9
Getting Started
Menu
1. Select the
Menu tab.
There are 2 menu types you can configure:
● Application Frame Menus - Items located on the Main Menu.
● Context Menus - Menus that resulting from right-clicking on a point or object.
Application Frame Menus
2. Select the
Menu from the drop-down list.
The Main Menu will appear as if the window was active.
3. Select the
Commands tab and move the item(s) to the desired menu
location.
4. Click Close to save and close the dialog box.
Context Menus
2. Select the
Context Menu from the drop-down list.
The
Context Menu will appear.
3. Select the Commands tab and move the item(s) to configure the context menu.
4. Click
Close to save and close the dialog box.
!
Click
Reset to restore the selected menu to the original settings; all changes will be lost.
Mouse
1. Select the
Mouse tab.
2. Select the radiobutton next to Associate Double Click Event With.
3. Select the
Event from the menu.
4. Click Close to save and close the dialog box.
Options
1. Select the Options tab.
● Show ScreenTips on toolbars - Shows the icons function on hover.
● Show shortcut keys in ScreenTips - Displays assigned shortcut keys.
● Large Icons - Toolbar icons appear larger.
● Menus show recently used commands - Infrequently used items can be accessed by clicking the down arrow in the menu.
● Show full menu after a short delay - All items in the menu will be displayed after a short delay.
● Reset My Data Usage - Clears recently used commands.
2. Select Close to save and close the dialog box.
Page 2-10 Fusion User Manual
Getting Started
Customizing the DNA Environment
Changing the Desktop Appearance
1. Select
View / Application Look from the Main Menu.
2. Select the desired setting from the resulting list.
The Fusion desktop changes to reflect the setting selected.
Changing the Data Window Appearance
1. Select
Window from the Main Menu.
With the MDI Tab Groups option checked, the windows are nested together in the Data
Window.
To tile the windows, drag the tab of the desired window to the bottom, top, right or left in the
Data Window until a line appears in the window and then drop the tab to tile the
window.
If the
MDI Tab Groups is unselected, the menu changes and the windows are detached from
the
Main Menu.
2. Select the desired setting from the resulting list.
The
Fusion Data Window changes to reflect the setting selected.
Hiding a Main Menu Item
1. With the
Customize dialog box open, click on the menu heading to be hidden.
2. Drag and drop it off the Main Menu bar and onto any other panel or section of the screen.
An
X will appear next to the button icon when the menu item is in a delete location. The menu heading will be hidden from view and no part of the menu will be visible.
Adding Toolbar Buttons
1. Click on the small down-arrow to the right of the Standard Toolbar and select Customize.
The
Customize dialog box opens.
2. From the
Commands tab, locate the Command and drag and drop it onto the desired Toolbar.
Or
Locate the desired item on the menu or toolbar and drag and drop it onto the desired
Toolbar.
A line will appear on the toolbar to identify the location. If an X appears, it indicates that the selected location is not valid.
The
Command will appear on the Toolbar.
Hiding Toolbar Buttons
1. With the
Customize dialog box open, click on the toolbar button to be hidden.
2. Drag and drop it off the toolbar and onto any other panel or section of the screen.
An
X will appear next to the button icon when the button is in a delete location. The toolbar will be hidden from view and its function will not be accessible.
!
Buttons are moved from one toolbar to another; not merely copied. When a button is
moved to a custom toolbar, it is removed from the original toolbar. Clicking Reset to restore
the button to the original toolbar will remove it from the custom toolbar.
Fusion User Manual Page 2-11
Getting Started
Modifying Toolbar Buttons
All toolbar buttons and icons can be modified.
1. With the Customize dialog box open, right-click on the button you wish to modify.
2. Select
Button Appearance from the resulting menu.
The
Button Appearance dialog will open.
3. Select the Operator-Defined Image checkbox.
The default image will be displayed.
4. Select an icon from the menu of buttons
And
If desired, select the
Edit button to edit the current selection
Or
Select the
New button to create a new icon.
If the
New or Edit buttons are selected, the Edit Button Image dialog box will
appear.
Use the simple drawing interface to create or modify an icon.
Select colors and tools from the palette.
Click
OK to save the icon and return to the Button Appearance dialog.
5. If desired, enter a new description in the
Button Text field.
6. Click
OK to save the changes and return to the Customize dialog.
7. Click
Close to exit the Customize dialog.
Page 2-12 Fusion User Manual
Getting Started
Downloading
It is imperative that records be downloaded to the SSP in order for them to be added to the panel.
It is recommended that an actual download be performed when large amounts of information or changes have been entered.
1. Depending on the object, there are number ways to perform a download.
● From the Hardware Browser, right-click on the Site and select Download or select Download from the
Hardware Main Menu drop-down.
● From the Personnel Browser, right-click inside the explorer and select Download or select Download from the Personnel Main Menu drop-down.
● For individual downloads, right-click on the object and select Download.
The
Download Manager dialog will display except for individual downloads.
2. Select the
Download All checkbox to download all information to the controller(s) or select the specific item(s) to download.
3. Select the Site(s).
4. Click
OK.
A status bar will indicate the downloads progress. The Cancel button can be selected at anytime to close the window without effecting the download.
Fusion User Manual Page 2-13
Getting Started
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 2-14 Fusion User Manual
DNA Properties
3
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
√
√
Configuring DNA
DNA Properties
Situation Manager
Email Enable
Personnel Properties
Hardware Tree Settings
Open Options has designed DNA to be extremely user-friendly. To that end, the user may determine how the application will appear and perform for the specific workstation by configuring the Host Settings.
The Host Settings are those parameters which establish the specifics of the display, and operational preferences or the manner in which the application will perform a given task. Most of the Host Settings are workstation specific however there are a number of options that are applied globally to the application.
The Properties Dialog
DNA Properties are configured via a series of dialog boxes in the Host Settings and are only applied to the host workstation.
To open the Host Settings:
1. Click the
DNA Properties button on the Standard Toolbar.
Or
Select
DNA / Administrative / Properties from the Main Menu.
The Host Setting (DNA Properties) dialog box appears.
There is an explorer tree on the left side which will open data panels related to the selected category.
2. Select a
Category from the explorer tree.
A dialog page will appear. See each dialog on the following pages.
3. Depending on the resulting page, you will need to do one or more of the following:
● Enter data in the fields.
● Use the drop-down menus and link browser buttons.
● Select the desired radio buttons and checkboxes to configure each dialog.
Fusion User Manual Page 3-1
DNA Properties
Station Settings
This dialog allows you to configure the workstation’s setting to determine how DNA will behave.
Station Settings
● Host Based Macro - Select the Host Based Macro to associate to the workstation.
● DNA Station Number - Displays the local station number. (Read only)
● DNA Station Name - Displays the local station name. (Read only)
● DNA Station Level - Numeric station designation determining permission for operator use. See Station
Levels on page 4-8 for more information.
● Custom Personnel - Select an option below.
No Custom Tabs - If selected, uses only the default Custom Fields found on the Employee Info
(Page 2) tab of a cardholder’s record. See page 3-22 for setup information.
1 to 1 Linkage (Legacy) - If selected, DNA will use the additional Custom Fields found on the Custom
Fields tab of a cardholder’s record. These fields are setup in the Properties/Personnel Properties/
Custom Fields Setup dialog. Allows 20 fields to be identified. See page 3-14 for more information.
1 to Many Linkage - If selected, the advanced predefined additional Custom Fields found on the
Custom Fields tab of a cardholder’s record will be used. Allows 20 alpha-numeric fields to be identified and places the data into a grid. These fields can only be edited through the Custom
Fields Editor tool. Contact Open Options Support for further information.
● Camera Station - Select a workstation from the drop-down and import the camera (IP based) settings from the select ed workstation to the current workstation.
● Station Filter - If using the Event Filtering and Alarm Escalation feature, select the filter to apply to the
DNA workstation. This option will only be available if the Event Filtering feature is configured. See page
14-25 for more information.
● Badging Station - Check box if this machine will be used as a badging station. Must be licensed for badging functionality. Enables the Photo ID tab on the Personnel Record on the workstation.
● No Application Minimize - Removes the minimize button.
● No Application Exit - Removes the exit function.
● Use tabs to show Multiple Documents - Enables tabs to display multiple documents.
● Open All Pages Maximized - All pages will display maximized when opened.
● Use Embedded Video Windows - Select if using a DVR integration.
● Hide PIN numbers on card tab - If checked, PIN numbers will be masked on the cardholder’s record.
Page 3-2 Fusion User Manual
DNA Properties
● Show Document Tab on Bottom - If checked, the Event Window tab(s) will appear at the bottom of the window instead of the top.
● Display Tray Icon - The DNA Fusion icon will appear in the Windows Tray when the application is running.
The icon will also convey important system information such as driver connection status in the form of a balloon.
Appearance: Information Bar
● Text Color - Changes the text color on the Information Bar.
● Back Color - Changes the background color on the Information Bar.
Tooltip Settings
● Heading - Changes the heading color on Tool Tips.
● Labels - Changes the label color on Tool Tips.
● Values - Changes the value color on Tool Tips.
● Font Size - Changes the font size on Tool Tips.
● Use Video Tooltips - Enables a tooltip within the video window. Hovering over a camera in the DVR
Manager will activate the tooltip and open a live video feed.
● Width - Sets the width for the tooltip video window.
● Height - Sets the height for the tooltip video window.
Fusion User Manual Page 3-3
DNA Properties
DNA Properties
This dialog allows you to configure many of the common properties that affect the way the application behaves.
Miscellaneous DNA Properties
● Home Page Path - Main graphic page. Often used as a starting point to link other graphic pages in the system. The Home Page is accessed through the Main Menu (File / Home Page).
● Graphics Blink Rate - The rate at which an object on a graphic page will blink in the event of an alarm.
● Hardware Summary Poll Rate - Time between hardware status updates.
● Operator Inactivity Logout - Logs operator off after a set amount of inactive time.
● Inactivity Warning Timeout - Number of seconds prior to logout when warning will display.
● Use NT Authentication - Uses Windows NT Authorization. Requires the addition of Operators using the same user name as the Windows logon. See page 4-1 for more information on adding operators.
!
You must add an operator, with admin privileges, using the same user name as the NT network logon before selecting this option. See page 4-1 for more information on adding operators.
● Use Strong Passwords - Enforces strong passwords for DNA Operators. When enabled, passwords must contain both lower and upper case letters, a punctuation character, a numerical character and met the minimum length requirement of 8 characters.
● Enable Tenants (Segregation) - Engages tenant functionality restricting multi-tenant viewing for some operators. Enables buttons on the Host Settings / Personnel Properties / Tenant Setting dialog. See Chapter
13 for more information on setting up the Tenants feature.
● Enable Operator SSP Lists - Enables SSP List button in the Edit Operator dialog, allowing operators to be configured for control of specific SSPs. This is a global setting. See page 4-25 for more information.
● Use Revolving Recall Windows - Allows you to assign specific doors to the Photo Recall Viewers.
Alarms & Events
● Bring Home Pages to front if loaded - If associated alarm point goes into alarm, the associated home page will be brought to the front of the application.
● Use Predefined Dispatch Text - Requires operators to use predefined dispatch text.
● Clear Alarm on Acknowledgement - Will allow alarms to be cleared upon acknowledgement if the object has returned to the normal state.
!
Keep in mind that these settings are workstation specific so if Alarms will be monitored on
multiple stations, Clear Alarm on Acknowledgement should NOT be selected on any station.
Page 3-4 Fusion User Manual
DNA Properties
● Do Not Load Homepages on Alarm - If homepages have been specified for hardware objects, they will not be loaded on this workstation in the event of an alarm.
● Bring Alarm Grid to front on Alarm - Alarm window will automatically be brought to the front when an alarm is generated. If selected, the Bring Application to Front on Alarm option will become available.
● Bring Application to front on Alarm - If Bring Alarm Grid to Front on Alarm is selected, the Bring Application to Front option will become available. The DNA Fusion application will automatically be brought to the front when an alarm is generated.
● Prevent Alarm Grid from Closing - If selected, once opened the Alarm Grid will not able to be closed on this workstation.
● Show Alarm Grid When Logged Out - The Alarm Window will be visible when the operator is logged out of DNA. Operators will have to log in to respond to alarms.
● Automatically Save Event Filters - If selected, applied Event filters will be saved upon closing the Event
Grid and reapplied when the Event Grid is opened again.
!
If Automatically Save Event Filters is selected, Fusion will save the Event Filters applied to the Events Grid in the Default.evt file (Default Location C:\Program Files\NPowerDNA\Msgs).
The DNA operator will need basic read/write privileges to the folder and file. The path is determined in the DNA Directories dialog under the Temporary Files field. See page 20-1 for more information on directories.
● Event Quantity - Maximum number of events displayed/returned to the Event Grid.
● Start Up - Specifies the page that will appear upon Start Up.
● Alarm Counter - Allows the administrator to select the format for the Alarm Status Bar at the bottom of the DNA window.
Fusion User Manual Page 3-5
DNA Properties
NOTES:
Page 3-6 Fusion User Manual
DNA Properties
Situation Manager
This dialog contains the settings related to the Situation Manager. See Chapter 9 for more information on the Situation Manager feature.
Situation Manager Settings
● Use DNA Situation Manager - Enables Situation Manager, allowing for the configuration of each defined situation.
● Situations - Enter the Name and Description for each color coded situation. Direct commands can also be linked to the situation by selecting a command from the drop-down.
● Host Macro - If desired, select a Host Macro from the drop-down.
Fusion User Manual Page 3-7
DNA Properties
Edit Operators
This dialog allows you to add operators and assign Operator Profiles to the selected operator. For more information on Operators, see chapter 4.
● Operator Name - Select the operator name to edit or remove.
● Operator Profile - Select the profile to assign the selected operator.
● Operator Environment - Select the database desktop view the operator will see upon logging in. See page 4-19 for more information on setting up the operator environment.
● Operator View Setting - Select the local environment desktop view the operator will see upon logging in.
See page 4-19 for more information on setting up the operator environment.
● Operator Enabled - If unchecked, the operator will not be able to log in to DNAFusion.
● Allow Web Access - If checked, the selected operator will be able to log in to Fusion Web. See Chapter
21: Fusion Web for more information.
Operator Statistics
● Locked Out Status - Displays the lock out status for the selected operator.
● Logon Attempts - Number of times the selected operator has attempted to logon.
● Failed Logons - Number of times the selected operator attempted to logon but failed.
● Successful Logons - Number of times the selected operator successfully logged on.
● Date Created - Date the operator was created.
● Last Logged On - Date the operator last logged on.
Options
● New Operator - Adds a new operator; opens the Password Verification dialog box.
● Remove Operator - Deletes the selected operator.
● Reset Warning - Restores warning dialogs that have been disabled by the selected operator.
● Unlock Operator - Unlocks the selected operators account. Option will be available if the selected operator is currently in the locked out status.
● Reset Password - Resets selected operator’s password; opens the New Password dialog box.
● Apply Changes - Saves the current configuration.
!
The Apply Changes button must be selected in order for changes to be saved. If not, changes will be lost when selecting another operator or closing the dialog box.
Page 3-8 Fusion User Manual
Operator Profiles
DNA Properties
This dialog allows you to configure rights and privileges within DNA for system operators. For more information of Operators, see chapter 4.
● Operator Profile - Select the operator profile to edit or remove.
● Privileges - Expand categories and check the boxes to select or deselect the desired privileges.
Hardware
Access Levels
Personnel
Alarms
Reports
Views
Actions
Graphics
Direct Commands
Schedules
Station Levels
Alarm Routing
Operator Filters
Operator Settings
Operator Import Settings
Options
● Add New Profile - Adds a new operator profile; opens the Add DNA Operator Profile dialog.
● Remove Profile - Deletes the selected operator profile.
● Profile SSP List - Allows the administrator to grant or restrict access to specific SSPs; opens the Operator
Controller Selection dialog. See page 4-25 for more information.
● Apply Changes - Saves the current configuration.
!
You must select the Apply Changes button in order for changes to be saved or changes
will be lost when selecting another operator or closing the dialog box.
Fusion User Manual Page 3-9
DNA Properties
E-Mail Enable
This dialog allows you to configure the e-mail feature within DNA. Email can also be setup in the Driver Setup dialog, see page 20-3 for more information.
Settings
● Enable E-Mail - Enables the e-mail function. Must be selected to enable AUTO E-Mail.
● Enable AUTO E-Mail - Enables the AUTO e-mail function; other selections become available.
● Address Text - (AUTO) Event text sent with an alarm/event. Enter the desired text using the Replacement
Text found in Appendix D.
● Cardholder Text - (AUTO) Event text sent with a cardholder event. Enter the desired text using the
Replacement Text found in Appendix D.
● Inactivity Text - (AUTO) Event text sent with an operator inactivity event. Enter the desired text using the
Replacement Text. See Appendix D for a complete list of Replacement Text.
● Use SMTP - Enables the SMTP e-mail function.
● SMTP Properties - Opens the SMTP Properties dialog.
SMTP Properties
SMTP Properties must be configured to receive automatic e-mails using the SMTP feature. If no connection to port 25, see the system administrator and request that SMTP be enabled and /or modify any anti-virus software to allow the dnafusion.exe to email 3rd party emails.
● Authentication - Type of authentication.
● Username - User’s SMTP name.
● Password - User’s SMTP password.
● SMTP Server - E-mail server’s name.
If configured, the Mail Server’s Name and Outbound port information can be obtained by entering the following command from the Windows
Command Prompt.
Netsh diag connect mail
If successful, the email configuration information will be returned.
Example:
Mailer Server Name
OutboundMailPort = 25
● SMTP Port - Default is 25. If needed, change the port number.
● From Address - E-mail address that will appear in the From: field.
Page 3-10 Fusion User Manual
DNA Properties
E-Mail Recipients List
● Recipients - List of e-mail recipients.
● Profile - E-mail profile for selected recipient.
● Password - Password for e-mail profile for selected recipient.
● Edit - Edits the selected recipient record; opens the E-mail Editor dialog box.
● Remove - Removes the selected recipient.
● Add - Adds a new recipient; opens the E-Mail Editor dialog box.
E-Mail Editor
● Object Type - Select the type of communication to be used.
● Operator’s Name - Recipients name.
● E-Mail Address - Recipients e-mail address.
● Time Schedule - E-mails will be sent during the specified time schedule.
● Send on Flagged - Select condition under which a cardholder event will be sent. Selecting Both will notify the recipient(s) of cardholder events that have been marked as Alarm and Watch cards.
Fusion User Manual Page 3-11
DNA Properties
Watchbar Settings
This dialog allows you to configure the Watch Windows.
Tab Captions
● Watch Bar 1 - Caption on Tab 1 of the Watch Window.
● Watch Bar 2 - Caption on Tab 2 of the Watch Window.
● Watch Bar 3 - Caption on Tab 3 of the Watch Window.
● Watch Bar 4 - Caption on Tab 4 of the Watch Window.
Grid Lines
● Vertical - Displays vertical grid lines on the Watchbar.
● Horizontal - Displays horizontal grid lines on the Watchbar.
● Grid Line Color - Selects the color of the grid lines.
Page 3-12 Fusion User Manual
DNA Properties
Personnel Properties
The Personnel dialogs allow the DNA administrator to configure many of the common properties for personnel records.
Operation
● Default Card Quantity - Indicates the number of cards that will be loaded when a new cardholder is added. (Default = 1)
● Default Picture Quantity - Indicates the number of pictures allowed per record.
● Allow Pre-Selected Field Prompts - Allow operator to enter text into key text fields for auto complete field.
Fields can be configured by right-clicking in the field and selecting Add Text.
● Use PCProx Enrollment Reader - Select if a PCProx Enrollment reader will be used to assign cards to a cardholder’s record.
● Auto Refresh Badge Image - If selected, the badge template image will automatically refresh.
● Always Prompt for Groups even if there is no card - If selected, DNAFusion will prompt the operator to add the cardholder to a Personnel Group even if the cardholder has no associated card.
New Cards
● Default Activation Period - Indicates the length of time the card is active. Default is set to 1 year.
● Default Mode - Identifies the default card format for the system. The Auto setting the is default mode; the Auto Mode utilizes the controller stored card formats.
If Corporate Mode is selected, enter the
Facility Code and the Multiplier.
The
Corporate Mode allows the system to have multiple facility codes with only one card format (per bit structure). When the card format for the
Corporate Mode is created, ensure that the ‘Card ID
Offset’ matches the multiplier set up in Personnel Properties. See page 3-55 in the Tech Manual for more information on configuring Card Formats and see page 7-9 for more information on cardholders.
Example: Multiplier * F/C + Card# = Credential - 1,000,000,000 x 6 = 6,000,000,000 + 449,166,208
= 6,449,166,208
If Multi - x bit card is selected, enter the Facility Code for the desired card format.
● Allow Duplicate Cards - Check to allow duplicate entries for Cards.
● Allow Duplicate PINs - Check to allow duplicate entries for PINs.
● Card Number Created Externally - If checked, operators will be prevented from assigning a card number directly to the card. The card number is read from the database.
Fusion User Manual Page 3-13
DNA Properties
● Increment Issue Code on New Cards - If the Issue Code function is used, selecting this option would automatically increase the
Issue Code by one digit when a new card is issued. See page 8-41 for details.
● Deactivate Card - If checked, all new cardholder’s cards will automatically be Deactivated when added to the system. The cards Activate checkbox will need to be selected before the card will grant access.
See page 7-20 for more information on Activating a Card.
● Enforce Employee ID Uniqueness - Check to disallow duplicate entries in the Employee ID field on the
Cardholder record.
● Enforce Employee No. Uniqueness - Check to disallow duplicate entries in the Employee No. field on the
Cardholder record.
● Copy Active Card Information to New Card - When selected, the access level information from the old card will be automatically added to the new card upon Update. See page 7-24 for more information.
● Deactivate Existing Cards on New Card - If checked and new card is added to a cardholder’s record, the existing cards will automatically be disabled upon Update. See page 7-26 for more information.
Custom Fields
If the Custom Personnel option on the Station Settings page is set to 1 to 1 Linkage (Legacy), the fields must be configured before saving the information in a Personnel Record.
● Custom Fields - Number of fields to use for the Custom Field tab in the Personnel Record.
!
The number of custom fields must be specified on all client workstations in order for them to have visibility to the fields.
● Setup Custom Fields - Opens the Personnel Custom Fields Setup dialog to allow for configuration of custom fields. See page 3-14 for more information.
Personnel Custom Fields Setup
● Type - Select the type of field.
● Field Name - Description of custom field.
● Displayed - Label that will be displayed in the Personnel Record.
● Advanced Setup - Opens the Advanced Properties dialog box.
● Create Table - Must click to create the table in the database. Failure to do so will result in an error when closing a personnel record. (Behind the scenes operation.)
It is important to create a unique name for each field. The name and displayed do not have to be identical, but it is recommended that they bear some relationship to one
another. The Field Name should be limited to 32 characters and should not contain
punctuation or spaces. The Displayed Names does not have these restrictions.
Advanced Properties
● Help Text - Context sensitive help that displays when the mouse hovers over the field.
● Control Type - Configures the type of field to be displayed in terms of functionality.
Edit - Field in which text is typed by the operator. Max. 50 characters.
Drop List - Field will present a drop-down menu list without additional options or the ability to receive text typed by the operator. Items for the drop-down list are enter ed in the Drop List Data panel field.
ComboBox - Field will present a drop-down list from which to select an item or allow the operator to enter original text. Items for the drop down list are enter ed in the Drop List Data panel field.
● Entry Mask - A template of text and numeric placeholders, i.e., SSN: ###-
##-#### or Phone: ###-###-####.
● Drop List Data - Enter the items for either the Drop List or ComboBox fields. Type an item and press
Ctrl+Enter to go to the next line.
● Required Field - Makes entry into the field required.
Drivers License Scanner Fields
This section determines the fields that will be imported when a driver’s license is scanned into the Fusion system. See page 7-3 for more information.
Page 3-14 Fusion User Manual
DNA Properties
Photo Recall
This dialog sets the parameters for the Photo Recall windows; see page 7-39 for more information.
Displayed Text
● Time - Displays time of event along with photo.
● Date - Displays date of event along with photo.
● Address - Displays ACM address of event along with photo.
● Description - Displays ACM description of event along with photo.
● Name - Displays the cardholders name associated with the event along with photo.
● Card # - Displays the card number associated with the event along with photo.
● Alarm! - If a Alarm Card Flag was set, Alarm! Card will be displayed. Any associated data will be displayed along with the photo.
● Watched - If a Watch Card Flag was set, Watched Card will be displayed. Any associated data will be displayed along with the photo.
● Note - If a Note Card Flag was set, Note will be displayed. Any associated data will be displayed along with the photo.
● Other Card - If a Other... Card Flag was set, Other will be displayed. Any associated data will be displayed along with the photo.
● Event Text - Displays the event description in the Photo Recall window.
Photo Sizing
● Fit Height - Stretches picture to fit height of window and maintains aspect.
● Fit Width - Stretches picture to fit width of window and maintains aspect.
● Fit Window - Stretches picture to fit the window and may not maintain aspect.
● Do Not Alter - Retains the original size of the photo.
● Maintain Aspect - Fits height and width to closet match while maintaining aspect.
Text Attributes
● Font - Changes the displayed font.
● Font Size - Changes the font size.
● Overlay - Defines the color of the overlay text for items such as Note Text, Personnel Type, etc.
Fusion User Manual Page 3-15
DNA Properties
Cycling
● Enable Cycling - Enables the cycling feature.
● Cycle Time - Sets the cycle time in between photos. (Default = 0.5 sec.)
● Inactivity - Y: Cycle through the last X (number of cards) when inactive Y (number of minutes).
● Quantity - X: Cycle through the last X (number of cards) when inactive Y (number of minutes).
Text Colors
● Normal - Selects the text color for Normal events.
● Alarm - Selects the text color for Alarm! events.
● Watch - Selects the text color for Watch events.
● Cycled - Selects the text color when Photo is cycling.
● Overlay - Determines the color for any overlay text, i.e. Note Text.
Display On
A condition must be selected in order for the system to display the designated photos.
● Card Type - Displays photos for the designated card type.
● Person Type - Displays photos for the designated person type.
● All - Displays photos on all card reads.
● Denied - Displays photos if access is denied.
● Granted - Displays photo if access is granted.
● Alarm - Displays photos on cards flagged as Alarm cards.
● Watch - Displays photos on cards flagged as Watch cards.
● Note - Displays photos on cards flagged as Note cards.
● Other - Displays photos on cards flagged as Other cards.
Page 3-16 Fusion User Manual
DNA Properties
Tree Properties
The Personnel Tree Properties allows the DNA administrator to set the Personnel Browser Tree Properties including tooltip options and search tabs for each workstation.
Personnel Tree Tooltips
● Enable Tooltips - Check the box to enable/disable the context information balloons.
● Hover Delay - Amount of time the cursor will hover before displaying the tooltip balloon.
● Display Time - Amount of time the tooltip balloon will display.
● Show Photos on Tooltips - Displays the cardholders photo on the tooltip.
● Show Access Levels on Tooltips - Displays the card’s access levels on the card tooltip.
● Show Last Used on Tooltips - Displays the time, date, location and event for the card’s last use on the card tooltip.
Personnel Tree Defaults
● Default Tab - Tab shown at start up: Name or Card View.
● Show Name Tab - Displays the Name View tab.
● Show Card Tab - Displays the Card # View tab.
● Expand on Double Click - If selected, double-clicking on a group will expand the tree instead of opening a new Personnel Record.
Refresh from Client Updates
● Always - Will refresh automatically when an update is available.
● Never - Will not update automatically.
● Prompt Operator - Will prompt operator to refresh when an update is available.
Personnel Tree Search Tabs
● Show Filtered 1-8 - Displays the custom Filtered Tabs in the Personnel Browser.
● Edit - Opens the Personnel SQL Builder dialog. See page 3-18 for more information.
● Tab Caption - Enter a description for the tab.
Fusion User Manual Page 3-17
DNA Properties
Personnel SQL Builder
Allows the system administrator to build custom search tabs that automatically filter based on the criteria set in the Personnel SQL Builder. See page 7-30 for more information.
● Field - Select the field type from the drop-down.
● Value - Enter the search criteria.
● OR - Enter additional search criteria.
Sort By
● Name - Sorts the browser tab by name.
● Card - Sorts the browser tab by card number.
● Hot Stamp - Sorts the browser tab by hot stamp number.
● Other - Select the browser tab sort criteria from the drop-down list(s).
Other
● Use Groups - Check the box to employ Personnel Groups in the search results browser tab.
Options
● Add - Adds another filter line item to grid.
● Remove - Removes the selected filter line item from the grid.
● View SQL - Displays the SQL search statement.
Page 3-18 Fusion User Manual
DNA Properties
Tenant Settings
The Tenants feature allows you to visually separate SSPs. For more information, see chapter 13.
* Enable Tenants in the DNA Properties dialog must be checked for the following items to appear.
● Filter Based on SSP List - Filter the events and hardware by SSP for the current tenant checked.
● Use Tenant Filtering - If Alarm Escalation and Event Routing is used in combination with Tenants, check Use
Tenant Filtering to activate the feature. See page 14-25 for information on setting up Alarm Escalation and Event Routing.
● Allow Shared SSPs - Allows SSPs to be shared between tenants. This allows the system owner to share
SSPs and/or control of the SSPs with this client.
Allow Edit - Allows operator to edit configurable settings on shared SSPs.
Allow Control - Allows operator to control hardware on shared SSPs.
● See System Messages - Displays system messages for operator on this workstation.
● Tenant Cards
Owned SSP: Show (Always) - Displays tenant cards on tenant SSPs. (Read only; always enabled)
Shared SSP: Show - Displays tenant cards on shared SSPs.
No Ownership: Show - Displays tenant cards on SSPs other than tenants.
● Non-Tenant Cards
Owned SSP: Show - Displays non-tenant cards on tenant SSPs.
Shared SSP: Show - Displays non-tenant cards on shared SSPs.
No Ownership: Show (Never) - Displays non-tenant cards on SSPs other than tenants. (Read only; always disabled)
● Always Show Tenant Cards (All Controllers) - Override Button. Enables all buttons on the Tenant Cards row above regardless of their configuration.
● Allow Card Transfers between Tenants - Allows a card to be assigned to another tenant on the system.
Fusion User Manual Page 3-19
DNA Properties
NOTES:
Page 3-20 Fusion User Manual
DNA Properties
Photo ID
This dialog allows the operator to set the naming convention for photos taken from a Badging Station as well other Photo ID settings.
Photo Name Configuration
Select the following options to configure the naming convention for photos:
● Date of Photo
● Employee Number
● First Name
● Last Name
● Time of Photo
● Unique Personnel ID
● Employee ID
Photo ID Settings
● Prompt for Description - The operator will be prompted to enter a description for the photo.
● Auto Increment Issue Code - If the Issue Code function is used, selecting this option would automatically increase the Issue Code by one digit when a new badge is printed. This feature requires the badge template to reference the Keycards_IssueCode field.
● Minimum Issue Code - Sets the minimum Issue Code allowed.
● Maximum Issue Code - Sets the maximum Issue Code allowed.
● Deactivate Existing Cards After Print - Automatically deactivates any existing cards from the cardholders record after printing a new badge.
● Capture signature using WinTab - Select to use a Wintab interface to capture signatures. The WinTab driver must be installed.
Fusion User Manual Page 3-21
DNA Properties
Custom Fields and Types
Provides access to the custom text fields that appear on the Personnel Records as well as Personnel Types,
Card Types and Access Levels.
Personnel Custom Fields (Embedded)
● Custom String 1-16 - Label to designate the different custom text fields. Displays as a label in the
Personnel Record, Employee Info (Page 2) tab.
● Custom Value 1-3 - Label to designate the different custom value fields. Displays as a label in the
Personnel Record, Employee Info (Page 2) tab.
Custom Personnel Types
● Custom 1-5 - Listing to designate different personnel categories. Listed in the Personnel Record, Employee
Info tab in the Type menu.
Custom Access Levels
● Custom 1-5 - Listing to designate different access level groups or categories. Listed in the Access Levels
Maintenance dialog in the Access Level Category menu.
Edit Card Types
The Edit Card Types dialog allows the system administrator to define up to 255 custom Card Types.
1. Select the
Edit Card Types button.
2. Click the
New button.
The
New Card Type field is added.
3. Enter a name for the
Card Type.
4. Click the
OK button to save the settings.
Edit Disable Reasons
The Disable Reasons editor allows the administrator to enter up to 255 custom card disabled reasons.
1. Select the Edit Disable Reasons button.
2. Click the
New button.
The New Disable Reason field is added.
3. Enter a name for the
Disable Reason.
4. Click the OK button to save the settings.
Page 3-22 Fusion User Manual
DNA Properties
Hardware Tree Behavior
This dialog allows you to configure the Hardware Browser. These settings can also be accessed by rightclicking in the Hardware Browser and selecting Tree Properties.
Personnel Tree Tooltips
● Enable Tooltips - Check the box to enable/disable the context help balloons.
● Hover Delay - Amount of time the cursor will hover a graphic before displaying the context help balloon.
● Display Time - Amount of time the context balloon will display.
Hardware Tree Tabs
● Default Tab - Tabs shown at start up.
● All Objects - If selected, displays the All Objects tab on the Hardware Tree.
● Inputs - If selected, displays the Inputs tab on the Hardware Tree.
● Outputs - If selected, displays the Outputs tab on the Hardware Tree.
● Readers - If selected, displays the Readers tab on the Hardware Tree.
● ACM (Doors/Elevators) - If selected, displays the ACM tab on the Hardware Tree.
● Monitor Point Groups - If selected, displays the MPGs tab on the Hardware Tree.
● Cameras - If selected, displays the Camera tab on the Hardware Tree.
● ASSA - Only available if licensed for the ASSA integration. Displays the ASSA tab on the Hardware Tree.
● Access Control Areas - If selected, displays the Access Control Areas tab on the Hardware Tree.
“All Objects” Tree Items
Determines the hardware objects that will be visible on the
All Objects Hardware Tree Tab.
● Channels - If selected, displays Channels on the All Objects tree.
● Doors - If selected, displays Doors on the All Objects tree.
● Elevators - If selected, displays Elevators on the All Objects tree.
● MPG - If selected, displays MPGs on the All Objects tree.
● Time Schedules - If selected, displays Time Schedules on the All Objects tree.
● Monitor Points - If selected, displays Monitor Points on the All Objects tree.
● Control Points - If selected, displays Control Points on the All Objects tree.
Fusion User Manual Page 3-23
DNA Properties
● Readers - If selected, displays Readers on the All Objects tree.
● Access Control Areas - If selected, displays Access Control Areas on the All Objects tree.
● Cameras - If selected, displays Cameras on the All Objects tree.
Refresh from Current Updates
● Always - Will refresh automatically when an update is available.
● Never - Will not update automatically.
● Prompt Operator - Will prompt operator to refresh when an update is available.
Miscellaneous Properties
● Sort By - Defines the sort order of the Hardware Tree: Address or Description: Ascending or Descending.
● Hide Door Objects on Inputs Tab - Hides Input objects that are associated with a door on the Hardware
Browser Inputs Tab.
● Hide Door Objects on Outputs Tab - Hides Output objects that are associated with a door on the Hardware
Browser Outputs Tab.
● Expand on Double Click - If selected, double-clicking on a hardware object will expand the tree instead of opening the
Properties for the hardware object.
Page 3-24 Fusion User Manual
DNA Properties
DNA Video Window Settings
This dialog allows the system administrator to specify the type of video that will populate each of the four video windows.
Video Window 1-4
● Allow Types - Select the priorities to be displayed in each video window. Camera priorities are set in
Camera Properties in the Hardware Browser.
Fusion User Manual Page 3-25
ASSA Settings
This option will only appear if the site is licensed for ASSA Door integration.
DNA Properties
Credential Settings
● Default Credential Format - Select the credential format from the drop down list.
● Default Facility Codes - Select the credential type from the drop down list and enter the
Facility Code for each selected credential type.
Magnetic Encoding Minimum Lengths
Any entry greater than zero will force the encoding to the specified length and pad the remaining characters with zeros.
● Facility - Enter the encoding minimum length for the Facility Code.
● Card - Enter the encoding minimum length for the Card Number.
● Issue - Enter the encoding minimum length for the Issue Code.
Fusion User Manual Page 3-26
DNA Operators
4
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Configuring Operators
Configuring Operator Profiles
Setting up Operators Environments
Operator Features
Importing Operators
Custom Personnel Permissions
Operator SSP Lists
System operators generally have different roles in the management and monitoring of the security software application. Therefore it only makes sense to limit these operators to the tasks that they will be performing within the system. Operators can be imported from Active Directory and automatically assigned a profile.
DNA is designed to accommodate a range of different levels of application access by use of Operator Levels, passwords and assigned privileges by Operator Profiles. This chapter will show you how to add and modify system operators, configure different operator profiles, and associate privileges to those operators.
Configuring Operators
Adding an Operator
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Operator Maintenance / Operator Privileges from the Main Menu.
Or
Open the Operator Browser and double click the Operators option.
See page 4-21 for more information on opening the Operator Browser.
Or
Click the DNA Properties button on the Standard Toolbar and select Edit Operators.
Fusion User Manual Page 4-1
Operators
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 4-2 Fusion User Manual
Operators
2.
Click the New Operator button.
If Use Strong Passwords is checked in DNA Properties, the Password
Verification screen will display the required parameters as well.
3. Enter the Operator name.
4.
Enter a Password.
If the strong passwords option is selected, the password must contain a lowercase letter, a uppercase letter, a punctuation character, a numerical character and be a minimum of 8 characters.
5.
Re-enter the password in the Verification field.
6.
Click the Add Operator button.
The Operator is added to the drop-down list of operators.
7.
Select the Operator Profile to assign the selected operator.
Operator Profile determines the privileges that the operator will have within Fusion. See page 4-5 for information on Operator Profiles.
8. Select the Operator Environment from the drop down list.
Operator Environment is the view the operator will have upon logging in to Fusion. If any setting other than
Local Environment is selected, the view will be pulled from the database. See page 4-19 for information on configuring Operator Environments.
9. If Local Environment was selected in the Operator’s Environment field, select the Operator View Setting from the drop down list.
Operator View Setting is stored in the local registry and refers to the setting that will be displayed when the selected operator logs in.
10.
Click Apply Changes or OK to save the changes.
Removing an Operator
1.
Open the Edit Operator dialog box.
2. Select the Operator from the list.
3.
Click the Remove Operator button.
A dialog box will appear confirming the deletion.
Changing Operator’s Password
1. Open the Edit Operator dialog box.
2.
Select the Operator from the list.
3. Click the Reset Password button.
4. Enter the new password and click OK.
A dialog box will appear confirming the change.
!
Operators can change their password by selecting File / Set Password from the Main Menu.
Fusion User Manual Page 4-3
Operators
NOTES:
Page 4-4 Fusion User Manual
Operators
Configuring Operator Profiles
The DNA Administrator has the authority to assign permissions and operator levels for all operators. These parameters will determine what the operator will be able to view and control or to what he/she will be able to respond.
Adding a Profile
1.
Select DNA / Administrative / Operator Maintenance / Operator Privileges from the Main Menu.
Or
Open the Operator Browser and double click the Operators option.
See page 4-21 for more information on opening the
Operator Browser.
Or
Click the DNA Properties button on the Standard Toolbar and select Edit Operators.
2.
Select the Operator Profiles link.
3. Click the Add New Profile button.
4.
Enter a Profile Name and click the Add button.
The Profile is added to the drop-down list of operator profiles.
5.
Configure the profile.
See page 4-7 for information on configuring profiles.
!
Configuring system operators is an administrative task and is only available to system administrators. Use caution when configuring operator levels that affect the administrator level so that you do not lock yourself out of the system entirely. It is recommended that the Administrator Profile be left alone for this reason.
Fusion User Manual Page 4-5
Operators
Removing a Profile
Profiles can be removed if no operators are currently assigned to the profile.
1.
Open the Operator Privileges Editor dialog.
2. Click the Operator Profiles option from the menu.
3.
Select the Profile from the drop down list.
4.
Click the Remove Profile button.
The Profile is removed from the list.
Editing a Profile
1.
Open the Operator Privileges Editor dialog.
2. Click the Operator Profiles option from the menu.
3.
Select the Profile from the drop down list.
4. Edit the profile.
5.
Click the Apply Changes button to save the changes.
!
!
The Apply Changes button must be selected in order for changes to be saved. If not,
changes will be lost when selecting another operator or closing the dialog box. If the Apply
Changes button is NOT selected, Fusion will prompt the operator to save changes.
If an operator is logged in when a profile is changed, the changes will take effect the next time the operator logs into DNA.
Page 4-6 Fusion User Manual
Operators
Configuring a Profile
1.
Open the Operator Profile dialog as described on page 4-5.
2. Select the desired Operator Profile from the drop down list.
3.
Expand each item in the menu and configure the profiles specific privileges.
See page 4-9 for an explanation of operator privileges.
The Privileges section is where the administrator can configure the various operator permissions to determine what the operator can and cannot do within the system.
The Privileges section consists of main categories and subcategories. Each item in the privileges tree has a Edit Properties option as well as various command/task options. If a command/task is checked, that option will be available for any operator(s) assigned the profile.
Main Category
Edit Properties
Subcategory
Command/
Task Options
There are a number of ways to configure the privileges for the objects.
● Configure each sub-item individually using the Properties drop-down menu and checkboxes.
Edit Properties:
None - Selecting this option will make the field Hidden so that the operator has no visibility to the field.
Read Only - Selecting this option makes the field Read Only so that the operator can view the data in the fields but cannot edit.
All Read Write - Selecting this option will make the field Read Write so that the operator can edit as well as view the data in the fields.
● Configure each category by right-clicking on the category header and selecting an option.
● Configure each subcategory by right-clicking on the subcategory header and selecting an option.
Fusion User Manual Page 4-7
Operators
Options:
Select All / Select Group - This option will select all the checkboxes beneath the group thus granting full privilege to this group.
Remove All / Remove Group - This option will unselect all the checkboxes beneath the group thus denying privilege to this group.
All Read Only - Selecting this option at the top level of the tree will make all the Edit Properties fields in the group Read Only so that the operator can view the data in the fields but cannot edit.
All Read Write - Selecting this option at the top level of the tree will make all the Edit Properties fields in the group Read Write so that the operator can edit as well as view the data in the fields.
All Hidden - Selecting this option at the top level of the tree will make all the Edit Properties fields in the group
Hidden so that the operator has no visibility to them.
4.
Expand the Station Levels header and select the Station Levels for this operator.
The DNA Administrator has the authority to assign the station levels for the Operators
Profile. This setting determines which stations the operator has permission to log on to.
If the station is checked the operator will be authorized to use any stations configured with the station level as defined by the DNA Station Level setting in the Host Setting /
Station Settings dialog. See page 3-2 for more information.
5.
Expand the Operator Settings header.
It is important to configure the Operator Settings. These settings are a series of operator parameters that are defined within the Privileges panel along with the operator’s privileges.
DNA Administrator - It is also significant to note that configuring the DNA Administrator Level determines the administrative capabilities of the operator. Anyone designated as an administrator can add operators, configure operator profiles and access DNA Properties.
The options for administrator levels are:
● None - Operator only; no administrator privileges or capability.
● System Level - Can assign and edit any level profile (System, Regional or Local).
● Regional Level - Can assign and edit Regional and Local Level profiles.
● Local Level - Can assign and edit Local Level profiles.
6. Click Apply Changes or OK to save the configuration.
!
!
The Apply Changes button must be selected in order for changes to be saved. If not,
changes will be lost when selecting another operator or closing the dialog box. If the Apply
Changes button is NOT selected, Fusion will prompt the operator to save changes.
If an operator is logged in when a profile is changed, the changes will take effect the next time the operator logs into DNA.
Page 4-8 Fusion User Manual
Operators
Operator Privileges
Below is a breakdown of the operator commands/tasks that may configured for each profile. More information about the option can be found by referencing the page number in parenthesis next to the option or checking the chapter for a explanation of the item.
Hardware
Many of the hardware options have the same task options. For more information on hardware, see Chapter
8: Hardware Features.
S ub
H eader
Monitor Points (Inputs)
Control Points (Outputs)
O ptiOnS
● Allow Direct Control - Allows the operator to control the object. (8-17)
● Require Text on Control - Requires the operator to enter text after initiating a direct control command.
● Trace History - View the history of the selected object. (8-20)
Same as Monitor Points
● ACM: Forced Held - Allows the operator to arm or disarm the Forced option.
(8-4)
● ACM: Held Arm - Allows the operator to arm or disarm the Held option. (8-4)
● ACM: Temporary Unlock - If selected, the operator can initiate a momentary unlock command. (8-4)
ACM (All Levels)
Properties.
● ACM: Set ACM Mode - Specifies if the operator can change the ACM mode
* Security levels are setup within the Door
(lock, unlock, card only, etc.). (8-3)
● Require Text on Control - Same as Monitor Point.
● Allow Precision Assignment - If selected, allows the operator to assign precision assignment doors. (7-28)
● Trace History - Allows the operator to view the history of the selected ACM.
(8-13)
Time Schedules
Holiday
Access Area
● Allow Door Follows Schedule Assignment - Allows the operator to configure the
Door Follows option. (8-7)
Same as Monitor Points. Chapter 5
Allows the operator to configure holidays. (Read/Write, Read Only, None)
Same as Monitor Points. Chapter 11
MPG (Monitor Point Group) Same as Monitor Points. Chapter 12
Triggers & Macros Same as Monitor Points. Chapter 10
● Reset Hardware - Ability to Reset the controller. (8-23)
● Connect - Operator has the ability to connect the SSP to the site. (8-23)
● Disconnect - Ability to disconnect the SSP to the site. (8-23)
● Reload Firmware - Allows the operator to download firmware to the SSP. (8-
23)
Controller
● Set Controller Time - Ability to set the SSP time. (8-23)
● Require Text on Control - Same as Monitor Point.
● Calculate Memory - Operator has the ability to calculate the SSP’s memory.
(8-41)
● Card Formats - Allows the operator to create or edit card formats. (8-71)
● Remove Controller - Ability to delete controllers. (8-24)
● Download Hardware - Allows the operator to download hardware settings to the controller(s). (2-13)
Fusion User Manual Page 4-9
Operators
S ub
H eader
Subcontroller
DVRs & Cameras
Miscellaneous
Universal Driver
ASSA Specific
O ptiOnS
● Remove Subcontroller - Ability to delete subcontrollers. (8-25)
● Record - Provides the operator with the option to record. (8-29)
● Playback - Allows the operator to playback a recorded image. (8-29)
● Control - Ability to control cameras. (8-32)
● Require Text on Control - Same as Monitor Point.
● View Camera - If selected, allows the operator to view cameras. (8-29)
● Assign Camera - If selected, allows the operator to assign cameras to specific video windows. (8-31)
● Other 1-3 - Custom fields
● Edit Site - Allows the operator to edit the hardware site. (8-37)
● Edit Channel - Provides the operator with the ability to edit the hardware channels. (8-38)
● Allow Direct Control - Allows the operators to control the universal drivers.
● Require Text on Control - Same as Monitor Point.
● UD Level - Specify the UD security level.
● Replace Serial -
● Confirm Door -
● Reset Access Point -
● Re-Provision Data -
● Initialize Device -
● Pulse/Lock/Unlock -
● Lockdown/Remove Lockdown -
● Add DSR -
● Force Changes to DSR -
Access Levels
For more information on access levels, see Chapter 6: Access Levels.
O ptiOnS
● Assign Access Level - If selected, allows the operator to assign normal access levels.*
● Assign High Security Access Level - Allows the operator to assign high security access levels.*
● Assign Medium Security Access Level - Allows the operator to assign medium security access levels.*
● Assign Low Security Access Level - Allows the operator to assign low security access levels.*
● Assign Custom 1-4 Access Level - Allows the operator to assign custom security access levels.
* For more information on custom access levels, see page 3-21.
● Add or Edit Access Level Groups - Allows the operator to add or edit access level groups.
● View Access Level Groups - If selected, the operator will be able to view access level groups.
● Force Drag and Drop Confirmation on Access Level (Normal, High, Medium, Low and Custom 1-4) - If checked, the operator will be presented with a confirmation dialog regardless to the Do NOT ask again setting.
* If the ability to assign access levels is granted, the profile must be granted Read/Write permission to
Access Levels under the Personnel/Card Fields subheader.
Page 4-10 Fusion User Manual
Operators
Personnel
For more information on personnel, see Chapter 7: Cardholders.
S ub
H eader
O ptiOnS
Personnel Actions
● Add Cardholder - Ability to add cardholder records. (7-3)
● Remove Cardholder - Allows the operator to delete cardholder records. (7-11)
● Add Card - Allows the operator to add a card to a record. (7-11)
● Remove Card - Allows the operator to delete a card from a record. (7-12)
● Deactivate Card - If selected, the operator will be able to deactivate a card. (7-12)
● Set Card Use Limit_ - Provides the ability to set the use limit on a card. (7-33)
● Issue Free Pass - Allows the operator to issue a free anti-passback pass. (7-33)
● Set Card Flags - Permits the operator to set card flags. (7-31)
● Download Personnel - Allows the operator to download personnel to the controllers.
● Trace History - Ability to trace the history of the selected card/cardholder. (7-31)
● Add or Edit Personnel Groups - Permits the operator to add or edit personnel groups.
(7-13)
● Add Cardholder to Personnel Group - If selected, the operator will be able to add cardholders to personnel groups. (7-19)
● Allow Remove All Access - Allows the operator to select the Remove All option on the Cardholders tab under the Access Level section. (7-26)
● Allow Biometric Enrollment - If selected, the operator will be able to enroll cardholders through the biometric reader.
● Allow Biometric Removal of Biometric Templates - Allows the operator to remove biometric templates.
Personnel Views
(Tabs)
● Card # View - Allows the operator to see the Card # tab on the Personnel Browser.
● Name View - Allows the operator to see the Name tab on the Personnel Browser.
● Custom Tab 1-8 - Provides the ability to see custom tabs. See page 3-17 for details.
Personnel Fields
This item contains all the fields that are located on the Employee Info & Employee
Info (Page 2) tabs of the Cardholders Record. Items can be set to Read-Write, Read
Only or None.
● Location, Site & Title - If selected, the operator will have the ability to configure the drop list for the field(s).
Personnel Custom
Fields
This item contains all the fields that are located on the Custom Fields tab of the
Cardholders Record. Items can be set to Read-Write, Read Only or None. See page
3-17 for more information.
Card Fields
Card Types
This item contains all the fields that are located on the Card tab of the Cardholders
Record. Items can be set to Read-Write, Read Only or None. (7-9)
Personnel Type
If checked, the operator will be able to view cardholders with the selected Personnel
Type. (7-1)
Assign Personnel
Types
Operator will have the ability to assign cardholders the designated
Personnel Types.
(7-5)
If checked, the operator will be able to view cardholders with the selected Card Type.
● Extended - Allows the operator to add new card types as well as Disable Reasons.
See page 3-22 for more information.
Assign Card Types
Operator will have the ability to assign cardholders the selected
Card Types. (7-9)
Fusion User Manual Page 4-11
Operators
S ub
H eader
O ptiOnS
Photo Badging
● Photo Badging - Operators will have access to the ID Badging tab when a record is opened on the Badging station. (22-21)
● View Badge - Allows the operator to view the badge on the ID Badging tab. The
Photo Badging option above must be checked. (22-26)
*More info on photo
● Take Photo - Permits the operator to take a photo within DNA. (22-25)
● Add Photo - Allows the operator to import photos to the ID Badging tab. (7-37) found in Chapter
22.
● Print Badge - Provides the operator the ability to print a badge. (22-26)
● Remove Photo - Allows the operator to remove photos from a cardholders record.
● View Photos - If selected, the photos will be visible to the operator.
● Use Custom XML Permissions - If the Custom Personnel Permissions feature is used, check the Custom XML option to enable the feature for the selected profile. See page 4-16 for information on configuring Custom Personnel Permissions.
Advanced Custom
Settings
● Perform Advanced Access Level Check - This option allows system administrators to enforce business rules to the assignment of access levels by calling a SQL stored procedure named sp_DNA_AuthorizedAccess which returns a true (-1) or false (0) value. If a true value is returned, the access level will be assigned to the card. If a false value is returned, a dialog will appear stating that the access level was not assigned. Contact Open Options Technical Support for more information.
● Use CardType for Deactivation Date - Allows the operator to define a deactivation date specific to a designated card type. This option is defined by a setting in the
DNASettings table. There currently is no user interface to configure this option.
Contact Open Options Technical Support for more information.
Alarms
For more information on alarms, see Chapter 14: Events & Alarms.
O ptiOnS
● Acknowledge All - Permits the operator to acknowledge all the alarms on the Alarms Grid.
● Clear All - Allows the operator to clear all alarms on the that have returned to normal.
S ub
H eader
O ptiOnS
Allow Acknowledge
Priority 1-15 - Specify the alarm priorities that the operator can acknowledge. (14-
17)
Require Dispatch Text Priority 1-15 - If selected, the operator will be required to enter text when an alarm is cleared or dismissed. (14-19)
Allow Dismiss Alarm
Priority 1-15 - Specify the alarm priorities that the operator can dismiss. (Remember dismissing an alarm does not require the alarm to return to the normal state.) (14-
17)
Reports
For more information on reports, see Chapter 17: Reports.
S ub
H eader
Access
Alarms
Events
Hardware Settings
Personnel
O ptiOnS
If selected, allows the operator to run Access reports.
If selected, allows the operator to run Alarm reports.
If selected, allows the operator to run Event reports.
If selected, allows the operator to run Hardware Setting reports.
If selected, allows the operator to run Personnel reports.
Page 4-12 Fusion User Manual
Operators
S ub
H eader
O ptiOnS
Restored Archive Data If selected, allows the operator to run Restored Data reports.
System
Custom Reports
If selected, allows the operator to run System reports.
If selected, allows the operator to run Custom reports as well as add or edit any
Custom reports.
Views
If an operator has permission to complete a task but the view is not selected, they will not have access to the browser/window. For example, if an operator has permission to add a time schedule but the Time Schedule option below is unchecked, they will not be able to open
the Time Schedule browser to add the schedule. For more information on views, see Chapter 2: Getting Started.
O ptiOnS
● Access Areas - Provides visibility into the Access Areas option in the Hardware Tree (11-1).
● Alarms - Allows the operator to open the Alarm Grid (14-13).
● Access Levels - If selected, permits the operator to open the Access Level Browser (6-1).
● Events Manager - Allows the operator to open the Events Manager (14-5).
● Hardware Manager - If selected, permits the operator to open the Hardware Browser (8-1).
● HTML Viewer - Allows the operator to open the HTML Viewer (16-1).
● Operators - If selected, permits the operator to open the Operator Browser (4-21).
● Personnel - If selected, permits the operator to open the Personnel Browser (7-1).
● Photo Recall - Allows the operator to open Photo Recall windows (7-39).
● IP Video 1-4 - Allows the operator to open Video Windows (8-33).
● Time Schedules - Permits the operator to open the Time Schedules Browser (6-1).
● Triggers & Macros - If selected, permits the operator to open the Triggers & Macros Browser (10-1).
● Watch - Allows the operator to open the Watch Window (15-1).
Actions
The Actions item contains miscellaneous actions that were not covered in the individual options.
O ptiOnS
● Add to Watch - Ability to add objects to the Watch Window (15-3).
● Remove from Watch - Ability to remove objects from the Watch Window (15-3).
● Archive Data - Permits the operator to archive data (20-5).
● Restore Data - Permits the operator to restore archived data (20-7).
● Batch Processing - Allows the operator to complete batch processing tasks (20-14).
● Customize - If selected, allows the operator to customize the application (2-8).
● Edit HTML Views - Provides the ability to add/edit the HTML Viewer (16-3).
● Actions E-Mail - Allows the operator to send e-mails from the Event or Alarm Grids.
● Filter Events - Ability to filter the Events Grid (14-5).
● Station Configuration - Administrative Function: DNA/Administrative
● Allow Do Not Ask Again - If selected, the Do Not Ask Again option will be available on dialog boxes.
● Allow Do Not Show Again - If selected, the Do Not Show Again option will be available on dialog boxes.
● Allow Situation Severe - Allows the operator to change the Situation Level Manager to Severe. (9-1)
Fusion User Manual Page 4-13
Operators
O ptiOnS
(C
Ont
’ d
)
● Allow Situation High - Allows the operator to change the Situation Level Manager to High. (9-1)
● Allow Situation Elevated - Allows the operator to change the Situation Level Manager to Elevated. (9-1)
● Allow Situation Guarded - Allows the operator to change the Situation Level Manager to Guarded. (9-1)
● Allow Situation Low - Allows the operator to change the Situation Level Manager to Low. (9-1)
Graphics
For more information on graphics, see Chapter 18: Graphic Maps.
O ptiOnS
● Show Graphics - Displays all normal objects.
● Edit Graphics - Allows the operator to edit graphic maps.
● Arm All on Page - Provides the ability to arm all hardware objects on a graphics map.
● Disarm All on Page - Provides the ability to disarm all hardware objects on a graphics map.
● Acknowledge All on Page - Provides the ability to acknowledge all alarms on a graphics map.
Direct Commands
For more information on direct commands, see page 8-35.
O ptiOnS
● Add Direct Command - Permits the operator to add direct commands.
● Edit Direct Command - Permits the operator to edit direct commands.
● Require Text on Control - Requires the operator to enter text before the command is executed.
● Remove Direct Command - Permits the operator to delete direct commands.
● Execute - If checked, allows the operator to execute the selected command.
Schedules
For more information on schedules, see Chapter 19: Scheduling.
O ptiOnS
● Schedule Archive - Permits the operator to schedule archives.
● Schedule Batch Files - If selected the operator will have the ability to schedule batch files.
● Schedule Downloads - Allows the operator to schedule downloads.
● Schedule Reports - If checked, the operator will be allowed to schedule reports.
Station Levels
For more information on station levels, see page 4-8 for more information.
O ptiOnS
● Station Levels 1-32 - Allows the administrator to restrict operator access to Fusion workstations.
Alarm Routing
For more information on alarm routing, see page 14-25 for more information.
O ptiOnS
● Create Routes - Allows the operator to create alarm routes in the DNA / Administrative Main Menu item.
● Assign Routes - If checked, the profile will have access to assign hardware objects to an alarm route.
Page 4-14 Fusion User Manual
Operators
Operator Filters
For more information on filters, see page 14-25 for more information.
O ptiOnS
If checked, the operators view will be limited to the selected filter.
Operator Settings
These settings are a series of operator parameters that are defined within the Privileges panel along with the operator’s privileges. For more information on settings, see page 4-8 for more information.
O ptiOnS
● Log Failed Logon as Alarm - Select the priority from the drop down list to generate an alarm if an operator fails to logon.
● Restrict Logon Attempts - Select the number of logon attempts before the operator is locked out.
● Lockout Operator Following Failed Attempt - If Restrict Logon Attempts is selected, specify the lockout time or until reset by an administrator.
● Restrict Active Logon Days - Allows for logon restriction by days (1-365).
● Restrict Active Logons - Allows for logon restrictions per actual number logons.
● Force Password Change - If set, will prompt the operator to reset their password after x number of days.
● DNA Administrator - Determines operators administrative level. See page 4-8. Set to NONE to restrict access to all administrative functions such as the addition of operators, configuring properties, system maintenance activities, etc.
● Generate Alarm After Inactivity - If set to True, will generate an alarm upon operator inactivity.
● Homepage - Provides a link to a specified homepage.
● HTML Viewer - Provides a link to a specified HTML page.
Operator Import Settings
For more information on import settings, see page 4-17 for more information.
O ptiOnS
Imports the operators from the specified Active Directory group and automatically assigns the designated profile to the operators.
Fusion User Manual Page 4-15
Operators
Custom Personnel Permissions
The Custom Personnel Properties option allows the system admimistrator to configure individual Personnel
Record fields per Personnel and/or Card Type in addition to the settings in the operator’s profile.
If the Custom Personnel Permissions option is used, verify that the Use Custom XML
Permissions is selected for the desired operator profile. See page 4-12 for information.
1. Select the DNA / Administrative / Setup Custom Personnel Permissions from the Main Menu.
2.
Select the Personnel Type from the Personnel drop down.
3.
Select the desired Permission Field and click the Permission Rights drop down list.
4.
Select the Permission Right from the list.
● None/Hidden - Selecting this option will make the field Hidden so that the operator has no visibility to the field.
● Read Only - Selecting this option makes the field Read Only so that the operator can view the data in the fields but cannot edit.
● Read-Write - Selecting this option will make the field Read Write so that the operator can edit as well as view the data in the fields.
5.
If desired, select a different Personnel Type and repeat steps 3 though 4.
6.
If desired, select the Custom Card Type Permissions tab and repeat steps 3 through 4.
7.
Click the OK button to save the settings.
Page 4-16 Fusion User Manual
Operators
Importing Operators
Operators can be imported from Active Directory and assigned the designated profile automatically with the
Active Directory Sync plugin. An operator’s account can also be disabled when an operator is removed from the Active Directory group.
Installing the AD Sync Plugin
Obtain the AD Sync Plugin installation application from Open Options Technical Support.
1.
Double-click the installation file to start the installation.
2. Click the Next button to begin the installation.
3. Click the Install button.
When the installation is complete, the Finished dialog will appear.
4.
Click the Finish button.
AD Sync Plugin Configuration
The AD Sync plugin is configured via the dnaWeb.Plugin.ADSync configuration file. The file is located in the
NPowerDNA folder (Default Location: C:\Program Files\NPowerDNA\Plugins\ADSync).
1.
Enter the Active Directory path between the <Path> options.
2.
If desired, change the other options.
3.
Save the changes to the configuration file.
Options
● Default Password - Determines how the default password will be set when operators are added.
Blank - Adds the operator without specifying a password.
Random - Adds the operator with a randomly generated 8-10 character password.
!
Static - Adds the operator and provides them with a static password. If this option is selected, insert a predefined password in the Static Password field.
Caution should be used when setting the default password to Blank. If the DNA workstation
does not have the NT Authenication feature enabled, the operators will be able to sign in
without a password. See page 3-4 for more information on NT Authenication.
Fusion User Manual Page 4-17
Operators
● Interval - Indicates the number of minutes or hours between synchronizations. Default is 1 hour.
● Interval Rate - Determines the timeframe that <Interval> represents. Default is Hours.
Hours - Sets the Interval time to hours.
Minutes - Sets the Interval time to minutes.
● Purge Method - Specifies how operators will be handled when they are removed from the active directory group or no longer appear in active directory.
Disable - Deactivates the operators account without removing the operator.
Remove - Deletes the operator from DNA.
● Static Password - Indicates the predefined password if Static is specified under the Default Password option.
● Sync On Startup
True - Sets the synchronization process to begin 1 (one) minute after the plugin starts.
False - Sets the synchronization process to start at the normal interval time.
Queries
● Path - Identifies the base LDAP path to search.
● Individual - Query string used to locate an individual record. No changes should be made to this string.
● Group - Query string used to retrieve all members of a particular group. No changes should be made to this string.
● Member Of - Query string used to identify if an individual is a member of a particular group. No changes should be made to this string.
Configure Import Settings
1.
Open the Operators Privileges Editor.
See page 4-6 for information on editing operator profiles.
2.
Expand the Operator Import Settings option.
3. Enter the Active Directory Path where the desired operators reside.
Example: CN=DNA Fusion Administrators,OU=DNA Fusion,OU=Domain Groups,DC=xxxxxx,DC=local
4.
Click the Apply Changes button to save the changes or the OK button to save the changes and close the dialog.
!
The Apply Changes button must be selected in order for changes to be saved. If not,
changes will be lost when selecting another operator or closing the dialog box.
Page 4-18 Fusion User Manual
Operators
Setting Up the Operator Environment
The DNA Administrator can setup operator environments so that each Operator Profile can have a different desktop view upon logging in to DNA Fusion.
Fusion offers two options for configuring operator’s environments.
● Write the environment to the workstations registry
● Pull the environment from the database
Local Registry
The operator must have permission to write to the local registry of the workstation.
1. Log in to the workstation as the desired operator.
2.
Open the Customize dialog and configure the desktop as desired.
For more information on the Customize dialog and customizing Fusion, see
Chapter 2: Getting Started.
Database View
Configuring a New Environment
Environments can also be saved to the database and then associated to an Operator.
1.
Select DNA / Administrative / Operator Maintenance / Save View Settings from the Main Menu.
2.
Select the New Environment option, enter a name for the environment in the Environment Name field
click the Save button.
3. Select DNA / Administrative / Operator Maintenance / Edit View Settings from the Main Menu.
4. Select the desired Environment and click the Load button.
The specified operator environment is loaded.
5.
Change the DNA Fusion desktop to meet the operators needs.
Open the desired Browsers, add and remove toolbar buttons, add and remove toolbars, open secondary toolbars or create custom toolbars and add and remove Main Menu options. See Chapter 2: Getting
Started for more information on customizing the environment.
Fusion User Manual Page 4-19
Operators
6.
Select DNA / Administrative / Operator Maintenance / Save View Settings from the Main Menu.
7.
Select the desired Environment and click the Save button.
Modifying an Environment
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Operator Maintenance / Edit View Settings from the Main Menu.
The
Modify Environment dialog opens.
2.
Select the desired Environment and click the Load button. The specified operator environment is
loaded.
3.
Change the DNA Fusion desktop to meet the operators needs.
Open the desired Browsers, add and remove toolbar buttons, add and remove toolbars, open secondary toolbars or create custom toolbars and add and remove Main Menu options. See Chapter 2: Getting
Started for more information on customizing the environment.
4.
Select DNA / Administrative / Operator Maintenance / Save View Settings from the Main Menu.
5. Select the desired Environment and click the Save button.
The Operator Environment is saved and changes to be applied to any operator assigned to the environment when they login.
!
If an operator is logged in when an environment is changed, the changes will take effect the next time the operator logs into DNA.
Page 4-20 Fusion User Manual
Operators
Operator Features
There are a number of features available to an operator.
Operator Browser
To access these features:
1.
Select View / Explorers / Operators and Hosts from the Main Menu.
2.
Right-click on the operator’s name under the Operators heading.
3.
Select the feature from the list.
● Properties - Quick way to edit operator properties
● Leave Message - Leaves a message for an operator. Message will be displayed when the operator logs into the system.
● Locate - Displays the station information for the selected operator
(operator must be logged in for this option to be available).
● Journal - Maintains a record of information from an operator
● Audit Report - Runs an Audit Report for the selected operator.
Leave Message
The Leave Message menu item allows you to leave a message for an operator not currently logged on to the system to be received immediately upon logon of the selected operator.
1.
Click on the Leave Message option.
2.
If desired, select the Urgent! radio button.
The message will appear in red text when received.
3.
Select the Local radiobutton to leave the message on the same station as the one on which the message is being composed.
Or
De-select the Local radiobutton to display a drop-down menu listing each of the stations connected to the system as well as an All menu item. Select the desired station or ALL to leave the message on all the stations.
4.
If desired, attach a file by using the Browse button.
5. Place the cursor in the Message Body panel and type the desired message.
6.
Click the OK button to send the message.
Fusion User Manual Page 4-21
Operators
Locate
The Locate feature will display the station information where the selected operator is currently logged in.
1.
Click the Locate option.
2.
Click OK to close the dialog.
Page 4-22 Fusion User Manual
Operators
Journal
From time to time, it may be necessary to maintain a record of information beyond that which is normally retained by the database, i.e. operator commentary regarding situations, equipment, other operators, or their own actions.
For this task, the operator may utilize the DNA Journal. The journal allows an operator to record a text entry and view all journal entries for which he has permission to view.
Creating a New Entry
1.
Click on the Journal option and select New Entry.
2.
Configure the DNA Journal log.
● Journal Entry For - Indicates entry component category. Entries may be sorted based on this field.
Select Operator: Entry is specific to the selected operator
Current Station: Entry is specific to the station in use
DNA System: Entry is related to the system
● Journal Entry Type - Indicates entry category. Entries may be sorted based on this field.
● Restrictions - Indicates who has the ability to view the entry.
3. Place cursor in the Journal Entry Text panel and type the desired message.
4.
Click the Add button.
Viewing an Entry
1. Click on the Journal option and select View.
2. Configure the DNA Journal Selection dialog.
3.
Click the OK button to view the results.
DNA Journal will display in View mode. In View mode, the operator will only be allowed to view existing entries for which he has permission to view.
Read Only fields indicate entry’s properties including its chronological sequence, author, station of origin, date and time, entry type, and entry link.
Navigate through the entries using the green arrow buttons at the bottom of the panel.
4.
When finished, select the Cancel button to close the dialog.
Fusion User Manual Page 4-23
Operators
Audit Report
Operators actions can be quickly traced by running an Audit Report for a selected operator(s). Another operator report is the System Audit Trial report; it can be accessed from the Reports Menu.
1.
Click the Audit Report option.
2.
If desired, enter the Report Header information.
3.
Select the Sites tab and configure the Sites selection.
4.
Select the Operators tab and configure the Audit Operators selection.
The Operator that is highlighted when you select the
Audit Report option will be selected by default.
5. Select the Date/Time Range tab and configure the Date and Time options.
6.
Click the OK button to generate the Audit Report.
For more information on navigating reports, see page 17-4.
Page 4-24 Fusion User Manual
Operators
Operator SSP Options
An administrator may grant or restrict access to specific SSPs to/from specific operators without using the tenant functionality. The operator’s Events and Alarms that appear in the grids will be limited to the assigned controller(s) however they will see all Personnel.
Profile SSP List
To utilize this capability, the administrator must enable the SSP Lists button in the Edit Operators dialog by selecting the
Enable Operator SSP Lists option in the Host Settings / Properties dialog.
1.
Open the Operator Profile dialog as described on page 4-5.
2.
Click the Profile SSP List button.
3.
Select the desired SSP and click the single right arrow button to transpose the SSP from the Available
Controllers panel to the Operator Controllers panel.
Or
Click the double arrows button to transpose all listed available SSPs to the Operator Controllers panel.
4. Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box.
Fusion User Manual Page 4-25
Operators
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 4-26 Fusion User Manual
Time & Holiday
Schedules
5
In This Chapter
√
√
√
Adding Time Schedules & Time Sets
Controlling Time Schedules
Adding Holidays & Holiday Sets
Schedules are a fundamental building block for DNA. Schedules are pre-determined time blocks that can be used for controlling access and automated operations.
Time schedules can be linked to access levels to regulate at what time a cardholder is allowed to access a particular door(s). They may also be used in conjunction with triggers to initiate predefined system actions
(macros). When associated to time schedules, certain devices will change behaviour based on different times of the day/week.
A holiday can be linked to a time schedule allowing for exceptions to the normal schedule. For example, a schedule that is applied to a door would contain an exception for observed holidays so that the door would not unlock on holidays.
Time Schedules
Time schedules are defined time ranges and associated days of the week that are stored in the SSP controller for access control. A time schedule consists of up to 12 time intervals. Each interval consists of a begin and end time as well as an option to associate holidays with the schedule.
Each SSP Controller, by default, will store up to 255 time schedules. All time schedules are stored remotely at the SSP once downloaded (along with personnel information and access levels).
Adding a Time Schedule
1. Click the
Time Schedules button on the Standard Toolbar.
The Time Schedules Browser opens.
2. Right-click in the
Time Schedule Browser and select New Time
Schedule.
The
Time Intervals dialog box appears.
If the schedule was added to a time schedule set, the set name will be displayed. See page 5-7 for information on sets.
3. Select a
Schedule Number from the drop-down list.
Each time schedule is designated with a time schedule number.
When adding a new time schedule, the system automatically assigns the next available time schedule number.
4. Select a Mode from the drop-down list.
● Off - The time schedule is inactive. No access will be granted.
● On - This setting activates the time schedule 24/7 regardless of the days and times specified. Access will be granted regardless of the time scheduled.
● Scan - (Default) This is the standard setting. The system continually checks to see which time schedules are to be activated, and then activates them. Access will be granted per the scheduled time interval.
Fusion User Manual Page 5-1
Time & Holiday Schedules
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 5-2 Fusion User Manual
Time & Holiday Schedules
5. Type a
Description for the time schedule.
Typically, this description should give the user an idea of what range of times the schedule addresses or the schedules purpose, i.e., Working Hrs 8a-5p or Front Door Unlock Schedule.
6. If desired, select a
Template to apply to the new time schedule.
7. Configure the time schedule intervals.
Each time schedule is made up of a possible twelve intervals. An interval consists of a Begin and End
Time along with the days of the week that this time schedule will be active and a place to determine if the schedule will be active during defined holidays. A time schedule must have at least one interval defined in order for it to be valid.
There are two methods to creating a time schedule interval.
● Manual Entry - Click the Tables button at the bottom-right corner of the dialog box. Enter the
Begin and End Times using military time designations (00:00-23:59) in the fields for the appropriate interval. Assign the time interval to given days of the week by checking the desired weekday box(es).
This method provides a more accurate method of entry.
The last box for each interval is labeled
H and, when checked, will activate the time schedule for the specified time range on days that have been defined as Holidays.
● Graphical Entry - Create the first interval by placing your mouse pointer below the appropriate day of the week at the Begin time. Click and drag the control downward to the end time. A tooltip will show the time range and number of hours between the begin and end times.
If a time schedule needs to span midnight, you will need to end at 11:59 p.m. and begin the next day at 12:00 a.m. This will provide seamless coverage.
8. If time was entered in the Holiday (H) column, select the Holiday Types to associate with the time schedule.
Verify that you have associated a time range to the Holiday by entering a time range in the
HOL/H field. See page 5-9 for more information on Holiday Types.
A NOTE ABOUT HOLIDAYS: If holidays are entered in the system, DNA will treat those days differently and will check the HOL/H column for the time schedule on designated holidays. If there is time in the column, the schedule will become active on holidays
(if assigned to an access level, access will be granted and doors will unlock if based on the time schedule). If there is no time in the column, the schedule will stay inactive during the holiday (if assigned to an access level, no access will be granted and doors will not unlock if based on the time schedule).
9. Click
Save to save the new time schedule.
10. Download all the time schedules to the SSP by right-clicking in the Time Schedules explorer and
selecting Download from the context menu.
Once the time schedules have been configured for the system, they must be downloaded to the SSP controllers for them to take effect. This can be done for all defined time schedules as described above or for individual schedules.
To download individual time schedules, expand the tree in the time schedule browser so that all available time schedules are shown; select the time schedule you wish to download. Right-click and select
Download from the context menu.
Time schedules may be controlled at the host once they have been downloaded to the controller(s).
Fusion User Manual Page 5-3
Time & Holiday Schedules
Editing a Time Schedule
1. Right-click on the
Time Schedule and select Properties.
The
Time Intervals dialog opens.
2. Make changes to the time schedule.
3. Click
OK to save the settings.
The schedule is updated.
Deleting a Time Schedule
1. Right-click on the Time Schedule and select Remove.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
2. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
The schedule is removed from the list.
Downloading Time Schedules
1. Right-click in the Time Schedules Browser.
The
Time Schedule context menu appears.
2. Select Download from the menu.
The
Time Schedules are downloaded to the controllers.
Where Used Report
The Where Used Info Ready report lists all the areas that a selected time schedule has been utilized; i.e., access levels, door schedules, triggers, etc..
1. Right-click on the desired
Time Schedule.
The Time Schedule context menu appears.
2. Select
Where Used... from the menu.
The
Where Used Report opens.
3. If desired, select the
Export option.
● Export Grid to CSV File - The Save As dialog will appear. If desired, rename the file and click the Save button.
● Export Grid to Clipboard - Exports the information to the Windows clipboard. The text can be pasted in a document.
4. Click OK or Cancel to close the dialog.
Page 5-4 Fusion User Manual
Time & Holiday Schedules
Controlling Time Schedules
After time schedules have been successfully downloaded to the SSP controller(s), they may be controlled from the control dialog.
Time Schedules can be controlled in three manners:
● Per Time Schedule (Time Schedule Browser) - Controls the time schedule for all SSPs that contain the time schedule.
● Individually per SSP (Time Schedule Browser) - Controls the time schedule for the selected SSP.
● Individually per SSP (Hardware Browser) - Controls the time schedule for the selected SSP.
Controlling a Time Schedule
1. From the
Time Schedule Browser, highlight the desired Time Schedule in the tree.
2. Right-click and select Control from the menu.
The
Execute Time Schedule Control Dialog will appear.
3. If desired, select the desired controller from the drop down list.
4. Select the appropriate
Command from the drop-down menu.
● Temporary Off – Temporarily sets the time schedule mode to OFF. The next time interval edge will return the schedule to its normal time-based state. Use the Resume Normal Status command to restore the time schedule to the time-based control prior to the next interval edge.
● Temporary On - Temporarily sets the time schedule mode to ON. The next time interval edge will return the schedule to its normal time-based state. Use the Resume Normal Status command to restore the time schedule to the time-based control prior to the next interval edge.
● Override Off - Sets the time schedule mode to OFF overriding the time-based control. Overrides the
Scan Mode and time intervals have no effect when this command is used. Use the Resume Normal
Status command to restore the time schedule to the time based control.
● Override On - Sets the time schedule mode to ON overriding the time-based control. Basically the
Scan Mode is being overridden and time intervals have no effect when this command is used. Use the
Resume Normal Status command to restore the time schedule to the time-based control.
● Resume Normal State – Puts the time schedule into the state as defined time-based rules. Use this command to remove the temporary clear/set and override clear/set commands. This command will return the system to its “normal” state.
● Refresh Status – Logs the current time schedule modes into the transaction log. Use this command to test triggers that are activated based on time schedule events.
5. Click the Execute button to send the command to the controller.
6. Click the
Cancel button to close the dialog after execution.
Fusion User Manual Page 5-5
Time & Holiday Schedules
Controlling Individual Time Schedules from the Hardware Browser
1. From the
Hardware Browser, locate and expand the desired controller.
2.
Expand the Time Schedule sub-header.
3.
Highlight the desired Time Schedule in the tree.
4. Right-click and select the appropriate
Command from the drop-down menu.
The command is executed at the controller.
Or
Right-click and select Control from the menu.
The
Execute Time Schedule Control Dialog will appear.
5. Select the appropriate
Command from the drop-down menu.
● Temporary Off – Temporarily sets the time schedule mode to OFF. The next time interval edge will return the schedule to its normal time-based state. Use the Resume Normal Status command to restore the time schedule to the time-based control prior to the next interval edge.
● Temporary On - Temporarily sets the time schedule mode to ON. The next time interval edge will return the schedule to its normal time-based state. Use the Resume Normal Status command to restore the time schedule to the time-based control prior to the next interval edge.
● Override Off - Sets the time schedule mode to OFF overriding the time-based control. Overrides the
Scan Mode and time intervals have no effect when this command is used. Use the Resume Normal
Status command to restore the time schedule to the time based control.
● Override On - Sets the time schedule mode to ON overriding the time-based control. Basically the
Scan Mode is being overridden and time intervals have no effect when this command is used. Use the
Resume Normal Status command to restore the time schedule to the time-based control.
● Resume Normal State – Puts the time schedule into the state as defined time-based rules. Use this command to remove the temporary clear/set and override clear/set commands. This command will return the system to its “normal” state.
● Refresh Status – Logs the current time schedule modes into the transaction log. Use this command to test triggers that are activated based on time schedule events.
6. Click the Execute button to send the command to the controller.
The command is executed at the controller.
7. Click the
Cancel button to close the dialog after execution.
Page 5-6 Fusion User Manual
Time & Holiday Schedules
Time Schedule Sets
A Time Schedule Set allows you to establish numerous schedules and assign them to a specific SSP(s). The controller will then be limited to the time schedules that are in the assigned set. Keep in mind that each SSP can have a maximum of 255 time schedules.
If a Time Schedule is not specified, the SSP will be downloaded with all time schedules listed under the
Default tree object.
Creating a Time Schedule Set
1. Right-click in the
Time Schedules browser.
2. Select New Time Set from the menu.
The
Time Schedule and Holiday Set Editor dialog will display.
3. If desired, select a
Set Number that will serve to identify the time schedule set.
4. Enter a Description for the set.
5. Click
OK to save the set.
Adding Time Schedules to a Set
There are three ways to add time schedules to a set: copy a default time schedule, drag and drop a default time schedule or create a schedule specific to the set.
!
After time schedule sets are configured, saved, and downloaded, they will appear in the
SSP Property dialog box in the Time Schedule Set drop-down list. Selecting a time schedule
set from this drop-down will indicate to the SSP which set of time schedules to observe.
See page 8-39 for more information.
Copy a Default Time Schedule
1. Expand the Time Schedules object to reveal the available time schedules.
2. Select the desired time schedule(s).
Multiple time schedules can be selected using the standard Windows conventions (Ctrl or Shift).
3. Right-click on the schedule(s) and select
Copy to Set.
4. Select the desired
Set.
The Time Schedule(s) appear in the specified set.
5. Right-click in the
Time Schedules explorer and select Download.
Fusion User Manual Page 5-7
Time & Holiday Schedules
Drag and Drop a Default Time Schedule
1.
Expand the Time Schedules object to reveal the available time schedules.
2.
Expand the Time Schedule Sets object in the tree to display all the individual sets.
3. Select the desired time schedule(s).
Multiple time schedules can be selected using the standard Windows conventions (Ctrl or Shift).
4. Drag and drop the desired Time Schedules to the desired Time Schedule Set.
The
Time Schedule(s) appear in the specified set.
5. Right-click in the
Time Schedules explorer and select Download.
Create a Set Specific Time Schedule
1. Right-click the desired
Time Schedule Set and select New Time Schedule.
The Time Intervals dialog will open with the Set Name listed.
2. Continue to create the
Time Schedule.
See page 5-1 for more information.
Removing Time Schedules from a Set
1. Right-click on the desired Time Schedule under the Time Schedule Set in the Time Schedule browser.
2. Select
Remove Schedule From Set from the menu.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
3. Click
Yes to confirm the deletion.
The time schedule is removed from the set.
Deleting a Time Schedule Set
1. Right-click on the selected
Time Schedule Set in the Time Schedule browser.
2. Select Remove Time Set from the menu.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
3. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
The time schedule set is removed from the list.
Page 5-8 Fusion User Manual
Time & Holiday Schedules
Holidays
Up to 255 different holidays can be established within the DNA Fusion system. When a day is specified as a holiday, it is treated differently by the system than a regular day (M-Su). Holidays are defined by the date and duration of the holiday as well as there assigned type.
Often times users create holidays because their facility runs on an entirely different schedule during these days. For example, if a manufacturing plant is closed on Thanksgiving day, the manager does not want the front doors to unlock as they do during regular business hours. Therefore he would establish Thanksgiving day as a holiday and simply not indicate any time in the Holiday column in the unlock time schedule.
How do Holidays & Time Schedules Work
Holidays and Time Schedules share a special relationship. At Midnight, the system checks to see if that day is designated as a holiday. If it is, the system checks the Time Schedules to see which schedules have
Holiday time. If a Time Schedule has time in the Holiday column, the system verifies that the Holiday Type(s) checked for that Time Schedule correspond with the Holiday’s Type. If it does, that Time will become active based upon the time interval in the Holiday column.
Adding a Holiday
1. Select the
Holidays tab in the Time Schedules explorer.
Click the + sign to expand the Holiday header.
The following colors apply to the programmed holidays:
● Grey text with asterisk - The Holiday date has already occurred.
● Red text with arrow - The Holiday date is today.
● Black text - The Holiday date is in the future.
2. Right-click inside the
Holidays explorer.
3. In the context menu, select Add.
The
Holidays dialog will display.
A holiday can span up to 365 days. Dates can be selected using the mouse, keyboard or by manually choosing the dates.
4.
Configure the holiday.
There are four methods to creating a holiday.
● Mouse Selection - Select the date(s) for the holiday. Use the Shift key to select multiple consecutive dates.
● Auto Configure - Enter the holiday description in the Find Date by
Name field and click the Search button. If the system recognizes the holiday, it will auto populate the Date and Description fields for the next occurrence. If the holiday is not recognized, the date will not appear and the holiday will need to be entered manually. Future holidays can be searched by entering the year after the shortcut.
Shortcuts can be used for various holidays as well. See page 5-10 for more information.
● Date Range - Enter a date range in the Start Date and End Date fields.
● Manual Configure - Click on the appropriate day. To view a different month, select the applicable arrow in the top left and right hand corner of the calendar. If more than one day is required, drag the mouse to include the additional days to be associated with the holiday.
5. Select the
Holiday Type from the drop-down list.
The holiday types are to used link time schedules with holidays of a certain type occurs. For instance
Type 1 Holidays maybe a regular days off while Type 2 Holidays are reserved for ½ days.
6. Click
OK.
7. Right-click in the Holidays explorer and select Download.
If today is a scheduled holiday, arrows will be displayed next to the holiday description.
If a scheduled holiday has already occurred, an asterisk will appear by scheduled holidays description.
Fusion User Manual Page 5-9
Time & Holiday Schedules
Deleting a Holiday
1. Right-click on the holiday and select
Remove.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
2. Click
Yes to confirm the deletion.
The holiday is removed from the list.
3. Right-click in the Holidays explorer and select Download.
Holiday Shortcuts
Enter the following shortcut combination into the Find Date field and click the Search button. The system will auto populate the Date and Description fields for the next occurrence.
Shortcut
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
Y
TM
NW
N1
TH
PD
T
N
AW
H
NY
NYE
X
XE
E
GF
J4
MD
LD
VD
CD
Holiday/Day
Christmas
Christmas Eve
Easter
Good Friday
Ash Wednesday
Halloween
New Year’s Day
New Year’s Eve
Independence Day - July 4
Memorial Day
Labor Day
Veterans Day
Columbus Day
Thanksgiving
Presidents Day
Today
Now
Yesterday
Tomorrow
Next Week
Next Sunday
Next Monday
Next Tuesday
Next Wednesday
Next Thursday
Next Friday
Next Saturday
Page 5-10 Fusion User Manual
Time & Holiday Schedules
Holiday Sets
Holiday sets, similar to time schedules set, allows you to establish numerous holidays and assign them to a specific SSP(s). The controller will then be limited to the time schedules that are in the assigned set. Keep in mind that each SSP can have a maximum of 255 time schedules.
If a Time Schedule is not specified, the SSP will be downloaded with all time schedules listed under the
Default tree object.
Adding a Holiday Set
1. To create a holiday set,
right-click in the Holidays Browser.
2. Select
Holiday Sets / New Holiday Set from the menu.
The
Time Schedule and Holiday Set Editor dialog will display.
3. Select a Set Number that will serve to identify the holiday set.
4.
Enter a description for the set.
5. Click OK to save the set.
Adding Holidays to a Set
1. Expand the Holidays header to reveal the available holidays.
2.
Expand the Holidays Sets object in the tree to display all the individual sets.
3. Drag and drop the desired holidays to the specific Holiday Set.
4. Right-click in the
Holidays explorer and select Download.
After holiday sets are configured, saved, and downloaded, they will appear in the
SSP Property dialog box in the Holiday Set: drop-down list. Selecting a holiday set
will indicate to the SSP which set of holidays to observe. See page 8-39 for more information.
Removing Holidays from a Set
1. Right-click on the desired holiday under the
Holidays Set header in the Holidays Browser.
2. Select
Holidays Sets / Remove Holiday from the menu.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
3. Click
Yes to confirm the deletion.
The holiday is removed from the set.
Fusion User Manual Page 5-11
Time & Holiday Schedules
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 5-12 Fusion User Manual
Access Levels
6
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
Creating a Basic Door Access Level
Setting up Elevator Access Levels
Access Level Options
Creating Access Level Groups
Access Levels are defined as an entry point (such as a door or elevator) and an associated time schedule or floor group that when added to a card record determines where and when the cardholder has access within the system.
Access Levels can be added to individual cards or groups of cards in the system. Each card can be assigned
32 access levels per each SSP controller in the system. This section shows you how to create and remove access levels.
See page 7-21 for information on assigning access levels to a cardholder.
Access Levels
An access level is created at the SSP level since doors and elevators are designated to a particular SSP.
Access Level Groups are then created to group the access levels from multiple SSPs together for easy of distribution to cardholders.
The are 4 different types of access levels that can be created.
● Basic Door Access Level - The simplest access level; includes a door and a time schedule to determine access.
● Basic Elevator Access Level - Controls access to elevators. Doors can be added to this type of access level to control access to doors as well as elevators.
● Escort Required Access Level - Requires at least 2 access levels: the escort and the escort required.
The cardholder with the Escort Requirement must have a cardholder that is assigned the Escort
Access Level badge after them in order to gain access.
● Auto Expiring Access Level - Allows for the assignment of an Activation and Deactivation Date. The
Access Level will automatically activate and deactivate based upon the dates. NOTE: Can be used in conjunction with an Escort Requirement setting.
Prior to adding an access level, at least one entry point (door or elevator, see page
8-47) and one time schedule (see page 5-1) must be created.
Fusion User Manual Page 6-1
Access Levels
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 6-2 Fusion User Manual
Access Levels
Creating a Basic Door Access Level
Access levels are applied cardholder’s card to grant them access to the building’s doors. They define the access to certain doors during specific hours.
1. Click the Access Levels button on the Standard Toolbar.
Or
Select
View / Explorers / Access Levels from the Main Menu.
The Access Levels Browser will open.
2. Expand the tree, right-click on the SSP icon that contains the doors and select Add Access Level from the resulting menu.
The Access Levels Maintenance Dialog will open.
3. Enter a Description for the access level.
4. Select a Default Time Schedule to apply to the selected doors.
5. If desired, check All Selected Doors to apply the selected time schedule to all doors.
If checked, any Time Schedule selected for an individual door will be ignored.
6. Select an Access Level Category to assign to the access level.
These categories can be assigned to operators thus permitting or restricting them from granting any access levels listed in this category. See Chapter 4: Operators for more information.
7. In the Access Control Model explorer section, expand the Doors option and select the door(s).
To select all the doors, check the checkbox next to the main Doors header.
8. In the Time Schedule section, if desired, select a Time Schedule for each door from the drop down menu.
This setting applies a specific time schedule to the selected door.
9. Click OK to save the access level.
10. Right-click on the controller object in the Access Levels Browser and select Download.
Fusion User Manual Page 6-3
Access Levels
NOTES:
Page 6-4 Fusion User Manual
Access Levels
Creating a Basic Elevator Access Level
While an Elevator Access Level is similar to a Door Access Level, there a some significant differences such as a floor group must be created prior to the creation of the actual access level.
There are three steps to creating an Elevator Access Level:
1. Create the Floor Group
2. Create the Access Level
3. Associate the Floor Group to the Access Level
Creating a Floor Group
Floor groups are used to assign access to certain floors during specific hours. The floor group is then associated with an access level which is applied to a cardholder to grant them access to the building’s floors.
1. Click the Access Levels button on the Standard Toolbar.
Or
Select
View / Explorers / Access Levels from the Main Menu.
The Access Levels Browser will open.
2. Select the Floor Groups tab at the bottom of the browser.
3. Expand the Floor Groups by clicking the + sign and expanding the Site.
4. Right-click on the SSP with the Elevator(s) and select Add Floor Group.
The Access Levels Maintenance Dialog will open.
5. Enter a Description.
6. Select a Default Time Schedule to apply to the floors.
This will restrict access to the selected floors to only the defined days and times.
7. Check the All Selected Elevators to apply the Default Time Schedule to all selected floors.
Checking this box will override any individual time schedules selected in the Floor explorer section below.
8. In the Output/Floor section, select the Output(s)/Floor(s) that the floor group be assigned.
If configured, a Floor Name may be associated with each Output.
9. If desired, select an individual time schedule for the floor from the drop-down menu.
This setting applies a specific time schedule to the selected output.
10. Click OK to save the Floor Group.
Fusion User Manual Page 6-5
Access Levels
Creating the Elevator Access Level
Once the Floor Group has been configured, the Access Level will need to be created and then the Floor Group associated to the Access Level. An Elevator Access Level can include both door and elevator objects in the same Access Level.
1. With the Access Levels Browser open, select the Access Level tab at the bottom of the browser.
2. Expand the tree, right-click on the SSP icon that contains the elevator(s) and select Add Access Level from the resulting menu.
The Access Levels Maintenance Dialog will open.
3. Enter a Description for the access level.
4. If this Access Level will include doors, select a Default Time Schedule for the access level doors.
5. Select a Default Floor Group to associate with the Elevator(s).
This selection will determine the floors that the cardholder can access as well as the days and times they have access.
6. If desired, check All Selected Elevators to apply the selected floor group to all elevators.
If checked, any Floor Group selected for an individual elevator will be ignored.
7. Select an Access Level Category to assign to the access level.
These categories can be assigned to operators thus permitting or restricting them from granting any access levels listed in this category. See Chapter 4: Operators for more information.
8. In the Access Control Model explorer section, expand the Elevators option and select the elevator(s).
To select all the elevators, check the box next to the main Elevators header.
9. If this Access Level will includes doors, expand the Doors option and select the door(s).
To select all the doors, check the checkbox next to the main Doors header. Be sure a Default Time
Schedule was selected above.
10. In the Time Schedule section, if desired, select a Time Schedule/Floor Group for each ACM from the drop-down menu.
This setting applies a specific time schedule/floor group to the selected door or elevator.
11. Click OK to save the access level.
12. Right-click on the controller object in the Access Levels explorer and select Download.
Page 6-6 Fusion User Manual
Access Levels
Escort Required Access Level
The Escort Required Access Levels allows the system user to restrict a cardholder from gaining access without having another cardholder present that has an access level flagged as an escort.
This feature requires at least 2 access levels be created: the escort and the escort required. The cardholder with the Escort Requirement must have a cardholder that is assigned the Escort Access Level badge after them in order to gain access.
Once a Requires an Escort card is presented to a reader, the Escort has 15 seconds to present an Is An Escort card before an Access Denied: No Escort Present event is received.
1. Click the Access Levels button on the Standard Toolbar.
Or
Select
View / Explorers / Access Levels from the Main Menu.
The Access Levels Browser will open.
2. Expand the tree, right-click on the SSP icon that contains the entry point(s) and select Add Access
Level from the resulting menu.
The Access Levels Maintenance Dialog will open.
3. Enter a Description for the access level.
4. Select a Default Time Schedule to apply to the selected doors.
5. If desired, check All Selected Doors to apply the selected time schedule to all doors.
If checked, any Time Schedule selected for an individual door will be ignored.
6. If elevators will be included in this Access Level, select a Default Floor Group to associate with the
Elevator(s).
This selection will determine the floors that the cardholder can access as well as the days and times they have access.
7. If desired, check All Selected Elevators to apply the selected floor group to all elevators.
If checked, any Floor Group selected for an individual elevator will be ignored.
8. Select an Access Level Category to assign to the access level.
These categories can be assigned to operators thus permitting or restricting them from granting any access levels listed in this category. See Chapter 4: Operators for more information.
9. Select the Escort Requirement for the Access Level.
● Not an Escort (default) - No Escort Requirement.
● Is an Escort - Cardholder with access level will be able to move through the building freely based upon the selected entry points and time schedule associated with the access level.
● Requires an Escort - Cardholder with access level is required to have a cardholder with the Is an
Escort access level present when badging at a reader in order to gain access. The Escort Required cardholder must badge first followed by the Escort cardholder.
Fusion User Manual Page 6-7
Access Levels
10. In the Access Control Model explorer section, expand the Doors option and select the door(s).
To select all the doors, check the checkbox next to the main Doors header.
11. If needed, expand the Elevators option and select the elevator(s).
To select all the elevators, check the checkbox next to the main Elevators header.
12. In the Time Schedule section, if desired, select a Time Schedule for each door and elevator from the drop-down menu.
This setting applies a specific time schedule to the selected entry point.
13. Click OK to save the access level.
14. Right-click on the controller object in the Access Levels explorer and select Download.
Page 6-8 Fusion User Manual
Access Levels
Auto Expiring Access Level
Auto Expiring Access Levels will automatically activate and deactivate based upon the dates specified in the
Access Level. Auto Expiring Access Levels can be used in conjunction with an Escort Requirement setting.
1. Click the Access Levels button on the Standard Toolbar.
Or
Select
View / Explorers / Access Levels from the Main Menu.
The Access Levels Browser will open.
2. Expand the tree, right-click on the SSP icon that contains the entry point(s) and select Add Access
Level from the resulting menu.
The Access Levels Maintenance Dialog will open.
3. Enter a Description for the access level.
4. Select a Default Time Schedule to apply to the selected doors.
5. If desired, check All Selected Doors to apply the selected time schedule to all doors.
If checked, any Time Schedule selected for an individual door will be ignored.
6. If elevators will be included in this Access Level, select a Default Floor Group to associate with the
Elevator(s).
This selection will determine the floors that the cardholder can access as well as the days and times they have access.
7. If desired, check All Selected Elevators to apply the selected floor group to all elevators.
If checked, any Floor Group selected for an individual elevator will be ignored.
8. Select an Access Level Category to assign to the access level.
These categories can be assigned to operators thus permitting or restricting them from granting any access levels listed in this category. See Chapter 4: Operators for more information.
9. Check the Activation Date checkbox.
The Activation and Deactivation Date fields become active.
10. In the Activation Date field, enter a date or click the down arrow to select from a calendar.
11. If needed, edit the Activation Date Time field.
12. In the Deactivation Date field, enter a date or click the down arrow to select from a calendar.
13. If needed, edit the Deactivation Date Time field.
14. In the Access Control Model explorer section, expand the Doors option and select the door(s).
To select all the doors, check the checkbox next to the main Doors header.
15. If needed, expand the Elevators option and select the elevator(s).
To select all the elevators, check the checkbox next to the main Elevators header.
Fusion User Manual Page 6-9
Access Levels
16. In the Time Schedule section, if desired, select a Time Schedule for each door and elevator from the drop-down menu.
This setting applies a specific time schedule to the selected entry point.
17. Click OK to save the access level.
18. Right-click on the controller object in the Access Levels explorer and select Download.
Editing an Access Level
1. Right-click on the Access Level to be edited and select Properties.
2. Edit the Access Level.
3. Click OK to save the changes.
Editing a Floor Group
1. Right-click on the Floor Group to be edited and select Properties.
2. Edit the Floor Group.
3. Click OK to save the changes.
Deleting an Access Level
1. Right-click on the access level and select Remove Access Level.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
2. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
The Access Level is remove from the list.
Deleting a Floor Group
1. Right-click on the Floor Group and select Remove Floor Group.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
2. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
The Floor Group will be removed from the list.
Page 6-10 Fusion User Manual
Access Levels
Access Level Groups
Creating an Access Level Groups
An access level can be set up to allow one or more access levels to be granted to a group prior to adding cardholders to the group. As cardholders are then added to the group, they will automatically be granted the access levels defaulted to this group.
Access Level Groups are persistent and if they are changed, any cardholders associated with the Access
Level Group will be effected.
1. With the Access Levels Browser open, right-click on Access Level Groups and select Add Access Level
Group from the resulting menu.
The Group Properties dialog box will appear.
2. Enter a Group Name for the access level group.
3. Enter a Description.
4. Click the Modify Levels button.
The Assign Access Levels dialog will appear.
5. Select the Assigned column for the desired Access Level(s).
A will appear in the Assigned column.
If the group has access levels already assigned, a will appear in the Assigned column.
6. Click OK to close the Group Properties dialog.
!
After the Access Level Group has been created, Access Levels may be added by rightclicking on the Access Level, selecting Add to Group and selecting the group.
Adding an Access Level to a Group
In addition to the above process, access levels can also be added to an Access Level Group through the
Access Levels Browser.
1. Right-click on the desired Access Level and select Add to Group.
The Add Access Level Group dialog is displayed.
2. Select the Access Level Group from the drop-down and click Add.
The access level is added to the group.
Fusion User Manual Page 6-11
Access Levels
Editing an Access Level Group
1. Right-click on the desired Access Level Group and select Properties.
2. Edit the Access Level Group.
To add an access level: Click the Assigned column next to the desired Access Level. A will appear in the Assigned column.
To remove an access level: If the group has access levels already assigned, a will appear in the
Assigned column. Click the icon to remove the access level and a will be displayed.
3. Click OK to save the changes.
Removing an Access Level from a Group
In addition to the procedure above, access levels can be removed from an Access Level Group via a rightclick from the Access Levels Browser.
1. From the Access Level Browser, right-click on the desired Access Level under the Access Level Group and select Add to Group.
2. Select the Access Level Group from the drop-down and click Add.
The access level is removed to the group.
Deleting an Access Level Group
1. Right-click on the Access Level Group and select Remove Access Level Group from the resulting menu.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
2. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
The access level group will be removed from the list.
Page 6-12 Fusion User Manual
Access Levels
Precision Access Levels
Precision Access Levels allows the system user to assign the cardholder doors instead of an actual Access
Level as described on pages 6-3 and 6-4. There are couple of drawbacks when using Precision Access Levels: it requires memory be allocated on a per door/elevator basis and it is harder to track where cardholders have access.
Setting Up Precision Access Levels
Before Precision Access Levels can be assigned they must be setup in the Controller.
1. Open the Properties for the desired SSP by right-clicking on the object and selecting Properties.
The Controller Properties dialog opens.
2. Select the Stored Quantities option from the menu.
3. In the Quantities section, set the Precision Access Levels number equal to the ACM number of last door and/or elevator that will be allocated to cardholders.
Example: If there are 15 doors and 5 elevators in the system and only doors 1-10 will be assigned via
Precision Access Levels, the setting would be 10. If there are 10 doors and 10 elevators in the system and doors 1 and 5 and elevators 10 and 20 will be assigned via Precision Access Levels, the setting would be 20 since ACM number 20 is included in the scheme.
4. Click OK to save the changes.
The DNA Memory Requirement dialog will appear.
5. Click Yes to change the memory configuration.
The SSP will perform a Reset in order to apply the new configuration. A Reset causes the controller to lose communication and a full download takes place upon the reestablishment of the connection.
Assigning Precision Access Levels
1. Open the Hardware Browser and expand the Doors object.
2. Open the Cardholder’s Record and select the Card tab.
3. Drag and drop the desired ACM (door or elevator) to the Access Levels section of the Card tab.
The Select Time Schedule and/or Floor Groups dialog will appear.
4. If the ACM is a door, select a Time Schedule from the drop down list.
Or
If the ACM is an elevator, select a Floor Group from the drop down list.
5. Right-click in the gray area of the Cardholder’s Record and select Update from the menu.
The ACM is added to the Access Level section and appears with a Door icon to indicate that it is a
Precision Access Level.
Fusion User Manual Page 6-13
Access Levels
NOTES:
Page 6-14 Fusion User Manual
Access Levels
Access Level Features
Access Level Members
You can view the members of an access level without generating a report by completing to following steps.
1. Right-click on the Access Level in the Access Level Browser and select Assigned To.
Or
Open
an existing Access Level and select Access Level Members from the menu.
The Access Level Editor is displayed.
To remove a member, highlight the member and click Remove.
A confirmation dialog will appear, click Yes to delete the cardholder from the access level.
The results can printed or exported to a csv file by selecting the appropriate button.
2. Click OK to close the dialog.
Journal Entries
The journal allows you to record a text entry and view all journal entries for which you have permission to view.
Creating a New Entry
1. Right-click on the Access Level and select Journal / New Entry.
The DNA Journal opens in entry mode.
2. Configure the DNA Journal log.
● Journal Entry For - Indicates entry component category. Entries may be sorted based on this field.
● Journal Entry Type - Indicates entry category. Entries may be sorted based on this field.
● Restrictions - Indicates who has the ability to view the entry.
3. Place the cursor in the Journal Entry Text panel and type the desired message.
4. Click the Add button.
Fusion User Manual Page 6-15
Access Levels
Viewing an Entry
1. Right-click on the Access Level and select Journal / View.
The DNA Journal Selection dialog opens allowing the operator to filter the entries.
2. Configure the DNA Journal Selection dialog.
3. Click the OK button to view the results.
The DNA Journal will display in “view” mode. In “view” mode, the operator will only be allowed to view existing entries for which he has permission to view.
The Read Only fields indicate entry’s properties including its chronological sequence, author, station of origin, date and time, entry type, and entry link.
Navigate through the entries using the green arrow buttons at the bottom of the panel.
4. When finished, select the Cancel button to close the dialog.
Page 6-16 Fusion User Manual
Access Levels
Access Level Group Features
Assigned To
The cardholders that have been assigned an access level group can quickly be identified without generating a report by completing to following steps.
1. Right-click on the Access Level Group in the Access Level Browser and select Assigned To.
To remove a member, select the member and click the Remove Selected Members button.
A confirmation dialog will appear, click Yes to delete the cardholder from the access level.
The results can exported to a csv file or to the Clipboard by clicking the Export button and selecting desired format.
2. Click OK to close the dialog.
Modify Access Level Group Members
Access Levels have been assigned to an access level group can quickly be modified without opening the
Access Level Group.
1. Right-click on the Access Level Group in the Access Level Browser and select Modify Access Level Group
Members.
The Modify Access Level Group Members dialog opens.
To add an access level: Click the Assigned column next to the desired Access Level. A will appear in the Assigned column.
To remove an access level: If the group has access levels already assigned, a will appear in the
Assigned column. Click the icon to remove the access level and a will be displayed.
Fusion User Manual Page 6-17
Access Levels
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 6-18 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
7
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
√
Adding Personnel (Cardholders)
Creating Personnel Groups
Assigning Access Levels
Cardholders Features
Utilizing Photos & the Photo Recall Window
The Personnel Manager is where all cardholder information is managed. A Cardholder is defined as a person in the system that is issued a card or credential for purposes of gaining access to secured areas in the facility.
An access card is assigned to this individual and then access levels are added to each card.
This chapter discusses the steps required to add cardholders to the system as well as creating personnel groups along with assigning access levels.
Personnel Browser
The Personnel Browser is an explorer window that consists of all the cardholders names and card numbers as well as personnel groups. The tree also displays employee type and card type information by using colored indicators. For information on sorting the Browser, see page 7-31.
To open the Personnel Browser:
1. Select the Personnel Icon from the Standard Toolbar.
Or
Select
View / Explorers / Personnel from the Main Menu.
The Personnel Browser will open.
There are two default tabs at the bottom: Name View and Card #.
Custom search tabs can also be created, see page 3-17.
Employee/Card Type Indicators:
● Blue - Normal
● Green - Visitor
● Gold - Temp
● Red - Disabled
● Purple - Contractor
● Orange - Vendor
● White w/number 1 through 5 - Custom Types
Custom Personnel and Custom Card Types can be setup in the DNA Properties / Personnel Properties /
Custom Fields and Types dialog. See page 3-22 for more information.
Hovering over a cardholder or card will show you information about the object in the form of a tooltip.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-1
Cardholders
Configuring the Browser
1. Right-click in the white area of the Personnel Browser and select Tree Properties.
2. Configure the settings. See page 3-17 for more information on Personnel Tree Settings.
Personnel Toolbar
DNA Fusion provides many useful commands and shortcuts to help you control the Personnel.
These commands are available from the Personnel Toolbar.
Cardholder Properties Icon - Displays the record for the selected cardholder.
Update Cardholder Icon - Saves new information entered in the record to the database.
Add Cardholder Icon - Displays a new employee record in the data window.
Remove Cardholder Icon - Deletes the selected cardholder from the database.
Add Card Icon - Adds and displays a new card to the selected cardholder. A personnel record must be open in order for this option to be available.
Remove Card Icon - Removes a card from the database for the selected employee. A card must be selected in order for this option to be available.
Add Group Icon - Opens the Group Properties dialog box from the Employee Name header. See page
7-13 for more information on Personnel Groups.
Download Manager Icon - Displays the Download Manager dialog box for downloading the database information to the SSP.
Use Limit Icon - Displays the Use Limit dialog box allowing the operator to set the parameter for number of times the card may be used.
Free Pass Icon - Opens the Free Pass dialog box; resetting the anti-pass back area for the card.
Set Flags Icon - Opens the Set Flags dialog box; allowing the operator to set card flags.
Watch Window Icon - Adds the selected cardholder to an existing Watch Window. The Watch
Window must be open in order for this option to be available.
Find Record Icon - Displays the Find Record dialog box allowing the user to quickly search for a specific record.
Personnel Tabs Icon - Opens the Personnel Tab setup dialog; allowing the user to configure the custom Personnel tabs. The tab must be open in order for the option to be available.
Photo Properties Icon - Displays the Photo Record dialog box for the selected cardholder allowing the operator to edit the data.
Personnel Tree Properties Icon - Displays the Personnel Settings dialog box.
Refresh Icon - Updates the Personnel Explorer tree.
Page 7-2 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Adding a Cardholder
1. Open the Personnel Browser.
2. Right-click inside the Personnel Browser pane and select Add New Cardholder from the menu.
Or
Double-click All Cardholders in the Personnel Browser.
A blank employee record opens.
The Employee Record is consists of 3 main personnel tabs and 1 ID Badging tab, if the workstation is designated as a Badging station.
● Employee Info: Tab - General employee information.
● Employee Info: (Page 2) Tab - Personal employee information and custom fields.
● ID Badging Tab - Setup and printing of ID Badges.
● Card Tab - Card information, settings, and access levels.
* If any Custom Field option is selected in DNA Properties, an additional tab will be present.
3. Populate the fields in each tab. See the following pages for tab options.
4. To save the record, click the Save button on the Personnel toolbar or right-click in the Personnel Record and select Update.
!
It is very important to make sure that all personnel entries, whether new or simply changes to existing data, are saved (Updated) to the database before the information will be available for retrieval. If the information is not saved, it will be lost upon exiting the program.
Using a Drivers License Scanner to Add Cardholder
A SnapShell or ScanShell ID Scanner can be used to populate a cardholder’s record. The ID Scanner SDK must be installed on the machine prior to using the scanner. Contact Open Options Technical Support to obtain the latest SDK installation file.
1. Place the cardholder’s drivers license on the scanner.
2. From the Personnel Browser, right-click on the All Cardholders item and select Add Record from Scanner.
A Personnel Record will open with the information populate from the drivers license.
3. Populate the other Cardholder Record fields and Update the record.
!
The fields that will be captured during the scan are defined in the DNA Properties / Personnel
Properties dialog. See page 3-14 for more information.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-3
Cardholders
Saving & Downloading Records
It is very important to make sure that all personnel entries, whether new or simply changes to existing data, are saved (Updated) to the database as well as downloaded to the SSP before the information will be available for retrieval when the cardholder badges at a door. If the information is not saved, it will be lost upon exiting the program.
Saving a Record
There are two ways to save/update a record.
●
Click
the Update button on the Personnel Toolbar.
●
Right-click
in the Cardholder’s Record and select Update from the menu.
If a card has not been added to the Cardholder’s Record, a dialog will appear verifying that the record will be saved without a card. Click Yes to add a card or No to save the record without a card.
Downloading Records
It is imperative that records be downloaded to the SSP in order for them to be added to the controller.
Clicking the Update icon on the Personnel Toolbar will send the information to the database and the SSP if an access level has been added to the card.
It is recommended to perform an actual download when large amounts of information or changes have been entered.
1. With the Personnel Browser open, right-click inside the explorer and select Download.
Or
Click
the Download icon on the Personnel Toolbar.
The Download Manager dialog will display.
2. Select the Personnel button.
3. Select the Site(s).
4. Click OK.
A status bar will indicate the downloads progress. You can click the Cancel button at anytime to close the window without effecting the download.
Verifying the Last Download
The last download can be checked in order to verify that a cardholder’s record was downloaded to the panel.
1. Open the Hardware Browser.
2. Right-click on the SSP and select Status from the menu.
The SSP Status dialog will appear.
3. Select the Download Status option from the menu.
Locate the Cardholders category to determine the last download date and time.
Page 7-4 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Employee Info Tab
Employee
● Unique ID - Auto populated.
● Type - Select the type of cardholder.
Normal
Visitor
Temp
Disabled
Contractor
Vendor
Custom 1 through 5
● First - Enter cardholders first name.
● Middle - Enter cardholders middle name.
● Last - Enter cardholders last name.
● E-Mail - Enter cardholders e-mail address.
Custom Personnel/Personnel Types can be setup in the DNA Properties / Personnel Properties
/ Custom Fields and Types dialog. See page 3-22 for more information.
Employment
● Location - Select the Location from the pre-defined drop down list.
● Department - Select the cardholder’s department from the pre-defined drop down list.
● Site - Select the cardholder’s site from the pre-defined drop down list.
● Title - Select the cardholder’s title from the pre-defined drop down list.
Right-click
in the Location, Department, Site or Title fields and select the Add Text
option. This feature will allow the system user to configure the drop-down options for the selected field.
● Work Phone - Enter cardholder’s work phone number
● Hire Date - Enter cardholder’s hire date
● Company - Select the Company from the drop-down list.
● Edit - Opens the Company Editor dialog. See page 7-6 for more information.
● Address - If company selected from the Company drop-down list, address information will auto populate.
● City - If company selected from the Company drop-down list, city information will auto populate.
● State - If company selected from the Company drop-down list, state information will auto populate.
● Country - If company selected from the Company drop-down list, country information will auto populate.
● Zip - If company selected from the Company drop-down list, zip code information will auto populate.
Employee Photos
Displays the employees photo along with the selected photo information. See page 7-37 for information on utilizing photos.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-5
Cardholders
Company Editor
The Company Editor dialog allows for the addition of company information.
To add a company:
1. From a Personnel Record, click the Edit button.
The Company Editor dialog appears.
2. Click the New button to add a company.
A prompt will appear.
3. Click Yes to clear the fields or No to keep the information.
4. Enter the information in the fields.
● Company - Enter the company’s name.
● Address - Enter the company’s address.
● City - Enter the company’s city.
● State - Enter the company’s state.
● Country - Enter the company’s country.
● Zip - Enter the company’s zip code.
5. Click OK to save the information.
The company is now available in the drop down list.
To delete a company:
1. From a Personnel Record, select the Company from the drop down list and click the Edit button.
The Company Editor dialog appears.
2. Click the Remove button.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
3. Click Yes to delete the company.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.
To edit a company:
1. From a Personnel Record, select the Company from the drop down list and click the Edit button.
The Company Editor dialog appears.
2. Edit the company information.
3. Click OK to save the information.
Page 7-6 Fusion User Manual
Employee Info: (Page 2) Tab
Cardholders
Personnel Information
● Personnel Fields - Enter cardholder’s personal information.
● Custom String 1 through 16 - Enter alphanumerical information in the fields. Custom fields are defined in the Host Setting / Personnel Properties / Custom Fields and Types. See page 3-22 for more information.
Right-click in the Custom 1-16 fields and select the Add Text option. This feature will
allow the system user to configure the drop-down options for the selected field.
● Custom Value 1 through 3 - Enter numerical information in the fields. Custom fields are defined in the
Host Setting / Personnel Properties / Custom Fields and Types. See page 3-22 for more information.
Other Personal Information
● Information Field - Enter various personal information.
ID Badging
See Chapter 22 for ID Badging information.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-7
Cardholders
NOTES:
Page 7-8 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Card Tab
● Mode - Identifies the Card Format mode for the cardholder. This information is pre-populated based on the DNA Properties setting; see page 3-13 for more information. The Auto default option should be selected unless the system is using multiple facility codes or the Corporate Mode. If using multiple facility codes or Corporate Mode, select the appropriate item from the drop-down. A resulting field will display immediately to the right; enter the facility code. Required
Auto - Uses the DNA Properties setting. The Auto setting is the default mode; the Auto Mode utilizes the controller stored card formats.
Corporate Mode - If selected, the operator will need to enter the card’s Facility Code as well as the Card Number. DNA will use the Multiplier specified in DNA Properties to calculate the Credential number. Example: Multiplier * F/C + Card# =
Credential - 1,000,000,000 x 6 = 6,000,000,000 + 449,166,208 = 6,449,166,208
Multi - x bit card - If selected, the operator will need to enter the card’s Facility Code and Card Number. The Credential number will automatically be populated based on the entered information.
● Credential - The actual credential number that the system will read from the card; hard-coded on the card. Employee records may be maintained in the system without being assigned a card.
● Hot Stamp - The number printed on the outside of the physical card.
● Issue Code - The number used with magstripe cards that indicates the number of times a card has been issued to the cardholder (i.e. as a replacement for a lost card). It is an internal number that is programmed on the card. If used, requires a Controller Flag to be enabled in the SSP Controller Properties
/ Stored Quantities dialog. See pages 8-41 and 8-71 for more information on Issue Codes. Issue Codes can be automatically incremented; see page 3-13 for details.
● PIN - The PIN number for the cardholder.
● Card Type - Normal, Visitor, Temp, Disabled, Contractor, Vendor, Custom 1 through 5. If Disabled is selected, a
Why? drop-down appears and the card is automatically deactivated.
Custom Personnel/Card Types can be setup in the DNA Properties / Personnel Properties /
Custom Fields and Types dialog. See page 3-22 for more information.
● APB Location - Number representing the cardholder’s APB area. If used, requires a Controller Flag to be enabled in the SSP Controller Properties / Stored Quantities dialog.
● Activation - The date that the card is or has become active. Requires a Controller Flag to be enabled in the SSP Controller Properties / Stored Quantities dialog (enabled by default).
● Deactivation - The date that the card is or will be deactivated. Automatically sets card deactivation to
1 year from issue date. Requires a Controller Flag to be enabled in the SSP Controller Properties / Stored
Quantities dialog (enabled by default).
● Vacation Start/For - The date fields used to deactivate a card temporarily for a specified amount of time while the cardholder is on vacation. Requires a Controller Flag to be enabled in the SSP Controller
Properties / Stored Quantities dialog for all SSPs.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-9
Cardholders
Advanced Access Control
● Use Limit - Maximum number of times a card may be used. The default is Unlimited. Requires a Controller
Flag to be enabled in the SSP Controller Properties / Stored Quantities dialog.
● Activate Card - Check to activate the card; uncheck to deactivate the card. Must be checked for card to be active. Cards are active by default. To change this setting, check the Deactivate Card option in DNA
Properties. See page 3-14 for more information.
● PIN Exempt Card - Toggle that overrides the requirement for a PIN. Leave unchecked if not using PINs.
● VIP (APB Exempt) - Toggle that allows card to be APB exempt, e.g. CEOs, presidents, owners.
● Don’t Change Use Count - Toggle that overrides the Use Limit setting. Leave unchecked if Use Limit is set to Unlimited.
● Don’t Change APB Location - Toggle that overrides the APB Location. Leave unchecked if not using APB.
● Always Download - Enabling this checkbox will force this specific card to be downloaded to the SSP prior to the first time the card is presented on any SSP, regardless of the Download Personnel on Demand
Setting in the Driver Configuration dialog.
● Auto Activate Card - Used in conjunction with a door set as an Auto Activate Door. If checked and the card is presented at the door, the card will automatically activate. See page 8-47 for more information.
● Auto Deactivate Card - Used in conjunction with a door set as an Auto Deactivate Door. If checked and the card is presented at the door, the card will automatically disable. See page 8-47 for more information.
● Time/Attendance Card - Used in conjunction with doors set as Time & Attendance In and Out Doors. If checked and the card is presented at the doors, the information is sent to a separate database table with the date, time, card number and whether the transaction was In or Out. See page 8-47 for ore information.
● ADA Mode - Toggle that prompts card to use ADA settings at door, granting extra time at door for disabled or impaired persons.
● 1 Free APB Pass - Toggle that allows one APB infraction before denying access. Leave unchecked if using
VIP (APB exempt).
● Host Macros - Select a Host Based Macro from the list.
● Host Macros Edit - Opens the Host Based Macro dialog, allowing for cause and effect relationships between points. See page 10-13 for more information on Host Based.
● Trigger Codes 1 through 7 - A configurable number-designation tag that, if present here and configured in the trigger, will prompt a desired macro when the card containing that trigger code is presented. The trigger code is used as a modifier to the card to allow triggers to be constructed to allow for specific outcomes. Requires a Controller Flag to be enabled in the SSP Controller Properties / Stored Quantities dialog. See page 10-9 for more information on Trigger Codes.
Other Options
● Trace History - Generates an InfoReady report that shows the most recent instances in which the card was used. See page 7-33 for more information on the Trace History report.
● Situation Manager - Opens the Situation Level Manager Settings dialog. See page 9-9 for more information on Situation Manager.
● Has Access To - Displays an InfoReady which shows the doors the cardholder has been assigned. See page 7-33 for more information on the Has Access To report.
● Last Used - Displays the card’s most recent information: including Date/Time, Event Message and Location.
● Date Stamps - Shows the card’s audit information. Including the Created Date, Updated Date and Card
Printed Date.
Access Levels
The Access Levels section displays all Access Levels, Access Level Groups and Precision Access assigned to the selected card.
From the Access Level section, right-click and select the Expand All option. This feature
will open all the controllers and reveal the Access Levels assigned to the card.
Page 7-10 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Managing Cardholders
A number of options are available for managing cardholders. These include assigning a cardholder multiple cards as well as adding a block of cards to the system.
Opening a Cardholder’s Record
There are multiple ways to open an established cardholder’s record:
● Double click the Cardholder’s Name or Card Number in the Personnel Browser.
● Right-click on the Cardholder’s Name or Card Number in the Personnel Browser and select Properties.
● Select the Cardholder’s Name or Card Number in the Personnel Browser and select Properties from the Main Menu.
● Double click on the cardholder’s event in the Event Grid.
Editing Multiple Cardholders / Cards
Multiple cardholders or cards may be edited at one time; this includes personnel/card type as well as changing the deactivation date.
1. Select the cardholder (from the Name View tab) or cards (from the Card # View tab) using the Control or Shift keys.
2. Right-click on the last object selected and select the Properties option.
3. Select the Edit checkbox next to the desired field.
The field will become active.
4. Make any changes.
5. Right-click inside the record and select the Update option.
6. Close the record.
Removing a Cardholder
When a cardholder is deleted, their record is moved so that the cardholders information is still retrievable but the cardholder is no longer visible in the Personnel Browser.
To delete a cardholder:
1. Select the desired cardholder.
2. Right-click on the cardholder and select Remove Cardholder.
3. Click Yes to remove the cardholder or No to cancel the remove.
Adding Cards
To add a card to a cardholder’s record:
1. Open the Cardholder’s Record.
2. Right-click in the record and select Add Card from the menu.
The Card Number dialog box opens.
3. Enter the card number and click Set.
The new card will appear as an additional tab in the cardholder’s record.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-11
Cardholders
Deactivating a Card
There are a number of methods can be used to deactivated a card including the following:
● Right-click on the card and select Direct Control / Deactivate Card. See page 7-35 for more information.
● Set the Card Type to Disabled in the Cardholder’s Record on the Card Tab. See page 7-9.
● Manually uncheck the Activate checkbox in the Cardholder’s Record on the Card Tab. See page 7-9.
● Automatically deactivate the card when a new card is added. See page 7-21 for information.
● Automatically deactivate the card when a new card is printed. See page 3-21.
● Setting a card on Vacation. More information can be found on page 7-9 and 7-12.
● From the Non-Use Report. See page 7-36 for more information.
● From the Event Grid. For further information, see page 14-7.
Activating a Card
Cards can be activate/reactivated in a number of different manners.
● Right-click on the card and select Direct Control / Activate Card. See page 7-35 for more information.
● Manually check the Activate checkbox in the Cardholder’s Record on the Card Tab. See page 7-9.
● From the Event Grid. For further information, see page 14-7.
Deleting a Card
When a card is removed from a record, the events are still retrievable but the card is no longer visible in the
Personnel Browser.
To delete a card:
1. Open the Cardholder’s Record and select the desired card tab.
2. Right-click in the record and select Remove Card from the menu.
3. Click Yes to remove the card or No to cancel the deletion.
Setting a Card in Vacation Mode
Cards can be configured to observe a set of “vacation” dates for which the card will be deactivated. This feature must be configured in the Controllers Properties / Stored Quantities. See page 8-39 for more information.
1. From the Card tab in the Cardholder’s record, check the Vacation Start box.
2. Click the Calendar drop down and select the desired dates.
3. Enter the number of “vacation” days and update the Cardholder’s record.
Adding a Card Block
A block of cards can be added to the system and then assigned to cardholders as needed.
1. Create a new cardholder without a card.
Enter
the cardholder information on the Employee Info Page 1 and 2 only. See page 7-3 for information on adding a cardholder.
2. Right-click in the record and select Update.
A dialog will appear confirming the save without the addition of a card.
3. Click No.
4. Right-click in the record and select Add Card Block.
The Card Range Editor will appear.
5. Enter the number of the First Card in Range and select the Card Quantity from the drop down list.
6. Click OK to add the card block to the record.
7. Update the record.
Page 7-12 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Assigning and Removing Access Levels
In order for a cardholder to gain access to an entry point, they must be assigned a card(s) which contains the access level for that cardholder. The access level defines what entry points the cardholder has access to and what times he/she may have that access. Other types of access credentials, such as fobs, are referred to as “cards” throughout the system. For more information on Access Levels see Chapter 6.
There are a number of ways to add an access level(s) to a card.
● Add to a individual card
● Drag and drop an access level to an individual
● Copy Active Card Access
● Copy another cardholders access level(s)
● Temporary Access Level Upgrade
● Add Precision Access to a Cardholder
Access Levels can also be assigned to a cardholder utilizing Personnel Groups. See page
7-23 for more information on Personnel Groups.
Individual Card
Access levels can be given to an individual cardholder from the cards context menu or within the cardholders record. An access level can also be dragged and dropped to a cardholder or individual card.
From the Context Menu
1. From the Personnel Browser, locate the desired cardholder’s card.
2. Right-click on the card and select Modify Access From Card from the menu.
The Assign Access Level dialog will open.
● A green check in the Assigned field indicates that the access level is already assigned to the cardholder.
● A red minus in the Assigned field identifies that the access level has been marked for removal from the card.
● A blue plus sign in the Assigned field indicates that the access level will be added to the card.
3. Locate the Access Level in the list.
If needed, enter criteria in the Search Access Levels box or limit the displayed access levels by specifying
Assigned, Unassigned or by selecting a individual controller.
4. Click the Assigned Field next to the desired Access Level(s).
A blue plus sign will appear next to the Access Level(s).
5. Click the OK button.
The Access Level(s) are added to the card.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-13
Cardholders
Cardholder Record
1. From the Cardholders Record, select the Card tab.
2. Right-click inside the Access Levels Browser and select Add/Remove/Modify Access
Levels for the menu.
The Assign Access Level dialog will open.
● A green check in the Assigned field indicates that the access level is already assigned to the cardholder.
● A red minus in the Assigned field identifies that the access level has been marked for removal from the card.
● A blue plus sign in the Assigned field indicates that the access level will be added to the card.
3. Locate the Access Level in the list.
If needed, enter criteria in the Search Access Levels box or limit the displayed access levels by specifying
Assigned, Unassigned or by selecting a individual controller.
4. Click the Assigned Field next to the desired Access Level(s).
A blue plus sign will appear next to the Access Level(s).
5. Click the OK button.
The Access Level(s) are added to the card.
6. Download the changes to the SSP.
See page 7-4 for more information on downloading.
Drag & Drop an Access Level to an Individual
1. Open both the Personnel and Access Level Browsers and expand the objects.
2. Drag and drop the Access Level to the Cardholder.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
3. Select OK to confirm the addition.
Page 7-14 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Copy Card Access
DNA Fusion provides many ways to distribute access levels including copying another cardholder’s access or duplicating the cardholder’s access to another card.
Copy Another Cardholder’s Access
The operator can copy one cardholder’s access level(s) to another cardholder. This will give the cardholder the exact same access as the selected cardholder.
This can be accomplished one of three ways:
● With a cardholder record open, drag the card with the desired access into the Personnel Access
Levels window of the card.
1. Open the Cardholder’s Record that needs the new access and select the Card tab.
2. In the Personnel Browser, expand the cardholders record with the desired access to reveal the card.
3. Drag the card with the desired access to the Access
Levels section of the card that needs the access.
The Access Levels are added to the card.
4. Right-click in the record and select Update.
● From the cardholder record, right-click in Personnel Access Level window and choose the card with the desired access.
1. Open the Cardholder’s Record that needs the new access.
2. Select the Card Tab for the card that needs the access.
3. Right-click in the Personnel Access Level section of the card, select Copy Access Levels From
Card and select the card with the desired access levels.
If the card number is grayed out, verify that the record has been Updated.
The access levels are added to the card.
4. Right-click in the record and select Update.
● In the Personnel Browser, drag the card with the desired access to the other card.
1. From the Personnel Browser, expand the cardholders record that has the desired access to reveal the card.
2. From the Personnel Browser, expand the cardholders record that needs the access to reveal the card.
3. Drag the card with the desired access to the card that needs the access.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
4. Click Yes to copy the access levels to the card or click No to cancel the copy procedure.
The access levels are added to the card.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-15
Cardholders
Copy Active Card Access Information
This option automatically copies the access level information to a newly added card from the active card already assigned to a cardholder.
This feature requires that a flag in the DNA Properties / Personnel Properties be set. From
the DNA Properties dialog, select the Personnel Properties option and check the Copy
Active Card Information to New Card option.
1. Open the desired Cardholder’s Record.
2. Right-click in the Record and select Add Card from the menu.
The Card Number dialog box opens.
3. Enter the card number and click Set.
The new card will appear as an additional tab in the cardholder’s record.
4. Right-click in the Personnel Record and select Update.
Or
Click
the Save button on the Personnel Toolbar.
Page 7-16 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Temporary Access Level Upgrade
The Temporary Access Level Upgrade features allows an access level to be assigned to a cardholder for a specified amount of time. If used, requires a Controller Flag to be enabled in all SSP Controller Properties /
Stored Quantities dialog for all SSPs. See page 8-39 for more information on Controller Properties.
1. From the cardholders record select the Card Tab, right-click inside the Access Levels Browser and
select
Add/Remove/Modify Access Levels for the menu.
The Assign Access Level dialog will open. For more information on Access Levels, see page 7-13.
2. Locate the Access Level in the list and click the Assigned Field next to the desired Access Level(s).
If needed, enter criteria in the Search Access Levels box or limit the displayed access levels by specifying
Assigned, Unassigned or by selecting a individual controller.
A blue plus sign will appear next to the Access Level(s).
A maximum of one Temporary Access Level may be assigned per SSP.
3. Double-click the Start Date field for the selected Access Level.
The Edit Temporary Access Level Settings dialog opens.
4. Enter a Start and End Date or click the down arrows next to the Start and End
Dates to open the calendar and select the desired dates.
A maximum of 255 days may be specified for the upgrade.
5. Click the OK button to save the Temporary Dates.
The dates will populate in the Assign Access Level dialog.
6. Click the OK button.
The Temporary Access Level(s) are added to the card.
7. Download the changes to the SSP.
See page 7-4 for more information on downloading.
The Temporary Access Level is added and appears green while regular access levels appear blue.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-17
Cardholders
Editing a Temporary Access Level
Once a Temporary Access Level has been added to a card, the duration may be changed.
1. From the Cardholder’s Record select the Card Tab, right-click in the Access Levels section and select
Add/Remove/Modify Access Levels.
The Assign Access Levels dialog will open.
2. Locate the Temporary Access Level and double click on the Edit Temporary Information for the menu.
The Edit Temporary Access Parameters dialog opens.
3. Edit the Upgrade Start or End Date(s) and click OK.
Page 7-18 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Precision Access Levels
Precision Access Levels allows you the flexibility to assign specific doors directly to a cardholder without creating access levels.
Before Precision Access can be utilized, the feature must be enabled in the SSP Controller
Properties / Stored Quantities dialog by setting the Precision Access Levels Quantity
(see page 8-41). For example, if ACM 63 needed to be available for Precision Access
assignment, you would select 63 from the drop down. All doors between 1 and 63
would allow Precision Access to be assigned.
1. With the Hardware Browser open, double-click on the Cardholder’s record.
2. Click on the Card tab in the record.
3. Drag and drop the selected Door from the Hardware Browser to the Access Levels window of the
Cardholder’s record.
The Select Time Schedules and/or Floor Groups dialog opens.
4. Select the Time Schedule and/or Floor Group from the drop-down list and click OK.
5. Right-click in the Cardholder’s record and select Update.
The Door appears in the Access Levels window.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-19
Cardholders
NOTES:
Page 7-20 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Removing a Cardholders Access
A cardholder’s access can be removed in a variety of manners including removing all access information.
Individual Card
Access levels can be given to an individual cardholder from within the cardholders record.
1. Open the Cardholder’s Record and select the Card Tab.
2. Right-click inside the Access Levels Browser and select Add/Remove/Modify Access Levels for the menu.
The Assign Access Level dialog will open.
3. Locate the desired Access Level in the list.
If needed, enter criteria in the Search Access Levels box or limit the displayed access levels by specifying Assigned,
Unassigned or by selecting a individual controller.
● A green check in the Assigned field indicates that the access level is already assigned to the cardholder.
● A red minus in the Assigned field identifies that the access level has been marked for removal from the card.
4. Click the Assigned Field next to the Access Level(s) to be removed.
The green checkbox will turn to a red minus ; this indicates that the access level will be removed.
5. Click the OK button.
The Access Level(s) are removed to the card.
6. Download the changes to the SSP.
Remove All Access Levels
A cardholders access levels may be removed in mass in a few quick steps.
1. From the Personnel Browser, locate the desired cardholder’s card.
2. Right-click on the card and select Remove All Access From Card from the menu.
3. Click the Yes button to remove all the cardholders assigned access levels.
All of the access levels are removed from the card.
Cardholder access may also be removed quickly from within the Personnel Record.
1. Open the Cardholder’s Record and select the Card Tab.
2. Right-click inside the Access Levels Browser and select Remove All Access Levels for the menu.
The Remove All Confirmation dialog will open.
3. Click the Yes button to remove all the cardholders assigned access levels.
All of the access levels are removed from the card.
Deactivate and Remove Access Level Information when a New Card is Added
This option automatically deactivates and removes the access level information from an existing card when a new card is added to the cardholder.
To enable this feature, select the Personnel Properties option from the DNA Properties dialog and check the
Deactive Existing Cards on New Card option. For more information on see page 3-21.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-21
Cardholders
From the Access Level Members Dialog
Cardholder access maybe removed when viewing the members of an access level. See page 6-15 for more information.
1. From the Access Level Browser, right-click on the desired Access Level or Access Level Group and select
Access Level Members.
If an Access Level is selected, the Access Level Editor is displayed. To remove a member, highlight the member and click Remove.
A confirmation dialog will appear, click Yes to delete the cardholder from the access level.
If an Access Level Group is selected, the Access Level Group Editor is displayed. To remove a member from the group, highlight the member and click Remove Selected Members.
A confirmation dialog will appear, click Yes to remove the cardholder(s) from the access level group.
2. Click OK to close the dialog.
Page 7-22 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Personnel Groups
Personnel groups allow you to organize cardholders into logical groups and assign default access level(s) to the group. As cardholders are added to the group, they are automatically granted access to the group’s default access level(s).
Creating a Personnel Group
1. Open the Personnel Browser.
2. Right-click on the All Cardholders header in the Personnel Browser.
3. Select Add New Group from the menu.
The Group Properties dialog opens.
4. Enter a Group Name for the group.
5. If desired, enter a Description.
6. Click the Modify button.
The Assign Access Levels dialog will appear.
To add an access level: Click the Assigned column next to the desired Access Level. A will appear in the Assigned column.
To remove an access level: If the group has access levels already assigned, a will appear in the Assigned column.
Click the icon to remove the access level and a will be displayed.
7. Click the Add or OK button to add the access level(s) to the Personnel Group.
The access level(s) will appear in the Default Access Level pane. Continue until all the desired access levels have been added to Personnel Group.
8. Click OK.
The personnel group is added to the Personnel Browser.
!
If an Access Level is added to the Personnel Group after cardholders are already in the Group, the existing cardholders will not automatically get the new Access Level(s). A prompt will appear inquiring about assigning the new access to the existing group members. Clicking
Yes will assign the new level(s) to the existing group cardholders.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-23
Cardholders
Editing the Personnel Records of a Personnel Group
Multiple cardholders or cards may be edited at one time; this includes personnel/card type as well as changing the deactivation date.
1. Select the desired tab from the Personnel Browser (Name View: Edit Cardholder information or Card #:
Edit Card information).
2. Right-click on the Personnel Group and select the Edit Group Members option.
3. Select the Edit checkbox next to the desired field.
The field will become active.
4. Make any changes.
5. Right-click inside the record and select the Update option.
6. Close the record.
Deleting a Personnel Group
1. With the Personnel Browser open, right-click on the group and select Personnel Group / Remove Group from the menu.
A confirmation box will appear.
2. Select Yes to delete the group.
The group will be removed from the list.
Page 7-24 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Adding & Removing Cardholders to a Personnel Group
Cardholders can be added to Personnel Groups in a number of different manners.
● Drag and drop to a personnel group
● Add User to Group
● Auto Prompt: Assign card to a personnel group
Drag and Drop
1. Open the Personnel Browser and expand the objects.
2. Drag and drop the cardholder(s) to the selected Personnel Group.
Multiple cardholders maybe selected by holding down the Control or Shift keys. A dialog box will appear if an access level has been associated with the personnel group.
3. Click Yes to add the Access Level or No to add the cardholder to the group without adding Access Levels.
Add User(s) to Group
Cardholders may also be added to a group by using the Add User(s) to Group function.
1. Right-click on the Cardholder(s) and select Add User(s) to Group from the menu.
Select
multiple cardholders using the Control or Shift keys.
The Select Group dialog will appear.
2. Select the Personnel Group from the drop down list and click OK.
3. Click Yes to add the Access Level or No to add the cardholder to the group without adding Access Levels.
Adding a New Cardholder
If a cardholders record is updated or closed without adding an access level and a personnel group has been setup, DNA will prompt to add the card to a personnel group.
1. Add a new cardholder and Update the record.
The Personnel Groups dialog opens.
2. Click Yes to add the card to a personnel group.
The Select Group dialog box opens.
3. Select the Personnel Group from the drop-down menu.
4. Click the OK button.
5. Click Yes to add the groups default access level(s) to the cardholder.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-25
Cardholders
Adding a New Card to a Cardholder Assigned to a Personnel Group
If a new card is added to a cardholder that already belongs to a Personnel Group, a prompt will be displayed when the new card is Updated.
1. Add the new card to the cardholder’s record and Update the record.
The dnaFusion Custom Personnel Groups dialog opens.
2. Click Yes to add the Access Levels associated with the Personnel Group to the new card.
OR
Click
No to add the card without the Personnel Groups associated Access Levels.
Using the Find Cardholders Feature
The user may also search all cardholders to locate a specific cardholder to add to a group by using the Find
Cardholders function.
1. Right-click on the Personnel Group and select Add Cardholders to Group from the menu.
The Find Cardholders Dialog will display.
2. Enter the search criteria and click the Find button.
The % sign acts as a wild card.
3. Select the cardholder and click Add.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
4. Click Yes to add the Access Level or No to add the cardholder to the group without adding Access Levels.
Removing Cardholders from a Personnel Group
1. Right-click on the cardholder in the Personnel Group and select Remove Cardholder from Group from the menu.
A confirmation box will appear.
2. Select Yes to remove the cardholder from the group.
The cardholder is removed from the group however any access levels are not removed from the card.
Page 7-26 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Managing Personnel Groups and Access Levels
There are a number of ways to manage access levels associated to personnel groups.
● Assigning a default Access Level or Access Level Group to a Personnel Group
● Add a Access Level or Access Level Group to cardholders already in a Personnel Group
● Remove a Default Access Level from a Personnel Group
● Remove an Access Level from the cardholders in a Personnel Group
Assigning a Default Access Level
When a default access level is assigned to a Personnel Group and a cardholder is added to the group, the cardholder is automatically granted access to the default access level assigned to the group.
1. From the Personnel Browser double-click on the desired Personnel Group.
Or
Right-click
on the Personnel Group and select Properties.
The Group Properties dialog will appear.
2. Click the Modify Levels button.
The Assign Access Levels dialog will appear.
To add an access level: Click the Assigned column next to the desired Access Level. A will appear in the Assigned column.
To remove an access level: If the group has access levels already assigned, a will appear in the Assigned column.
Click the icon to remove the access level and a will be displayed.
3. Click the OK button to add the access level(s) to the Personnel Group.
The access level(s) or access level group(s) will appear in the Default Access Level pane.
4. Click OK.
If an Access Level is added after cardholders are already in the Personnel Group, a dialog will appear to confirm the addition of the new access levels or groups to the existing cardholders.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-27
Cardholders
Adding Access Levels to Cardholders in a Personnel Group
There are two methods for quickly assigning a new Access Level(s) to the existing cardholders in a Personnel
Group.
● Drag and drop an Access Level to the Personnel Group
● Use the Add Access Levels to Group Members option
Using any of these methods does not add the access level to the Personnel Group permanently. For more information on configuring the Personnel Group with a default access level or access level groups, see page
7-27.
Drag and Drop
1. Open both the Personnel and Access Level Browsers and expand the objects.
2. Select an Access Level and drag and drop it to the selected Personnel Group.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
3. Click Yes to confirm the access level.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
4. Click OK to confirm the addition.
The Access Level is added to all the cards currently assigned to the group.
Add Access Level or Access Level Group to Personnel Group Members
1. From the Personnel Browser, right-click on the desired Personnel Group.
2. Select Access Levels / Add Access Levels to Group Members.
The Assign Access Levels dialog opens.
If needed, enter criteria in the Search Access Levels box or
select
an individual controller.
3. Click the Assigned Field next to the desired Access Level(s).
A blue plus sign will appear next to the Access Level(s).
4. If desired, double-click the Assigned field to access the Temporary Access Level Settings dialog and
enter
Start / End Dates.
The access level will only be available to the cardholder during the specified timeframe.
5. Click the Yes button to add the level(s).
The Access Level(s) are added to the cardholders currently in the Personnel Group.
Page 7-28 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Removing Access Levels from a Personnel Group
There are three methods that can be used to quickly remove Access Level(s) from the members of a
Personnel Group.
● Remove a default Access Level from a Personnel Group
● Use the Remove All Access from Group Members option
Removing a Default Access Level from a Personnel Group
1. From the Personnel Browser right-click on the Personnel Group and select Properties.
The Group Properties dialog will appear.
2. Click the Modify Levels button.
The Assign Access Levels dialog will appear.
To remove an access level: If the group has access levels already assigned, a will appear in the Assigned column.
Click the icon to remove the access level and a will be displayed.
3. Click the OK button to remove the access level(s) to the Personnel Group.
The access level(s) or access level group(s) will appear in the Default Access Level pane.
4. Click OK.
If an Access Level is removed after cardholders are already in the Personnel Group, a dialog will appear to confirm the removal of the access levels or groups to the existing cardholders.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-29
Cardholders
Remove All Access Levels from the Personnel Group Members
1. From the Personnel Browser, right-click on the desired Personnel Group.
2. Select Access Levels / Remove All Access Levels from Group Members.
The Remove Access Level dialog appears.
3. Click the Yes button.
All access levels assigned to group members are removed.
Page 7-30 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Viewing Cardholders
There are a number of ways to locate cardholders within DNA. Each method offers a different way to view or access the cardholder’s information.
Sorting the Personnel Browser
By default, the Personnel Browser is grouped by Personnel Groups. DNA provides the flexibility to group the
Personnel Browser by any repeatable field in a Personnel Record.
1. Right-click on All Cardholders or All Cards in the Personnel Browser and
select
Group By.
2. Select the field to Group By from the list.
The Personnel Browser is grouped by the selected field.
NOTE: Card Fields will only be available if the Card # View tab is selected.
Custom Repeatable Queries (CRQs)
The Custom Repeatable Queries feature is used to perform a quick search for cardholder record(s) based upon the Name, Card Number or one of ten user-defined custom queries.
Running a Query
1. Right-click on All Cardholders or All Cards in the Personnel Browser and select Repeating Queries.
2. Select the Name or Card Number option to query the desired field.
The DNA Custom Personnel Repeatable Query dialog opens.
The % sign acts as a wild card.
If desired, select one of delimiter field(s).
● Begins With - The returned record(s) will begin with the entered text.
● Contains - The returned record(s) will contain the entered text.
● Exact - The returned record(s) will contain the exact entered text.
3. Enter the information in the field(s) and click the Find button.
The Personnel Query Results dialog will open.
4. Double click the result to open cardholder’s record.
The selected record will open in the data window.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-31
Cardholders
Creating Custom Queries
Queries based on any Cardholder Record field can be created and saved for future use. These fields may include Custom Fields as well as Card Fields.
1. Right-click on All Cardholders or All Cards in the Personnel Browser and select Repeating Queries.
2. Select the Custom / New option to create a query.
The DNA Custom Personnel Repeatable Query Definition dialog opens.
3. Enter the following information and click OK:
● CRQ Name(s) - Appears in the CRQ drop down menu.
● CRQ Field(s) - Select the field to search when a query is performed.
● Displayed - Text that will appear in the dialog when the query is selected.
● If desired, click the Uses “OR” type query checkbox to apply a conditional statement to the query.
4. Run the query as described on page 7-31.
Using the Find Cardholders Feature
The Find Cardholders feature allows the user to create a group based on certain criteria.
1. Right-click in the Personnel Browser and select Find Cardholder in the context menu.
The Personnel SQL Builder dialog opens.
2. Select the desired Field from the drop down list.
3. Enter the desired criteria in the Value and OR fields.
4. If desired, click the Add button to define more fields.
5. If desired, define a selection of cardholders using the filters dialog.
6. Click OK to apply the filter.
A filtered personnel group will appear at the bottom of the Personnel browser with the results.
Once filtered, the user can use the shift or control keys to select multiple cardholder objects and then drag and drop the multiple cardholders simultaneously to any object.
Deleting the Find Cardholders Group
1. With the Personnel Browser open, right-click on the Find Cardholders group and select Remove Personnel
Group from the menu.
The group will be removed from the list.
Page 7-32 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Cardholder Features
Different features are available based on the selected object in the Personnel Browser.
Individual Cardholder Features
Individual cardholder features include the ability to view the access information as well as run a trace history for a selected cardholder.
Card Flags
Cards can be flagged so that they will display additional information in the Events Grid. A card must be assigned to the cardholder in order to utilize the Card Flags feature.
1. Right-click on the Cardholder or Card in the Personnel Browser and select Direct Control/Set Card Flags.
Or
Right-click
in the Cardholder’s Record and select Direct Control/Set Card Flags.
The Card Flags dialog appears.
2. Check the appropriate Flag and enter text if needed.
An icon will appear on the Events Grid.
● Alarm Card - Appears in the Events Grid: Alarm Card Used!
● Cardholder has a Note - Provides space to type a note.
● Other - Provides space to type other information.
● Watch Card - Appears in the Event Grid: Watch Card.
3. Click OK to apply the changes.
Has Access To
This feature allows you to view which doors a cardholder has access.
1. Right-click on the Cardholder in the Personnel Browser and select Info / Has Access To.
The Access dialog opens.
2. The results can printed or exported to a .csv file by selecting the appropriate button.
Trace History
You can view the last transactions for a selected cardholder by running a trace history.
1. Right-click on the cardholder and select Info / Trace History.
The Trace History Dialog will open.
2. If a wider time or date range is needed, enter the Start and End Date /Time and click the Trace button.
The results can printed or exported to a .csv file by selecting the appropriate button.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-33
Cardholders
User Membership
This InfoReady report displays the Personnel Groups that the cardholder has been assigned.
1. Right-click on the cardholder and select Info / User Membership.
The Group Membership dialog will open.
2. Click the Close button.
Journal
Creating a New Entry
1. Click on the Journal option and select New Entry.
The DNA Journal opens in entry mode.
2. Configure the DNA Journal log.
3. Place cursor in the Journal Entry Text panel and type the desired message.
4. Click the Add button.
Viewing an Entry
1. Click on the Journal option and select View.
The DNA Journal Selection dialog opens allowing the operator to filter the entries.
2. Configure the DNA Journal Selection dialog.
3. Click the OK button to view the results.
Navigate through the entries using the green arrow buttons at the bottom of the panel.
4. When finished, select the Cancel button to close the dialog.
Page 7-34 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Individual Card Features
Individual card features include the ability to activate and deactivate cards, as well as reassign and remove cards from a cardholder’s record.
Use Limit
You can set the maximum number of times a card may be used for a single card or for all cardholders. * Use
Limits in the SSP Properties / Stored Quantities dialog must be checked in order for the controller to store the information, see page 8-41.
1. Right-click on the Card in the Personnel Browser and select Direct Control / Set Use Limit.
Or
Right-click
in the Cardholder’s Record and
select Direct Control / Set Use Limit.
The Set Use Limit Dialog opens.
2. Select the Limit from the drop-down list.
If desired, check Apply Limit to All Cards.
3. Click OK to apply the change.
Activate/Deactivate a Card
Cards can be activate and deactivated from the Personnel Browser.
1. Right-click on the Card and select Direct Control / Activate or Deactivate
Card.
The card will either become active or deactive based on your selection.
Reassign a Card
You can easily reassign a card to another individual by dragging the dropping the card to the new cardholder or by following procedure below.
1. Select the card to be reassigned.
2. Drag the card to the desired cardholder and click Yes when the confirmation dialog is displayed.
The card is reassigned to the cardholder.
OR
1. Right-click on the Card in the Personnel Browser and select Re-assign Card.
The Find Cardholder Dialog is displayed.
2. Enter the cardholders information.
The % sign acts as a wild card when searching.
3. Click the Find button.
A dialog box will appear with the number of records found.
4. Click Yes to continue or No to cancel.
If yes is selected, the cardholder will appear under results.
5. Click OK to reassign the card to the selected cardholder.
A confirmation dialog will open.
6. Click Yes to reassign the card.
Remove Card
1. Right-click on the card and select Remove Card.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
2. Click Yes to remove the card.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-35
Cardholders
All Cardholders/All Cards Features
There are features that are available from the All Cardholders / All Cards headers in the Personnel Browser as well as from any Personnel Group; these features include Last Used and Non Use reports.
Last Used
The Last Used feature provides a quick look at the last card events for all cardholders.
1. Right-click on All Cardholders from the Name View tab or All Cards from the Card View tab and select
Info / Last Used from the resulting menu.
The Card Activity Reports dialog will open.
Check the Filter Unused checkbox, to remove card information for cards that have not been used.
The results can exported to a .csv file or to the clipboard.
2. Click OK to close the dialog.
Non Use
You can view all the cards that have not been used for a specified amount of time.
1. Right-click on All Cardholders from the Name View tab or All Cards from the Card View tab and select
Info / Non Use from the resulting menu.
The Non Use Report Parameters dialog opens.
2. Select the Date Range from the drop-down list and click the Next button.
Or
Check
the Since a specific date box, select a date from the calendar and
click
the Next button.
If desired, select the Exclude disabled cards checkbox to view only active cards.
3. If desired, deselect an SSP and click Next.
If needed, enter text in the Search Items field to narrow the list of SSPs.
4. If desired, deselect a Personnel Type(s) and click Next.
5. If desired, deselect a Card Type(s) and click the Finish button.
The Non-User Cardholders report opens.
6. If desired, select the card(s) that need to be Disabled.
The Disable Cards drop down becomes available.
Select
the Deactivate option.
The selected cards will turn gray.
7. If desired, select the Export drop down and select an export option.
8. Click OK to close the dialog and apply any changes.
Page 7-36 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Utilizing Photos
Once an employee’s record has been saved to the database, one or more photos may be imported to the record. Photos may also be captured through DNA with a compatible camera; see chapter 21 for more information. The photos can be triggered to display in the Photo Recall window.
Importing Photos to a Record
1. With the Cardholder’s Record open and updated, right-click inside the Employee Info data window and
select
Photo Properties from the menu.
Or
Right-click
on the Cardholder’s Name in the Personnel Browser and select Photo Properties from the menu.
The Add Cardholder Photo dialog will appear.
2. Click the New button to browse for the desired photo.
Or
Use the arrows to scroll and select an existing photo.
3. Select the checkboxes to activate the photo properties.
● Set Default - The default photo will appear in the hover-over tooltip in the Personnel Browser.
● Displayed - Displays the photo on the Employee Information tab in employee record. A maximum of four (4) photos may be displayed per record.
4. Click the OK button.
5. To save the record, click the Save button on the Personnel toolbar or right-click in the Personnel Record and select Update.
A blue box will appear by the cardholder’s name in the Personnel Browser indicating that a photo has been assigned to the record.
If client access to photos is needed, verify that the directory is shared and configure the directories path to point to the directory. Default directory paths can be configured by
selecting DNA / Administrative / DNA Directories from the Main Menu (see page 20-1).
Removing a Photo
1. With the Cardholder’s Record open, right-click inside the Employee Info data window and select Photo
Properties from the menu.
The Add Cardholder Photo dialog will appear.
2. Select the photo link and click the Remove button.
3. Click the OK button.
4. To save the record, click the Save button on the Personnel toolbar or right-click in the Personnel Record and select Update.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-37
Cardholders
Arranging Photos
Photos can be rearranged so that a recently added photo appears in the first position. Typically this would occur when printing badges.
1. With the Cardholder’s Record open, right-click inside the Employee Info data window and select Photo
Properties from the menu.
The Add Cardholder Photo dialog will appear.
2. Select the photo link and use the arrows to move the photo to the desired location.
3. Click the OK button.
4. To save the record, click the Save button on the Personnel toolbar or right-click in the Personnel Record and select Update.
Page 7-38 Fusion User Manual
Cardholders
Photo Recall
When an employee badges in (displays his card to a reader), the assigned photos will be displayed in the
Photo Recall Viewer; that is, if the employee’s record is configured to display photos and the Recall Photo browser has been setup and is open. You can view up to 4 different Photo Recall windows at one time.
Photo Recall Toolbar
Go to Photo Icon -Clicking the arrow displays a drop-down list with the available photos.
Zoom Out Icon - Zooms out of the photo.
Zoom In Icon - Zooms in the photo.
Stop Cycling Icon - Stops the photo display cycle process that occurs after the Photo Recall window had been active for a few minutes.
Personnel Record Icon - Displays the personnel record for the selected photo.
Retrieve Note Icon - Displays the Retrieve Note dialog box, allowing an operator to enter notes relating to the photo as well as assign an alarm to the card related to the photo. The operator may also review notes that were previously entered.
Pause Icon - Pauses the photo display scroll.
E-mail Icon - Displays the e-mail dialog box allowing the user to e-mail the photo to a Other
Photos Icon - Displays photos in addition to the one(s) set as the default, if additional photos have been associated to the card.
Setup Photo Recall Icon - Displays the photo properties/data dialog box.
Opening a Photo Recall Window
To open the Photo Recall Windows:
1. Select View / Windows / Photo Recall / Photo Recall 1-4 from the Main Menu.
The Photo Recall Viewer will display.
The Photo Recall Viewer can be left open to compare the displayed photo with the one on the employee’s badge and/or the employee him/herself.
If this is the first time the Photo Recall window has been used, it will need to be configured to display photos. See page 7-40 for configuration information.
Personnel Features
You can access the cardholders record, set card flags, or add a journal entry by right-clicking on the image in the window and selecting Personnel. See page 7-33 for more information on cardholder features.
Fusion User Manual Page 7-39
Cardholders
Configuring the Photo Recall Window
The Photo Recall Windows must be configured to display photos.
1. With a Recall Window open, right-click inside the window and select Set Up Photo Recall from the resulting menu.
The Host Settings / Photo Recall window opens.
2. Select a Display On Event Type(s) and if desired, configure the various other parameters.
For more information on the Host Settings / Photo Recall window, see page 3-15.
3. Click OK to save the settings.
Assigning Specific Doors
A door can be assigned to a window so that operators see only cardholders at that specific door.
1. With a Recall Window open, right-click inside the window and select Doors from the resulting menu.
2. Select Add Door or one of the Add All options.
If Add Door is selected, the Get Hardware dialog will appear.
3. Select the door from the drop-down list and click OK.
Doors can be edited by right clicking in the window and selecting Doors / Edit Door List.
Page 7-40 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
8
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
√
√
Hardware Browser & Toolbar Overview
Controlling Hardware Objects
Scheduling Hardware Objects
Hardware Features
Hardware Properties
Configuring Direct Commands
DNA offers a number of different hardware features as well as ability to control various hardware objects.
Hardware features vary based on the selected object but include the ability to make journal entries related to the object and generate “Who Has Access” reports on the fly.
The Hardware Browser
The Hardware Browser is an explorer window that consists of a hierarchical layout of the field devices that make up the system. The tree also displays the status of objects by using status indicators to the left of the object on the tree.
To open the Hardware Browser:
1. Select the Hardware icon from the Standard Toolbar.
Or
Select View / Explorers / Hardware from the Main Menu.
The Hardware Browser will open.
Status Indicators:
● Green Diamond - Inactive Status
● Red Diamond - Active Status
● Yellow Diamond - Fault Status
● Black Diamond - Offline Status
Object Color:
● Black - Normal condition
● Gray - Object is offline
● Red - Object is an Alarm condition
● Blue - Alarm has been acknowledged
● Green - Object has returned to normal (but not acknowledged)
Door Color:
● Red Door - The door is currently in an alarm state; i.e., door held open or door forced open.
● Blue Door - The door is currently in a normal state; i.e., closed.
Hovering over a given object will show you the status for the object in the form of a tooltip.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-1
Hardware Features
Configuring the Browser
The Hardware Browser can be customized to display various tabs as well as objects in the Hardware tree. The hardware tree can also be sorted by description or address.
1. Right-click in the white area at the bottom of the Hardware Browser.
2. Select Tree Properties from the list.
3. Configure the settings. See page 3-22 for more information on Hardware Tree Settings.
Hardware Toolbar
DNA Fusion provides many useful commands and shortcuts to help you control the Hardware.
These commands are available from the Hardware Toolbar.
Download Manager Icon - Displays the Download Manager dialog box for downloading the database information to the SSP.
Direct Control Icon - Displays the Direct Control dialog for the selected hardware object.
Hardware Properties Icon - Displays the Hardware Properties for the selected hardware object.
Add Hardware Icon - Click the arrow to display a drop-down menu of hardware object. Selecting an item displays the Add dialog box for the selected object.
Delete Icon - Displays the deleted item confirmation box.
Status Icon - Displays the status for the selected hardware object.
Default Template Icon - Applies the default template to the selected hardware object.
Template Manager Icon - Displays the Template Manager dialog box.
Watch Window Icon - Adds the selected hardware object to an existing Watch Window. The Watch
Window must be open in order for this option to be available.
Tree Update Icon - Updates the Hardware Explorer tree.
Home Page Icon - Launches the home page associated with the selected hardware object.
Disable High Icon - Disables the IP Video Window from opening automatically on a High Priority alarm.
Disable Normal Icon - Disables the IP Video Window from opening automatically on a Normal Priority alarm.
Disable Low Icon - Disables the IP Video Window from opening automatically on a Low Priority alarm.
Disable Custom Icon - Disables the IP Video Window from opening automatically on a Custom
Priority alarm.
Page 8-2 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Controlling Doors
There are a number of ways to change the Door (Reader) Mode within the Hardware Browser. The mode determines the type of access the reader will allow and is used for both doors and elevators.
There are also options to arm and disarm the Door Held and Door Forced statuses. This section will describe the various means of control including:
● Door Options (Right-click)
● The Door Modes Toolbar
● Direct Control dialog
Remember access to door controls within DNA is not limited to the above options try right-clicking on the Door Item in the Watch Window, from a Graphics Map, or the Event or Alarm Grids and select Hardware / Control.
Door Modes
The Door Mode indicates the state of door. Below is an explanation of the various Door Modes.
Reader Mode: Disabled Icon - Disables the reader and the door remains locked with no REX capability.
Reader Mode: Unlocked Icon - Unlocks the selected point and allows unlimited access.
Reader Mode: Locked Icon - Locks the selected point. No access is allowed but the door can be used from the inside, using the REX button.
Reader Mode: Facility Code Icon - Matches the facility code to approve entry.
Reader Mode: Card Only Icon - Requires a card with the correct format be presented.
Reader Mode: PIN Icon - Point requires a PIN code be entered to gain access.
Reader Mode: Card & PIN Icon - Point requires that both the card be presented and a PIN code entered to gain access.
Reader Mode: Card or PIN Icon - Point requires either a card be presented or a PIN code be entered to gain access.
Override Mode - Opens the Temporary ACR Override dialog. See page x-x for more information on the Override Mode feature.
Cancel Override Mode - Cancels the Temporary Override command. See page x-x for more information on the Override Mode feature.
Privacy Mode - Only available for Schlage AD locks. The Privacy Mode prevents normal credentials from opening the door from the outside.
Office Mode - Only available for Schlage AD locks. The Office Mode unlocks the door when a credential is presented and then automatically locks after the strike time has expired. To keep the door unlocked, push the button on the inside. The button will momentarily illuminate green. To return the lock to the locked state, push the button again or present a credential to the outside.
Classroom Mode - Only available for Schlage AD locks. The Classroom Mode unlocks the door when a credential is presented and then automatically locks after the strike time has expired.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-3
Hardware Features
Apartment Mode - Only available for Schlage AD locks. The Apartment Mode sets the door to be normally locked and but never relocks the door automatically, which prevents users from being locked out.
● To unlock the door from the outside, present a credential.
● To unlock the door from the inside, push the inside button or, if using the MD chassis, retract the deadbolt. Egress always available from inside.
● When lever is rotated and door is opened, the request-to-exit switch is used in conjunction with the door position switch to cause the door to return to unlocked condition.
● To lock the door from the outside, present a credential.
● To lock the door from the inside, push the inside button or, for MD chassis, extend the deadbolt.
Cancel Extended Mode - Only available for Schlage AD locks. Cancels the Extended Mode (Privacy,
Office, Classroom or Apartment) commands. See page x-x for more information on the Extended
Modes feature.
Page 8-4 Fusion User Manual
Door Options
The easiest way to control a door is through the Door Options menu.
1. Right-click on the desired door(s) in the Hardware Browser.
Hardware Features
2. Select Control / Mode and select the correct Mode based on the table above.
The Door(s) change mode and the Reader Mode number changes in the Hardware Browser.
The Door Options menu also includes access to Held / Forced as well as Momentary Unlock.
If the door is equiped with a Schlage AD, an additional Extended item will appear in the menu.
Door Modes Toolbar
The Door Modes Toolbar allows quick access to change the modes with the selection of a toolbar button. The desired door(s) must be highlighted before the Door Mode Toolbar button is selected.
All the door modes as well as the Extended AD-400 lock modes can be accessed from the Door Mode Toolbar.
For more information on Secondary toolbars, see page 2-5.
Door Mode Override Feature
The Door Mode Override feature can be used to override the mode on a door for a given amount of time. The selected mode is used during the specfied temporary time and the door’s normal mode is maintained. Once the temporary time expires, the door will revert back to the normal door mode.
Example: The door is set up to be temporarily locked for 5 minutes. If an event happens that would typically change the door mode to its Normal state (such as a time schedule becoming active), the door would not change to the new mode until the 5 minutes has passed.
There are three possible settings for the Door Override Mode:
● Indefinite - Overrides the door’s normal mode and sets the reader to the specified mode permentantly.
● Number of Minutes - Sets the door mode on the selected door for the indicated amount of time. The number of minutes can be up to 16383
(over 11 days).
● Absolute Time - The Absolute Time option allows the operator to change the door mode until a specified ending time, in hours/minutes.
When using the Absolute Time option, the mode will not necessarily end at the exact
hour/minute you specify. Instead it will last for a fixed number of whole minutes that is closest to the time specified.
For example, if a door override mode to end at 1:00:00 pm and it was 12:30:30 when the override was executed, the mode would end at 1:00:30.
When the Door is set in an Override Mode, a clock icon will appear on the Door in the Hardware Browser.
Door Mode Override Feature is support in SSP-EP firmware 1.17.3. Support for Absolute Time was added in
1.17.9 and the Indefinite option was added in 1.18.2.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-5
Hardware Features
Direct Control Dialog
DNA allows the operator to directly perform various tasks on a selected door using the Direct Control dialog.
The dialog offers the following options:
● Change the Door Mode
● Issue a Momentary Unlock
● Arm & Disarm the Held and Forced Statuses
● Schedule One Time & Repeating Door Mode Changes
To open the Direct Control dialog:
1. Right-click the door(s) you wish to control and select Control / Control Dialog from the context menu.
The Direct Control dialog will open.
● Door - Address and description of selected door. (Read Only)
● Status - Displays the Held and Forced Statuses (Armed or Disarmed)
● Control - Determines the type of control that will be executed.
Immediate Control - If checked, select a control item to immediately initiate. See below for control information.
Timed Control - If checked, the Time Controls Dialog will appear to allow for scheduling of future control. See page 8-7 for information on Scheduling Doors.
Immediate Control
1. Select the appropriate buttons to control the door.
● Arm Forced - Arms the forced door alarm on a disarmed door.
● Arm Held - Arms the door held alarm on a disarmed door.
● Disarm Forced - Disarms the forced door alarm on an armed door. A blue mask appears over the door icon. If both Forced and Held are disarmed, a red mask will appear.
● Disarm Held - Disarms the held door alarm on an armed door. A blue mask appears over the door icon. If both Forced and Held are disarmed, a red mask will appear.
● Door Mode - Indicates the current door mode for the door and displays the door mode selector; allowing the operator to set the reader mode. This setting determines the type of access the reader will allow. See the table on page 8-3 for door mode information.
The mode number appears beside the door in the Hardware Browser. If the door is in an alarm state, the door will appear red in the Hardware Browser.
● Momentary Unlock - When selected unlocks the door for the programmed strike time.
2. Click Close or X to close the dialog box.
Doors can also be controlled by right-clicking on the door and selecting Control / Mode to change the door mode or Control / Arm or Disarm to arm or disarm the door.
Page 8-6 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Scheduling Doors (Timed Control)
The Timed Control option allows the operator to schedule two types of door control.
● One Time - A single event with defined start and end times as well as door modes. This type of scheduled control is stored in the host and is initiated from the host at the time of the event.
Consequentiality, the host computer most be on at the time of the event.
● Repeating - Multiple regular occurrences based on a time schedule in which a trigger/macro combination is written and stored in the controller’s memory. The time schedule must be created prior to the creation of the repeating control command. This can also be setup through the Door
Properties dialog. See page 8-6 for more information.
One Time Scheduling
The One Time Scheduling feature offers the operator the ability to schedule a single event. This event will be stored in, and initiated from the host at the time of the event. Consequentiality, the host computer most be on at the time of the event.
1. Select the Timed Control radiobutton.
The Scheduling section will open.
Timed Control
Option
Scheduling
Options
2. Select the One Time radiobutton.
3. Enter a Start Time and Date.
4. Enter a End Time and Date.
5. Enter a Description.
This is a user-defined description for the action that will appear when the event is viewed in the future.
6. Select a Start Mode for the door(s) from the drop-down list.
See the table on page 8-3 for door mode information.
7. Select an End Mode from the drop-down list.
8. Click the Schedule button.
A confirmation dialog will appear. Click OK to close the dialog.
To view any Scheduled Events, click the Scheduled button.
If desired, click the History button to view previously scheduled events.
Future events are displayed in green while events that have already occurred appear red.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-7
Hardware Features
Repeating Events
Repeating Scheduled Events are multiple regular occurrences of an event based on a time schedule. A trigger/macro combination will be written and stored in the controller’s memory.
The time schedule must be created prior to the creation of the repeating control command. This function can be accomplished through the Door Properties. See page 8-9 for information.
1. Select the Timed Control radiobutton.
The Scheduling section will open.
2. Select the Repeating radiobutton.
3. Select a Time Schedule from the drop-down list to associate with the scheduled control.
4. Enter a Trigger Name.
This is a user-defined name for the trigger that will appear in the
Triggers & Macros dialog.
5. Enter a Description.
6. Select a Start Mode for the door(s) from the drop-down list.
7. Select a End Mode from the drop-down list.
8. Click the Schedule button to save the schedule.
The wizard writes a trigger and macro combination that changes the door(s) mode based upon the selected time schedule. The combination can be viewed by opening the Triggers & Macros Browser, selecting the correct SSP and double-clicking the newly created trigger or macro. For more information on Triggers & Macros, see Chapter 10.
Controlling Multiple Doors
Multiple doors may be controlled at one time; this includes changing the door mode, arming or disarming the door as well as scheduling events.
1. Select the doors using the Control or Shift keys.
2. Right-click on the last door selected and select the Control option.
● Direct Control Dialog - Select the option from the dialog. See page 8-5 for more information.
● Context Menu - Select the control option. See 8-3 for more information on Door Modes.
Page 8-8 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Configuring a Door to Follow a Time Schedule
The Follows Schedule option provides a quick way to set up a door(s) to adhere to a specified time schedule and designated ACM modes. A system generated trigger/macro combination is written and stored in the controller’s memory. The time schedule must be created prior to the creation of the repeating control command.
1. From the Door Properties dialog, select the Follows Schedule option from the menu.
Or
Right-click
on the Door and select the Follows Schedule option.
The Follows Schedule dialog opens.
2. Check the Enable Door Follows Time Schedule for this door box to implement the feature.
3. Select the desired time schedule from the Time Schedule to Follow drop down list.
4. Select the ACM Mode for the door when the specified time schedule becomes active from the Reader
Mode on Activate drop down list.
5. Select the ACM Mode for the door when the specified time schedule becomes inactive from the Reader
Mode on Deactivate drop down list.
6. Click OK to save the changes.
Page 8-9 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
NOTES:
Page 8-10 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Controlling Elevators
There are a number of ways to change the Elevator (Reader) Mode within the Hardware Browser (similar to
Doors). There are also options to arm and disarm the Held and Forced statuses. This section will describe the various means of control including:
● The Door Modes Toolbar
● Elevator Options (Right-click)
● Direct Control dialog
Remember access to elevator controls within DNA is not limited to the above options try
right-clicking on the Elevator Item in the Watch Window, from a Graphics Map, or the
Event or Alarm Grids and select Hardware / Control.
Door Modes Toolbar
The Door Modes Toolbar allows quick access to change the modes with the selection of a toolbar button. The desired elevator must be selected before the Door Mode Toolbar button is selected.
For more information on Secondary toolbars, see page 2-5. The following commands are available from the
Door Modes Toolbar.
Reader Mode: Disabled Icon - Disables the reader and the elevator remains locked with no REX capability.
Reader Mode: Unlocked Icon - Unlocks the selected point and allows unlimited access.
Reader Mode: Locked Icon - Locks the selected point. No access is allowed.
Reader Mode: Facility Code Icon - Matches the facility code to approve entry.
Reader Mode: Card Only Icon - Requires a card with the correct format be presented.
Reader Mode: PIN Icon - Point requires a PIN code be entered to gain access.
Reader Mode: Card & PIN Icon - Point requires that both the card be presented and a PIN code entered to gain access.
Reader Mode: Card or PIN Icon - Point requires either a card be presented or a PIN code be entered to gain access.
Override Mode - Opens the Temporary ACR Override dialog. See page x-x for more information on the Override Mode feature.
Cancel Override Mode - Cancels the Temporary Override command. See page x-x for more information on the Override Mode feature.
Elevator Options
The easiest way to control an elevator is through the Elevator Options menu.
1. Right-click on the desired elevator(s) in the Hardware Browser.
2. Select Control / Mode and select the correct Mode based on the table above.
The Elevator mode changes and the Reader Mode number changes in the Hardware Browser.
The Door Options menu also includes access to Held / Forced as well as Momentary Unlock.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-11
Hardware Features
Elevator Mode Override Feature
The Elevator Mode Override feature can be used to override the mode on an elevator for a given amount of time. The selected mode is used during the specified temporary time and the elevator’s normal mode is maintained. Once the temporary time expires, the elevator will revert back to the normal elevator mode.
Example: The elevator is set up to be temporarily locked for 5 minutes. If an event happens that would typically change the elevator mode to its Normal state (such as a time schedule becoming active), the elevator would not change to the new mode until the 5 minutes has passed.
There are three possible settings for the Elevator Override Mode:
● Indefinite - Overrides the door’s normal mode and sets the reader to the specified mode permentantly.
● Number of Minutes - Sets the door mode on the selected door for the indicated amount of time. The number of minutes can be up to 16383
(over 11 days).
● Absolute Time - The Absolute Time option allows the operator to change the door mode until a specified ending time, in hours/minutes.
When using the Absolute Time option, the mode will not necessarily end at the exact
hour/minute you specify. Instead it will last for a fixed number of whole minutes that is closest to the time specified.
For example, if a door override mode to end at 1:00:00 pm and it was 12:30:30 when the override was executed, the mode would end at 1:00:30.
Door Mode Override Feature is support in SSP-EP firmware 1.17.3. Support for Absolute Time was added in
1.17.9 and the Indefinite option was added in 1.18.2.
Page 8-12 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Direct Control Dialog
DNA allows the operator to directly perform various tasks on a selected elevator using the Direct Control dialog. The dialog offers the following options:
● Change the Elevator Mode
● Pulse a Designated Floor(s)
● Arm & Disarm the Held and Forced Statuses
● Schedule One Time & Repeating Elevator Mode Changes
Elevators can also be controlled by right-clicking on the elevator and selecting Control /
Mode to change the elevator reader mode.
To open the Direct Control dialog:
1. Right-click the elevator(s) you wish to control and select Control / Control Dialog from the context menu.
The Direct Control dialog will open.
● Door - Address and description of selected elevator. (Read Only)
● Status - Displays the Held and Forced Statuses (Armed or Disarmed)
● Control - Determines the type of control that will be executed.
Immediate Control - If checked, select a control item to immediately initiate. See below for control information.
Timed Control - If checked, the Time Controls Dialog will appear to allow for scheduling of future control. See page 8-11 for information on Scheduling Elevators.
2. If desired, specify the Floors to be controlled in the Floors drop down.
Immediate Control
1. Select the appropriate buttons to control the elevator.
● Door Mode - Indicates the current reader mode for the elevator and displays the elevator mode selector; allowing the operator to set the reader mode. This setting determines the type of access the reader will allow. See the table on page 8-9 for elevator mode information.
The mode number appears beside the elevator in the Hardware Browser.
● Pulse Floors - When selected pulses the selected floor(s) for the programmed strike time. Select the floor(s) from the drop-down list.
2. Click Close or X to close the dialog box.
Page 8-13 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Scheduling Elevators (Timed Control)
The Timed Control option allows the operator to schedule two types of elevator control.
● One Time - A single event with defined start and end times as well as elevator modes. This type of scheduled control is stored in the host and is initiated from the host at the time of the event.
Consequentiality, the host computer most be on at the time of the event.
● Repeating - Multiple regular occurrences based on a time schedule in which a trigger/macro combination is written and stored in the controller’s memory. The time schedule must be created prior to the creation of the repeating control command.
One Time Scheduling
The One Time Scheduling feature offers the operator the ability to schedule a single event. This event will be stored in, and initiated from the host at the time of the event. Consequentiality, the host computer most be on at the time of the event.
1. Select the Timed Control radiobutton.
The Scheduling section will open.
Timed Control
Option
Scheduling
Options
2. Select the One Time radiobutton.
3. If desired, check the Floors to be controlled in the Floors drop down list.
4. Enter a Start Time and Date.
5. Enter a End Time and Date.
6. Enter a Description.
This is a user-defined description for the action that will appear when the event is viewed in the future.
7. Select a Start Mode for the elevator(s) from the drop-down list.
See the table on page 8-9 for elevator mode information.
8. Select an End Mode from the drop-down list.
9. Click the Schedule button.
To view any Scheduled Events, click the Scheduled button and click the History button.
Repeating Events
Repeating Scheduled Events are multiple regular occurrences of an event based on a time schedule. A trigger/macro combination will be written and stored in the controller’s memory. The time schedule must be created prior to the creation of the repeating control command.
1. Select the Repeating radiobutton.
The Scheduling section will open.
2. If desired, check the Floors to be controlled in the Floors drop down list.
3. Select a Time Schedule from the drop-down list to associate with the scheduled control.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-14
Hardware Features
4. Enter a Trigger Name.
This is a user-defined name for the trigger that will appear in the Triggers & Macros dialog.
5. Enter a Description.
6. Select a Start Mode for the door(s) from the drop-down list.
7. Select a End Mode from the drop-down list.
8. Click the Schedule button to save the schedule.
The wizard writes a trigger and macro combination that changes the elevator(s) mode based upon the selected time schedule. The combination can be viewed by opening the Triggers & Macros Browser, selecting the correct SSP and double-clicking the newly created trigger or macro. For more information on Triggers & Macros, see Chapter 10.
Controlling Multiple Elevators
Multiple elevators may be controlled at one time; this includes changing the elevator mode, arming or disarming the elevator as well as scheduling events.
1. Select the elevators using the Control or Shift keys.
2. Right-click on the last elevator selected and choose the control option.
● Direct Control Dialog - Select the option from the dialog. See page 8-10 for more information.
● Context Menu - Select the control option. See 8-9 for more information.
Configuring an Elevator to Follow a Time Schedule
The Follows Schedule option provides a quick way to set up an elevator(s) to adhere to a specified time schedule and designated ACM modes. A system generated trigger/macro combination is written and stored in the controller’s memory. The time schedule must be created prior to the creation of the repeating control command.
1. From the Elevator Properties dialog, select the Elevator Follows Schedule option from the menu.
Or
Right-click
on the Elevator and select the Elevator Follows Schedule option.
The Follows Schedule dialog opens.
2. Check the Enable Door Follows Time Schedule for this door box to implement the feature.
3. Select the desired time schedule from the Time Schedule to Follow drop down list.
4. Select the ACM Mode for the elevator when the specified time schedule becomes active from the
Reader Mode on Activate drop down list.
5. Select the ACM Mode for the elevator when the specified time schedule becomes inactive from the
Reader Mode on Deactivate drop down list.
6. Click OK to save the changes.
Page 8-15 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
NOTES:
Page 8-16 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
ACM Features
The are a number of features available for doors and elevators. For instance, you can see who has access to a specific door or trace the history for the selected ACM.
Status
Detailed status information can be displayed for the selected ACM including Door Status, Reader Mode and the status of the various door hardware objects.
1. Right-click on the ACM and select Info / Status.
The Door Status dialog will open.
2. Click the OK button to close the dialog.
Trace History
A trace history report can be run on a ACM to view the last transactions.
1. Right-click on the ACM and select Info / Trace History.
The Trace History Dialog will open.
2. If a wider time or date range is needed, enter the Start and End Date /Time and click the Trace button.
The results can be narrowed down by selecting Access Only and clicking the Trace button.
The results can printed or e-mailed by selecting the appropriate button. Select the Print to Size checkbox to size the report so that all columns appear on the same page without forcing them to a new page.
Who Has Access
This feature allows you to generate an immediate report that details who has access to the selected ACM.
1. Right-click on the ACM and select Info / Who Has Access.
The Who Has Access dialog appears.
If the cardholder received their access from an Access Level Group, the following icon will appear in the Access Level column.
The results can be exported, printed or e-mailed by selecting the appropriate button.
Who Does Not Have Access
This feature allows you to generate an immediate report that details who does not have access to the selected ACM.
1. Right-click on the ACM and select Info / Who
Does Not Have Access.
The Who Does Not Have Access dialog appears.
The results can exported, printed or e-mailed by selecting the appropriate button.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-17
Hardware Features
Where Used
The Where Used feature provides a grid displaying the doors associated relationships (i.e. Triggers, Macros,
Access Levels, etc.).
1. Right-click on the ACM object and select Where Used.
The Where Used dialog opens.
The results can be Exported to a CSV file or to the Clipboard.
Journal Entries
The journal allows you to record a text entry and view all journal entries for which you have permission to view.
Creating a New Entry
1. Right-click on the ACM object and select Journal / New Entry.
The DNA Journal opens in entry mode.
2. Configure the DNA Journal log.
● Journal Entry For - Indicates entry component category. Entries may be sorted based on this field.
● Journal Entry Type - Indicates entry category. Entries may be sorted based on this field.
● Restrictions - Indicates who has the ability to view the entry.
3. Place cursor in the Journal Entry Text panel and type the desired message.
4. Click the Add button.
Viewing an Entry
1. Right-click on the ACM object and select Journal / View.
The DNA Journal Selection dialog opens allowing the operator to filter the entries.
2. Configure the DNA Journal Selection dialog.
3. Click the OK button to view the results.
The DNA Journal will display in “view” mode. In “view” mode, the operator will only be allowed to view existing entries for which he has permission to view.
The Read Only fields indicate entry’s properties including its chronological sequence, author, station of origin, date and time, entry type, and entry link.
Navigate through the entries using the green arrow buttons at the bottom of the panel.
4. When finished, select the Cancel button to close the dialog.
Page 8-18 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
ACM Status Report
The ACM Status Report feature provides visibility to the status of any and/or all ACMs; this includes both doors and elevators. The ACM Status Report is live and interactive so that the status of each object is updated in real-time as well as providing the ability to control the ACM directly from the grid. It allows you to maintain full visibility of all ACMs that are open or unlocked and provides reporting for documentation of door status during shift changes in a simple grid configuration.
Generating an ACM Status Report
1. Select Hardware / ACM Status / New Report from the Main Menu.
A blank ACM Status grid appears.
2. Right-click in the grid and select Add.
The Add menu appears.
3. Select an option from the menu.
● Door - Opens the Get Hardware Object dialog and allows the operator to select individual ACMs.
Select
the ACM from the drop down list and click the OK button.
● All Doors - Adds all the ACMs to the ACM Status grid.
● All SSP Doors - Opens the Get Hardware Object dialog and allows the operator to add ACMs by selecting an SSP from the drop down list.
● All Site Doors - Opens the Get Hardware Object dialog and allows the operator to add ACMs by selecting a Site from the drop down list.
● High Security Doors - Adds all the ACMs that have designated as High Security to the ACM Status grid.
● Medium Security Doors - Adds all the ACMs that have designated as Medium Security to the ACM
Status grid.
● Low Security Doors - Adds all the ACMs that have designated as Low Security to the ACM Status grid.
● Normal Security Doors - Adds all the ACMs that have designated as Normal Security to the ACM Status grid.
The grid is populated with the selected ACMs.
Formatting a Report
1. Right-click in the configured ACM Status grid.
● Remove Column - Removes the selected column from the grid.
● Reset Columns - Resets the columns to the default setting.
● Select Hide Icons to remove the icons from the grid.
● Select Fonts, configure the Font Selection Dialog and click OK.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-19
Hardware Features
Saving a ACM Status Report
An ACM Status Report can be saved for future use.
1. Right-click in the configured ACM Status grid.
2. Select File Utilities / Save As from the resulting menu.
The Save As dialog opens.
3. Enter a Name for the report and click the Save button.
Opening a Saved ACM Status Report
1. Select Hardware / ACM Status / Open from the Main Menu.
The Open dialog appears.
2. Select the ACM Report and click the Open button.
The ACM Status Report opens.
ACM Status Features
There are a number of features available from within the ACM Status Grid.
Controlling an ACM
1. Right-click on an ACM in the ACM Status grid and select Door / Control from the menu.
The Control menu appears.
2. Select a Control option.
For more information on controlling hardware, see page 8-9.
Info
Trace History
1. Right-click on the ACM and select Info / Trace History.
The Trace History Dialog will open. See page 8-13 for more information.
Who Has Access
1. Right-click on the ACM and select Info / Who Has Access.
The Who Has Access dialog appears. See page 8-13 for more information.
Who Does Not Have Access
1. Right-click on the ACM and select Info / Who Does Not Have Access.
The Who Does Not Have Access dialog appears. See page 8-13 for more information.
Page 8-20 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Controlling Input/Output Points
There are a number of ways to control the Input and Output Points within the Hardware Browser (similar to
Doors). This section will describe the various means of control for both inputs and outputs including:
● Input & Output Options (Right-click)
● Direct Control dialog
Input / Output Options
The easiest way to control an input or output point is through the Points Options menu.
1. Right-click on the desired input or output point(s) in the Hardware Browser.
2. Select the correct State for the point(s).
The point(s) change state and the Hardware tree is updated to reflect the state change. If an input is disarmed, a colored box will appear over the input. If an output is Activated, the diamond will turn from green to red. See page 8-18 for more detailed information.
Remember access to input/output controls within DNA is not limited to the above options
try right-clicking on the Item in the Watch Window, from a Graphics Map, or the Event or Alarm Grids and select Hardware / Control.
Direct Control Dialog
DNA allows the operator to directly perform various tasks on selected input or output point(s) using the
Direct Control dialog. The dialog offers the following options:
● Arm & Disarm the Input Point(s)
● Activate & Deactivate the Output Point(s)
● Momentary Activate or Pulse the Output Point(s)
● Schedule One Time & Repeating Arm & Disarm Events
● Schedule One Time & Repeating Activate & Deactivate Events
To open the Direct Control dialog:
1. Right-click the input(s) and/or output point(s) you wish to control and select Control / Control Dialog from the context menu.
The Direct Control dialog will open.
● Point - Address and description of the selected point. (Read only)
● Status - Armed status for the selected point. (Armed or Disarmed/Active or Inactive)
● Control - Determines the type of control that will be executed.
Immediate Control - If checked, select a control item to immediately initiate. See page 8-18 for control information.
Timed Control - If checked, the Time Controls Dialog will appear to allow for scheduling of future control. See page 8-18 and 8-19 for information on Scheduling.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-21
Hardware Features
Immediate Control
1. Select the appropriate buttons to control the input or output point(s).
Input Options
● Arm - Arms the selected input point.
● Disarm - Disarms the selected input point. A red mask appears over the point.
Output Options
● Activate - Activates the selected output point and turns the indicator red.
● Deactivate - Deactivates the selected output point and turns the indicator green.
● Momentary - Activates the output for a specified time.
● Pulse - Pulses the output point.
● On Time - Specifies the amount of time the point is active when a momentary or pulse command is executed.
● Off Time - Specifies the amount of time the point is inactive when a momentary or pulse command is executed.
● Repeat - Number of times the pulse will repeat when a Pulse command is executed.
2. Click Close or X to close the dialog box.
Page 8-22 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Scheduling Input & Output Points (Timed Control)
The Timed Control option allows the operator to schedule two types of control.
● One Time - A single event with defined start and end times as well as states. This type of scheduled control is stored in the host and is initiated from the host at the time of the event. Consequentiality, the host computer most be on at the time of the event.
● Repeating - Multiple regular occurrences based on a time schedule in which a trigger/macro combination is written and stored in the controller’s memory. The time schedule must be created prior to the creation of the repeating control command.
One Time Scheduling
The One Time Scheduling feature offers the operator the ability to schedule a single event. This event will be stored in, and initiated from the host at the time of the event. Consequentiality, the host computer most be on at the time of the event.
1. Select the Timed Control radiobutton.
The Scheduling section will open.
2. Select the One Time radiobutton.
3. Enter a Arm At Time and Date for inputs or enter a Activate At Time and Date for outputs.
4. Enter a Disarm At Time and Date for inputs or a Deactivate At Time and Date for outputs.
5. Enter a Description.
This is a user-defined description that will appear when the event is viewed in the future.
6. Click the Schedule button.
To view any Scheduled Events, click the Scheduled button and click the History button.
Repeating Events
Repeating Scheduled Events are multiple regular occurrences of an event based on a time schedule. A trigger/macro combination will be written and stored in the controller’s memory. The time schedule must be created prior to the creation of the repeating control command.
1. Select the Timed Control radiobutton.
The Scheduling section will open.
2. Select the Repeating radiobutton.
The Scheduling section will open.
3. Select a Time Schedule from the drop-down list to associate with the scheduled control.
4. Enter a Trigger Name.
This is a user-defined name for the trigger that will appear in the Triggers & Macros dialog.
5. Enter a Description.
6. Select a Begin State from the drop-down list.
7. Select a Ending State from the drop-down list.
8. Click the Schedule button to save the schedule.
The wizard writes a trigger and macro combination that changes the points state based upon the selected time schedule. The combination can be viewed by opening the Triggers & Macros Browser, selecting the correct SSP and double-clicking the newly created trigger or macro.
For more information on Triggers & Macros, see Chapter 10.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-23
Hardware Features
Controlling Multiple Points
Multiple input and output objects may be controlled at one time; this includes changing properties as well as scheduling events.
1. Select the Input and Output Points using the Control or Shift keys.
2. Right-click on the last object selected and select the desired option.
Trace History
A trace history report can be run on an input or output point to view the last transactions.
1. Right-click on the Point and select Info / Trace History.
The Trace History Dialog will open.
2. If a wider time or date range is needed, enter the Start and End Date /Time and click the Trace button.
The results can be narrowed down by selecting Access Only and clicking the Trace button.
The results can printed or e-mailed by selecting the appropriate button.
Where Used
The Where Used feature provides a grid displaying the doors associated relationships (i.e. Triggers, Macros,
Access Levels, etc.).
1. Right-click on the ACM object and select Where Used.
The Where Used dialog opens.
The results can be Exported to a CSV file or to the Clipboard.
Page 8-24 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Site Options
The Site is a collection of channels and controllers that communicate with a common driver. The Site will appear “Connected” on the Status Bar when the Site is communicating with the Driver.
Caution should be used before editing or selecting any of the Site options below.
● Properties - Displays the Properties for the Site. See page 8-37 for more information on Site Properties.
● Link and Unlink Options - Provides an option to link the Workstation to a Site (establish a connection to the DNAdrvr Service) as well as the option to unlink from the Site. For more information see page
8-37.
● Site Addition and Editing Options - Opens a dialog for the addition of a site as well as an option to edit the site. For more information see page 8-37.
● Add Channel/Camera Options - Select to add a channel or a camera (not DVR Integration). See page
8-42 for Channel Properties and page 8-70 for Camera Properties.
● Scheduled Commands - Displays the One-Time Scheduled Commands for Hardware Objects across the entire Site. See page 8-5 for more information on One-Time Scheduled Commands.
● Journal - The journal allows you to record a text entry and view all journal entries for which you have permission to view. For more information on creating or viewing journal entries, see page 8-23.
● Download - It is imperative that records are downloaded to the SSP in order for them to be added to the panel. For more information on Downloading, see page 2-13.
● Connection - The Connection option has a number of useful options.
Disable Driver - If selected, the Site will become Disabled. The option will change to Enable Driver and when selected the Site will Enabled.
● Refresh Status - Refreshes the connection site connection status.
Channel Options
The Channel is defined as the path of communication from the server to the controller(s). Caution should be used before editing or selecting any of the Channel options below.
● Properties - Displays the Properties for the Channel. See page 8-38 for more information on Channel
Properties.
● Add SSP Option - Select to add a new controller to the selected channel. See page 8-39 for more information on SSP Properties.
● Delete - Removes the selected channel. Any controllers that are attached to the channel must be moved to another channel or removed before deleting the channel.
● Download - It is imperative that records are downloaded to the SSP in order for them to be added to the panel. For more information on Downloading, see page 2-13.
● Journal - The journal allows you to record a text entry and view all journal entries for which you have permission to view. For more information on creating or viewing journal entries, see page 8-23.
● Status - Opens a dialog that displays the channel’s state as well as the DLL version.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-25
Hardware Features
SSP Options
The Controllers allow you to check the status, create and view entries in the journal, and open the Download
Manager.
Properties
Opens the Properties dialog for the selected Controller. See page 8-43 for detailed information about
Controller Properties.
Promote SSP
This option will only be available is the selected SSP is a legacy controller. The Promote SSP feature allows the board to be replaced with a current product and programmed into DNA Fusion with no issues. See page x-x in the Technical Installation manual for more information.
1. Right-click on the SSP and select Promote SSP from the list.
The Promote SSP dialog will appear.
Status
1. Right-click on the SSP and select Status from the list.
The SSP Status dialog will appear.
2. Select the different status screens from the dialog menu.
● SSP Status - Includes the following information about the selected controller.
Identification - Includes the controller name and number information as well as the serial number.
Memory - Shows the total and available memory including a break down of certain individual categories.
DIP Switches - Graphical display of the dipswitch settings currently and at the time of power up.
Properties - Provides such valuable information as the controllers adjusted time, the communication status and hardware configuration information.
Firmware - Displays the controller’s firmware version and the option to download firmware. See page 20-12 for more information on reloading firmware.
● Time Schedules - Displays the status of time schedules; results may be interrupted based upon the
Key.
● Access Areas - Displays the status of Access Areas; results may be interrupted based upon the Key.
● MPG - Displays the status of MPGs; results may be interrupted based upon the Key.
● Download Status - Provides information about each categories last download including any Duplicates or Errors (D/E). Also provides access to Download Checked, Download All as well as Reset commands.
See page 8-23 for more information on the Reset option.
Page 8-26 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Controller Commands
The Controller Commands section offers many high level options such as connecting and disconnecting the controller, resetting the controller and reloading firmware. Caution should be used before editing or selecting any of the Controller options below.
● Connect - Connects the controller to the host (channel). If the Controller is Offline and the Site is
Connected, select the Connect option to reattempt communication.
● Disconnect - Disconnects the controller from the host (channel). When selected, the controller text will appear grey and a black diamond will be displayed indicating that the controller is offline.
● Reset - Deletes the information in the controller’s memory and then a full download reloads the controller with updated information. During the process, the controller will lose communication with
DNA; depending on the amount of information being downloaded, this process could take a while.
● Set Time - Sets the controller time to match the time on the server.
● Refresh Time Schedules - Logs the current time schedule modes into the Event Log. The command will affect all Time Schedules for the selected SSP.
● Reload Firmware - Downloads the latest firmware to the selected controller.
● Scheduled Commands - Displays the One-Time Scheduled Commands for the selected controller.
Note: Does not display scheduled Repeating Commands.
● Trigger Codes - Opens the Trigger Codes dialog and allows for the naming of Trigger Codes. Allows for easy identification.
● Change Channel - Allows for the controller to be placed on another channel; switching communication to another channel. Opens the SSP Channel... dialog.
Add
The Add section provides the options to add various components to the system.
● Add Access Area - Opens the Access Areas dialog. See Chapter 11 for more information.
● Add Door - Opens the New Door dialog. See page 8-41 for more information on Door Properties.
● Add Elevator - Opens the New Elevator dialog. See page 8-55 for more information on Elevator
Properties.
● Add MPG - Opens the Secured Areas dialog. See Chapter 12 for more information.
● Add Subcontroller - Opens the New Subcontroller dialog. See page 8-45 for more information on
Subcontroller Properties.
● Keypad Command - Opens the Remote Keypad Command dialog.
Journal Entries
The journal allows you to record a text entry and view all journal entries for which you have permission to view.
Creating a New Entry
1. Right-click on the SSP and select Journal / New Entry.
The DNA Journal opens in entry mode.
2. Configure the DNA Journal log.
● Journal Entry For - Indicates entry component category. Sortable field.
● Journal Entry Type - Indicates entry category. Sortable field.
● Restrictions - Indicates who has the ability to view the entry.
3. Place cursor in the Journal Entry Text panel and type the desired message.
4. Click the Add button.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-27
Hardware Features
Viewing an Entry
1. Right-click on the SSP and select Journal / View.
The DNA Journal Selection dialog opens allowing the operator to filter the entries.
2. Configure the DNA Journal Selection dialog.
3. Click the OK button to view the results.
The DNA Journal will display in “view” mode. In “view” mode, the operator will only be allowed to view existing entries for which he has permission to view.
The Read Only fields indicate entry’s properties including its chronological sequence, author, station of origin, date and time, entry type, and entry link.
Navigate through the entries using the green arrow buttons at the bottom of the panel.
4. When finished, select the Cancel button to close the dialog.
Delete
Removes the selected controller. Caution should be used when selecting the option since all attached hardware will be deleted.
!
Extreme caution should be used before selecting the Delete option. Once a controller and the attached hardware have been deleted, there is no way to undo the action, the controller will have to be readded to the system.
Card Formats
Opens the Card Formats Dialog; allowing for the editing, addition, copying and removal of card formats. See page 8-75 for more information of card formats.
Download
It is imperative that changes be downloaded to the SSP in order for them to be added to the panel. It is recommended that an actual download be performed when large amounts of information or changes have been entered.
1. Select the appropriate Download checkbox.
2. Select the Site(s)/Controller(s) options.
3. If desired, select the individual Site(s)/Controller(s) and click OK.
A status bar will indicate the downloads progress. Click the Cancel button at anytime to close the window without effecting the download.
Reports
Hardware setting reports can be generated quickly and easily from the SSP.
1. Right-click on the SSP and select Reports / Hardware Settings Reports.
2. Select the report from the resulting list.
The Reports Parameter Configuration dialog opens. See Chapter 17: Reports for more information on report configuration.
3. Use the tabs to configure the parameters for the selected report.
Each tab will display a dialog box with a list of items.
4. Click OK.
The selected report will open.
Homepage
Opens the designated Homepage for the selected controller. See page 8-39 for more information on setting homepage’s for controllers.
Refresh Status
Refreshes the selected controller’s status.
Page 8-28 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Subcontroller Options
The Subcontrollers allow you to check the status, create and view entries in the journal, and create templates.
Caution should be used before editing or selecting any of the Subcontroller options below.
Properties
Opens the Properties dialog for the selected Subcontroller. See page 8-45 for detailed information about
Subcontroller Properties.
Delete
Removes the selected subcontroller. Any subcontroller objects that are associated with a door or any other hardware object must be reconfigured before deleting the subcontroller.
If a subcontroller has objects that are associated with a door (or other object), a dialog will appear with the address of the object(s).
Download
Selecting Download at the subcontroller level is considered an individual download and only information about that specific subcontroller will be sent to the controller. A Download dialog is not displayed for individual downloads.
Reload Firmware
Opens the Firmware Reload dialog to allow the selected subcontroller’s firmware to be updated.
See page 20-14 for more information.
Status
Displays detailed status for the selected subcontroller including Identification, Status, and Firmware information.
Journal
The journal allows you to record a text entry and view all journal entries for which you have permission to view. See page 8-23 for more information on adding and viewing entries.
Refresh Status
Refreshes the selected subcontroller’s status.
Where Used
The Where Used feature provides a grid displaying the objects associated relationships (i.e. Triggers,
Macros, etc.).
Fusion User Manual Page 8-29
Hardware Features
ACM Options
There are a number of options available by right-clicking on the ACM.
Properties
Opens the Properties dialog for the selected ACM. See page 8-47 for information about Door Properties and see page 8-55 for more information on Elevator Properties.
Control
See page 8-3 for information on Controlling Doors and see page 8-9 for information on Controlling Elevators.
Add Door/Elevator
Opens the New Door/New Elevator dialog. See page 8-47 for more information on Door Properties and page
8-55 for more information on Elevator Properties.
Door Follows Time Schedule
Opens the Door Follows Schedule dialog. See page 8-7 for more information on setting up the Door Follows
Time Schedule feature.
Delete
Removes the selected ACM. Caution should be used when selecting the option since the door or elevator will be deleted from the system.
Download
It is imperative that changes be downloaded to the SSP in order for them to be added to the panel. It is recommended that an actual download be performed when large amounts of information or changes have been entered.
1. Select the appropriate Download checkbox.
2. Select the Site(s)/Controller(s) options.
3. If desired, select the individual Site(s)/Controller(s).
4. Click OK.
A status bar will indicate the downloads progress. Click the Cancel button at anytime to close the window without effecting the download.
Reports
ACM specific reports are easy to generate from the selected object.
1. Right-click on the ACM and select Reports.
A list of options appears.
2. Configure the Parameters and click the OK button.
See Chapter 17: Reports for more information on report configuration.
Info
See page 8-13 for more information on the Info feature.
Journal
The journal allows you to record a text entry and view all journal entries for which you have permission to view. See page 8-14 for more information on the Journal feature.
Watch Item
Adds the selected item to the Watch Window. For more information on the Watch Window, see Chapter 15.
Refresh Status
Refreshes the selected door’s status.
Where Used
The Where Used feature provides a grid displaying the objects associated relationships (i.e. Triggers,
Macros, Access Levels, etc.).
Page 8-30 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Input and Output Options
The Input and Output Points allow you to access the properties, open the Download Manager, and add the object to the Watch Window.
Properties
Opens the Properties dialog for the selected point. See page 8-63 for information about Input Point Properties and see page 8-67 for more information on Output Point Properties.
Control
See page 8-17 for information on Controlling Input and Output Points.
Download
Selecting Download at the Input or Output Point level is considered an individual download and only information about that specific point will be sent to the controller. A Download dialog is not displayed for individual downloads.
Reports
Input and Output Point specific reports are easy to generate from the selected object.
1. Right-click on the Point and select Reports.
A list of options appears.
2. Configure the Parameters and click the OK button.
See Chapter 17: Reports for more information on report configuration.
Journal
The journal allows you to record a text entry and view all journal entries for which you have permission to view. See page 8-23 for more information on the Journal feature.
Trace History
A trace history report can be run on a Input or Output Point to view the last transactions.
1. Right-click on the Point and select Trace History.
The Trace History Dialog will open.
2. If a wider time or date range is needed, enter the Start and End Date /Time and click the Trace button.
The results can be narrow down by selecting Access Only and clicking the Trace button.
The results can printed or e-mailed by selecting the appropriate button.
Watch Item
Adds the selected item to the Watch Window. For more information on the Watch Window, see Chapter 15.
Defaults
Applies the default templates to the Inputs and Outputs associated with the selected point(s).
Templates
See pages 8-63 and 8-67 for more information on Input and Output settings.
Where Used
The Where Used feature provides a grid displaying the objects associated relationships (i.e. Triggers,
Macros, Access Levels, etc.).
Fusion User Manual Page 8-31
Hardware Features
NOTES:
Page 8-32 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Viewing & Controlling DVR/NVR and IP Cameras
DNA Fusion incorporates a number of features for viewing and controlling cameras attached to a server from most major NVR/DVR manufacturers.
The DVR Browser
The DVR Browser contains the DVR/NVR servers as well as the cameras associated to each server.
Camera Groups can be created to allow for logical or geographical groups of cameras that can dragged and dropped on the Video Manager for quick viewing.
To open the DVR Browser:
1. Click the DVR Manager button on the Standard Toolbar.
Or
Select
View / Explorers / DNA DVR from the Main Menu.
The DVR Browser will appear.
Cameras are listed under the DVR/NVR server they are associated with.
IP Cameras are listed under the DVR Servers / IP Cameras header. IP Cameras can be added to Camera Groups however they will not support archived video playback and
Video Tooltips are not available.
Using Video Tooltips
Video tooltips provide a camera view without opening any additional windows. Simply hover any camera in the DVR Browser and a live video window will open in the form of a video tooltip.
1. Click the DNA Properties button on the Standard Toolbar.
2. From the Station Setting page, locate the Tooltip Settings section.
3. Select the Use Video Tooltips checkbox.
4. Enter desired the Width and Height for the video tooltip window(s).
5. Click the OK button to save the settings.
When the mouse is placed on the camera’s name in the DVR Browser, the camera’s video will display on popup tooltip.
Creating Camera Groups
Camera groups allow the operator to group certain cameras together and drop the group into the Video
Manager to fill the display with the selected cameras or onto the Recording option.
1. With the DVR Browser open, right-click on the Camera Groups option and select Add Camera Group.
The Camera Group Properties dialog opens.
2. Enter a Group Name and click OK to save the group.
3. Expand the Camera Groups section by clicking the plus sign (+).
4. Drag and drop the camera(s) into the desired Camera Group.
The Cameras will appear in the specified camera group. To remove a Camera from a group, right-click on the camera in the group and select Remove.
To view a camera:
1. Open the DVR Browser and the Video Manager Window.
For more information on the Video Manager, see page 8-31.
2. Drag and drop the Camera or Camera Group to the Video Manager Window.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-33
Hardware Features
Adding Recordings
Recordings can be created with a start and stop time and then multiple cameras or camera groups assigned to the recording item. This allows the operator to view the desired timeframe on multiple cameras at the same time without having to reenter the time parameters for each camera.
To add a recording:
1. With the DVR Browser open, right-click on the Recordings option and select Add Recording.
The Search Recordings dialog opens.
2. Enter a Description for the recordings search.
3. In the Start Date field specify a start date by clicking the Down Arrow to open the calendar or using the up and down keys/buttons.
4. In the End Date field specify an end date by clicking the Down Arrow to open the calendar or using the up and down keys/buttons.
5. Right-click in the Cameras section to add desired cameras to the search.
● Add Camera - Opens the Camera dialog; allowing for single camera selection. Multiple cameras can be selected from this dialog by using the Control or Shift keys.
● Add Camera Group - Opens the Camera Group dialog; allowing for camera group selection. Multiple camera groups can be selected from this dialog by using the Control or Shift keys.
6. Select the cameras and click the OK button.
7. Click Create Search to save the search.
The saved recording search will appear under the Recordings header.
To play a recording:
1. Open the DVR Browser and the Video Manager Window.
For more information on the Video Manager, see page 8-31.
2. Drag and drop the Saved Recording to the Video Manager Window.
The associated cameras will play the specified recorded video. Use the video manager controls to playback the video.
To delete a saved recording:
1. With the DVR Browser open, right-click on the desired Recording.
2. Select Delete Recording from the resulting menu.
The saved recording will be removed from the Recording List.
Page 8-34 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Video Manager
DNA Fusion incorporates a flexible monitor matrix that can be used to view either live or recorded video from multiple cameras. Drag and drop cameras or camera groups directly to the matrix and the video display resizes automatically. Window and playback controls are built into the matrix for easy access.
To open the Video Manager:
1. Select the Video Manager button on the Standard Toolbar.
Or
Select
View / Windows / Video View Manager from the Main Menu.
The Video View Manager window opens.
Displaying Video
To display live cameras in the Video View Manager, open the DVR Browser and drag cameras or a Camera
Group to the Video Manager. The display will automatically readjust the number panes in the layout. If more than one window is displayed, double-click on a window to open it full screen.
Host Based Macros can also be configured to automatically populate the Video Manager windows when a particular event happens at a specific door. See page 10-16 for more information.
Video View Manager Toolbar
The Video Manager Toolbar provides a number of useful controls including playback options as well as the ability to specific the number of panes.
Play Control Focus - Indicates which window to apply the selected control option.
Previous Segment Icon - Moves to the first image in the previous recorded sequence.
Step Backwards Icon - Moves to the image just before the one currently displayed.
Play Icon - Plays recording forward in time.
Step Forward Icon - Moves to the image just after the one currently displayed.
Next Segment Icon - Moves to the first image in the next recorded sequence.
Window Layout Icon - Number of window panes in the layout.
Clear Window Icon - Clears the Video Manager of all cameras currently being viewed.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-35
Hardware Features
Video Manager Features
The Video Manager offers a number of built-in features which allows the operator to control the cameras without having to leave the Fusion environment.
PTZ Control
If the camera has PTZ (pan, tilt, and zoom) capability, the controls can be accessed from within the Video
Manager.
Many PTZ cameras may be controlled simply by pointing and clicking inside the images from the camera. If a set of crosshairs is present when placing the mouse pointer over the images from a PTZ camera, pointand-click control is supported for the camera.
To control a camera:
1. Drag the desired camera over to the Video Manager.
2. In the window with the camera, click the center of the desired location.
The camera will move to the desired location.
To zoom a camera:
1. Drag the desired camera over to the Video Manager.
2. In the window with the camera, click and hold down the left mouse button.
A meter will appear on the screen.
3. With the left mouse held down, select the Zoom Level and release the mouse button.
The camera will zoom to the selected level. Selecting a zoom level of 0% will return the camera to a whole image view.
Clear All Windows
The Clear All Windows feature allows the operator to remove the cameras from the Video Manager.
1. Click the button on the Video Manager toolbar.
The windows will clear of all live camera views and/or any recorded video.
Page 8-36 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Recalling from the Events and Alarms Grids
The camera can be viewed from both the Events and Alarms Grids in conjunction with the activity.
1. Right-click in the Event or Alarm Grid.
2. Select Hardware / Launch Camera from the resulting menu.
The DNA Video Window appears.
Use the Video Manager toolbar to review the recalled video. For more information on viewing video, see page 8-35.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-37
Hardware Features
NOTES:
Page 8-38 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Direct Commands
Direct commands can be used to link various commands together so that multiple items can be controlled at once. A custom button can be created that is linked to the direct commands.
For instance, a user may create a button that will directly unlock a specific door. The user can place the button on a toolbar and then place it in the header area for convenient access.
There are 2 parts to creating a user-defined button:
● Creating the Direct Command
● Adding the command to a toolbar
Creating a Direct Command
1. Select Hardware / Direct Commands / Add from the Main Menu.
The User Commands Editor will display.
2. Enter a name (short description) for the command in the User Command Title field.
3. If desired, select the Password Protect checkbox.
If this option is checked, the user will be prompted to enter their DNA Fusion password before the command will be executed.
4. Select the Add button.
The Add Direct Command Editor will open.
If a ASSA Hardware Direct Command will be added, click the drop down arrow and select the Add ASSA based Hardware option from the menu.
5. Enter a Title for the command.
6. Select a desired option from the Command drop-down menu.
Depending on your selection, the remainder of the dialog will change.
7. Select the desired options from the Address and Operations drop-down lists.
If the command involves a Temporary Override or Sending Text to a Keypad, the user will need to configure other options. If the command refers to a control point, the On Time, Off Time, and Repeat options may be configured.
8. Click OK to save the command.
The command will appear in the User Commands Editor.
If needed, repeat steps 4-8 until all desired commands have been added.
9. Click OK to close the dialog.
The newly created Direct Command will appear in the Direct Command drop-down under the Hardware item on the Main Menu.
Direct Commands can be added to the toolbar for easy access. See page 8-40 for more information.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-39
Hardware Features
Executing a Direct Command
1. Select Hardware / Direct Commands from the Main Menu.
2. Select the desired command from the resulting menu.
Adding a Direct Command to a Toolbar
1. Click on the small down-arrow to the right of the Standard Toolbar and select Hardware in the Commands tab.
The Customize dialog box opens.
2. Select the Direct Command option from the Categories section.
3. Drag the Direct Command to the desired toolbar.
The button will appear on the selected toolbar.
4. Right-click on the button and select Button Appearance.
The Button Appearance dialog opens.
5. Select the Image and Text radio button.
6. Select the image for the button and click OK.
The new command will appear on the toolbar with the selected icon.
For more information on Customizing buttons, see Getting Started, page 2-9.
Page 8-40 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Hardware Properties
Site Properties
A site is defined as a collection of channels and controllers that communicate with a common driver. Think of a site as the location of the communicating hardware for a section or all of a given system.
Most installations will have only one site with multiple channels. Each site is basically a separate driver that communicates to the various channels and controllers.
● Number - Identification for the site.
● Status - Indicates online or offline status.
● Name - Site name.
● Location - Name of computer on which a given sites’s DNADrvr32 driver is residing.
● Port - Driver machine TCP/IP port used to establish communication with the site’s driver.
● Subcontrollers - Number of sub-controllers actively connected (online) for the site.
● Connection Type - Indicates the connection type to the site.
Local - Server Workstation
Remote - Client Workstation
Fusion User Manual Page 8-41
Hardware Features
Channel Properties
A channel is a defined virtual pathway determining a route of communication from the host to one or more SSPs. DNA Fusion can communicate with the controllers using either: Serial, Ethernet, or Modem communications.
● Site Number - Location of hardware (auto-populated).
● Channel ID - Designation for the channel.
● Description - Label for the channel.
● Channel Type - Method of communication connection. See page 3-6 for more information .
Ethernet (TCP/IP) - If desired, the following options can be changed the TLS Encryption option, the
SSP Rely Timeout or the TCP/IP Retry Count. Enter the IP Address in the SSP Properties dialog. See page 8-40 for more information.
Serial - Select the COM Port from the drop down list.
Dial In/Out - Select the Modem Name from the drop down list.
IP Client - Remote TCP/IP - Provides the ability for panels to connect to the Driver rather than the normal method of the driver connecting to the panel. Used in situations where the panels are behind a Hosted/Managed firewall. See page 3-xx in the Technical Installation Manual for more information.
● COM Port - Identifies the COM Port for serial connections to the controller.
● TLS Encryption - Determines if TLS Encryption is required or only if available.
● SSP Reply Timeout - SSP timeout in milliseconds. Recommended settings are 200-400 milliseconds for
Serial channels, 600-800 milliseconds for TCP/IP channels.
● TCP/IP Retry Count - Number of times the driver will re-attempt communication between the host and an SSP after an unsuccessful attempt. Recommended setting is 10,000-20,000 seconds. TCP/
IP Configurations only.
● Baud Rate - Rate of transmission to the SSP.
● Modem Name - Modem designation in the Control Panel. Dial In/Out Configurations only.
● RTS Mode - On/Toggle/Off/CTS-RTS Handshake
On - Fixes the state of the RTS pin to ON. This setting is used with RS-232 with Hardware
Handshake.
Toggle - Tells the port handler to set the RTS output to ON when data is being sent. This setting is used when the COMM port is used in half-duplex mode, such as 2-wire RS-485 connection.
Off - Fixes the state of the RTS pin to OFF. For instance, setting 0 is used with RS-232 without
Hardware Handshake.
CTS/RTS Handshake - Regulates communication based on the amount of traffic. This setting selects full hardware flow control. Hardware handshake is required if data transfer must be paused momentarily. Connections to the modems, terminal emulators (Lantronix), or connections at baud rates above 38,400 baud will require hardware flow control.
Page 8-42 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
SSP (Controller) Properties
The controller is the data gathering panel that makes local access decisions. The SSP also stores all information such as access levels, time schedules, and triggers and macros. Each setting is discussed in detail on the following pages.
Controller Properties
Attributes
● Site - Location of hardware (auto populated).
● SSP Number - Designation for the SSP.
● SSP Description - User defined description of the SSP-typically location or function related.
● Controller Type - Select the SSP type from the drop-down list.
It is important to select the correct controller type when configuring the controller.
Some boards have on-board subcontrollers that get added automatically.
● Use Encryption - If selected, data will be encrypted from the server to the SSP.
NOTE: Using encryption will cause the system to run about 30% slower.
● Home Page - A file associated with the controller that will open when the object goes into alarm.
● Download on Demand Exempt - If the driver has been configured to download personnel when they badge, selecting this checkbox will override the setting and personnel will be downloaded normally.
● Physical Address - Physical address defined by the SSP’s dipswitch settings. Typically only set on
SSP’s with a serial connection.
Controller Time Parameters
● GMT Offset - Number of hours offset from Greenwich Mean Time.
-5=Eastern Time
-6=Central Time
-7=Mountain Time
-7=Arizona
-8=Pacific Time
-9=Alaska
-10=Hawaii
● Time Schedule Set - Selected Time Schedule Set for this SSP. See page 5-7 for more information.
● Holiday Set - Selected Holiday Set for this SSP. See page 5-1 for more information.
● Use Daylight Savings - Check to automatically adjust for Daylight Savings Time.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-43
Hardware Features
● Edit Table - Opens the Daylight Savings Editor.
Add - Opens the Daylight Savings Date Editor. Up to 20 date pairs can be added in chronological order.
Remove - Removes the selected Daylight Savings entry.
Edit - Opens the Daylight Savings Date Editor.
Defaults - Loads the default Daylight Savings information.
● Host Response Time - If Host Verification is enabled in the Door/Advanced dialog (page 8-52), the SSP will report to the Host for access confirmation. This value is a timeout value for that decision. If the delay exceeds the value, the SSP will complete the access granted cycle.
Connection
● Connection Type - Connection type defined in the channel properties (auto populated).
TCP/IP Channels - For IP Channels, enter the controller’s IP Address.
Serial Channel - If Serial Channel, no further information is needed.
Dial In / Out Channel - If Dial In/Out Channel, enter the Phone Number. Remember to include any leading digits. A comma creates a pause.
● Poll Delay - Time between each poll from the tree host to the SSP (auto populated).
● Baud Rate - Speed at which the SSP communicates with the subcontrollers. (Dipswitches 6 and 7)
● Password - Sets a password in the SSP to permit communication. (Dipswitch 8)
● SSP Channel - Channel that the SSP is attached to on the Hardware Tree. (auto populated)
● Retry Count - Number of times a poll can fail before a panel is determined to be offline.
● Offline Time - The time between messages from the host prior to SSP offline condition. For dialup connections, this allows the SSP to hang up after the host breaks the connection.
Downstream Ports
● Port 1 Baud - Baud rate for Port 1.
● Port 2 Baud - Baud rate for Port 2; redundant port. (SSP-EP & SSP-E only)
Page 8-44 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Stored Quantities
Controller Memory
● Panel Memory - The amount of memory on the panel.
Offline Transaction Capacity
● Current Setting - The number of transactions held in memory before the controller discards firstcome/first-served transactions.
● Calculate - Automatically calculates the Current Settings number based on current flags and quantity amounts set below.
Controller Flags
If a feature is used, it must be stored in the controller in order for it to function properly.
● Store Issue Codes - Stores Issue Codes for cards. The Issue Code number is used with magstripe cards and indicates the number of times a card has been issued to the cardholder (i.e. as a replacement for a lost card). It is an internal number that is programmed on the card. See page 8-71 for card format information.
● Store APB Location - Stores the Anti-Pass Back locations.
● Store Activation Date - Stores the activation date. Prevents access prior to date set.
● Store Deactivation Date - Stores the deactivation date. Prevents access after set date.
● Support Timed Anti-Pass Back - Stores time of last entry for use with Anti-Pass Back. All Readers must be set up for Timed APB.
● Store Vacation Date - Stores dates for vacation. See page 7-12 for more information.
● Store Temporary Upgrade Date - Stores temporary access level. See page 7-27 for more information.
● Store Trigger Code - Stores trigger codes for a card.
● Store Use Limit - Stores use limit for a card. See page 7-33 for more information.
● Store Asset Code - Stores an asset code for a card.
Quantities
● Access Levels Per Card - Number of access levels that can be assigned per card for the selected SSP.
See Chapter 6: Access Levels for more information.
● Precision Access Levels - Number of precision access levels. See page 6-13 for more information on
Precision Access Levels.
● Access Levels - Number of access levels. Max. 255
Fusion User Manual Page 8-45
Hardware Features
● Triggers - Number of triggers to store. Default=128
● Macros - Number of macros to store. Default=128
● Time Schedules - Number of time schedules to store. (auto-populated)
● Holidays - Number of holidays to store. (auto-populated)
● Cards - Number of cards allowed in the controller.
● Secured Areas - Number of secured areas allowed in the controller.
● Unreported Transactions - Number of unreported transactions to log event. There will be an Event entry made when this number is exceeded. Can be used to trigger the SSP to dial back and report transactions.
Elevator Control
● Max Floors - Number of floors in the building.
● Max. per Cab - Maximum number of floors per cab. The number entered must be less than or equal to the Building Max.
● Floor Group Quantity - Set maximum number of elevator access levels per floor group.
● Edit Floor Names - Opens SSP Floors Setup dialog box, allowing names to be entered.
PIN and Duress Options
● PIN Digits to Store - Number of PIN digits to store. Used with a keypad reader.
● Card ID Size - Set card format.
● Duress Digit - Indicate the duress digit 0 through 9. Setting the Duress Digit to 0 indicates that the
Duress feature is not used.
● Duress PIN Mode - Add or Append the original PIN.
Add - If Add is selected, the duress would be issued when the cardholder adds the specified
Duress Digit to their original PIN. Only the last number of the PIN code will be changed.
Example: If the PIN Number is 1234 and the Duress Digit is set to 1, then the cardholder’s Duress PIN would be 1235 - cardholder’s original PIN 1234 + 1 = 1234.
If the Duress Digit is set to 6, then the cardholder’s duress PIN would be 1236 - cardholder’s original PIN 1234 + 6 = 1230.
If the Duress Digit is set to 2, then the cardholder’s duress PIN would be 1236 - cardholder’s
original PIN 1234 + 7 = 1231.
If the Add option is selected, care should be taken so that PIN codes do not overlap.
Append - If Append is selected, the duress would be issued when the cardholder inserts the
Duress Digit at the end of the cardholder’s original PIN code.
Example: If the PIN Number is 1234 and the Duress Digit is set to 1, then the cardholder’s Duress
PIN would be 12341 - cardholder’s original PIN 1234 with 1 inserted at the end = 12341.
If the PIN Number is 1234 and the Duress Digit is set to 6, then the cardholder’s Duress PIN would be 12346 - cardholder’s original PIN 1234 with 6 inserted at the end = 12346.
Page 8-46 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Cards & Dual Comm
Card Formats (Personnel)
● Card Formats 0-7 - Select a card format from the library. See page 8-71 for more information on setting up card formats.
● Host Macro - Select the Host Based Macro to execute.
● Edit - Opens the Host Based Macro edit dialog. See page 10-13 for more information on Host Based
Macros.
Alternate Ports
This section will be available only with the SSP-E.
● Enable - Enables the alternate ports when the communication is lost on the primary port.
● Connection Type - Alternate port connection type.
● Phone # - Phone number to dial if the alternate port is connected to a machine.
● Alternate Channel - Communication channel for the alternate port.
● Poll Delay - Time between polls on the alternate port.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-47
Hardware Features
NOTES:
Page 8-48 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Subcontrollers Properties
Subcontrollers are a series of circuit boards that communicate information about field devices like readers, motion detectors, etc., upstream to the SSP.
Sub-Controller
Address
● Site - Name of site defined in site properties. (auto-populated)
● SSP - Name of SSP attached to subcontroller. (auto-populated)
● Subcontroller (SIO) - Subcontroller address.
● Match Physical - Matches the physical address in the software with the dipswitch settings on the board. When selected, the SSP will attempt to communicate to the subcontroller on the next available address. See the Hardware Manual for dipswitch settings.
● Disable SIO - If checked, the subcontroller will be disabled.
● Description - User-defined description of the subcontroller; typically location or function related.
● Home Page - Home page to associate with the subcontroller.
Attributes
● Physical Address - Physical address as set on the dipswitches. This option will be greyed out when the
Match Physical option is selected and will automatically increase as subcontrollers are added to the system. See the Hardware Manual for dipswitch settings.
● 4-Wire Configuration - If checked, the 4-Wire RS-485 communications is ON.
● SSP Relay Channel - Indicates the port on that the subcontroller is using to communicate to the controller.
● SSP Send Channel - Reflects the SSP Reply Channel. (auto-populated)
● IP Addr - When the NSC-100 subcontroller is selected, the IP Addr field identifies the IP address that the subcontroller is assigned.
● MAC Addr - When the NSC-100 subcontroller is selected, the MAC Addr field identifies the subcontroller’s default MAC address.
Type/Preview
● Type - Drop-down list featuring different subcontrollers.
● Inputs - Number of inputs on the selected subcontroller. (auto-populated)
● Outputs - Number of outputs on the selected subcontroller. (auto-populated)
● Readers - Number of readers on the selected subcontroller. (auto-populated)
Alarm Text
Point specific alarm text that is displayed in the Alarm Grid when an alarm occurs.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-49
Hardware Features
Advanced
Advanced Properties
● Errors Before Offline - Number of consecutive communication errors before the subcontroller is determined to be offline.
● Alternate Message 1 - Change the alarm information for the cabinet tamper to a different message, allowing the utilization of the hardware point for another purpose.
● Alternate Message 2 - Change the alarm information for the power tamper to a different message, allowing the utilization of the hardware point for another purpose.
● Host Macro - Select the Host Based Macro to execute.
● Edit - Opens the Host Based Macro edit dialog. See page 10-13 for more information on Host Based
Macros.
● Reverse Polling on Inputs - Changes the order in which inputs are processed by the system. If selected, inputs will be processed from higher number to the lower number.
Continuations
● Continuation of Inputs (Elevator Setting) - If the number of floors selected exceeds the available inputs for a single controller, inputs will be taken from the next consecutive SIO. This allows you to jump/skip SIOs with continuation.
This is an advanced feature and modification should be avoided unless the operator has a through understanding of the ramifications.
● Continuation of Outputs (Elevator Setting) - If the number of floors selected exceeds the available outputs for a single controller, outputs will be taken from the next consecutive SIO. This allows you to jump/skip SIOs with continuation.
This is an advanced feature and modification should be avoided unless the operator has a through understanding of the ramifications.
Identification
● Serial Number - Reference Field Only: Stores the subcontroller serial number for future reference.
Page 8-50 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Door Properties
Access Control Model (ACM) perform two functions: it validates access requests and it manages and monitors the access point.
Common Properties
Address
● Site - Site number. (auto-populated)
● Controller - Name of controller defined in controller properties. (auto-populated)
● Door Number - Access Control Model #
● Door Type - Determines how the door function.
Normal - Door will operate as a regular access control door.
Muster - Door will operate as a muster point in addition to a regular access control door. See the
Muster Report Manual for more information.
Auto Activate - Door will operate as a regular access control door but if a badge is presented that has been designated a Auto Activate badge, the badge will be activated. See page 7-10 for more information.
Auto Deactivate - Door will operate as a regular access control door but if a badge is presented that has been designated a Auto Deactivate badge, the badge will be deactivated. See page 7-10 for more information.
Time and Attendance In - Door will operate as a regular access control door but if a badge is presented that has been designated a Time & Attendance badge, the data will be collected and stored in a separate table as the In Time. See the Time & Attendance manual for more information.
Time and Attendance Out - Door will operate as a regular access control door but if a badge is presented that has been designated a Time & Attendance badge, the data will be collected and stored in a separate table as the Out Time. See Time & Attendance manual for more information.
InfoReader - Works in conjunction with the InfoReader hardware.
● Situations... - Opens the Situation Level Manager Settings dialog for the associated door. See Chapter
9 for more information on Situation Manager.
Other
● Description - User defined description of the door that appears in the browser; typically location related.
● Home Page - Home page associated with the door that will open when the door goes into alarm.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-51
Hardware Features
Point Alarm Properties
● Alternate Priority - Selected Alarm Priority overrides the default Event specific priority set in DNA /
Administrative / Events & Alarms / Logging. See page 14-23 for more information.
● Security Level - Category designation. Allows administrator to restrict operator use.
● Do Not Load Home Page on Alarm - If associated door goes into alarm, the Home Page will not load.
● Alarm Media File - Door specific alarm file to be displayed when an alarm occurs.
● Alarm Text - Point specific alarm text to be displayed when an alarm occurs in addition to the alarm reason.
● Camera - Camera associated with the door; allowing it to be recalled in the Event Grid as well as in the Alarm Grid.
Page 8-52 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Door Objects
Door Parameters
● Type - Specifies type of door.
In & Out Door - Select this option when using Access Areas or Anti Passback. When selected, two readers will be assigned to the door.
Single Door - Assigns one reader to the door.
● Pre-Alarm Held - Number of seconds before door reports Door Held Pre-Alarm event/alarm causing an event to be generated prior to a Door Held alarm.
● LED Mode - LED operation.
● Held Time - Length of time an input will be ignored when it goes active during an access granted event. Indicates the number of seconds before door reports a Door Held event/alarm. This only applies to inputs that are specified as the Door Contact.
Reader
● Address - Specifies the reader address.
● Edit - Opens the Reader Properties dialog box. See page 8-61 for more information.
● Default Mode - Defines the normal state of the reader.
None - No reader is associated with the door.
Disabled - Disables the reader and the door remains locked with no REX capability.
Unlocked - Unlimited access mode.
Locked - No access is allowed but the door can be used from the inside, using the REX button.
Facility Code - Only the facility code is checked, for access authorization.
Card Only - Only the card number is checked, for access authorization.
PIN Code - Only the PIN code is checked, for access authorization.
Card and PIN - Both the card and PIN numbers are checked, for access authorization.
Card or PIN - Either the card or PIN numbers are checked, for access authorization.
● Offline Mode - Defines offline mode of the reader. Uses same settings as the Default Mode.
None - No reader is associated with the door.
Disabled - Disables the reader and the door remains locked with no REX capability.
Unlocked - Unlimited access mode.
Locked - No access is allowed but the door can be used from the inside, using the REX button.
Facility Code - Only the facility code is checked, for access authorization.
● Type - Specifies type of reader.
Normal
Keypad
Text Keypad
Fusion User Manual Page 8-53
Hardware Features
Contact
● Address - Specifies the address of the door contact.
● Edit - Opens the Edit dialog for this object. See page 8-63 for more information.
Request to Exit (REX)
● Address - Specifies the address of the REX.
● Edit - Opens the Edit dialog for this object. See page 8-63 for more information.
Strike
● Address - Specifies the address of the door strike.
● Edit - Opens the Edit dialog for this object. See page 8-67 for more information.
● Activation - Maximum seconds door will be unlocked when an Access Granted is received. Check code for your area.
● Mode - Defines how the door strike will act when door is opened.
No Impact on Strike - Opening the door or closing the door does not effect the Activation Timer.
Cut Short On Open - Strike Activation Timer is canceled and the Strike is re-engergized when the door is opened.
Cut Short On Close - Strike Activation Timer is canceled and the Strike is re-engergized when the door is closed after it has been opened.
Tailgate: Short When Opens - Strike activation timer is canceled and the Strike is re-engergized when the door is opened. In addition, the adjacent relay is pulsed for 1 second. Example: If the strike is assigned to 1.1.1.O1 then 1.1.1.O2 would be pulsed for one second.
Tailgate: Short When Closes - Strike activation timer is canceled and the Strike is re-engergized when the door is closed after it has been opened. In addition, the adjacent relay is pulsed for
1 second. Example: If the strike is assigned to 1.1.1.O1 then 1.1.1.O2 would be pulsed for one second.
ADA Settings
The following options are invoked for cardholders with the ADA Flag set in the Cardholder record. See page
7-10 in the Users Manual for more information.
● Strike Time - Number of seconds the strike will unlock if card is flagged as ADA.
● Held Time - Number of seconds before the door reports a Door Held alarm/event if card is flagged as ADA.
Page 8-54 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Advanced
Anti-Pass Back (APB) Settings
See Chapter 11 in the Users Manual for information on configuring Anti-Pass Back.
● Option - Type of Anti-Pass Back
Do not alter APB location - Anti-Pass Back is not in use.
Accept any location, change on entry - Accept any new location, change the users location to the current reader, and generate an anti-pass back violation for an invalid entry. (Area-based Soft
APB)
Check location, change on entry - Check user location, if a valid entry is made, change the user’s location to the new location. If an invalid entry is attempted, do not grant access. (Area-based
Hard APB)
Check last valid user - References the user’s card number and will not allow access to the same card number until either a different card is presented at the reader or the APB delay expires.
Requires Support Timed Anti-Pass Back be enabled in the SSP Properties / Stored Quantities dialog.
(Reader-based APB using the readers last user)
Check last ACR used, no location change - Disallows a cardholder to present his card to the same reader twice in a row. Once access is granted at the reader, the user will not be granted access at this same reader again until the user presents his card at another reader in the system or APB delay has expired. Requires Support Timed Anti-Pass Back be enabled in the SSP Properties / Stored
Quantities dialog. (Reader-based APB using the cardholders access history)
Check current location, change on entry - Similar to option #2, except that the APB delay will reset user’s area after the specified time. Requires Support Timed Anti-Pass Back be enabled in the
SSP Properties/Stored Quantities dialog. (Area-based APB)
● Delay - Number of minutes before APB resets. Only used in conjunction with APB options 3-5. Max. delay = 255 minutes
● From - The area number the user comes from.
● To - The area number the user enters.
Door Parameters
● Decrement Use Limit - This door decrements Use Limit associated with card.
● Require Use Limit > Zero - If use limit reaches 0, do not allow access.
● Set to Deny Duress - Denies access upon receiving a duress signal. PIN & Card only
● Log All Requests as Used - Assumes that the door was used and log all access requests as used Door
Used as soon as the request is granted. Not for use with Anti-Pass Back.
● Do NOT pulse on REX - Prohibits pulsing the door strike on REX cycle. Used for quiet exit.
● Filter Change of State - Filters all changes of state and displays only Open or Closed events.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-55
Hardware Features
● Require 2 Card Control - Requires two access credentials to be presented.
● Biometric Verification - Biometric hardware is being supported. This is an advanced feature and should be avoided unless the operator has a understanding of the ramifications.
● Enroll on Access - Biometric hardware is being supported and the system should record the biometric signature on the first presentation. This information will be used as the future reference.
● Grant If Host Offline - Access will be granted in the event the Host is not available. Works in conjunction with Host Verification.
● Host Verification - Host verification must be obtained prior to granting access. See page 8-39 Host
Response Time to set the timeout parameter.
● Enable Cypher Mode - Allows user to enter the card number through a keypad.
● Grant First Log Later - Grants access to the door and then logs the event; allows instant access to the door. Door Used/Not Used events are not logged until door is actually opened or timeout expires.
Access Granted events only.
● Wait for Missing Card - If an access request is denied due to “card not in file,” the reader is put into the wait state and waits for host response.
● Enable Door Forced 3 Second Filter - If selected, a Door Forced event will not be reported if the door is reopened within 3 seconds of closing after an Access Granted event.
● No Reset on Held Timer - If checked and an Access Granted is received and the door is opened and then on a subsequent card read happens, the shunt time will not start over.
● Enforce CARD before PIN - Requires the cardholder to badge before entering their PIN number.
Logging Based on Deny Violations
● Not in File: PIN only Mode - An event will be logged when an incorrect PIN is entered.
● Not in File: Cypher Mode - An additional event will be logged when an incorrect PIN (card number) is entered.
● Deactivate if Bad PIN - Deactivates the card if the number of attempts exceeds the stated quantity.
● Bad PIN: Card & PIN Mode - An additional event will be logged when an incorrect PIN is entered.
● Biometric Failures - An additional event will be logged when an biometric failure occurs.
● Violations - Number of violations to allow before event is logged.
● Reset Time - The amount of time before the count resets.
Secondary Request to Exit (REX)
● Address - Address of secondary REX.
● Edit - Opens the Edit dialog for this object.
Secondary (Biometric) Reader
● Address - Drop-down list of readers to select for Reader 2.
● Edit - Opens the Edit dialog for this object.
● Reader Type - Drop-down list of reader types to select for Reader 2.
Page 8-56 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Macros
Door Sounder
This option creates a trigger and macro based upon the selections.
● Address - Address of door sounder.
● Schedule - Drop-down list of the available time schedules.
● Sound On - Condition to activate the sounder.
Pre-Alarm Held
Held or Forced
Close
Open
● Sound Off - Conditions to deactivate the sounder.
Alarm Conditions
● Held Pre-Alarm / Schedule - Drop-down list of macros to activate when a Door Held Pre-Alarm message is received along with a drop-down list of time schedules.
● Forced or Held - Drop-down list of macros to activate when a Forced or Held message is received along with a drop-down list of time schedules.
Normal Conditions
● Host Macro - Select the Host Based Macro to execute.
● Edit - Opens the Host Based Macro edit dialog. See page 10-13 for more information on Host Based
Macros.
● Unlocked / Schedule - Drop-down list of macros to activate when a Door Unlocked message is received along with a drop-down list of time schedules.
● Open / Schedule - Drop-down list of macros to activate when a Door Open message is received along with a drop-down list of time schedules.
● Closed / Schedule - Drop-down list of macros to activate when a Door Closed message is received along with a drop-down list of the available time schedules.
● Locked / Schedule - Drop-down list of macros to activate when a Door Locked message is received along with a drop-down list of the available time schedules.
● Access Granted / Schedule - Drop-down list of macros to activate when an Access Granted message is received along with a drop-down list of the available time schedules.
● Access Denied / Schedule - Drop-down list of macros to activate when an Access Denied message is received along with a drop-down list of the available time schedules.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-57
Hardware Features
Follows Schedule
The Follows Schedule option provides a quick way to set up a door(s) to adhere to a specified time schedule and designated ACM modes. For more information, see page 8-7 for more information.
● Enable Door Follows Time Schedule for this door - Check the box to implement the Follow Time Schedule feature.
Time Schedule to Follow - Select the desired Time Schedule from the drop down list.
Reader Mode on Activate - Select the ACM Mode for the door when the specified time schedule becomes active.
Reader Mode on Deactivate - Select the ACM Mode for the door when the specified time schedule becomes inactive.
Page 8-58 Fusion User Manual
Elevator Properties
Hardware Features
The Elevators object must be checked in the Hardware Tree Properties for the object to
be visible in the tree. Right-click in the white space of the Hardware Tree select Tree
Properties from the menu and check Elevators under the All Objects Tree Items heading.
Switch tabs to refresh the view.
Common Properties
Address
● Site - Site number for the elevator (auto-populated)
● Controller - Controller for the elevator (auto-populated)
● Elevator Number - Number designation for the elevator.
● Door Type - Determines how the door function.
Normal - Door will operate as a regular access control door.
Muster - Door will operate as a muster point in addition to a regular access control door. See the
Muster Report Manual for more information.
Auto Activate - Door will operate as a regular access control door but if a badge is presented that has been designated a Auto Activate badge, the badge will be activated. See page 7-10 for more information.
Auto Deactivate - Door will operate as a regular access control door but if a badge is presented that has been designated a Auto Deactivate badge, the badge will be deactivated. See page 7-10 for more information.
Time and Attendance In - Door will operate as a regular access control door but if a badge is presented that has been designated a Time & Attendance badge, the data will be collected and stored in a separate table as the In Time. See the Time & Attendance Manual.
Time and Attendance Out - Door will operate as a regular access control door but if a badge is presented that has been designated a Time & Attendance badge, the data will be collected and stored in a separate table as the Out Time. See the Time & Attendance Manual.
InfoReader - Works in conjunction with the InfoReader hardware.
● Situations... - Opens the Situation Level Manager Settings dialog for the associated elevator. See Chapter
9 in the Users Manual for more information on Situation Manager.
Other
● Description - User defined description of the Elevator that appears in the browser; typically location related.
● Home Page - Home page associated with the Elevator that will open when the elevator goes into alarm.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-59
Hardware Features
Point Alarm Properties
● Alternate Priority - Selected Alarm Priority overrides the default Event specific priority set in DNA /
Administrative / Events & Alarms / Logging. See page 14-23 for more information.
● Security Level - Category designation. Allows administrator to restrict operator use.
● Do Not Load Home Page on Alarm - If associated elevator goes into alarm, the Home Page will not load.
● Alarm Media File - Elevator specific alarm file to be displayed when an alarm occurs.
● Alarm Text - Point specific alarm text to be displayed in the Alarm Grid when an alarm occurs in addition to the alarm reason.
● Camera - Camera associated with the elevator; allowing it to be recalled in the Event Grid as well as in the Alarm Grid.
Page 8-60 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Elevator Objects
Elevator Parameters
● Type - Specifies type of elevator.
Elevator Reader (No Feedback) - No floor selection information is passed to the SSP.
Elevator Reader (Floor Selectors) - Floor selection information will be sent to the SSP.
● Floor Quantity - Number of floors being controlled.
● Starting Floor - The starting floor for the elevator.
Reader
● Reader - Specifies the reader address.
● Edit - Opens the Reader Properties dialog box. See page 8-61 for more information.
● Default Mode - Defines the normal state of the reader.
● Offline Mode - Defines offline mode of the reader.
Inputs & Outputs
● First Input - The first input for the floor selectors. Grayed out if No Feedback is selected.
● First Relay - The first relay for the elevator relays.
● Selection Delay - The amount of time a cardholder has to select floor(s).
Floor Groups
See page 6-5 in the Users Manual for more information on floor groups.
● Override Mode - Used to unlock certain floors during a selected time schedule. When the time schedule is inactive, the floors will return to their default mode.
● Facility Code Mode - Indicates the floors that will available if the elevator enters Facility Code Mode.
This may be useful when commissioning a system and access levels have not been created/assigned.
● Off-line Mode - Specifies the floors that will be unlocked if the SSP (controller) loses communication with the reader subcontroller for the elevator. The subcontroller that holds the floor selector relays must stay online for this mode to activate.
Secondary (Biometric) Reader
● Reader 2 - Drop-down list of readers to select for Reader 2.
● Edit - Opens the Edit dialog for this object.
● Reader Type - Drop-down list of reader types to select for Reader 2.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-61
Hardware Features
NOTES:
Page 8-62 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Elevator Parameters
Attributes
● Default LED Mode - Drop-down list of LED Modes to select for default.
Anti-Pass Back (APB) Settings
See Chapter 11 in the Users Manual for information on configuring Anti-Pass Back.
● Option - Type of Anti-Pass Back
Do not alter APB location - Anti-Pass Back is not in use.
Accept any location, change on entry - Accept any new location, change the users location to the current reader, and generate an anti-pass back violation. (Area-based Soft)
Check location, change on entry - Check user location, if a valid entry is made, change the user’s location to the new location. If an invalid entry is attempted, do not grant access. (Area-based
Hard)
Check last valid user - References the user’s card number and will not allow access to the same card number until either a different card is presented at the reader or the APB delay expires.
Requires Support Timed Anti-Pass Back be enabled in the SSP Properties / Stored Quantities dialog.
(Reader-based using the readers last user)
Check last ACR used, no location change - Disallows a cardholder from presenting his card to the same reader twice in a row. Once access is granted at the reader, the user will not be granted access at the same reader again until the card is presented at another reader in the system or
APB delay has expired. Requires Support Timed Anti-Pass Back be enabled in the SSP Properties /
Stored Quantities dialog. (Reader-based using the cardholders access history)
Check current location, change on entry - Similar to option #2, except the APB delay will reset user’s area after the specified time. Requires Support Timed Anti-Pass Back be enabled in the SSP
Properties / Stored Quantities dialog. (Area-based)
● Delay - Number of minutes before APB resets. Only used in conjunction with APB options 3-5. Max. delay = 255 minutes
● From Area - The area number the user comes from.
● To Area - The area number the user enters.
Elevator Functions
● Decrement Use Limits - This door decrements Use Limit associated with card.
● Require Use Limit > Zero - If use limit reaches 0, do not allow access.
● Set to Deny Duress - Denies access upon receiving a duress signal. PIN & Card Mode only.
● Log All Access Requests as Used - Assume that the door was used and log all access requests as used
Door Used as soon as the request is granted. Not for use with Anti-Pass Back.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-63
Hardware Features
● Require 2 Card Control - Requires two access credentials to be presented.
● Biometric Verification - Biometric hardware is being supported. This is an advanced feature and should be avoided unless the operator has a understanding of the ramifications.
● Enroll on Access - Biometric hardware is being supported and the system should record the biometric signature on the first presentation. This information will be used as the future reference.
● Host Verification - Host verification must be obtained prior to granting access. See page 8-39, Host
Response Time, to set the timeout parameter.
● Grant If Host Offline - Access will be granted in the event the Host is not available. Works in conjunction with Host Verification.
● Enable Cypher Mode - Allows user to enter the card number through a keypad.
● Grant First Log Later - Grants access to the door and then logs the event; allows instant access to the door. Door Used/Not Used is not logged until door is actually opened or timeout expires. Access
Granted events only.
● Wait for Missing Card - If an access request is denied due to “card not in file,” the reader is put into the wait state and waits for host response.
Follows Schedule
The Follows Schedule option provides a quick way to set up a elevator(s) to adhere to a specified time schedule and designated ACM modes. See page 8-12 for more information.
● Enable Door Follows Time Schedule for this door - Check the box to implement the Follow Time Schedule feature.
Time Schedule to Follow - Select the desired Time Schedule from the drop down list.
Reader Mode on Activate - Select the ACM Mode for the elevator when the specified time schedule becomes active.
Reader Mode on Deactivate - Select the ACM Mode for the elevator when the specified time schedule becomes inactive.
Page 8-64 Fusion User Manual
Reader Properties
Hardware Features
Common Properties
Address
● Site - Site location for this reader. (auto-populated)
● Controller - Controller for this reader. (auto-populated)
● Sub-Controller - Sub-Controller for this reader. (auto-populated)
● Point/Reader - Point or reader number. (auto-populated)
● Type - Type of point. (auto-populated)
● Door ID - Door associated with the reader. 0 indicates that the reader has not been associated with a door. (auto populate)
Distribution / Other
● Description - User-defined description of the door; typically location related.
● Home Page - Home page associated with the reader.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-65
Hardware Features
Reader Properties
Reader Properties
● LED Configuration - Drop-down menu of the LED configurations.
● Keypad Mode - Drop-down menu of the keypad modes.
● Reader Type - Drop-down menu of the reader types.
Card Data Format
● Wiegand Pulses - Used with Proximity Readers.
● Trim Zero Bits - Used with most readers except Sensor Insertion or Dorado Readers. Trims the leading
0 bits from the card number.
● Format to Nibble Array - Used with Keypad Readers.
● Bi-directional Mag Decode - Used with Keypad Readers.
● Northern Mag - Used with Keypad Readers.
● CASI 1-Wire F2F - If checked, flags the reader as using CASI F2F output format.
Advanced Properties
● Host Based Macro - Select a Host Based Macro to associate with this reader.
● Edit - Opens the Host Based Macro Edit dialog box. See page 10-13 in the User Manual for more information.
Templates
● Template Name - Select a template to configure the reader.
● Description - Auto populated by the template.
● Application Notes - Auto populated by the template.
Page 8-66 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Input Point Properties
Input Points are connections on the subcontroller that sense whether a circuit is open or closed. They monitor door switches, request to exit (REX) buttons and motion detector contracts. They can also be used to monitor dry contacts from fire alarm panels, temperature and pressure alarms, etc.
Common Properties
Address
● Site - Site location for this input point. (auto-populated)
● Controller - Controller for this input point. (auto-populated)
● Sub-Controller - Sub-Controller for this input point. (auto-populated)
● Point/Reader - Point or reader number. (auto-populated)
● Type - Type of point. (auto-populated)
● ACM Number - ACM number for the reader. 0 indicates that the input has not been associated with a door. (auto populate)
● Situations... - Opens the Situation Level Manager Settings dialog for the associated point. See Chapter
9 in the Users Manual for more information on Situation Manager.
Distribution / Other
● Description - User defined description of the input point; typically location related.
● Home Page - Home page associated with the reader.
● Do Not Load Home Page on Alarm - If associated point goes into alarm, the Home Page will not load.
Alarm Properties
● Alarm Setting - Type of alarm setting for the input point.
Global Settings - If checked, uses the system default settings.
Local Settings - If checked, activates the Alarm States settings on the right.
Never an Alarm - If checked, a change in state will be reported only in the Event Log.
● Alarm States - If Local Setting was selected, check the states to report as an alarm.
Active - If checked, reports alarm if point is active.
Faults - If checked, reports alarm if point fault is reported.
Comm Loss - If checked, reports alarm if the subcontroller is offline.
● Alternate Priority - Selected Alarm Priority overrides the default Event specific priority set in DNA /
Administrative / Events & Alarms / Logging. See page 14-23.
● Alarm Media File - Output specific alarm file to be displayed when an alarm occurs.
● Alarm Text - Point specific alarm text to be displayed when an alarm occurs in addition to the alarm reason.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-67
Hardware Features
NOTES:
Page 8-68 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Input Properties
Input Point Properties
● Circuit Type - Defines the circuit when in the normal state.
Normally Closed - No End of Line Termination (EOL)
Normally Open - No EOL
Normally Closed (1K Safe, 2K Alarm) - With EOL
Normally Open (2K Safe, 1K Alarm) - With EOL
Custom Table 1-3
● Sensitivity - Number of consecutive input scans before a change of state is reported. A low sensitivity setting (2) requires the system to receive this number of consecutive readings from an input prior to reporting a change of state. A high sensitivity setting (15) will require the input to report 15 consecutive readings without deviation before the system will report an alarm.
Sensitivity is measured in units where each unit is reported to the SSP approximately every 17 milliseconds. Example: With a sensitivity setting of 4, the input will have to report the same status
(open, close, fault, etc.) 4 times before a change of state will be reported.
Sensitivity values should never be set lower than 2 since noise and other factors may cause the system to report numerous changes in state.
Recommended setting for REX is 2, and 4-6 for standard inputs. Use higher numbers only if you are receiving noise induced fault reports.
● Hold Time - Amount of time, in seconds, that an input will be ignored if activated, once reset.
Generally used in association with a motion detector or other device capable of reporting many alarms per second. Max. value=15 seconds
● Log Specification - Logging parameters specific to the point.
Log All Changes - Logs all change of state events.
Do not log contact COS (change of state) if masked - Fault to fault change of state events will be logged but change of state events will not be logged if they are masked.
No masked contact COS + no fault to fault COS - Contact change of state will not be logged if masked and no fault to fault changes.
● Latching Mode - Type of latching mode. Only used with configuring entry and exit delays common with secured areas.
Normal - Select Normal when no entry or exit delay is used.
Non-Latching - Generates an alarm only if the point is still in alarm after the entry time has expired. If the door is opened and immediately closed (within the entry delay), the alarm would not be generated. A event will be generated when the change of state happens, but no alarm would be received. If selected, an Entry and Exit should be set.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-69
Hardware Features
Latching - The contact closure will generate an alarm unless the point is masked within the entry delay time. If the door is opened, regardless if the door is shut again, an alarm will be generated
(unless the monitor point is masked). This is the preferred setting. If selected, an Entry and Exit should be set.
● Entry Delay - Warning period to allow for disarming of system. If the system is not disarmed within the entry delay, an alarm will be generated. Available if Non-Latching or Latching is selected for the
Latching Mode.
● Exit Delay - Amount of time to delay before removing the mask to allow for arming of the system.
Once the exit delay has expired, the mask is removed and the point is considered armed. Available if Non-Latching or Latching is selected for the Latching Mode.
Advanced Features
● Camera - Enables camera menu item in Event/Alarm grid context menus. When enabled, the operator may click a menu item to display camera view browser.
● Host Based Macro - Select a Host Based Macro to associate with this reader.
● Edit - Opens the Host Based Macro Edit dialog box. See page 10-13 in the Users Manual for more information.
Templates
● Template Name - Select a template to configure the reader.
● Description - Auto-populated by the template.
● Application Notes - Auto-populated by the template.
Page 8-70 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Output Point Properties
Output Points are connections on the subcontrollers that act as a switch controlled by the SSP. They are typically used to control strikes (locks) but can also be used to control elevators, lighting, etc.
Common Properties
Address
● Site - Site location for this input point. (auto-populated)
● Controller - Controller for this input point. (auto-populated)
● Sub-Controller - Sub-Controller for this input point. (auto-populated)
● Point/Reader - Point or reader number. (auto-populated)
● Type - Type of point. (auto-populated)
● ACM Number - Access Control Model number for the reader. 0 indicates that the output has not been associated with a door. (auto populate)
● Situations... - Opens the Situation Level Manager Settings dialog for the associated point. See Chapter
9 in the Users Manual for more information on Situation Manager.
Distribution / Other
● Description - User defined description of the input point; typically location related.
● Home Page - Home page associated with the reader.
● Do Not Load Home Page on Alarm - If associated point goes into alarm, the Home Page will not load.
Alarm Properties
● Alarm Setting - Type of alarm setting for the input point.
Global Settings - If checked, uses the system default settings.
Local Settings - If checked, activates the Alarm States settings on the right.
Never an Alarm - If checked, a change in state will be reported only in the Event Log.
● Alarm States - If Local Setting was selected, check the states to report as an alarm.
Active - If checked, reports alarm if point is active.
Faults - If checked, reports alarm if point fault is reported.
Comm Loss - If checked, reports alarm if the subcontroller is offline.
● Alternate Priority - Selected Alarm Priority overrides the default Event specific priority set in DNA /
Administrative / Events & Alarms / Logging. See page 14-23 for more information.
● Alarm Media File - Output specific alarm file to be displayed when an alarm occurs.
● Alarm Text - Point specific alarm text to be displayed when an alarm occurs in addition to the alarm reason.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-71
Hardware Features
Output Properties
Output Properties
● Default Mode - Specify if the relay coil is energized or de-energized in the normal state.
● Momentary Time - Amount of time that the relay will activate when given a momentary command.
Check local code.
Advanced Features
● Host Based Macro - Select a Host Based Macro to associate with this reader.
● Edit - Opens the Host Based Macro Edit dialog box. See page 10-13 in the Users Manual for more information.
Page 8-72 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
DVR Properties
DVR integration provides a seamless interface between DNA Fusion and the digital video recorder. The integration allows users to view live or recorded video on the network providing quick access to video from alarms generated in the system. The NVR/DVR integration is a licensed feature.
All DVRs are managed in the DVR Manager Browser. For information on managing DVRs, see page 8-29.
There are numerous NVR/DVRs that are compatible with the DNA Fusion system. Options vary by NVR/DVR manufacturer.
Server Properties
● Description - User defined description of the DVR server. Typically location related.
● IP Address - The DVR server’s IP address on the network.
● User Name - The Administrator User Name for the DVR server.
● Password - The Administrator Password for the DVR server.
● Authentication Mode - Must match the Authentication Mode setting on the DVR server.
● Server GMT - The GMT setting for the location of the DVR server.
● DVR Type - Identifies the type of DVR server.
DVR Camera Properties
Once cameras have been associated with the DVR server, the Camera Properties will be available by expanding the DVR server and opening the individual camera.
● Description - User defined description of the DVR camera. Typically location related.
● Camera Identifier - Description pulled from the DVR server. Do not change this field.
● Pre-alarm - Sets the time to view in advance of the event or alarm.
● Post - Sets the time to continue view after the event or alarm.
● Has PTZ Control - Select the PTZ Control checkbox to identify the camera has pan, tilt and zoom capability.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-73
Hardware Features
IP Camera Properties
IP cameras may be added to the system allowing the operator to monitor the cameras view from the application.
● Displayed Name - Enter a name for the camera.
● URL or IP Address - The URL or IP Address where the camera is located.
Page 8-74 Fusion User Manual
Hardware Features
Card Formats
The Card Formatter defines a format for the SSP to take the raw data and format it into fields for access request processing. Multiple formats allow the use of badges with different facility codes, and/or different data lengths.
Creating a Card Format
1. Right-click on the SSP in the Hardware Browser.
2. Select Card Formats from the menu.
The Card Formats Dialog box opens.
3. Select the option below and continue.
● New Card Format
● Edit Card Format
● Copy Card Format
If the Issue Code feature will be utilized, enter the Issue Code Bit Quantity and specify
the Start Bit in the Issue Code Qty and Start fields.
Creating a New Card Format
1. Click the New button.
2. Enter a name in the Description field.
3. Enter the Facility Code.
4. Select the Card Format from the drop-drop list.
5. Enter the desired values in the Card Format fields.
6. Click the Save button to save the configuration.
The new format is added to the Description drop-down.
Copying a Card Format
1. Select the Format from the drop down and click the Copy button.
2. Change the name in the Description field.
3. Enter the correct Facility Code and/or change any desired values.
4. Click the Save button to save the configuration.
The new format is added to the Description drop-down.
Editing a Card Format
1. Click the Edit button.
2. Edit the desired values in the Card Format fields.
3. Click the Save button to save the changes.
Fusion User Manual Page 8-75
Hardware Features
Gathering Card Format Information
DNA allows you to easily identify the bit format and the facility code for an access credential.
1. Present the card to a reader.
2. Open the Event Grid and look at the Event Data for the Access Denied: Invalid Card Format event to determine the bit format.
3. Assign the generic card format that contains the same bit structure as the card to the SSP.
See Assigning a Card Format above.
In the example, the HID 26 bit with Facility Code would be selected.
4. Present the same card to the reader a second time.
5. Check the Event Data for the Access Denied: Facility Code event to determine the Facility Code (FC).
6. Create the card format by following the instructions on page 8-71 for Copying a Card Format.
7. Assign the newly created card format to the SSP.
See Assigning a Card Format below.
Be sure to overwrite or delete the generic card format added in step 3.
8. Download the changes to the SSP.
Assigning a Card Format to the SSP
Up to eight card formats may be active simultaneously for each SSP. Multiple card formats allow the use of facility codes or different data lengths, as is frequently encountered in large corporate systems.
1. Right-click on the SSP in the Hardware Browser.
2. Select Properties from the menu.
The Controller Properties dialog box opens.
3. Select the Cards and Dual Comm tab from the menu.
4. Select the formats (0-7) from the Card Formats drop-down.
5. Click OK to save the formats to the controller.
Page 8-76 Fusion User Manual
Situation Manager
9
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
Setting the Situation Level
Configuring the Situation Manager
Configuring Hardware
Authorizing Operators
Situation Manager allows a system administrator to change the settings of their entire access control system in a single step. The administrator can choose between five security configurations matched to the U.S.
Department of Homeland Security’s threat advisory levels allowing building security to be reconfigured at the click of a button.
System parameters and business rules can be quickly changed with one click using Situation Manager. The following objects can be affected through Situation Manager:
● Doors & Elevators (ACMs)
● Inputs & Outputs
● Secured Areas
● Access Areas
● Time Schedules
● Card Access
Setting the Situation Level
Five situation levels are selectable, each of which can be given its own name and color code, and customized to provide a different level of security. Changing the Situation Manager Level can determine the cardholders who are allowed to gain access, the areas they may access, and the operation of access control equipment around the building.
To use Situation Manager:
1. Open the Situation Manager Secondary Toolbar by right-clicking in the grey area next to the Standard
Toolbar and selecting Situation Level Manager.
The Situation Manager Toolbar opens. You can move the toolbar anywhere on the DNA desktop. See page 2-5 for more information on Secondary Toolbars.
2. Click on the corresponding color coded icons to change the Situation Manager Level.
All settings for the related level will follow their configuration.
Fusion User Manual Page 9-1
Situation Level Manager
Configuring Situation Manager
DNA administrators can customize each security configuration based on a variety of options. For example, in a “Warning” environment, all cardholders could access a particular door using their cards only but in an
“Alert” environment, only select cardholders could access a particular door using their Card & PIN.
Five color coded threat levels are selectable; each can be configured with a name and customized to provide a different level of security.
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Properties from the Main Menu.
The Host Settings dialog opens.
2. Select Situation Manager from the Host Settings menu list.
The Situation Manager opens.
3. Enter a Name and Description for the corresponding color.
4. If desired, select a Direct Command to associate with the situation level.
The Direct Command will be fired after all the other commands have executed.
5. If desired, select a Host Based Macro to associate with Situation Manager.
A Host Based Macro can be set to send emails or effect a hardware object when situation levels are changed. Only one Host Based Macro can be assigned to the Situation Manager and it will be executed before any other commands are fired. See page 10-13 for more information on Host Based Macros.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
Page 9-2 Fusion User Manual
Situation Level Manager
Enabling Hardware Objects
Doors & Elevators
Each door can be configured to change reader modes based on the Situation Manager settings. See page
8-47 for Door Properties and page 8-55 for Elevator Properties.
1. Right-click on the Door or Elevator in the Hardware Browser and select Properties.
The Objects Properties dialog will open.
2. Click the Situations... button.
The Situation Level Manager Settings dialog opens.
3. Check the Enable Situations checkbox.
4. Select the Situation Level State for each Situation Level.
● Disabled - Disables the selected object.
● Unlocked - Unlocks the selected object.
● Locked - Locks the selected object.
● Facility Code - Matches the facility code to approve entry.
● Card Only - Requires a card with the correct format be presented.
● PIN Only - Requires a PIN code be entered to gain access.
● Card & PIN - Requires that a card be presented and a PIN code entered to gain access.
● Card or PIN - Requires either a card be presented or a PIN code be entered to gain access.
5. Click OK to save the settings.
6. Click OK to close the Properties dialog.
Input Points
1. Right-click on the Input object in the Hardware Browser and select Properties.
The Input Properties dialog will open. See page 8-63 for Input Properties.
2. Click the Situations... button.
The Situation Level Manager Settings dialog opens.
3. Check the Enable Situations checkbox.
4. Select the Situation Level Setting for each Situation Level.
● Armed - Arms the point.
● Disarmed - Disarms the point.
5. Click OK to save the settings.
6. Click OK to close the Properties dialog.
Output Points
1. Right-click on the Output object in the Hardware Browser and select Properties.
The Output Properties dialog will open. See page 8-67 for Output Properties.
2. Click the Situations... button.
The Situation Level Manager Settings dialog opens.
3. Check the Enable Situations checkbox.
4. Select the Situation Level Setting for each Situation Level.
● Active - Activates the point.
● Inactive - Deactivates the point.
5. Click OK to save the settings.
6. Click OK to close the Properties dialog.
Fusion User Manual Page 9-3
Situation Level Manager
Secured Areas
1. Right-click on the Secured Area in the Hardware Browser and select Properties.
The Secured Areas Properties dialog will open. See page 12-3 for Secured Areas Properties.
2. Select Area Points from the Secured Areas menu list.
The Area Points dialog appears.
3. Click the Situations... button.
The Situation Level Manager Settings dialog opens.
4. Check the Enable Situations checkbox.
5. Select the Situation Level Setting for each Situation Level.
● Armed - Arms the Secured Area.
● Disarmed - Disarms the Secured Area.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
7. Click OK to close the Properties dialog.
Access Areas
1. Right-click on the Access Area in the Hardware Browser and select Properties.
The Objects Properties dialog will open. See page 11-1 for Access Areas Properties.
2. Click the Situations... button.
The Situation Level Manager Settings dialog opens.
3. Check the Enable Situations checkbox.
4. Select the Situation Level Setting for each Situation Level.
● Enabled - Enables the Access Area.
● Disabled - Disables the Access Area.
5. Click OK to save the settings.
6. Click OK to close the Properties dialog.
Page 9-4 Fusion User Manual
Situation Level Manager
Configuring Time Schedules
Time Schedules can be customized to response to Situation Level changes. Keep in mind that when a time schedule is controlled, it can effect cardholder access as well door schedules. See page 5-1 for Time
Schedules Properties.
1. Right-click on the Time Schedule in the Time Schedules Browser and select Properties.
The Time Intervals dialog opens.
2. Click the Situations... button.
The Situation Level Manager Settings dialog opens.
3. Check the Enable Situations checkbox.
4. Select the Situation Level Setting for each Situation Level.
● Temporary On - Temporarily sets the time schedule mode to ON. The next time interval edge will return the schedule to its normal time-based state.
● Temporary Off - Temporarily sets the time schedule mode to OFF. The next time interval edge will return the schedule to its normal time-based state. .
● Override On - Sets the time schedule mode to ON overriding the time-based control. Basically the
Scan Mode is being overridden and time intervals have no effect when this command is used.
● Override Off - Sets the time schedule mode to OFF overriding the time-based control. Basically the
Scan Mode is being overridden and time intervals have no effect when this command is used.
● Resume - Puts the time schedule into the state as defined time-based rules. Use this command to remove the temporary clear/set and override clear/set commands. This command will return the system to its “normal” state.
● Refresh - Logs the current time schedule modes into the transaction log. Use this command to test triggers that are activated based on time schedule events.
5. Click OK to save the settings.
6. Click OK to close the Time Intervals dialog.
Fusion User Manual Page 9-5
Situation Level Manager
Establishing Card Access
A cardholder’s card can be deactivated when certain conditions are present and then reactivated at the appropriate time. See page 7-11 for information on opening cardholder’s records.
1. Open the Personnel Record for the selected cardholder.
2. Select the Card tab.
The Card Information dialog opens.
3. Click the Situations... button.
The Situation Level Managers Settings dialog opens.
4. Check the Enable Situations checkbox.
5. Select the Situation Level Setting for each Situation Level.
● Enabled - Activates the Cardholder’s card and allows access to the facility.
● Disabled - Deactivates the Cardholder’s card and disallows access to the facility.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
7. Close the Personnel Record.
Page 9-6 Fusion User Manual
Situation Level Manager
Configuring Operator Privileges
It is important to set the operator profiles so that certain operators have access to change Situation Manager level.
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Operator Maintenance / Operator Privileges from the Main Menu.
Or
Click
the DNA Properties button on the Standard Toolbar and select Edit Operators.
The Operator Privileges Editor dialog box appears.
2. Select the Operator Profiles link.
The Operator Profiles dialog box will open.
3. Select the desired Operator Profile from the drop down.
4. Expand the Actions item and place a check next to the Situation Manager options the profile will have access to change.
5. Click Apply Changes to save the configuration.
If an operator is logged in when a profile is changed, the changes will take effect the next time the operator logs into DNA.
!
The Apply Changes button must be selected in order for changes to be saved. If not,
changes will be lost when selecting another operator or closing the dialog box.
Fusion User Manual Page 9-7
Situation Level Manager
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 9-8 Fusion User Manual
Triggers & Macros
10
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
√
Creating Macros
Creating Triggers
Adding Macros to Doors
Creating Host Based Macros
Adding Host Based Macros to Hardware
Triggers and Macros add a tremendous amount of dimension and flexibility to the system by allowing the operator to set up automated actions to occur based on certain system events.
Creating triggers and macros is easy once you have determined what it is you want to happen within the system. Think of triggers and macros as if/then statements; i.e., If a specific event occurs in the system
(trigger), then a defined action will occur (macro).
Triggers provides a means for event based control. Macros are a canned list of commands that an operator might perform. The trigger defines the event for which a chain of actions is desired.
The macro executes the list of actions. Together they provide event based control and allow for customization of DNA.
In this chapter you will learn how to configure macros and then how to define event triggers to activate those macros based on user defined criteria.
Macros
We discuss the building of macros before triggers since macros are referenced via a drop-down list in the triggers module. In other words, while the creation of either a macro or a trigger can be accomplished first, usually a macro will be created first in order to complete the creation of a functioning trigger.
A macro is a defined set of commands that perform various actions within the system. The number of commands is limited by the available memory.
Examples of a macro:
● A command to activate or deactivate an output relay on a sub-controller.
● A command to unlock a door based on a given time schedule.
● A command to arm or disarm a monitor point.
Creating a Macro
1. Click the Triggers & Macros button on the Standard Toolbar.
The Triggers and Macros Browser opens.
2. Expand the Macros object and right-click on the appropriate SSP icon in the browser and select Add Macro from the resulting menu.
!
Macros are created and downloaded to the specific SSP that contains objects associated to the macro. It is important to select the appropriate
SSP when adding a macro to the system.
The Macro Editor is displayed.
Fusion User Manual Page 10-1
Triggers & Macros
3. Enter a Description for the macro.
4. If desired, select a Host Based Macro from the drop-down list or click the Edit button to create a new host macro based on a Macro.
If Edit is selected, continue to page 10-13 for more information.
5. Click the Add button to associate commands with the macro.
Macro commands are executed in the order they are added or by the Action Type associated with the command. An infinite number of commands can be associated with the macro.
The Macros Editor appears.
6. Select the desired Command from the drop-down list of available commands.
Depending on the Command selection, the field(s) below will change to allow for configuration of the command.
Use the information in the table on page 10-3 to complete the setup based on your selection.
7. Select the Object to control.
This field will depend on the Command selected in step 6.
8. If desired, select an Action Type from the drop-down list.
Since more than 1 macro command can be added to a macro, the action type specifies which macro commands will fire based on the action type referenced in the trigger. The Action Type field in the Macro relates to the Command field in the Trigger
(see page 10-7) for more information.
There are four Action Types (Type 1 - 4) which allows the system to execute only one type per trigger.
For instance, both Unlock and Card Only mode changes can be placed under a single macro with each designated as a different Action Type; two triggers would link to the same macro but reference the appropriate Action Type.
9. Click OK to save the macro command.
The macro command will appear in the Triggers and Macros Browser.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 until all Macro Commands have been added.
11. Click the OK button to save the Macro.
12. Create a Trigger to execute the desired Macro Commands.
See page 10-5 for information on creating a Trigger.
Macro command Action Types are conditions, and/or states, attributed to a given
command. If unfamiliar with this functionality, use Type 1, which is the default. Assigning
action types to a macro command is an advanced feature of DNA.
Page 10-2 Fusion User Manual
Triggers & Macros
C
Monitor Point
Control Point
ommand
Reader
Door
Elevator
Macro Command
Set Trigger Variable
Time Schedule Control
Reader LED Control
Issue Free Pass
Dialout to HOST
HEX Output to SIO Port
MPG
Access Area
Clear Reader Buffer
Temp Reader LED Command
Select
ACM
Display Text on LCD Reader
o
bjeCt
a
dditional
F
ields
Select
Monitor Point
● If Pulse, enter On Time
Select
Control Point
● If Repeating Pulse, enter On Time, Off
Time & Repeat
Select ACM
Select
ACM
Select
Elevator
Select
Floor
Select
Macro
Select
Command
Select
Trigger Variable Select Variable Setting
Select Time Schedule Select Command
Select
ACM
Select
LED Index
Select
Access Area
Enter
Number
● Select Baud Rate
Select
SIO ● Select SIO Channel
Select
MPG
Select
Access Area
Select ACM
● Enter HEX Data
● If Test Armed, select Command
● If Text Active, select Command
If Set Occupancy, enter Occupancy
Select ACM
● Select Color On
● Select Color Off
● Select Ticks On
● Select Ticks Off
● Select Repeat
● Select Beeps
● Select Text Type
● Select Text Duration
● Select Text Tone
● Select Tone Duration
● Select Text Row
● Select Text Column
● Enter Text
Dial Out to Host using Alternate
Port
Delay Command
A delay command will pause for the specified amount of time before it continues to the next macro command.
Enter Number
Select
Delay
A delay command will only accept a Abort or
Resume trigger command; all others are ignored. See page 10-7.
Fusion User Manual Page 10-3
Triggers & Macros
NOTES:
Page 10-4 Fusion User Manual
Triggers & Macros
Triggers
Triggers are defined as events that occur in the access control system, which cause other actions (macros) to take place. A trigger can be created to detect any number of specific transactions (events). Once the transaction is detected, the time schedule is evaluated. If the time schedule is active, the trigger will proceed.
Adding a Basic Trigger
To add a trigger to the system:
1. Click the Triggers & Macros button on the Standard Toolbar.
The Triggers and Macros Browser opens.
2. Expand the Triggers object and right-click on the appropriate SSP icon in the browser and select Add
Trigger from the resulting menu.
The Triggers Editor dialog will open.
3. Enter a Description for the trigger.
4. Select the Trigger Event from the drop-down list.
Depending on the Trigger Event selection, the fields below will change to allow for advanced configuration of the trigger including Arguments, Variables and Trigger Codes. Advanced configuration is optional.
See page 10-6 for information on Arguments and see page 10-9 for Trigger Code information. More information can be found on Trigger Variables on page 10-10.
5. Select the Object to assign to the event.
Use the information above to complete the setup based on your selection.
NOTE: If None is selected for the ACM, any ACM used will execute the trigger.
6. Select a Time Schedule from the drop-down list.
This schedule will limit the time that the trigger will execute.
7. Select the Macro to associate with the trigger.
8. If needed, select the Command (Action Type) from the drop-down list.
The Command field specifies the macro command to execute. In most cases, the default command
(Execute Type 1 (Default) should be selected unless multiple commands are associated to the selected macro (see page 10-3 for more information).
● Execute Type 1 (Default) = Executes Type 1 (Default) macro commands
● Execute Type 2 - 4 = Executes the specified Macro Type
● Abort Execution = Aborts a delayed macro
● Resume Type 1 - 4 = Resumes the specified delayed Macro Type
9. Click OK to save the trigger.
10. Right-click on the Trigger and select Download from the menu.
Page 10-5 Fusion User Manual
Triggers & Macros
Advanced Configuration Options
Depending on the Trigger Event selection, the fields below will change to allow for advanced configuration of the trigger including Arguments, Variables and Trigger Codes. Advanced configuration is optional.
There are two types of Arguments that may be configured in the Triggers window:
● Safe Message - Selecting a Safe Message within a trigger requires the specified condition to be present before the trigger will fire.
● Alarm Message - Selecting a Alarm Message within a trigger requires the specified alarm condition to be meet before the trigger will fire.
Trigger Codes may also be enabled on a trigger and allows the operator to designate a specific card to execute the trigger. See page 10-9 for more information.
Another option for certain triggers is Trigger Variables. Trigger Variables create a “toggle” effect. See page 10-
10 for more information on trigger variables.
Fusion User Manual Page 10-6
Triggers & Macros
t
rigger
e
vent
o
bjeCt
a
rguments
& v
ariables
(P
age
10-9)
Area: All Options
Biometric: All Options
Control Point: Activated
Control Point: Deactivated
Door: Access
Door: Alarm
Door: APB
Select
Area & Schedule
Select Address & Schedule
Select
Point & Schedule
Select
Point & Schedule
Select
Safe Message:
● Status is now inactive (was active)
● Status is now active (was inactive)
● Last state was ALARM
● Last state was FAULT
● Last state was ALARM or FAULT
Select
ACM & Schedule Trigger Code Optional (see page 10-9)
Select
Alarm Message:
Select ACM & Schedule
● Forced Open only (held following...)
● Held Open only (only after normal...)
● Both (Forced then held open)
● Held open, regardless of forced...
● Either (forced or held open, only one...)
● Trigger on any reader alarm
Select ACM & Schedule Trigger Code Optional (see page 10-9)
Select
Safe Message:
Door: Door Closed
Door: Duress
Door: Fault
Monitor Point
Monitor Point: Inactive
Monitor Point Group
Reader
REX
SSP
SSP: Controller Local MP Alarm
Select ACM & Schedule
● Held open pre-alarm only
● Forced open is being cancelled
● Held open is being cancelled
● Held or forced is being cancelled
● Door Closed
● Door Opened
Select
ACM & Schedule Trigger Code Optional (see page 10-9)
Select
ACM & Schedule
Select
Point & Schedule
Select
Safe Message:
● Status is now inactive (was active)
Select
Point & Schedule
● Status is now active (was inactive)
● Last state was ALARM
● Last state was FAULT
● Last state was ALARM or FAULT
Select
MPG & Schedule
Select
ACM & Schedule
Select ACM & Schedule
Select
SSP & Schedule
Select
SSP & Schedule
Select Local Source:
● Cabinet Tamper or Power Fault
Page 10-7 Fusion User Manual
Triggers & Macros
t
rigger
e
vent
o
bjeCt
SSP: Controller Local MP Secure Select SSP & Schedule
a
rguments
& v
ariables
(P
age
10-9)
Select
Local Source:
● Cabinet Tamper or Power Fault
Select
Safe Message:
● Status is now inactive (was active)
● Status is now active (was inactive)
● Last state was ALARM
● Last state was FAULT
● Last state was ALARM or FAULT
Subcontroller
Time Schedule
User Command
Select
SIO & Schedule
Select Time Schedule
Select
ACM
Enter
the User Command
* Trigger Arguments & Variables are optional (see step 4 for more information).
Fusion User Manual Page 10-8
Triggers & Macros
Trigger Codes
A Trigger Code is a configurable number-designation tag that, if present in the Cardholder’s record, will run the macro when the card containing that trigger code is presented. The trigger code is used as a modifier to the card to allow triggers to be constructed to allow for specific outcomes.
Trigger Codes can be added to a most Door Event based Triggers.
Creating Trigger Codes
Prior to the Trigger Code being applied to the Trigger, the code must be created.
1. From the Main Menu, select Hardware / Trigger Codes.
The Trigger Codes dialog will open.
2. Click the New button and enter a Description.
3. Click OK to save the changes.
Adding Trigger Codes to a Trigger
1. Create the Trigger as described on page 10-5.
NOTE: If None is selected for the ACM, any ACM used will execute the trigger.
2. Select a Operation from the drop down list in the Trigger Variables and Arguments section.
● Accept Any - Allows the designated Trigger Code to be in any slot (Codes 1-7) in the Trigger Codes section of the Cardholder’s Record.
● Match 1 through 7 - Requires the cardholder have the designated
Trigger Code in the specified slot (Codes
1-7) in the Trigger Codes session of the Cardholder’s
Record.
3. Select a Trigger Code from the drop-down list and click
OK to save the trigger.
4. Right-click on the Trigger and select Download from the menu.
5. Open the desired Cardholder’s Record and select the Card tab.
6. Select the Trigger Code entered in step 3 from the drop down list.
Adding Trigger Codes to a Cardholder’ Record.
1. Open the Cardholder’s Record and select the Card Tab.
2. From the Trigger Codes section, select the correct Trigger Code based on the following:
● If Accept Any was selected: The designated Trigger Code can be selected in any Code 1-7 field.
● If Match 1-7 was selected: The designated Trigger Code must be selected in the specified Code 1-7 field that was referenced in the
Trigger Operation drop down.
3. Update the Cardholder’s Record.
Fusion User Manual Page 10-9
Triggers & Macros
Trigger Variables
The trigger variable section is for advanced triggers and macros. Selecting a value for the trigger variables means that the selected variable must be present in the SSP before the trigger will fire.
The most common use for trigger variables is to create a “toggle” effect, where a pair of triggers are created with identical terms, except one requires a trigger variable to be False to complete the trigger, and the other requires a trigger variable to be True to complete the trigger. Only one of the two triggers will trip for a given transaction.
Trigger variables are set in the Macro Command / Set Trigger Variable. See page 10-1 for more information on macro commands.
1. Create the Trigger as described on page 10-5.
2. Select the Variable(s) from the drop down list in the Trigger Variables and Arguments section.
3. Click radiobutton for the correct condition: ON or OFF.
4. Click OK to save the trigger.
5. Create another Trigger with the same Trigger Variable selected.
6. Select the opposite condition: ON or OFF.
This creates a toggle condition and requires the correct Trigger Variable to be in the controller for the trigger to execute.
7. Right-click on the Trigger and select Download from the menu.
8. Create the Macro and add commands to set the Trigger Variables.
See page 10-1 for more information on macros.
9. Associate the Macro to the desired Trigger.
Page 10-10 Fusion User Manual
Triggers & Macros
Working with Existing Macros & Triggers
Deleting a Macro or Trigger
1. With the Triggers and Macros Browser open, right-click on the Macro or Trigger and select Remove
Macro from the menu.
A confirmation box will appear.
2. Click Yes to delete the object.
The command will be removed from the list.
Editing a Macro or Trigger
1. With the Triggers and Macros Browser open, right-click on the Macro or Trigger and select
Properties from the menu.
The Properties dialog for the selected object will be displayed.
2. Make any changes.
3. Click OK.
4. Download the changes to the controller.
Copying Trigger & Macro Combinations
Triggers and macros can be copied to save time. To copy both a Trigger and Macro:
1. Expand the Triggers section and right-click on the desired SSP.
2. Select Copy... from the resulting menu.
A
Copy Triggers dialog opens.
3. Check the Triggers you wish to copy or check the Select All option.
4. To copy the associated macros, check the Copy Macros button.
5. Click the Copy To drop down and select the SSP from the list.
6. Click the OK button.
The selected Triggers and/or Macros are copied to the specified SSP.
7. If desired, edit the copied Trigger and Macro.
To copy a Macro:
1. Right-click on the desired Macro and select Copy Macro from the menu.
The Macro will be copied to the same controller.
Fusion User Manual Page 10-11
Triggers & Macros
Adding a Macro to a Door
Macros can be added to a door to trigger an action based on the door condition.
1. Open the Hardware Browser and expand the tree.
2. Right-click on the Door you want to associate with the macro and select Properties.
The Properties dialog will open.
3. Select Macros from the menu.
The Macros dialog will open.
4. Select the desired macro from the Macros drop-down list next to desired Trigger condition.
5. Select a Time Schedule from the drop-down list.
6. Click OK.
A download prompt will appear.
7. Select Yes to download the macro.
A trigger is created in the Triggers & Macros Browser.
Page 10-12 Fusion User Manual
Triggers & Macros
Host Based Macros
In addition to the macros stored on the SSPs, DNA has the capability of storing host-based macros. Host
Based Macros allow for cause and effect relationships between points controlled by different controllers that wouldn’t be possible with conventional trigger-macro configurations.
Host Based Macro are programmed differently from regular Triggers and Macros. One of the major differences is that Host Based Macros must be assigned to the Controlling Object(s) in the Properties dialog. This creates the linkage to the Controlling Object(s) which tells the system which object(s) trigger the Macro to execute.
Creating a Host Based Macro
To create a host macro:
1. With the Triggers & Macros Browser open, select the Host Macros tab at the bottom of the browser.
2. Right-click on the Host Based Macros object in the browser and select Add
Host Macro.
The Host Based Macros dialog will appear.
3. Enter a Description for the macro.
This description will appear in a drop-down menu later when the controlling object is configured.
4. If desired, select a Time Schedule for the Host Based Macro.
See page 10-17 for information on creating Internal Time Schedules.
5. Select a Object Type from the Local Object Type (Controlling Object) drop-down menu.
This is the controlling object that will cause the macro to execute. This selection determines the choices available in the Action Event ID drop-down menus.
6. Select an Action(s) 1-4 for the Controlling Object from the desired Action Event ID drop-down menu(s).
Up to four separate actions can be configured.
7. Select the Remote Object Type (Controlled Object) from the drop-down menu.
This is the controlled object that will receive the action as a result of the event being triggered.
This selection will determine which identifying fields are displayed as well as adding additional parameters to the Local Object Type Action. See the table for more information.
8. Select an action from the Action drop-down menu(s) corresponding to the selected Event ID(s).
Up to four separate actions can be configured to match the Controlling Objects Actions.
9. If needed, click the Build button to configure the Remote Object (Controlled Object).
The Build option will appear when an item requires additional configuration such as camera call-up, controlling peripheral items, changing the access to an integrated lock, etc.
Fusion User Manual Page 10-13
Triggers & Macros
10. If needed, click the Search button to configure the Remote Object (Controlled Object).
The Search option will appear when an item requires an additional file to execute.
11. If needed, enter a value in the Parameters field to configure the Remote Object (Controlled Object).
The Parameters option will appear when an item requires additional configuration such as setting the
LED Mode, controlling an access area,
12. If required, enter data in the Remote Objects fields to configure the Remote Object Type’s (Controlled
Object) hardware address.
This address tells the system which hardware object will be controlled: Site, SSP, SIO, ACM, TS, etc.
13. Click OK to save the Host Based Macro.
14. Associate the Host Based Macro to the Controlling Object.
!
Host Based Macros are stored locally in the host application instead of at the controller as in the case of regular triggers and macros. In order for Host Based Macros to execute, the application must be running.
Adding the Host Based Macro to the Controlling Object
Unless the Host Based Macro was created by clicking the Edit button in the Properties dialog of the Controlling
Object, the Object will need to linked in order for it be executed.
1. Depending on the Controlling Object, open the appropriate Browser/Dialog for the object.
● Hardware Object: Hardware Browser - Expand the tree and open the desired Properties dialog.
● Time Schedule Object: Time Schedule Browser - Expand the tree and open the desired Time Intervals dialog.
● Trigger Object: Triggers & Macros Browser - Expand the tree and open the desired Trigger dialog.
● Access Card Object: Personnel Browser - Expand the tree, open the desired Personnel Record and
click
the Card Tab.
● Macro Object: Triggers & Macros Browser - Expand the tree and open the desired Macro dialog.
● Station Object: Properties Dialog / Station Settings page.
● Situation Level Manager Object - Properties Dialog / Situation Level Manager page.
2. Depending on the Controlling Object, the Host Macros drop-down may be located on the front page or
select Macros or Input/Output Properties from the menu to access the Host Macros drop-down.
3. Click OK.
A download prompt will appear.
4. Select Yes to download the macro.
Page 10-14 Fusion User Manual
C
ontrolled
o
bjeCt
CAM: Advanced Camera Macro
CAM: Control Camera Recording
CRD: Card Access
EXT: Control Peripheral Object
EXT: Control ASSA Access Point
HDW: Monitor Point
HDW: Control Point
HDW: Door
HDW: Arm Door
HDW: Set Reader Mode
HDW: Set Reader LED Mode
HDW: Time Schedule
HDW: Monitor Point Group (MPG)
HDW: Access Control Area
Triggers & Macros
Host Based Macros Table
e
vent
● Select the Station from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button to select the View, Camera and specify the Preset time or the Pre-Alarm time
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button to specify the Recording Options
● Select desired action the Action drop-down: Set Card Use Limit /
Issue Free Pass
● Enter the Use Limit or Access Area in the Parameters field
● Enter the Card Number (0 for All Cards or the specific card #)
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button to specify the Peripheral Object
● Select the desired Action from the drop-down: Lock / Unlock /
Momentary Unlock / Lock Down / Remove Lockdown / Enable /
Disable
● Click the Build button to assign the desired Door
● Select the desired Action from the drop-down: Arm / Disarm
● Enter the Input Address in the Remote Object Properties field
● Select the desired Action from the drop-down: Activate /
Deactivate / Pulse
● Enter the Output Address in the Remote Object Properties field
● Select the desired Action from the drop-down: Door Momentarily
Unlock / Elevator: Floor Pulse FLR XX
● Enter the ACM Address in the Remote Object Properties field
● Select the desired Action from the drop-down: Disarm Door
Forced Open / Arm Door Forced Open / Disarm Door Held Open /
Arm Door Held Open / Arm Both (Forced & Held) / Disarm Both
● Enter the ACM Address in the Remote Object Properties field
● Select the desired Action from the drop-down: Disabled /
Unlocked / Locked / Correct Facility Code / Card Only / PIN Only /
Card AND PIN / Card OR PIN
● Enter the ACM Address in the Remote Object Properties field
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Enter LED Table Index 1, 2, or 3
● Enter the ACM Address in the Remote Object Properties field
● Select the desired Action from the drop-down: Temporarily Off /
Temporarily On / Override Off / Override On / Resume Normal State
/ Refresh Status
● Enter the Time Schedule Address in the Remote Object Properties field
● Select the desired Action from the drop-down: Arm / Disarm /
Access / Force Arm / Standard Arm / Override Arm
● Enter the MPG Address in the Remote Object Properties field
● Select the desired Action from the drop-down: Enable / Disable /
Set Occupancy
● Enter the Access Area Address in the Remote Object Properties field
Fusion User Manual Page 10-15
Triggers & Macros
C
ontrolled
o
bjeCt
HDW: Macro
HDW: Set Trigger Variable
HDW: Control SSP
HDW: SSP Set Time
HDW: Execute Direct Command
HDW: LCD Text to Keypad
HDW: Submit Batch File
HDW: HEX to SIO Port
HDW: Execute Host Macro List
HST: Run Program
HST: Load External Page
HST: Load HTML Goto Page
HST: Load Camera
HST: Load Graphic Map
HST: Email
Host: Play WAV File
MIS: Log Off Station
e
vent
● Select the desired Action from the drop-down: Macro Command
/ Macro Command TYPE 2 / Macro Command TYPE 3 / Macro
Command TYPE 4
● Enter the Access Area Address in the Remote Object Properties field
● Select the Trigger Variable Control from the Action drop-down
● Enter the Trigger Variable in the Parameters field
● Enter the Trigger Variable Address in the Remote Object Properties field
● Select the desired Action from the drop-down: Attach SSP /
Detach SSP / Dual Port Control / SSP Hang Up Soon
● Enter the desired variable in the Parameters field
● Enter the Channel Address in the Remote Object Properties field
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Enter the SSP Address in the Remote Object Properties field
● Select the Station from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button and select the Direct Command
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button and enter the LCD Text parameters
● Enter the ACM Address in the Remote Object Properties field
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Click the Search button and locate the Batch File
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button and enter the SIO HEX output parameters
● Enter the SSP Address in the Remote Object Properties field
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button and select the desired macro(s) from the
Macro List dialog
● Select the Station from the Action drop-down
● Click the Search button to select the Program
● Select the Station from the Action drop-down
● Enter the path in Parameters field
● Select Station from the Action drop-down
● Enter path in Parameters field
● Select the Station from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button to select the desired Camera
● Select the Station from the Action drop-down
● Click the Search button to select the Graphic Map
● Select the Station from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button to enter the Email and Replacement Text parameters (see Appendix D)
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button to select the File
● Select the Station from the Action drop-down
Page 10-16 Fusion User Manual
Triggers & Macros
C
ontrolled
o
bjeCt
MIS: Situation Level Manager
e
vent
● Select the desired option from the Action drop-down: Situation
Level Manager Set to Severe (Red) / Situation Level Manager Set to
High (Orange) / Situation Level Manager Set to Elevated (Yellow)
/ Situation Level Manager Set to Guarded (Blue) / Situation Level
Manager Set to Low (Green) / Turn Situation Level Manager ON /
Turn Situation Level Manager OFF
DBM: Add to Database with DSN
DBM: Add to DB with Events Server
DBM: Add to DB with Hardware Server
DBM: Add to DB with Personnel Server
DBM: Add to Logfile Entry
UAD: Universal Driver
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button and enter the Query and DSN in the dialog
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button and enter the Query in the dialog
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button and enter the Query in the dialog
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button and enter the Query in the dialog
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button and enter the Query and File in the dialog
● Select Activate from the Action drop-down
● Click the Build button and select the Driver Name from the dropdown
Fusion User Manual Page 10-17
Triggers & Macros
NOTES:
Page 10-18 Fusion User Manual
Triggers & Macros
Internal Time Schedules
Creating Internal Time Schedules
An Internal Time Schedule can be configured to limit the timeframe in which a Host Based Macro will execute.
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Setup Internal Schedules from the Main Menu.
The Internal Time Schedules Properties dialog will open.
2. Click the New button.
The Add Internal Schedule dialog appears.
3. Enter a Schedule Name and click the OK button.
The Internal Schedules dialog appears.
4. Configure the Time Schedule intervals.
Each time schedule is made up of a possible twelve intervals. An interval consists of a Begin and End
Time along with the days of the week that this time schedule will be active and a place to determine if the schedule will be active during defined holidays. A time schedule must have at least one interval defined in order for it to be valid.
a. Enter the Begin and End Times using military time designations (00:00-23:59) in the fields for the appropriate interval. b. Assign the Time Interval to given days of the week by checking the desired weekday box(es). This method provides a more accurate method of entry.
c. The last box for each interval is labeled H and, when checked, will activate the time schedule for the specified time range on days that have been defined as Holidays. See below for more information on adding holidays.
5. Click the Save button to save the Internal Time Schedule.
Adding Internal Holidays
1. If desired, click the Edit Holidays button.
The Internal Holidays dialog will open.
2. Click the plus (+) sign to add a new holiday.
The Details dialog will appear along with a calendar.
3. Enter a Name and select a Date from the calendar.
4. Click the OK button to save the Holiday.
The holiday is added to the Internal Holidays list.
Page 10-19 Fusion User Manual
Editing Internal Time Schedules
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Setup Internal Schedules from the Main Menu.
The Internal Time Schedules Properties dialog will open.
2. Select the desired schedule from the Schedule drop down list.
3. Edit the Internal Time Schedule.
4. Click the Save button to save the changes.
Deleting Internal Time Schedules
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Setup Internal Schedules from the Main Menu.
The Internal Time Schedules Properties dialog will open.
2. Select the desired schedule from the Schedule drop down list.
3. Click the Remove button.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
4. Click the Yes to delete the schedule.
5. Click the Save button to save the changes.
Editing Internal Time Schedule Holidays
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Setup Internal Schedules from the Main Menu.
The Internal Time Schedules Properties dialog will open.
2. Click the Edit Holidays button.
The Internal Holidays dialog will open.
3. Double-click the desired Holiday.
The Details dialog opens.
4. Edit the holiday.
5. Click OK to save the changes.
6. Click the Close button to close the Internal Holidays dialog.
Deleting Internal Time Schedule Holidays
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Setup Internal Schedules from the Main Menu.
The Internal Time Schedules Properties dialog will open.
2. Click the Edit Holidays button.
The Internal Holidays dialog will open.
3. Select the desired Holiday and click the minus (-) sign to delete the new holiday.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
4. Click the Yes to delete the holiday.
5. Click OK to save the changes.
6. Click the Close button to close the Internal Holidays dialog.
Triggers & Macros
Fusion User Manual Page 10-20
Access Areas &
Anti-Pass Back
11
In This Chapter
√
√
√
Setting Up Access Areas
Configuring Anti-Pass Back
Implementing Anti-Pass Back
Access Areas
What is an Access Area?
An Access Area is a defined area wherein all access points to the area are secured by the system. The access points can be configured and adjusted to set parameters on occupancy and permission attributes.
Access areas can be configured to limit the number of cardholders within the area. The configuration includes a minimum and maximum number of cardholders allowed in the area; before the occupancy counts is reached, an event is reported. These limits may be set so that no fewer then two cardholders are in the area.
Creating an Access Area
1. Right-click on the SSP object from the tree in the Hardware Browser and select Add.
2. Select Add Access Area from the context menu.
The Access Areas Dialog box will display.
3. Select an Area Number from the drop-down list.
The number is an arbitrary designation for the given access area.
4. Enter a Description for the area.
5. Select the appropriate type of Access Control from the drop down.
● No Change - Area’s Occupancy Count will not change when Cardholders access this Area.
● Disabled - Deactivates the Area and Cardholders will receive Access Denied: Area Disabled.
● Enabled - Activates the Area and Cardholders will have access based on their assigned Access Level and the Access Areas Occupancy Rules.
Fusion User Manual Page 11-1
Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back
6. If desired, select a Host Based Macro from the drop-down list to associate with the Access Area.
See page 10-13 for more information on Host Based Macros.
7. If desired, enable Situation Manager by clicking the Situations... button.
See page 9-4 for more information on Situation Manager.
8. If needed, check the Require 2 or more in area checkbox to require two separate access credentials be recognized for access to be gained.
Do not check if Anti-Pass Back is being used.
9. Enter the Initial Occupancy.
Leave this field set to 0 if you are not setting an initial occupancy.
10. Enter the Maximum number of occupants for the access area.
If Anti-Pass will be used, this number should be more than the total number of cards. When this number is reached, an event will be generated in the system.
11. If desired, enter the Upper Warning occupancy number.
Normally 5% less than Max. number. Reaching this number can generate an alarm indicating that the maximum occupancy is close to being met.
12. If desired, enter the Lower Warning occupancy number.
Reaching this number will generate an alarm indicating that the occupancy has fallen below a certain number.
13. Click OK to save the access area.
14. Download the changes to the SSP.
See page 2-13 for information on downloading.
15. Add the Access Area to the appropriate ACM to configure the To and From areas.
See pages 11-3 (door) and 11-5 (elevator) for information on adding the Access Area to an ACM.
Page 11-2 Fusion User Manual
Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back
Adding an Access Area to a Door
1. With the Hardware Browser open, right-click an existing Door and select Properties or create a new door for the area.
The Doors Properties dialog will open.
2. From the menu, select the Advanced option.
The Advanced dialog opens.
3. Select the type of anti-pass back from the Option field drop-down.
● Accept any location, change on entry - Accepts any new location, changes the user location to the current reader and generates an anti-pass back violation for an invalid entry. (Area based Soft Anti-
Pass Back)
● Check location, change on entry - Check user location; if a valid entry is made, change the user’s location to the new location. If an invalid entry is attempted, do not grant access. (Area-based Hard
Anti-Pass Back)
● Check last valid user - References the user’s card number and will not all access to the same card number until either a different card is presented at the reader or the APB delay expires. (Readerbased Anti-Pass Back)
● Check last ACR used, no location change - Disallows a cardholder to present his card to the same reader twice in a row. Once access is granted at the reader, the user will not be granted access at this same reader again until the user presents his card at another reader in the system or APB delay has expired. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
● Check current location, change on entry - Similar to option #2, except that the APB delay will reset user’s area after the specified time. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
For anti-pass back configuration, see page 11-7.
4. Enter the From: Area Number the user will come from.
5. Enter the To: Area Number the user will enter.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
Fusion User Manual Page 11-3
Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back
Adding an Access Area to an Elevator
1. With the Hardware Browser open, right-click an existing Elevator and select Properties or create a new elevator for the area.
The Elevator Properties dialog will open.
2. From the menu, select the Elevator Parameters option.
The Elevator Parameters dialog opens.
3. Select the type of anti-pass back from the Option field drop-down.
● Accept any location, change on entry - Accepts any new location, changes the user location to the current reader and generates an anti-pass back violation for an invalid entry. (Area based Soft Anti-
Pass Back)
● Check location, change on entry - Check user location; if a valid entry is made, change the user’s location to the new location. If an invalid entry is attempted, do not grant access. (Area-based Hard
Anti-Pass Back)
● Check last valid user - References the user’s card number and will not all access to the same card number until either a different card is presented at the reader or the APB delay expires. (Readerbased Anti-Pass Back)
● Check last ACR used, no location change - Disallows a cardholder to present his card to the same reader twice in a row. Once access is granted at the reader, the user will not be granted access at this same reader again until the user presents his card at another reader in the system or APB delay has expired. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
● Check current location, change on entry - Similar to option #2, except that the APB delay will reset user’s area after the specified time. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
For anti-pass back configuration, see page 11-7.
4. Enter the From: Area Number the user will come from.
5. Enter the To: Area Number the user will enter.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
Page 11-4 Fusion User Manual
Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back
Access Areas Features
DNA offers a number of features that are available for Access Areas/Anti-Pass Back.
Enable/Disable an Area
Enabling and disabling an Access Area allows the system operator to quickly control access to the area.
1. Expand the Hardware Browser to view Access Areas.
2. Right-click on the Access Area and select Direct Control / Enable Access.
Or
3. Right-click on the Access Area and select Direct Control / Disable
Access.
● Disable - Deactivates the Area and Cardholders will receive
Access Denied: Area Disabled.
● Enable - Activates the Area and Cardholders will have access based on their assigned Access Level and the Access Areas
Occupancy Rules.
Set Occupancy Level
The Set Occupancy Level option manually adjusts the occupancy number for the Access Area.
1. Expand the Hardware Browser to view Access Areas.
2. Right-click on the Access Area and select Direct Control / Set Occupancy.
The Occupancy dialog appears.
3. Enter the Occupancy Setting and click Set.
The Occupancy Level for the selected Access Area is set to the designated number.
Deleting an Access Area
1. Expand the Access Area selection in the Hardware Browser.
2. Right-click on the Access Area and select Remove.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
3. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
The access area is remove from the list.
Fusion User Manual Page 11-5
Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back
NOTES:
Page 11-6 Fusion User Manual
Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back
Anti-Pass Back
Anti-pass Back (APB) prevents a person from using a door if the system does not recognize him as being in the correct area. A cardholder must present their card at each reader as they progress through the facility in order to be in the correct area. If a cardholder fails to badge at a reader and follows another cardholder into an area, a violation has occurred since the cardholder was not detected in the correct area. APB also prevents a card from being passed back to an unauthorized user.
It is important to carefully plan your anti-pass back system if it is to be effective.
It is recommended that you obtain a layout of the facility where APB will be implemented. Using this layout, determine what areas or zones that you will set up and which readers will control access into and out of these zones. Use the information to set up the Anti-Pass Back features in DNA Fusion.
Types of Anti-Pass Back
DNA supports reader-based and area-based models, with time based extensions. Within those mechanisms, the anti-pass back rules can be set to “hard” or “soft” anti-pass back. Hard anti-pass back refers to rules that do not allow the user access for anti-pass back violations; while Soft will not deny access due to anti-pass back violations but an anti-pass back event will be logged.
Reader-Based
Reader-based anti-pass back refers to rules based on access history for an individual reader. Typically, these rules prevent multiple people from entering using the same card at the same reader. There are two types of reader based anti-pass back. The first type stores the card number and time of the last access granted event in the reader and the second type stores the reader number of last access granted event in the cardholder’s record.
Area-Based
Area-based anti-pass back relies on knowing where the user is in the system at all times. Typically, areabased anti-pass back is implemented with readers tracking entry and exit out of an area. The location of the cardholder’s last access granted is stored in the cardholder’s record. If the area in the cardholders record matches the area that the reader is in, the cardholder will be granted access. Once entry had been detected, the cardholder’s location will change.
Configuring DNA to use Anti-Pass Back
DNA must be configured for anti-pass back prior to implementing the feature.
1. In the SSP Properties dialog under Stored Quantities, select the Store APB Location checkbox.
See page 8-41 for more information on SSP Properties and Anti-Pass Back options.
2. For general Anti-Pass back, verify that the Support Timed Anti-Pass Back is deselected in the Stored
Quantities dialog.
3. Create an Access Area for each of the anti-pass back locations.
There must be at least two Access Areas created; a To: Area and a From: Area. See page 11-1 for information on creating access areas.
!
If the APB locations will cross multiple SSP panels, a constant connection to the server will be required since Host Based Macros will be used to communicate between panels.
Fusion User Manual Page 11-7
Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back
NOTES:
Page 11-8 Fusion User Manual
Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back
Implementing General Anti-Pass Back for a Door
1. Open the Advanced Properties dialog for the door as described on page 11-3.
2. Select the type of Anti-Pass Back for the door from the Option drop down list.
NOTE: The first option, Do Not Alter APB, disables the Anti-Pass Back Feature.
● Accept any location, change on entry - Allows any user with the appropriate access into an area regardless of the user’s current area. Changes the area number. (Area based Soft Anti-Pass Back
● Check location, change on entry - Requires the cardholder be in the correct area (as established in the reader’s anti-pass back properties) before access is granted. (Area-based Hard Anti-Pass Back)
● Check last valid user - References the user’s card number and will not all access to the same card number until a different card is presented at the reader. Delay = 0. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
● Check last ACR used, no location change - Disallows a cardholder to present his card to the same reader twice in a row. Once access is granted at the reader, the user will not be granted access at this same reader again until the user presents his card at another reader in the system or APB delay has expired. Delay = 0. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
● Check current location, change on entry - Similar to option #2, except the user’s area will be reset.
Delay = 0. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
3. Select the From: Area Number the user will come from.
4. Select the To: Area Number the user will enter.
The From and To settings will generally be reversed for each door in an In/Out reader configuration.
5. Check any Door Parameter settings to apply to the area.
When using APB, it is strongly recommended that you uncheck the Log All Access
Requests as Used setting in the Door Parameters to prevent cardholders from mistakenly being in the wrong APB area.
If this option is selected and the cardholder presents his card without using the door, the system will consider them to be in the new area and will not be granted access at the reader the next time a card is presented unless a delay time expired.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
7. Create an Access Level for the APB doors.
See Chapter 6 for access level information.
8. Assign cardholders to the access level.
See page 7-21 for more information on assigning access levels.
Fusion User Manual Page 11-9
Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back
Implementing Timed Anti-Pass Back for a Door
1. Open the Advanced Properties dialog for the door as described on page 11-3.
2. Select the type of Anti-Pass Back for the door.
NOTE: The first option, Do Not Alter APB, disables the Anti-Pass Back Feature.
● Check last valid user - References the user’s card number and will not all access to the same card number until either a different card is presented at the reader or the APB delay expires. (Readerbased Anti-Pass Back)
● Check last ACR used, no location change - Disallows a cardholder to present his card to the same reader twice in a row. Once access is granted at the reader, the user will not be granted access at this same reader again until the user presents his card at another reader in the system or APB delay has expired. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
● Check current location, change on entry - Similar to option #2, except that the APB delay will reset user’s area after the specified time. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
3. Select the Delay from the drop-down list.
The delay will reset the system after x minutes so that a user may gain access to an area after the delay has expired. Max. delay = 255 minutes
4. Select the From: Area Number the user will come from.
5. Enter the To: Area Number the user will enter.
The From and To settings will generally be reversed for each door in an In/Out reader
configuration.
6. Select any Door Parameter settings to apply to the area.
When using APB, it is strongly recommended that you uncheck the Log All Access
Requests as Used setting in the Door Parameters to prevent cardholders from mistakenly being in the wrong APB area.
If this option is selected and the cardholder presents his card without using the door, the system will consider them to be in the new area and will not be granted access at the reader the next time a card is presented unless a delay time expired.
7. Click OK to save the settings.
8. Create an Access Level for the APB doors.
See Chapter 6 for access level information.
9. Assign cardholders to the access level.
See page 7-15 for more information on assigning access levels.
Page 11-10 Fusion User Manual
Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back
Implementing General Anti-Pass Back for an Elevator
1. Open the Elevator Parameters dialog for the elevator as described on page 11-4.
2. Select the type of Anti-Pass Back for the elevator
NOTE: The first option, Do Not Alter APB, disables the Anti-Pass Back Feature.
● Accept any location, change on entry - Allows any user with the appropriate access into an area regardless of the user’s current area. Changes the area number. (Area based Soft Anti-Pass Back
● Check location, change on entry - Requires the cardholder be in the correct area (as established in the reader’s anti-pass back properties) before access is granted. (Area-based Hard Anti-Pass Back)
● Check last valid user - References the user’s card number and will not all access to the same card number until a different card is presented at the reader. Delay = 0. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
● Check last ACR used, no location change - Disallows a cardholder to present his card to the same reader twice in a row. Once access is granted at the reader, the user will not be granted access at this same reader again until the user presents his card at another reader in the system or APB delay has expired. Delay = 0. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
● Check current location, change on entry - Similar to option #2, except the user’s area will be reset.
Delay = 0. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
3. Select the From: Area Number the user will come from.
4. Enter the To: Area Number the user will enter.
The From and To settings will generally be reversed for each elevator in an In/Out reader configuration.
5. Select any Elevator Function settings to apply to the area.
When using APB, it is strongly recommended that you uncheck the Log All Access
Requests as Used setting in the Elevators Parameters to prevent cardholders from mistakenly being in the wrong APB area.
If this option is selected and the cardholder presents his card without using the door, the system will consider them to be in the new area and will not be granted access at the reader the next time a card is presented unless a delay time expired.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
7. Create an Access Level for the APB elevator.
See Chapter 6 for access level information.
8. Assign cardholders to the access level.
See page 7-21 for more information on assigning access levels.
Fusion User Manual Page 11-11
Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back
Implementing Timed Anti-Pass Back for an Elevator
1. Open the Advanced Properties dialog for the elevator as described on page 11-4.
2. Select the type of Anti-Pass Back for the elevator.
NOTE: The first option, Do Not Alter APB, disables the Anti-Pass Back Feature.
● Check last valid user - References the user’s card number and will not all access to the same card number until either a different card is presented at the reader or the APB delay expires. (Readerbased Anti-Pass Back)
● Check last ACR used, no location change - Disallows a cardholder to present his card to the same reader twice in a row. Once access is granted at the reader, the user will not be granted access at this same reader again until the user presents his card at another reader in the system or APB delay has expired. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
● Check current location, change on entry - Similar to option #2, except that the APB delay will reset user’s area after the specified time. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
3. Select the Delay from the drop down list.
The delay will reset the system after x minutes so that a user may gain access to an area after the delay has expired. Max. delay = 255 minutes
4. Select the From: Area Number the user will come from.
5. Select the To: Area Number the user will enter.
The From and To settings will generally be reversed for each elevator in an In/Out reader configuration.
6. Select any Elevator Function settings to apply to the area.
When using APB, it is strongly recommended that you uncheck the Log All Access
Requests as Used setting in the Elevators Parameters to prevent cardholders from mistakenly being in the wrong APB area.
If this option is selected and the cardholder presents his card without using the door, the system will consider them to be in the new area and will not be granted access at the reader the next time a card is presented unless a delay time expired.
7. Click OK to save the settings.
8. Create an Access Level for the APB doors.
See Chapter 6 for access level information.
9. Assign cardholders to the access level.
See page 7-21 for more information on assigning access levels.
Page 11-12 Fusion User Manual
Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back
Anti-Pass Back Areas Features
DNA offers a number of features that are available for Access Areas/Anti-Pass Back.
Enable/Disable an Area
Enabling and disabling an Access Area allows the system operator to quickly control access to the area.
1. Expand the Hardware Browser to view Access Areas.
2. Right-click on the Access Area and select Direct Control / Enable Access.
Or
3. Right-click on the Access Area and select Direct Control / Disable
Access.
● Disable - Deactivates the Area and Cardholders will receive
Access Denied: Area Disabled.
● Enable - Activates the Area and Cardholders will have access based on their assigned Access Level and the Access Areas
Occupancy Rules.
Issue Free Pass
A free pass can be issued to a cardholder in instances of an APB infraction in order to get out of the Area.
1. Expand the Hardware Browser to view Access Areas.
2. Right-click on the Access Area and select Issue Free Pass.
The Set Anti-Pass Back Area dialog opens.
3. Select the Card from the drop-down list.
4. Click Issue.
The pass is applied to the selected cardholder.
A Free Pass can also be issued from the Personnel Browser by right-clicking on the
cardholder’s Card and selecting Direct Control / Issue Free Pass.
Fusion User Manual Page 11-13
Access Areas & Anti-Pass Back
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 11-14 Fusion User Manual
Secured Areas
12
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
Creating Secured Areas
Building Secured Area Triggers and Macros
Hardware Configuration
Controlling Secured Areas
Secured Areas are areas that can be armed and disarmed using a PIN code. Secured Areas must be set up with a RSC-DT Keypad Reader. If a reader with a keypad is used, the display text on the keypad functionality will be negated.
There are 4 steps involved in creating a secured area:
1. Create the Monitor Point Group (MPG)
2. Make the MPG a secured area
3. Build triggers and macros
4. Configure the hardware
Creating a Secured Area
Setting Up the MPG
The MPGs object must be checked in the Hardware Tree Properties for the object to
be visible in the tree. Right-click in the white space of the Hardware Tree select Tree
Properties from the menu and check MPG under the All Objects Tree Items heading.
1. Right-click on the SSP object in the Hardware Browser and select Add.
2. Select Add MPG from the context menu.
The Secured Areas dialog will appear.
3. If desired, select an MPG Number from the drop-down list.
The number is an arbitrary designation for the given secured area.
Fusion User Manual Page 12-1
Secured Areas
4. If desired, select a Host Macro from the drop-down to associate with the area.
5. Enter a Description for the area.
6. If desired, enable Situation Manager by selecting the Situation Manager button.
See page 9-4 for more information on Secured Areas and Situation Manager.
7. In the Input Point explorer section, expand the points and select the desired Monitor Points and/or ACM Objects.
ACMs are the keypads as well as any doors you want to control with the Secured Area.
8. If desired, select a Mask Type for each ACM point from the dropdown menu.
9. Click OK to save the Secured Area.
The area will appear in the Hardware Browser under MPGs.
Page 12-2 Fusion User Manual
Setting Up the Secured Area
1. Right-click on the MPG and select Make Secured Area from the context menu.
The Secured Areas dialog will appear.
Secured Areas
Only MPGs that have a keypad reader associated with them will be promoted to Secured
Areas. See page 12-9 for secured areas hardware configuration information.
2. Populate the appropriate fields to configure the secured area settings.
Secured Areas
Identification
● MPG Number - Number and description of the MPG. (Auto Populated)
Keypad Display Text
● In Alarm - Editable text that will appear in the keypad display when the area is in alarm.
● Test Failure_ - Editable text that will appear in the keypad display upon test failure.
● Is Armed - Editable text that will appear in the keypad display when the area is armed.
● Is Disarmed - Editable text that will appear in the keypad display when the area is disarmed.
● Sound - If checked, the designated event will generate a sound. Select the sound type from the drop-down list.
● Perm - Designates whether the text is permanent or temporary.
Secured Area Actions & Behaviors
This section allow for indirect control of the Secured Area, such as Forced Arming. There must be a Time
Schedule available to associate with the event. The control portion of the action will occur upon activation of the assigned time schedule.
● Action 1 through 4 - Select a Time Schedule and a Secured Area Action. If selected, the area will automatically assume the specified action when the associated time schedule becomes Active.
Conditionally Arm Area- Arms the area; all zones must be inactive.
Disarm Area - Disarms the area and masks all the points in the group.
Force Arm Area - Arms the area even though there are active zones.
● Arm Window - Select a Time Schedule to associate with the arm window. If the area is not armed by the specified time, an event will be generated.
● Disarm Window - Select a Time Schedule to associate with the disarm window. If the area is not disarmed by the specified time, an event will be generated.
● Continue Macro - Select a Macro from the drop-down list.
Fusion User Manual Page 12-3
Secured Areas
● Report Macro - Select a Macro from the drop-down list.
● Text Duration - Select the Duration for temporary text to remain on the display.
● Rearm Point - Select an Input from the drop-down list.
● Rearm Time - Select a Rearm Duration Time from the drop-down list.
● Keypads: Armed Mode - Defines the keypad mode when the area is armed.
● Keypads: Disarmed Mode - Defines the keypad mode when the area is disarmed.
● ACMs: Armed Mode - Defines the ACM mode when the area is armed.
● ACMs: Disarmed Mode - Defines the ACM mode when the area is disarmed .
Area Points
This dialog allows you to associate different types of hardware with the Secured Area. By default the point that were associated with the MPG will automatically be assigned to the Secured Area.
However, you can add others based on the desired functionality.
● MPG Number - Number and description of the MPG. (Auto Populated)
● Host Macro_ - Select a Host Based Macro to execute.
● Controller - Description of the controller. (Auto Populated)
● Description - Description created upon setup. (Auto Populated)
● Input Explorer - Available Monitor Points, ACMs and Control Points.
3. Once all the setting have been configured, click OK.
This will begin the process of building the Macros that control the Secured Area.
4. When prompted to download the information, click Yes.
The Build Monitor Points Triggers box will appear.
5. Click Yes to build the associated triggers.
This builds a trigger for each Monitor Point associated with the area that will activate the alarm text.
Page 12-4 Fusion User Manual
Secured Areas
Building Arm/Disarm Triggers
The next step is to create the triggers that will arm and disarm the designated Secured Area based on card access. Remember if Actions 1 - 4 were setup in the Secured Areas Actions & Behaviors section, the area may Arm and Disarm based on a Time Schedule as well. For more information on Triggers, see Chapter 10:
Triggers & Macros.
1. Open the Triggers & Macros Browser and expand the Trigger tree down to the appropriate SSP.
2. Right-click on the SSP and select Add Trigger from the menu.
The Triggers Editor dialog will appear.
3. Configure the following parameters:
Arm the System (Trigger #1)
● Description - User defined description for the trigger. (Example: Training Room Arm)
● Trigger Event - Door: Access Granted. It is possible to choose other events, however this is option is used to control the Secured Areas from the keypad reader.
● ACM (Access Control Module) - Select the desired ACM from the drop-down list.
● Schedule - Select the desired Time Schedule from the drop-down list. The area will be armed when this schedule is active.
● Macro ID - Select the correct Macro (SA) from the drop-down list. This macro was created when the secured area was built. The address of the macro will be different but the description will be followed by ‘-SA.’
● Command - Execute Type 1 (Default)
● Operation - Accept Any
● Trigger Variables - Variable 1 = OFF
Set based on the Trigger Variable in the linked Macro. Generally when the Secured Area is created it will associate the Trigger Variable number to the number of the Secured Area. (Example: SA #1 macro will control Trigger Variable #1)
Disarm the System (Trigger #2)
● Description - User defined description for the trigger. (Example: Training Room Disarm)
● Trigger Event - Door: Access Granted. It is possible to choose other events, however this is option is used to control the Secured Areas from the keypad reader.
● ACM (Access Control Model) - Select the desired ACM from the drop-down list.
● Schedule - Select the desired Time Schedule from the drop-down list. The area will be disarmed when this schedule is active.
Fusion User Manual Page 12-5
Secured Areas
● Macro ID - Select the correct Macro (SA) from the drop-down list. This macro was created when the secured area was built. The address of the macro will be different but the description will be followed by ‘-SA.’
● Command - Execute Type 2
● Operation - Accept Any
● Trigger Variables - Variable 1: ON
4. Click OK.
It is recommended that the above steps be completed for each Secured Area before
continuing. This will keep the Arm/Disarm Triggers & Macros grouped together for ease of
identification in the Triggers & Macros Browser.
Page 12-6 Fusion User Manual
Secured Areas
Building a Chime Macro & Trigger
A Macro can be built to create an entry delay that will make the keypad beep for a specified amount of time to remind the user to disarm the system.
1. With the Triggers & Macros Browser open, expand the Macros tree down to the appropriate SSP.
2. Right-click on the SSP and select Add Macro from the context menu.
The Macros Editor will appear.
3. Enter a Description.
4. Click OK.
Adding Macro Commands
1. Right-click on the newly created Macro and select Macro Commands / Add Command.
The Macros Command Editor will appear.
2. Configure the following parameters to enable the keypad sound on the designated entry point until the
Secured Area is disarmed.
● Action Type: Type 1 (Default)
● Command: Display TEXT on LCD Reader
● ACM (Access Control Model): Select the desired ACM from the drop-down list.
● Text Type: Temporary
● Temp Duration: Select the Temporary Text Duration from the drop-down list.
● Tone - Select the Tone from the drop-down list.
● Tone Duration - Select the Tone Duration from the dropdown list.
● Row - If desired, select the Row from the drop-down list to display the text.
● Column - If desired, select the Column from the drop-down list to display the text.
● Text - Enter the desired Text to display on the keypad screen.
3. Click OK.
Fusion User Manual Page 12-7
Secured Areas
Creating the Chime Trigger
1. With the Triggers & Macros Browser open, expand the Trigger tree down to the appropriate SSP.
2. Right-click on the SSP and select Add Trigger from the menu.
The Triggers Editor dialog will appear.
3. Configure the following parameters.
● Description: User defined description for the trigger.
(Example: Training Room Chime)
● Trigger Event: MP: Entry Delay in Progress
● Monitor Point: Select the Monitor Point from the dropdown list. The address will be different based on the
SSP number and which point is designated as the Entry
Point.
● Schedule: Select the desired Time Schedule from the drop-down list. The chime will only sound when the
Time Schedule is active.
● Macro ID: Select the correct Macro from the drop-down list. This macro was created in the steps above.
● Command: Execute Type 1 (Default)
4. Click OK.
It is recommended that the above steps be completed for each keypad that needs to
“countdown” the entry delay.
Page 12-8 Fusion User Manual
Secured Areas
Hardware Configuration
In order for the keypad to function properly, you will need to make some changes in the hardware tree.
Doors
1. Right-click on the Door with the keypad and select Properties.
The Door Properties dialog will open.
2. Select Door Objects from the dialog menu.
3. Change the Default and Offline Modes to Card or PIN.
4. Change the Reader Type to Text Keypad.
5. Click the Edit button in the Reader section.
The Hardware Properties: Reader dialog is displayed.
6. Select Reader Properties from the dialog menu.
7. In the Templates section, click the drop-down menu and select the DMP keypad.rtp template from the list.
Selecting this template will populate the properties in the reader so that the keypad will operator correctly.
8. Click OK to save the settings.
The Download dialog will appear.
9. Click OK to download the new settings.
Fusion User Manual Page 12-9
Secured Areas
Setting Entry & Exit Delays
Entry and exit delays are easily accessed from within the Door Properties dialog.
1. Right-click on the Door with the keypad and select Properties.
The Door Properties dialog will open.
2. Select Door Objects from the dialog menu.
3. Click the Edit button beside the Contact.
4. Select Input Properties from the dialog menu.
5. Configure the Latching Mode using the information below.
● Latching Mode - Type of latching mode. Only used with configuring entry and exit delays common with secured areas.
Normal - Select Normal when no entry or exit delay is used.
Non-Latching - Generates an alarm only if the point is still in alarm after the entry time has expired. If the door is opened and immediately closed (within the entry delay), the alarm would not be generated. A event will be generated when the change of state happens, but no alarm would be received.
Latching - The contact closure will generate an alarm unless the point is masked within the entry delay time. If the door is opened, regardless if the door is shut again, an alarm will be generated
(unless the monitor point is masked). This is the preferred setting.
● Entry Delay - Warning period to allow for disarming of system. If the system is not disarmed within the entry delay, an alarm will be generated.
● Exit Delay - Amount of time to delay before removing the mask to allow for arming of the system.
Once the exit delay has expired, the mask is removed and the point is armed.
6. Click OK to save the changes.
7. Click the Edit button beside the REX and configure the input as well.
8. Click OK to save the changes to the Door Properties.
Page 12-10 Fusion User Manual
Secured Areas
Controlling Secured Areas
DNA allows the operator to directly perform various tasks on a selected Secured Area. There are three types of control for the secured area:
● Secured Area Direct Control for outputs, keypads modes, ACM modes, and MPGs.
● Secured Area Control to arm, disarm and conditional arm the area.
● Object Direct Control for each object. For more information on Direct Control of hardware, see page
8-4.
Secured Area Direct Control
1. Right-click on the Secured Area (under MPGs) and select Direct Control.
● Outputs:
Activate - Activates the selected output point.
Deactivate - Deactivates the selected output point.
● Keypad Modes:
Armed - Arms the Secured Area.
Disarmed - Disarms the Secured Area.
● ACM Modes:
Armed - Arms the ACMs associated with the Secured Area.
Disarmed - Disarms the ACMs associated with the Secured Area.
● MPG:
Arm - Arms the Monitor Point Group.
Disarm - Disarms the Monitor Point Group.
Access - If no points are masked, the Secured Area will allow access.
Forced Arm - Arms the Secured Area even if one or more areas is faulted.
Standard Arm - Arms the Secured Area if no points are active.
Override Arm - Arms the Secured Area and overrides any faulted areas.
Secured Area Control
1. Right-click on the Secured Area (under MPGs) and select Secured Area Control.
● Arm - Arms the Secured Area.
● Disarm - Disarms the Secured Area .
● Conditional Arm - Conditional arms the Secured Area.
Object Direct Control
1. Right-click on the object under the Secured Area and select Control / Direct Control. See page 8-4 for more information.
● Control Dialog - Opens the Control Dialog for the selected object.
● Object Mode - Provides the ability to change the objects mode.
● Arm: Forced / Held - Arms the Forced or Held Door conditions.
● Disarm: Forced / Held - Masks the Forced or Held Door conditions.
● Momentary Unlock - Unlocks the door for the programmed strike time.
Fusion User Manual Page 12-11
Secured Areas
NOTES:
Page 12-12 Fusion User Manual
Secured Areas
Keypad Commands
Keypad commands can be programmed to allow the user to control varies hardware objects from the keypad.
Adding Commands
1. Create a Macro to execute the desired commands.
For more information on creating macros, see page 10-1.
2. Create a Trigger and select User Command: User Command Requested for the Trigger Event.
The User Command field appears. For more information on creating triggers, see page 10-5.
3. Configure the Trigger Details.
4. Select the Macro created in step 1.
5. Enter the keypad command numerical combination in the User Command field.
This number will execute the macro when entered on the keypad.
6. Click OK to save the trigger.
Executing Keypad Commands
To execute a keypad command:
1. Press the Command button.
2. Enter the keypad command code created in step 5 above.
3. Press the Command button again.
The command is executed.
Fusion User Manual Page 12-13
Secured Areas
Basic Keypad Operation
Arming the System
Before arming the system, close all protected doors and windows, and stop movement in areas protected by motion detectors.
If the LED light is off, you have no AC power. Restore power if possible. If not, contact your installing company.
To arm the system:
1. Enter your Access Code and press the Command button on the keypad. As each digit is entered, the keypad sounder will beep.
Your Access Code: ____________________
2. When the Access Code has been entered, the keypad display will say “Secured Area Is Armed” and the keypad will beep.
If all the zones are not closed, “Secured Area Test Failure” will appear on the keypad display along with a list of points and their addresses.
3. If an incorrect Access Code is entered, the keypad will display “Invalid”.
To correct a mistake when entering a code, press the Arrow key and enter the Access Code again.
4. When the keypad displays “Secured Area Is Armed”, leave the premises before the Exit Delay expires.
At the end of the Exit Delay, all lights on the keypad will be shut OFF - your system is now armed.
Disarming the System
Enter the premises through the designated Entry-Exit door. The keypad will sound a constant tone to indicate that the system must be disarmed.
To disarm the system:
1. Enter your Access Code and press the Command button on the keypad.
If an error is made entering the code, press the Arrow key and enter the Code again.
2. When the correct Access Code is entered, the keypad display will say “Secured Area Is Disarmed”, and the sounder will be silenced - your system is now disarmed.
An Access Code must be entered before the Entry Delay expires or an alarm will occur.
If an alarm occurred while the system was armed, the display will show “Secured Area Is In Alarm”.
Enter
your Access Code to cancel the alarm and return the keypad to the “Ready” mode.
Page 12-14 Fusion User Manual
Tenants
13
In This Chapter
√
√
√
Enabling Tenants
Creating Tenant SSP Groups
Assigning SSP Groups to Operators
The Tenants feature allows you to visually separate hardware and cardholders in DNA Fusion.
Personnel, hardware, events and alarms will be displayed only for the assigned SSP(s). Operators can be assigned specific tenants, allowing you to restrict an operator to only one controller and their assigned cardholders or allow access to all the controllers and cardholders for a whole system view.
Setting Up Tenants
Each Fusion workstation must be configured in order for the tenants function to work properly.
Enabling Tenants
The Tenants setting in Host Settings must be enabled in order for the tenants options to be available.
1. Select DNA Properties from the Standard Toolbar.
Or
Select
DNA / Administrative / Properties from the Main Menu.
2. In the DNA Properties dialog, check the Enable Tenants (Segregation) checkbox.
3. Click OK to save the setting.
Fusion User Manual Page 13-1
Tenants
Filter on SSP List
1. Select Personnel / Tenant Settings from the Host Settings menu list.
2. Check the Filter Based on SSP List(s) checkbox.
This setting filters the events and hardware by SSP for the current tenant checked.
3. If desired, configure the remaining settings.
● Use Tenant Filtering - If Alarm Escalation and Event Routing is used in combination with Tenants, check Use Tenant Filtering to activate the feature. See page 4-25 for information on setting up Alarm
Escalation and Event Routing.
● Allow Shared SSPs - Allows SSPs to be shared between tenants. This allows the system owner to share
SSPs and/or control of the SSPs with this client.
Allow Edit - Allows operator to edit configurable settings on shared SSPs.
Allow Control - Allows operator to control hardware on shared SSPs.
● See System Messages - Displays system messages for operator on this workstation.
● Allow Card Transfers between Tenants - Allows a card to be assigned to another tenant on the system.
● Tenant Cards
Owned SSP: Show (Always) - Displays tenant cards on tenant SSPs. (Read only; always enabled)
Shared SSP: Show - Displays tenant cards on shared SSPs.
No Ownership: Show - Displays tenant cards on SSPs other than tenants.
● Non-Tenant Cards
Owned SSP: Show - Displays non-tenant cards on tenant SSPs.
Shared SSP: Show - Displays non-tenant cards on shared SSPs.
No Ownership: Show (Never) - Displays non-tenant cards on SSPs other than tenants. (Read only; always disabled)
● Allow Shared SSPs - Allows SSPs to be shared between tenants. This allows the system owner to share
SSPs and/or control of the SSPs with this client.
● Always Show Tenant Cards (All Controllers) - Override Button. Enables all buttons on the Tenant Cards row above regardless of their configuration.
4. Click OK to save the setting.
5. Restart DNA Fusion.
Page 13-2 Fusion User Manual
Creating Tenant SSP Groups
1. With the Personnel Browser open, right-click in the white area and select
Tenants / Add from the menu.
The Tenants Group Properties dialog will appear.
Tenants
2. Enter a Name for the Tenant Group.
3. Select the SSP from the Available Controllers section and click the button to add it to the Tenant
Controllers.
If all Available Controllers are desired, select the button and all available controllers will be transferred to the Tenant Controllers section.
To remove controllers, select either or .
4. If desired, select Personnel Properties in the Group Properties list.
The Personnel Properties dialog opens.
5. Configure the Personnel Properties options.
For more information on Personnel options, see page 3-13.
6. If desired, select the Custom Fields and Types in the Group Properties List.
7. Configure the Custom Fields.
For more information on Custom Fields, see page 3-22.
8. Click OK to save the settings and add the Tenant to the Browser.
The Operator must have access to “Edit” Tenant Settings in the Operator
Profiles. See page 4-5 for more information on Operator Profiles.
Fusion User Manual Page 13-3
Tenants
NOTES:
Page 13-4 Fusion User Manual
Tenants
Assigning Tenants to Operators
Operator Profiles should be created for each Tenant Group in order for multi-tenant viewing to be restricted.
Access to ALL Tenant Groups should be granted to a profile. For more information on configuring Operator Profiles, see page 4-5.
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Operator Maintenance / Operator Privileges from the Main Menu and select
Operator Profiles from the list.
Or
Select
the DNA Properties button on the Standard Toolbar and select Operator Profiles from the list.
The Operator Profiles dialog will open.
2. Select the Operator Profile from the drop down or create a new profile.
3. Expand the Tenants selection.
4. Expand the Tenants sub-heading.
5. Select the Tenant Group(s) to assign to the selected Operator Profile.
A Tenant Group with a check by it indicates that it will be available/visible to all assigned operators.
6. Click the Apply Changes button to save the settings.
7. Click OK.
All operators with the configured profile will have access to the indicated Tenant Group(s), both in the
Hardware Browser and the Personnel Browser.
To prevent operators from seeing all Tenants when running a report, under the Operator
Settings set the DNA Administrator option to Regional or Local Level.
Personnel must be configured in order for them to appear in the correct Tenant Group.
See page 13-7 for more information.
Fusion User Manual Page 13-5
Tenants
NOTES:
Page 13-6 Fusion User Manual
Tenants
Assigning Cardholders to a Tenant
In order for a cardholder to appear in the correct Tenant Group, they must be assigned to the Tenant when the cardholder is created or after the Tenant feature has been enabled.
1. Select the correct Tenant Group from the Personnel Browser and open a
Cardholder’s Record.
See Chapter 7 for information on adding cardholders.
2. Verify that the correct Tenant Group is selected.
If not, select the desired Tenant Group from the drop down.
3. Enter the cardholder information.
4. Right-click in the Cardholder Record and select Update to save the record.
The record is added to the correct Tenant Group and is only visible to those operators with the Tenant Group assigned to their profile.
Fusion User Manual Page 13-7
Tenants
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 13-8 Fusion User Manual
Events & Alarms
14
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
√
Using the Events Manager
Access Denied Codes
Handling Alarms
Controlling Hardware from the Alarm Grid
Configuring Logging for Events & Alarms
The Alarms Manager and Events Manager Grids are data windows that contain system information and allow the user to monitor real-time conditions of the physical environment as well as review a history of the system events.
The Events and Alarms windows can be closed by clicking the X in the upper right corner of the window.
There are a number of options for the Events and Alarms windows that can be set in the DNA Properties dialog. For more information, see page 3-4.
Events
An Event is the report of an incident that has occurred on the system. For example, when a user presents their card and is permitted access at the door, an event is sent to the host(s). The event documents the user concerned, the reader at which they presented their card as well as the time and date of the event.
The events that are displayed in the Events Grid are based on the settings in the Logging window.
See page 14-23 for information on Logging.
Events Toolbar
DNA Fusion provides many useful commands and shortcuts to help you manage the
Events Grid. These commands are available from the
Event Toolbar when the event is selected. All of these options are also available by right-clicking on the
Event as well, see page 14-8.
Pause Icon - Pauses the event screen display.
Print Preview Icon - Displays the Print Preview screen.
Personnel Record Icon - Displays the personnel record associated with the card involved with the selected event.
Retrieve Notes Icon - Displays notes associated with the personnel record for the card involved with the selected event.
Photo Verification Icon - Displays the Photo Recall Viewer populated with the photo associated with the personnel record for the card involved with the selected event.
Launch Camera Icon - Opens the IP Video browser for the camera associated with the event point.
Control Icon - Displays the Direct Control dialog for selected point or object.
Fusion User Manual Page 14-1
Events & Alarms
Point Properties Icon - Displays the Event Point Properties for the selected point or object.
Home Page Icon - Launches the home page associated with the selected object.
E-mail Event Icon - Displays the E-mail Event dialog box. Allows user to send e-mail with event data and text messaging.
Reports Icon - Arrow displays a Reports menu drop-down menu.
Page 14-2 Fusion User Manual
Events & Alarms
Events Filters Toolbar
DNA Fusion provides many useful filters to help you manage the Events Grid. These commands are available from the
Events Filters Toolbar. Event Filters may also be viewed by right-clicking in the Event Grid, see page
14-5.
Door Icon - Shows and hides all door events.
Arm Events Icon - Shows and hides all armed events.
Disarm Events Icon - Shows and hides all disarmed events.
Secure Icon - Displays and sorts secure events.
Alarm Events Icon - Displays and sorts alarm events.
Comm Events Icon - Displays and sorts communication events.
Access Area Events Icon - Shows and hides all area events.
MPG Icon - Shows and hides all MPGs (Monitor Point Groups) events.
Time Trigger Macros Icon - Shows and hides all time trigger macros events.
Operator Commands Icon - Shows and hides all operator commands events.
Access Granted Icon - Shows and hides all access granted events.
Access Denied Icon - Shows and hides all access denied events.
Mode Change Icon - Shows and hides all mode change events.
Operator Alarm Handling Icon - Filters the list for operator alarm handling events.
Miscellaneous Icon - Shows and hides all miscellaneous events.
Hardware Filters Icon - Hides the filtered hardware events.
Card Numbers Icon - Displays the Card Number Filters dialog box.
Tenant Filters Icon - Shows and hides tenant events.
Operators Filters Icon - Filters the list for operator commands.
Index Filter Icon - Opens the Index Selection Dialog box. Provides for more advanced filtering options, see page 14-5 for more information.
Fusion User Manual Page 14-3
Events & Alarms
Date Time Range Filter Icon - Configures date/time range parameter of events.
Clear All Filters Icon - Clears all filters.
Filtered Icon - Toggles between the last filter applied.
Page 14-4 Fusion User Manual
Events & Alarms
Events Manager
The
Events Manager shows the events in date/time order with the most recent events displayed at the top.
Date/time, user and location are recorded as well as a description of the event. The Events grid lists all system activity designated as an event in the Logging dialog.
To open the Events Manager:
1. Click the
Events Manager button on the Standard Toolbar.
Or
Press Shift+F2 on the keyboard.
The
Events Manager grid opens in the Data Window.
Multiple Event Windows
Multiple event windows can be configured to show different elements.
1. Right-click in the
Event Grid and select Grid / Save Settings.
2. If needed, browse to the desired location, enter a File Name and click the Save button.
3. Right-click in the
Event Grid and select Grid / Load Settings.
4. Locate the .evt file and click the Open button.
A new event grid will appear in the
Data Window.
5. Apply the desired Filter to the new grid.
Filtering Data
The Events Manager provides you with a number of different ways to filter the information presented. Events may be filtered to display only desired attributes or components.
1. Right-click in the
Event Grid to display the context menu.
2. Select the desired filter or secondary filter from the menu.
The
Event Grid will display only the events that are applicable to the filtered attribute.
Or
1. Drag and drop a hardware component or a personnel object to the
Events Window.
2.
To filter by multiple objects, drag the additional objects to the Events Window.
The
Event Grid will display only the events that are applicable to the selected objects.
Index Filter
The Index Filter allows the user to select events which provides greater filtering flexibility.
1. Right-click in the Event Grid to display the context menu.
2. Select
Filter / Index from the menu.
The Index dialog opens.
3. Select the desired
Event(s) from the drop down list(s).
Events can be selected from multiple categories.
4. Click the
OK button.
Fusion User Manual Page 14-5
Events & Alarms
Exporting the Event Grid
The Event Grid can be exported to a .csv file.
1. Right-click in the
Event Grid and select Grid / Export.
The Save As dialog opens.
2. If needed, browse to the desired
Location and enter a File Name.
3. Click the Save button.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
4. Click OK.
The report is exported to the designated location.
Events Grid Setup
The Event Grid can be configured to the operator’s preference. For example, the Controller’s (Panel) Time can be displayed on the Event Grid. This would be helpful if the controller is in a different time zone.
1. Right-click in the
Event Grid and select Grid / Grid Properties.
The
Events Grid Settings dialog opens.
2. Configure the Grid Properties options.
● Object Type Icons - Select this checkbox to display object icons on the Events Grid. Must be selected to see
Card Flags that have been set for a Cardholder.
3. Select the Grid Colors tab.
The
Grid Colors dialog opens.
4. Select Foreground and Background Colors for the various
Event Descriptions.
5. Select the
Grid Columns tab.
The Grid Columns dialog opens.
6.
Configure the Grid Columns.
● Move Up/Move Down - Moves the selected field.
● Defaults - Resets the grid to the default setting.
● Edit - Opens the DNA Events Grid Columns dialog for the selected field.
● Remove - Removes the selected field.
● Add - Opens the DNA Events Grid Columns dialog.
a. Enter a name in the
Heading field.
b. If desired, select an Icon Field from the drop down list.
c. Select
the desired field from the Text Field drop down.
d. Click OK.
7. Click the
OK button to save the configuration.
Page 14-6 Fusion User Manual
Events & Alarms
Accessing Hardware & Cardholders from the Events Grid
Controlling Hardware
DNA allows the operator to directly perform various tasks on a selected point from the Events Grid.
1. To access the hardware functions, right-click on the selected
Hardware object and select the option from the menu.
● Properties - Opens the Properties dialog for the selected object.
● Direct Control - Opens the Direct Control dialog. See page 8-4 through 8-17 for more information on the
Direct Control Dialog.
● DVR Recording - Opens the selected DVR Window.
● Launch Camera - Launches the Camera associated with the object (see page 8-33).
● Load Homepage - Loads the Homepage associated with the selected object.
● Trace History - Runs a Trace History report for the object (see page 8-13).
● Watch Item - If the Watch Window is open, the object will be added to the Watch Window. See
Chapter 15: Watch Windows for more information.
● Journal - Opens the DNA Journal window or opens the DNA Journal Selection dialog (see page 8-14).
Accessing Cardholders
From the Events Grid, the operator can perform a number of cardholder functions.
1. To access the cardholder functions, right-click on the selected Cardholder and select the option from the menu.
● Photo Recall - Opens the Photo Recall window if a photo is associated with the cardholder.
● Personnel Record - Opens the cardholder’s record.
● Get/Set Note - Opens the Card Flags dialog to retrieve or add a note to the cardholder’s record.
● Trace History - Runs a Trace History report for the cardholder (see page 7-31).
● Activate Card - Activates the selected card.
● Deactivate Card - Deactivates the selected card.
● Set Use Limit - Opens the Set Use Limit dialog.
● Free Pass - Opens the Set Anti-Passback Area dialog.
● Watch Item - If the Watch Window is open, the object will be added to the Watch Window.
● Journal - Opens the DNA Journal window or opens the DNA Journal Selection dialog (see page 7-32).
Fusion User Manual Page 14-7
Events & Alarms
NOTES:
Page 14-8 Fusion User Manual
Events & Alarms
Access Denied Codes
Events wherein a cardholder was denied access will appear on the Events Grid. Each access denied event will display a code statement indicating the reason. This may prove helpful in determining the correct resolution, if needed.
E vEnt
L oggEd
Access Denied: After Deactivation Date
Access Denied: Alarm Card Used!
Access Denied: Anti-pass Back Violation
Access Denied: Area Disabled
Access Denied: Deactivated Card
Access Denied: Duress Code Detected
Access Denied: Facility Code
Access Denied: Host Denied Access
Access Denied: Invalid Card Format
Access Denied: Invalid PIN
Access Denied: Issue Code
Access Denied: Level
d
Efinition
A card was presented after the deactivation date.
SOLUTION: Change the Deactivation Date in the cardholder’s record on the Card Tab. (7-9)
A card was presented that has been tagged an alarm card.
SOLUTION:
A card was presented that violated the Anti-pass Back protocols.
SOLUTION: If timed, wait for the time to expire or issue a Free-
Pass to get to cardholder in the correct area. (11-13)
A card was presented at an entry point to an Access Area, but was denied because the area has been disabled.
SOLUTION: Enable the specified Access Area. (11-5)
A card was presented that is no longer activated.
SOLUTION: Right-click on the card and select Activate or select the
Activate checkbox on the Card Tab in the Cardholder’s
Record. (7-12)
A duress code was entered on a keypad or a card was presented in a manner indicating a duress code at the point of entry.
SOLUTION: In the Advanced settings of the Door Properties, the
Set to Deny on Duress option has been checked. (8-51)
A card was presented with an invalid Facility Code.
SOLUTION: If a valid Facility Code, program the Code into the system. (8-43 & 8-71)
A card was presented at an entrance that required approval from the host but the approval was denied by the host.
SOLUTION: Host Verification enabled. (8-52) Verify that the cardholder has been entered in the system and the correct access level assigned.
A card was presented with a card format that does not match any in the database.
SOLUTION: If a valid Card Format, program the Format into the system. (8-71)
A PIN was entered that did not match any PIN in the database.
SOLUTION: Verify cardholder’s PIN number has been entered and the correct access level assigned. (7-9)
A card was presented with an issue code that is not longer activated.
SOLUTION: Cardholder should use correct card or Issue Code should be updated in the Cardholder’s record on the Card Tab.
(7-9)
A card was presented that was not assigned an access level for this entry point.
SOLUTION: If applicable, assign the cardholder the correct access level for the entry point. (7-21)
Page 14-9 Fusion User Manual
Events & Alarms
E vEnt
L oggEd
Access Denied: Locked
Access Denied: No Host Approval
d
Efinition
The door mode was configured to be locked and unresponsive to card presentation or PIN input.
SOLUTION: Change the Door Mode to for the specified door to
Card Only to allow card access. (8-3)
A card was presented at an entrance that required approval from the host but no response was received from the host.
SOLUTION: In the Advanced settings of the Door Properties, the
Host Verification option has been checked. (8-52)
A card was presented that does not match any card in the memory at the controller.
Access Denied: Not In Card File
SOLUTION: If the cardholder’s name appears in the Event Grid, verify that the correct Access Level has been assigned to the cardholder. (7-21) If assigned an access level, download the cardholder’s information to the controller. (7-4)
A card was presented at an entry point to an Access Area but was denied access because the area already contained the maximum number of occupants allowed.
Access Denied: Occupancy Limit
Access Denied: Time
SOLUTION: Occupants must leave the room to decrease the
Occupancy Count or the Maximum Occupancy Limit can be adjusted for the Access Area. (11-5)
A card was presented before the scheduled activation date.
Access Denied: Prior to Activation
SOLUTION: If applicable, adjust the Activation Date on the Card
Tab in the cardholder’s record. (7-9)
One card was presented at a reader requiring two cards for access (2 Card Rule) but a second was not presented within the
Access Denied: Second Card not
Presented allotted timeframe.
SOLUTION: Two valid cards with the proper access level must be presented to the reader in the allotted timeframe.
A card was presented with a proper access level for this entry point but the time of presentation was outside of the time schedule associated with the access level.
SOLUTION: If applicable, adjust the time schedule for the assigned access level. (5-5 & 6-5)
A card was presented which exceeded the number of times allowed for the card.
Access Denied: Use Limit
SOLUTION: If applicable, adjust the cardholder’s Use Limit number. (7-9)
** Each Access Denied Code has a corresponding code for Magstripe cards that indicates the direction the card was swiped. (<<) - The arrows indicate the card was slid right to left.
Fusion User Manual Page 14-10
Events & Alarms
Alarms
DNA offers a very sophisticated set of alarm monitoring tools. This section covers the basic capabilities of the alarm grid, alarm monitoring commands, and the versatility of DNA in handling alarms from a given work station.
Alarms signal a specific and “user-defined” change of state on system hardware. These changes in state are reported through the system to display on the alarm grid. Additionally, alarms can be set up and monitored using graphic pages. That method of alarm monitoring is addressed in Chapter 18: Graphics Maps.
Alarms Toolbar
Each button on the Alarms Toolbar represents a command used to control alarms in the grid. The Alarms options are also available by right-clicking on an Alarm in the Alarms window.
The Alarms toolbar is context sensitive so that only the objects or icons that are available for any given status are enabled. If an icon (or menu item) is not available, it will appear as a “ghost” object (greyed out).
Select All Icon - Allows the operator to select all of the current alarms on the grid for a specific control such as acknowledge or clear.
Acknowledge Alarm Icon - Allows the operator to acknowledge a selected alarm.
Acknowledge Selected Icon - Allows the operator to acknowledge a group of alarms that have been previously selected.
Clear Alarm Icon - Clears the grid of selected alarm. Only active once an alarm has been acknowledged and returned to normal.
Clear Selected Icon - Allows the operator to clear a group of alarms that have been previously selected. As with the clear button, this button is only active once an alarm has been acknowledged and returned to normal.
Dismiss Alarm Icon - Dismisses the selected alarm.
Dispatch Text Icon - Toggles the dispatch text requirement for Acknowledging or Clearing alarms.
Move Down Icon - Moves the selected alarm(s) down in the alarm grid order. Used for sorting.
Move Up Icon - Moves the selected alarm(s) up in the alarm grid order. Used for sorting.
Control Icon - Calls up a Control Dialog for the selected alarm point in the grid.
Point Properties Icon - Opens the Properties for the point where the alarm originated.
Alarm Information Icon - Toggles to expand a drop-down Alarm Information field under a selected event.
Camera Icon - Opens a window displaying a camera view if one has been associated with the alarm point selected in the grid.
Home Page Icon - Brings the point’s homepage to the front. The point’s homepage is associated in the point’s hardware properties.
E-mail Alarm Icon - Displays E-mail Alarm dialog box. Allows user to send e-mail with alarm data and text messaging to any valid e-mail address.
Fusion User Manual Page 14-11
Events & Alarms
NOTES:
Page 14-12 Fusion User Manual
Events & Alarms
The Alarm Grid
The
Alarm Grid is a data window comprised of a “matrix” or spreadsheet record of alarm events.
There are several ways to display the alarm grid. The basic alarm grid can be viewed by a number of different methods:
● Selecting the Alarm button at the top of the screen in the Standard Toolbar.
● Double-click the Alarm status icon on the Status Bar.
Selecting the
Alarm Grid (using any of the methods described) will bring it to the front of the operator interface and display any alarms that have not been acknowledged and cleared or dismissed.
If no alarms are pending, the grid will be brought forward with a message, “There are no pending alarms…”
The Alarm Grid presents the alarm information in a condensed format to conserve screen space. The alarm grid displays all pertinent data in an easy to read format. The grid consists of 9 columns to describe various properties of each individual alarm as well as an Alarm Information section:
H
EadEr d
Escription
Alarm Status Icon
The user defined priority of this alarm.
The time and date that the alarm occurred.
The hardware address of the specific alarm point.
A user defined address description of the alarm point.
Supplemental alarm text information.
The current status of the hardware.
The count indicating how many times this specific alarm point has changed state since it was acknowledged and cleared.
The status of the alarm condition.
The
Alarm Information pane includes the alarm information for the selected alarm including previous alarm incidents as well as any predefined instructions.
Alarm Grid Features
Fusion User Manual Page 14-13
Events & Alarms
All alarms will display text detailing the specific information regarding the alarm. Any number of alarms can be displayed simultaneously on the grid. With the alarm count feature and the expandable and collapsible alarm text, virtually hundreds of alarms can be viewed simultaneously.
● The Alarm count feature is extremely useful in periods of system maintenance or hardware device failure. With this feature, the alarm point only creates one entry on the grid and the count is adjusted upwards to indicate the number of times the point has changed state.
● The Alarm Information Pane allows the operator to read the alarm information as well as any predefined instructions and respond accordingly.
● Multiple alarms can be selected to make acknowledging and/or clearing the alarms easier.
Page 14-14 Fusion User Manual
Events & Alarms
Using the Alarms Grid
The alarm grid offers tools to help manage the alarm process.
Grouping the Alarm Grid
The
Alarm Grid can be grouped by any header column including Alarm Status, Priority or any other header column.
1. Select the
“Group By” Box option in the top of the Alarm Grid.
The Group By section opens.
2. Drag an
Alarm Grid column header(s) to the box.
The Alarm Grid is grouped by the header(s).
Arranging the Columns
Alarm Grid columns can be arranged so that only the relevant columns are visible.
To remove a column:
1. Drag the column off the header until a large X is visible.
2. Drop the column anywhere in the DNA environment.
The header column is removed from the
Alarm Grid.
To replace a column:
Once a column header has been removed, it will appear in the
Field Chooser dialog.
1. Click the
Field Chooser option in the top of the Alarm Grid.
The
Field Chooser dialog will open with the removed columns.
2. Drag the desired column to any location on the
Alarm Grid header until two red arrows appear.
3. Drop the column in the desired location.
The column will appear in the Alarm Grid.
Grid Sounds
The alarm grid can be configured to the operator’s preference as well as assigning different audio files to alarm states.
The
Alarm Grid Sounds dialog is used to assign a unique sound by alarm priority or to various alarm states.
The sound can be any .wav file available on the system.
1. Right-click in the Alarm Grid and select Grid Setup from the menu.
The
Alarm Grid Settings dialog box will open.
2. Select Grid Sounds-By Priority or Grid Sounds-Other from the menu.
The
Grid Sounds dialog is displayed.
3. Select the Events by checking the Enable box.
4. Click the
Browse button to find the .wav file.
5. Select the
Loop checkbox to continue playing the sound until another action occurs.
6. Click
OK.
Fusion User Manual Page 14-15
Events & Alarms
Alarm Grid Colors
The
Alarm Grid is setup to change colors based on the Alarm Priority and Alarm Status. The grid colors can be customized for each priority and status.
1. Right-click in the
Alarm Grid and select Grid Setup from the menu.
The Alarm Grid Settings dialog box will open..
2. Select
Alarm Grid Colors from the menu.
The Grid Colors dialog is displayed.
3. Select the desired Priority from the drop down list.
4. Select the
Background and Foreground colors for each Alarm State.
● Alarm: A new alarm message. A change of state was detected.
● RTN - No Ack: An alarm that has returned to normal but has not been recognized by the operator.
● Acknowledged: An alarm that has been recognized by the operator.
● Cleared: An alarm that has been acknowledged, responded to, and cleared from the alarm grid.
5. If desired, check the Blink Background box.
The color will blink when the alarm condition is met.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
Page 14-16 Fusion User Manual
Events & Alarms
Handling Alarms
The system operator is responsible for the recognition of an alarm condition. This section will deal with the basics of how an alarm is handled once it is displayed on the
Alarm Grid. Alarm handling involves multiple steps for the operator and they can be accomplished directly from the Alarm gird in a number of ways.
There are two alarm states to be aware of:
● Active – When the point has changed state from its normal state to an alarm state.
● Inactive – When the point has not changed to an alarm state or it has returned to its normal state.
In working with the alarms, there are basically four conditions of an alarm:
● Unacknowledged Alarm - A new alarm message. A change of state was detected.
● Acknowledged Alarm - An alarm that has been recognized by the operator.
● Cleared Alarm - An alarm that has been acknowledged, responded to, and cleared from the alarm grid.
● Dismissed Alarm - An alarm that has been dismissed by the operator.
When handling alarms from the alarm grid, the operator can experience and must recognize the actual status of the alarm being viewed and that status is determined by a combination of states and conditions.
Under normal operations the process of state and condition on any given alarm point would be as follows:
s tEp
1.
2.
3.
4.
a ction
The alarm comes to the grid
Operator recognizes the alarm
The alarm returns to normal state
Operator clears alarm
s tatE
Active
Active
Inactive
Inactive
c ondition
Unacknowledged
Acknowledged
Acknowledged
Cleared
The operator has three different avenues to work from in order to interface with the system in handling, monitoring and responding to alarms from the Alarms Grid:
● Alarm Toolbar
● Menus
Alarms menu on the Main Menu
Context menu resulting from right-clicking a selected alarm
● Keystroke / Shortcut Keys
Acknowledge
F5 Shortcut key
Clear F8 Shortcut key
Customized user-defined keystroke combinations
The Administrator has the ability to clear all alarms in the Alarm Grid. To clear all the
alarms, select DNA / Administrative / Alarms & Events / Clear All Alarms. All pending alarms
will be cleared from the Alarm Grid.
Fusion User Manual Page 14-17
Events & Alarms
Alarm Status
In providing the various avenues for the direction and control of alarm commands, the operator can effectively and effortlessly view, acknowledge, respond to, and clear all alarm activities from the basic alarm grid.
Alarm handling in DNA is color coded so that the response activity to handle an alarm will involve the same color as indicated on the icon in the alarm status field.
For instance, an alarm with a red icon in the status field requires that the operator select a red Acknowledge icon from the toolbars or press the
Acknowledge function key. The same logic applies for the green Clear icons and key.
a
Larm s tatus
/i con a
Larm
s tatus
d
Efinition o pErator
r
EsponsE o pErator
a ction
A change has occurred to a normal condition that has resulted in an alarm.
The operator should acknowledge the alarm.
Select or or
F5 or Shift F5 (All Selected)
The condition that resulted in the alarm has returned to its normal state, but still must be acknowledged by the operator.
The operator should acknowledge the alarm.
Select or or
F5 or Shift F5 (All Selected)
The alarm has been recognized by the operator, but the condition has not returned to normal.
No action is required to by the operator but the physical condition causing the alarm may need to be addressed.
No action is required however, the operator may need to change the physical condition of the problem in order for the condition to return to normal.
The alarm has been recognized by the operator and the condition has returned to normal and awaits clearing by the operator.
The operator should clear the alarm.
Select or or
F8 or Shift F8 (All Selected)
An acknowledged alarm may not be cleared until the alarm state has returned to normal, i.e., all alarms must be both acknowledged and indicate a “returned-to-normal” status before they can be cleared. Order is not important. However, the operator may use the
Dismiss option to remove an alarm from the alarms grid prior to both conditions occurring.
If the system connection has been interrupted, select View / Refresh from the Main Menu
to display the current alarm data. A refresh should also be performed if the operator logs off and then back on or if the Alarms grid seems unresponsive.
Page 14-18 Fusion User Manual
Events & Alarms
Dispatch Text
The Dispatch Text feature allows comments to be entered or selected during alarm acknowledgement to record relevant information.
Dispatch Text can be entered two ways:
● Free-hand entry
● Selecting from a list of pre-defined entries
Free Hand Text Entry
The free hand method allows the operator to key the alarm information into a dialog.
1.
Configure the Alarms Logging & Priority settings.
See page 14-23 for more information on configuring alarms.
2.
Configure the Operator’s Profile to Require Dispatch Text for the various priorities.
See Chapter 4: DNA Operators, page 4-5 for more information on configuring profiles.
3. When an alarm is presented, handle the alarm as explained on page 14-17.
Upon Clearing or Dismissing an alarm, the Enter Dispatch Text dialog appears.
4. Enter comments and click the
Clear/Dismiss button.
The alarm is removed from the
Alarm Grid and the Dispatch Text is saved to the Event Grid under the
Event Data field for the Alarm Cleared/Dismissed event.
Predefined Text Entry
Predefined Dispatch Text requires the operator to select from a list of entries.
1.
Configure the Alarms Logging & Priority settings.
See page 14-23 for more information on configuring alarms.
2.
Configure the Operator’s Profile to Require Dispatch Text for an alarm.
See Chapter 4, page 4-5 for more information on configuring profiles.
3. From the DNA Properties dialog window, select the checkbox for Use Predefined
Dispatch Text.
See Chapter 3, page 3-4 for more information on DNA Properties.
4. Select DNA / Administrative / Alarms & Events / Dispatch Text from the Main Menu.
The
Dispatch Text Editor appears.
Fusion User Manual Page 14-19
Events & Alarms
5. Enter a
Dispatch ID number and the Dispatch Text in the correct fields.
6. Click the New button to add additional lines.
7. Click
OK to save the text entries.
8. When an alarm is presented, handle the alarm as explained on page 14-17.
Upon Clearing or Dismissing an alarm, the Enter Dispatch Text dialog appears.
9. Select the
Predefined Dispatch Text from the Index drop down.
The text will populate the dialog.
10. Click the
Clear/Dismiss button.
The alarm is removed from the
Alarm Grid and the Dispatch Text is saved to the Event Grid under the
Event Data field for the Alarm Cleared/Dismissed event.
Page 14-20 Fusion User Manual
Events & Alarms
Accessing Hardware from the Alarms Grid
Controlling Hardware
DNA allows the operator to directly perform various tasks on a selected point from the Events Grid.
1. To access the hardware functions, right-click on the selected object and select
Hardware from the menu.
● Point Properties - Opens the Properties dialog for the selected object.
● Direct Control - Opens the Direct Control dialog. See pages 8-4 through 8-17 for more information on the
Direct Control Dialog.
● DVR Recordings - Opens the selected DVR Window.
● Launch Camera - Launches the camera associated with the object (see page 8-31).
● Load Homepage - Loads the Homepage associated with the selected object.
● Journal - Opens the DNA Journal window or opens the DNA Journal Selection dialog (see page 8-14).
● Trace History - Runs a Trace History report for the object (see page 8-13).
● Watch Item - If the Watch Window is open, the object will be added to the Watch Window.
See Chapter 15: Watch Windows for more information.
Fusion User Manual Page 14-21
Events & Alarms
NOTES:
Page 14-22 Fusion User Manual
Events & Alarms
Configuring the Alarms & Events Logging
The system administrator will need configure which alarms and events will be reported to the Alarm gird.
By default, no conditions are marked as alarms however, the Return to Normal (RTN) conditions have been selected.
1. Select
DNA / Administrative / Alarms & Events / Logging from the Main Menu.
The
Alarms Routing Editor dialog box will open.
2. Select an object from the menu.
3. Select the parameters for each event for the selected object.
● Log? - Log this event to the database.
● Display? - Display this event in the Event Grid.
● RTN? - Check if the event is a return to normal (RTN) from an alarm condition.
● Alarm? - Display the event as an alarm in the Alarm Grid.
NOTE: If an alarm event is identified, a RTN condition must be selected in order for alarms to be cleared, i.e., Door Held/Door Forced is identified as an alarm (ALARM) condition then Door Closed would be the Return to Normal (RTN) condition.
● Priority - Priority for the event.
4. Repeat steps 2 through 3 until all objects have been configured.
5. Click
OK to save the configuration.
Fusion User Manual Page 14-23
Events & Alarms
NOTES:
Page 14-24 Fusion User Manual
Events & Alarms
Event Filtering and Alarm Escalation
Event Filtering and Alarm Escalation gives you the ability to automatically filter the events via workstation or operator profile as well as escalate alarms to email. Once events are generated they will be routed through the system to the correct workstation or operator.
Alarms can be emailed to designated addresses based on the Filter Definitions and Alarm Priorities.
Configuring Event Filtering
Setting Up Event Filters
1. Select
DNA / Administrative / Setup Filters from the Main Menu.
The Filter Setup dialog opens.
2. Select the
Add button to create a new Event Filter.
The Filter Definitions dialog appears.
3. Click the Add button to create a new Filter Definition.
The
Filter Properties dialog opens.
4. Enter a description in the
Filter Description field and click the OK button.
If desired, click the
Add New Escalation Object button. See page 14-26 for more information on Alarm
Escalation.
5. Expand the header objects and select the desired components.
6. Click the
Close button to save the setting and exit the dialog.
7. Apply the
Filter to an operator profile(s) or Fusion workstation(s).
Applying the Event Filters
Once created, event filters can be assigned to a specific workstation or to an operator’s profile.
To assign the Event Filter to a workstation:
1. Open the
DNA Properties dialog.
2. Select
the desired filter from the Station Filter drop down and click OK.
See page 3-2 for more information on DNA Properties.
To assign the Event Filter to an operator profile:
1. Open the Operator Profiles dialog.
2. Expand the Operator Filters section and select the desired
Filter from the list.
3. Click OK.
See page 4-7 for more information on Operator Profiles.
Fusion User Manual Page 14-25
Events & Alarms
Setting Up Alarm Escalation
1. Select
DNA / Administrative / Setup Escalation from the Main Menu.
The
Filter Definitions dialog opens.
Or
Select
DNA / Administrative / Setup Filters from the Main Menu.
The Filter Setup dialog opens.
This option allows for the combination of the
Event Filtering and Alarm Escalation features. See page 14-
25 for information on configuring Event Routing.
2. Select the
Add button to create a new Alarm Escalation filter.
The Filter Properties dialog will appear.
Or
Select
a configured Event Route and click the Edit button.
The
Filter Definitions dialog appears.
3. Click the
Add button to create a new Filter Definition.
The
Filter Properties dialog opens.
4. Enter a description in the Filter Description field and click the OK button.
5. Click the
Add New Escalation Object button.
The
Escalation Properties dialog opens.
6. Enter a description in the
Description field.
7. Enter a number (in seconds) in the
Timeout field.
After an alarm is received, if the operator does not respond to the condition in the set amount of time it will be escalated per the settings.
8. Enter the desired
Alarm Priority to escalate.
If the alarm generated matches the Priority setting it will be escalated after the designated amount of time.
9. Select the
Add button.
The Escalation Type dialog opens.
10. Select
Send Email Message from the drop down list and click OK.
The Escalation Email Properties dialog appears.
11. Complete the
Description, From address, To address, and Subject Matter fields.
12. If desired, enter information in the Body section and click OK.
13. Click
OK to save the setting.
14. Click OK to close the dialog.
The
Email Authentication settings in the Driver Setup must be configured properly for the email to be sent. See page 20-3 for information on Setting up Email.
15. Apply the
Filter to an operator profile(s) or Fusion workstation(s).
Page 14-26 Fusion User Manual
Watch Window
15
In This Chapter
√
√
√
Using Watch Windows
Adding Objects to Watch Windows
Configuring a Watched Object
The DNA Watch Windows feature is a unique and extremely useful tool that helps the user focus on those objects (persons, entry points, and alarms) that require the most or frequent attention.
Watch Windows are data window panes that provide the user with the ability to monitor given alarms and track individual events, and to be alerted when such an event occurs.
Typical events the user might track would be:
● When a specific cardholder enters
● When a specific door is opened
● When a specific cardholder enters through a specific door
Using the Watch Windows
To open the Watch Windows:
1. Select View / Windows / Watch from the Main Menu.
The Watch Window will display at the bottom of the main screen environment. However, the window can be docked anywhere by the operator.
2. Select a tab to display the desired window of the four Watch Windows available.
Naming the Watch Windows
1. Right-click in the Watch Window and select Watch Window Setup.
The Watch Windows Host Settings dialog opens.
2. Enter a Caption for each Watch Window.
3. If desired, select a Grid Color.
4. Click OK to save the settings.
!
Watch Window names can also be defined in the Host Settings / Watchbar Settings or by
right-clicking in the Watch Window area and selecting Watch Window Setup. See page
3-12 for more information on Watchbar Settings.
Fusion User Manual Page 15-1
Watch Window
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 15-2 Fusion User Manual
Watch Window
Adding Watch Objects
1. Open the selected Watch Window to add the objects.
2. Select the object from its explorer/browser and drag and drop it into the Watch Window.
Or
Right-click
on the desired object and select Watch Item.
The object will appear in the Watch Window.
Watched Object Options
Depending on the watched object, a number of different options are available.
To view the available options:
1. With the Watch Window open, right-click on the object.
A context menu will appear.
2. Select the option from the menu.
● Alarms - Allows for the control of alarms for the watched object from the Watch Window. See Chapter
14 for more information on alarms.
● Personnel - Provides access to the selected personnel record as well as the ability to trace history from the Watch Window. See Chapter 7 for more information on personnel.
● Hardware - Provides access to the selected objects properties as well as the ability to control the hardware from the Watch Window. See Chapter 8 for more information on hardware.
Removing Watch Objects
1. With the Watch Window open, right-click on the object.
2. From the menu select Watch Bar Items / Remove.
The object will disappear from the Watch Window.
Fusion User Manual Page 15-3
Watch Window
Configuring a Watched Object
Watch Window items can be configured individually.
1. Right-click on the watch object and select Watch Bar Items / Properties from the menu.
The Watch Item Properties dialog will appear.
2. Configure the object using the drop-down menus.
● Background Color - Sets the background color for the selected object.
● Foreground Color - Sets the foreground color for the selected object.
● Enable Sounds - If checked, the selected audio file will play when the associated event occurs.
● Audio File - Displays the path to the selected audio file.
● Sound Event - The selected event that will trigger the audio file.
● Sound Address - The selected object address where the event will occur to initiate the audio file.
3. Click the Browse button to select an audio file to assign to the object.
4. Select the Sound Event from the drop down list.
The event must occur in order for the audio file to play.
5. Select the object from the Sound Address drop down list.
The selected event must occur and the specified object in order for the audio file to play.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
Page 15-4 Fusion User Manual
HTML Viewer
16
In This Chapter
√
√
Using the HTML Viewer
Adding Pages & URLs to the HTML Viewer
The built-in HTML Viewer is a data window that provides the ability to view any web content directly from within the application as well as add custom HTML pages and multimedia to any system. This may include such information as a company web page, facility layout, phone lists, policies and procedures, etc.
All HTML pages are added to the viewer menu by using the HTML Viewer Editor.
The HTML Viewer is a global setting which allows the administrator to configure the feature at any client workstation. After the HTML Viewer is configured, the settings will be available at all client workstations.
Fusion User Manual Page 16-1
HTML Viewer
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 16-2 Fusion User Manual
HTML Viewer
Using the HTML Viewer
To open the HTML Viewer:
1. Select File / HTML Viewer from the Main Menu.
The HTML Viewer opens.
2. Click links in the HTML Viewer pane to navigate to the destination points.
The associated page is displayed.
Adding Pages & URLs
The tree in the HTML explorer represents the pages available to be displayed in the Viewer panel.
The HTML explorer tree is created by using the HTML Viewer Editor.
To open the HTML Viewer Editor:
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Edit HTML Tree from the Main Menu.
The DNAFusion HTML Viewer Editor is displayed.
The operator may add root pages or he/she may add pages as “children” to existing roots.
New Root Pages
A root page will show up in the tree as a main item. You may add children to a root page.
1. Select the New Root button.
Or
Right-click
on a HTML link and select the Insert Before or
Insert After option from the menu.
A
New Item will appear in the tree.
2. Type the desired name for the new page.
3. From the Link field, select the File button to locate the desired link or type the address in the field.
4. Select an icon for the new link.
5. Select the Save button.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
6. Select Yes to save the changes.
Fusion User Manual Page 16-3
HTML Viewer
New Child Pages
A child page will show up in the tree as a sub-item to a root page.
1. Select the Root item from the The DNAFusion HTML Viewer Editor dialog.
2. Right-click on the item and select Add Child from the menu.
Or
Select
the Insert Before or Insert After option from the menu.
3. Select the New Child button in the HTML Viewer Editor.
A
New Child will appear in the tree.
4. Type the desired name for the new page.
5. From the Link field, select the File button to locate the desired link or type the address in the field.
6. Select an icon for the new link.
7. Select the Save button.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
8. Select Yes to save the changes.
The new child object is now nested under the selected page.
Edit HTML Page
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Edit HTML Tree from the Main Menu.
The DNAFusion HTML Viewer Editor is displayed.
2. Right-click the desired HTML Item and select Edit Label.
3. Type the desired name for the page.
4. If needed, select the File button in the Link field and locate the desired link or type the address in the field.
5. Select an icon for the link.
6. Select the Save button.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
7. Select Yes to save the changes.
Remove HTML Page
1. With the DNAFusion HTML Viewer Editor open, right-click the desired HTML Item and select Remove
Node.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
2. Click Yes to remove the page.
The HTML page is removed from the HTML Viewer tree.
3. Select the Save button.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
4. Select Yes to save the changes.
Page 16-4 Fusion User Manual
Reports
17
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
Types of Reports
Creating a Report
Creating Custom Reports
Exporting Reports
The Reports feature in DNA is a straightforward and easy to use application interface for delivering an elaborate and detailed account of information gathered by the program. Like all of DNA, the reports function is highly customizable and provides the user the ability to generate specific and useful data tailored for any focus.
Reports
Report Types
There are several default reports from which to choose that offer a wide array of information.
Access
● Access Levels - Displays the access levels with the assigned door(s) and time schedule(s).
● Access Level Descriptions - Shows the description for each access level.
● Floors - Provides Floor Group information including floors and time schedule(s).
● Door Access Profile - Shows the access levels that are associated with each entry point.
● Elevator Access Profile - Under Development
Alarms
● Alarms History - Provides a history of all the alarms based on the defined parameters.
● Acknowledged Alarms - Displays only the Acknowledged alarms based on the parameters.
● Pending Alarms - Reports the alarms that have not been Acknowledged and are still pending.
Events
● Event History - Provides the ability to run an “Event” specific report based card number, event, and/ or device specific parameters.
● Event Log Settings - Shows the Events & Alarms Logging settings.
Hardware Settings
● Sites - Displays Site and Station information as well as the number of controllers and subcontrollers attached to the Site.
● Channels - Shows all the Channel(s) information for the Site.
● Controllers (SSP) - Provides information on the controllers attached to the system.
● Sub-Controller (SIO) - Reports the subcontrollers model and address as well as the channel.
Fusion User Manual Page 17-1
Reports
● Monitor Points - Displays the monitor points properties including circuit type and log specification.
● Control Points - Shows the control points properties as well as momentary time and normal state.
● Readers - Reports the reader properties including mode, type, and card format information.
● Elevators - Displays the elevator information including maximum floors and associated hardware.
● Cameras - Provides information on the cameras programmed into the system.
● Monitor Point Groups - Under Development
● Doors - Displays the door information including associated hardware.
● Door Contacts - Displays the Door Status Monitor contact information for all the doors in the system.
● Request to Exit - Provides the Request to Exit information for all the doors in the system.
● Door Strikes - Shows the Lock information for all the doors in the system.
● APB Doors - Reports the Anti-Pass Back Doors in the system along with area information.
Personnel
● Companies - Displays the company information for all companies entered in the system including the address.
● Personnel - Card Information - Shows all the cardholders in alphabetical order with their card numbers along with their Activation and Deactivation dates as well as if the card is Active.
● Personnel - General - Provides all the cardholders in alphabetical order along with company, department, title, work phone and employees id information.
● Personnel - Access - Reports all the cardholders in alphabetical order with their card numbers along the assigned access level(s) as well as if the card is Active.
● Personnel - Groups - Displays the Personnel Groups and the cardholders associated with each group.
Restored Archive Data
● Acknowledged Alarms - Shows any restored acknowledged alarms based on the parameters.
● Audit Trail - Displays any restored audit trail events based on the defined parameters.
● Event History - Reports any restored event history (transactions) based on the parameters.
System
● Audit Trail - Displays the operator’s actions based on the defined parameters.
● Holidays - Shows the holidays that have been programmed into the system including the date and duration of the holiday.
● Macros - Provides information on the system macros including action and hardware address.
● Time Schedule - Reports the time schedules that have been programmed in the system including begin and end times as well as the days of the weeks.
● Triggers - Displays information on the system triggers including the trigger event, trigger address and the linked macro information.
● Auto Armed Secured Areas - Under Development
● Door Follows Time Schedule Report - Provides information on each doors time schedule setting as well as any one-time scheduled events.
● Operators - Shows the operators within the system, the operator profile they are assigned, if they are an admin, and the last logon information.
Custom Reports
● User-defined reports - Custom tailored reports that have been added to the system.
Page 17-2 Fusion User Manual
Reports
Generating a Report
1. To open any of these reports, select Reports from the Main Menu.
2. From the resulting menu, select the desired menu item category and menu sub-item.
For instance, to open the Events History report from the Events category, select Reports / Events / Events
History from the Main Menu.
The DNAFusion Report Parameter Configuration will appear.
3. Complete the Report Header information.
The information will appear on the report banner on the first page.
The operator field will default to the operator who is currently logged in. The owner is the person who requested the report. The Custom Description field simply describes the report.
4. Use the tabs to configure the Parameters for the selected report.
Each tab will display a dialog box with a list of items.
For tabs with multiple attributes, the list can be sorted by the different columns by clicking on the column header. The current sort field is designated with a *.
5. Click OK.
The selected report will open.
Once a report is open, the Reports Main Menu selections change to allow for control of the report.
Reports Toolbar
DNA provides a Reports toolbar that allows the operator to quickly filter and print the report.
Report commands are available from the Report Toolbar.
Report Refresh Icon - Refreshes the current, active report display. The “To Date” will be automatically updated to the current date and time.
Report Parameters Icon - Displays the Reports Parameter Configuration dialog box for the current, active report.
Report SQL Icon - Displays the SQL Editor for the current, active report.
Print Report Icon - Displays the Print Report dialog box which allows for printing of the current, active report.
** “Active” refers to the top report if multiple reports are open.
Fusion User Manual Page 17-3
Reports
Navigating the Report
At the top of the Reports Viewer is the Viewer Control Bar that has a series of control icons. These icons allow the operator to navigate through the report, change the view, print, search the report for specific items, and even export the report to several destinations in a variety of formats.
Page 17-4
Export Report Icon - Displays the Export Report dialog box. See page 17-7 for more information on exporting reports.
Print Report Icon - Displays the Print Report dialog box.
Go to First Page Icon - Displays the first page of the report.
Go to Previous Page Icon - Displays the previous page of the report.
Go to Next Page Icon - Displays the next page of the report.
Go to Last Page Icon - Displays the last page of the report.
Page Number Indicator - Displays the current page number and the total pages in the report. To display a different page, simply enter the desired page number and press
Enter.
Stop Loading Icon - Stops the loading process and displays the last page of the partial load. Page indicator total will display the last page number and a “+” to indicate that only a portion of the information was loaded.
Search Icon - Displays the Search Text dialog box and allows the operator to enter a character string. The application will find the next matching string of characters and highlight them with a red-outlined box.
Zoom Control Icon - Zoom view percentage drop-down menu. The Zoom Control defaults to fit the page width in the current window.
Fusion User Manual
Reports
Creating a Custom Report
The DNA reports function features the capability to create and maintain up to 20 customized reports. This is particularly useful when the operator wishes to save a report configuration that will be used repeatedly. After creating a custom report, the report is saved so the operator may recall or schedule it later.
1. Open the desired report and configure the parameters with the exception of the Date/Time Range option.
The report will open in the Data Window.
2. From the Reports item on the Main Menu, select the Create Custom Report option.
The Report Name dialog opens.
3. Enter a name for the report and click the OK button.
The Custom Report Configuration dialog box opens.
4. Enter a Menu Name and any desired Help Text.
These entries will appear in the Reports menu.
5. Select any desired Parameters checkboxes.
Parameters that are relevant to the selected report are available or selection. Checking a parameter will make it configurable when the report is generated. Leaving a parameter unselected will make it unavailable when the custom report is generated.
6. Click OK to save the report.
The Custom Reports Manager dialog will appear and the new report will appear in the next available slot.
7. Review the custom reports configuration.
Highlight the desired custom report in the list. The Add, Edit, and Delete buttons modify the selected report as indicated.
8. When satisfied with the custom report’s configuration, click the OK button.
The custom report is now listed in the Main Menu under Reports / Custom Reports.
Fusion User Manual Page 17-5
Reports
Generating a Custom Report
1. To open a custom report, select Reports / Custom Report from the Main
Menu.
2. From the resulting menu, select the desired custom report from the list.
The DNAFusion Report Parameter Configuration will appear with only the selected parameters available.
3. Complete the Report Header information.
4. Use the tabs to configure the Parameters for the selected report.
5. Click OK.
The selected report will open.
Once a report is open, the Reports Main Menu selections change to allow for control of the report.
Page 17-6 Fusion User Manual
Printing a Report
1. With the selected report open, click the Print icon.
2. Select the desired printer from the drop-down list in the Printer Settings area.
The Print Report dialog opens.
Reports
3. Select the Number of Copies.
Exporting a Report
1. With the selected report open, click the Export icon.
The Export dialog appears.
2. Select the File Format from the drop-down list and enter the parameters for the selected format.
● Acrobat Format (PDF) - Maintains the original formatting of the report.
● Crystal Report (RPT) - Requires Crystal to open the report.
● HTML 3.2 - Opens in an Internet window. Maintains the original formatting.
● HTML 4.0 - Opens in an Internet window. Maintains the original formatting.
The operator will need to specify a file path when exporting in HTML format. The file name of the report and the file name of the “temp” file can not be the same.
● MS Excel 97-2000 (XLS) - Maintains the original formatting of the report.
● MS Excel 97-2000-Data only (XLS) - Data separated into columns.
● MS Word (RTF) - Maintains the original formatting of the report.
● MS Word-Editable (RTF) - Maintains the original formatting of the report and allows for editing.
● ODBC - Requires the selection of a dsn from the list.
When exporting in ODBC format, “Application” and “Disk File” are the same.
● Record Style-Columns with spaces (REC) - Produces an EpiData file.
● Record Style-Columns without spaces (REC) - Produces an EpiData file.
● Report Definition (TXT) - Provides the report parameters in a .txt file
● Rich Text Format (RTF) - Maintains the original formatting of the report.
● Separated Values (CSV) - Excel format with data separated into rows.
● Tab Separated Text (TTX) - Exports to a .ttx file.
● Text (TXT) - Simple text file.
● XML - Extensible Markup Language.
Fusion User Manual Page 17-7
Reports
3. Select the Destination from the drop-down list.
● Application - The report is exported directly to the application for the selected format type.
● Disk File - The program saves the report to a file path location that the operator specifies.
● Exchange Folder - The report is exported to a Microsoft® Exchange folder. The operator selects the folder, and the report is stored there in the format that the operator specifies. A Microsoft Exchange folder can contain standard notes (mail), files, and instances of Microsoft Exchange forms.
● Lotus Domino - The report is exported to the Lotus Domino server.
● Lotus Domino Mail - The program displays a dialog box through which the report may be e-mailed directly in the specified format to an email address that the operator enters. The operator may type a message and the report is attached by default.
● Microsoft Mail (MAPI) - The program displays a dialog box through which the report may be e-mailed directly in the specified format to an email address that the operator enters. The operator may type a message and the report is attached by default.
4. Based on the selection above, click OK or Send when finished.
When exporting a report to MAPI, the email application must be running simultaneously with DNA at the time the email is configured AND at the time the email is sent. A dialog will appear verifying the application can access Microsoft Outlook. Specify an amount of time and click Yes.
MS Outlook 2000 SP1 + SR1 and later editions will prompt the current Windows user for permission before allowing DNA to access it. Consequently, the Microsoft Mail destination option will not operate as an automatic functionality at the scheduled time.
Scheduling a Report
See page 19-9 for information on scheduling a report.
Page 17-8 Fusion User Manual
Graphic Maps
18
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
Creating Graphic Maps
Linking Graphic Maps to Hardware & Hyperlinks
Using Graphic Maps to Control Hardware
Using Graphic Maps to Handle Alarms
The graphic maps in DNA are a powerful and flexible tool for providing visual representations of an external hardware platform. The maps can represent the various states and statuses of the attached hardware, and may be used to allow easy access to various user commands, such as alarm acknowledgement, hardware control, and setup.
DNA provides a flexible application of sounds and audio capability including customizing status and alarm sounds and employing audio instruction capability.
Graphics
The graphic maps are “object oriented” graphic objects, meaning that, unlike a typical graphics program, they may be manipulated and moved as a single entity easily after their creation. This allows the various properties to be used to represent hardware states and statuses. In addition, the maps may be linked together to provide a drill down effect, linked to external applications and web sites.
Graphic maps exist in either design mode or in run mode. Design mode allows the graphic map to be modified and graphic objects to be added, linked, and configured. Run mode protects a configured graphic object and disallows any modifications, while still allowing hardware and alarms to be controlled via the graphic map.
Graphics Toolbar
DNA provides a Graphics Toolbar that allows the operator to easily customize a map. Graphics commands are available from the Graphics Toolbar.
Select Tool Icon - Select tool is used to select objects for modifications.
Line Tool Icon - Draws a line.
Rectangle Tool Icon - Draws a rectangle. Can show state using background and foreground colors.
Ellipses Tool Icon - Draws a ellipses. Can show state using background and foreground colors.
Polyline Tool Icon - Draws a polyline (not closed) object.
Polygon Tool Icon - Draws a polygon (closed) object. Can show state using background and foreground colors.
Pointer Tool Icon - Draws an arrow.
Fusion User Manual Page 18-1
Graphic Maps
Freehand Tool Icon - Draws a freehand object.
Hi Lite Tool Icon - Highlights an object.
Redact Tool Icon - Blocks out sections of the screen and will run an associated link upon selection.
Great for linking to other pages, objects, and zooming, macros.
Text Tool Icon - Creates a text object.
Note Tool Icon - Displays a text notepad with a colored background. Can show state using the background color (translucent).
Text Stamp Tool Icon - Creates a boxed text stamp object. Can show state using a linked file.
Rubber Stamp Tool Icon - A stamp object as noted above, with pre-selected text selected from the arrow drop-down list. Can show state using a linked file.
Hotspot Tool Icon - Creates a hotspot on the page that can be linked and then used like a button to run the associated link.
Freehand Hotspot Tool Icon - Creates a freehand hotspot on the page that can be linked and then used like a button to run the associated link.
Button Tool Icon - Creates a button object that will run an associated link upon selection. Great for linking to other pages, objects, zooming, and macros.
Point Tool Icon - Draws a cross-hair object. Can show state using a file (bmp, icon, jpg, etc.).
Audio Tool Icon - Creates an object for playing various audio formats. Allows you to change the file automatically upon an alarm condition. Can show change in state.
Video Tool Icon - Creates a video object for playing various video files or linking to a capture card.
Allows you to change the file automatically upon an alarm. Can show change in state.
Ruler Tool Icon - Draws a line with measurement.
Cross Product Tool Icon - Draws a cross hair object with measurements.
Protractor Tool Icon - Draws a protractor object.
Pushpin Tool Icon - Creates an object that expands to reveal additional text when selected. When
Run mode is selected, the map changes and the text box expands to reveal detailed text.
Design Mode Icon - Allows for editing of the graphic map.
Run Mode Icon - Actives the graphic map.
Page 18-2 Fusion User Manual
Graphic Maps
Graphics Alignment Toolbar
DNA provides a Graphics Alignment Toolbar for easier manipulation of the graphics. Graphic alignment commands are available from the Graphics Alignment Toolbar.
Align Center Tool Icon - Aligns the object with the center of the objects selected.
Align Left Tool Icon - Aligns the object with the left edge of the objects selected.
Align Right Tool Icon - Aligns the object with the right edge of the objects selected.
Align Top Tool Icon - Aligns the object with the top of the tallest objects selected.
Align Bottom Tool Icon - Aligns the object with the bottom of the shortest objects selected.
Space Horizontally Tool Icon - Spaces the selected objects even horizontally.
Space Vertically Tool Icon - Spaces the selected objects even vertically.
Same Size Tool Icon - Makes the selected objects the same size.
Same Height Tool Icon - Makes the selected objects the same height.
Same Width Tool Icon - Makes the selected objects the same width.
Flip Tool Icon - Flips the selected object.
Rotate Tool Icon - Opens the Rotation Degrees dialog box.
Rotate 90˚ Tool Icon - Rotates the selected object 90˚.
Rotate 180˚ Tool Icon - Rotates the selected object 180˚.
Rotate 270˚ Tool Icon - Rotates the selected object 270˚.
Fusion User Manual Page 18-3
Graphic Maps
NOTES:
Page 18-4 Fusion User Manual
Graphic Maps
Creating a New Graphics Map
The maps are built on an existing graphics object such as a floor map or building diagram. Most current graphic formats are currently supported.
1. Load a graphics file from disk by selecting the File / Graphic Maps / Design (New) item from the Main
Menu.
This will bring up the Open dialog.
2. Browse to the file and click Open.
The new graphics page will load in the window.
3. Select the Design Tool from the Graphics Toolbar.
The tools on the Graphics Toolbar will become available for selection.
4. Configure the graphic map using the Graphics Toolbar and the Graphics Alignment Toolbar.
Select
the appropriate tool and draw the object in the chosen location. The tool selected will remain active until another object is selected.
5. Right-click on the object to configure each object’s properties such as foreground/background colors, text, etc.
6. After the object is visually complete, you have the following options.
● Leave the object as a simple visual presentation object.
● Link the object to a live hardware point. See page 18-7.
● Link the object to a hyperlink object such as a external website or program. See page 18-9.
● Link to another Fusion graphic’s map. See page 18-9.
7. When the map is complete, select File / DNA / Save As and enter a name for the map.
The graphic will be saved as a .dng file. If the original background file changes, the image will automatically update the .dng file.
The graphic maps may be in any directory accessible to the computer as long as the Graphics option in the DNA directories points to the correct location. Care should be taken to assure that the chosen location is always available when requested and does not require special mappings and network identifications.
Fusion User Manual Page 18-5
Graphic Maps
NOTES:
Page 18-6 Fusion User Manual
Graphic Maps
Linking to Hardware
There are 2 ways to link hardware to an object.
● Drag & Drop
● Manually Link
Drag & Drop
1. Open the Hardware Browser.
2. Drag and drop the hardware component to the graphic’s map object.
A confirmation box will appear.
3. Click OK to confirm the link.
4. Right-click on the linked object and select Linked Object Properties to configure the point (see steps 4 through 12 below under Manually Link).
Manually Link
1. Right-click on the object to be linked.
2. From the resulting menu, select Link Hardware and the hardware you wish to link.
The Linked Object Dialog will appear for the selected hardware object.
3. Configure the address for the object by selecting the Site, Controller & Point, if applicable.
4. Under the Object Properties section, check the Make this the Objects Home Page checkbox to display the page whenever an alarm occurs at that address.
5. Select the Action to occur when the object is selected.
● None - Take no action upon selection.
● Control/Ack (default) - Opens up the Direct Control dialog when not in alarm and the Acknowledge dialog when in alarm.
● Control - Always opens the Direct Control dialog.
● Acknowledge - Always opens the Acknowledge dialog.
● Page Zoom - Zooms to another page upon selection. When Page Zoom is selected, the Page field is enabled and the operator may select the DNA Fusion graphic’s page to load.
● Hyperlink - Opens a web page or runs an external program.
6. Select the Link Type from the drop-down list.
Indicates the type of state this link will monitor and is dependent on the hardware type.
Fusion User Manual Page 18-7
Graphic Maps
7. Select State Properties from the Linked Object menu.
The State Properties section will open. State Properties are defined by the Link Type selected in step 6.
8. Configure the different states by selecting the desired message and editing the parameters.
Each state can be assigned a unique sound to various alarm conditions/points as they are geographically represented on the map. The sound can be any .wav file available to the system.
● Blink - Check to have the graphic object blink.
● Back Color - Select the background color for the graphic object from the drop-down.
● Text Color - If using text, select the text color from the drop-down.
● Graphic File - If using a graphic file, click the Browse button to find the location.
● Sound - If desired, select a sound from the drop-down to assign a unique sound to each alarm state.
● Loop - If checked, the sound will continue to play until another action occurs.
9. Select Linked Object Properties from the menu.
The Linked Object Properties section opens.
10. Configure the Object Properties.
The enabled fields will change based on the type of object selected.
11. Click OK.
12. Save the page upon completion by selecting File / DNA / Save from the Main Menu.
Remember you can set the Default Graphic Properties in Host Setting and any objects
added to the graphic maps will automatically assume the properties. See page 3-4.
Page 18-8 Fusion User Manual
Linking to Hyperlinks
There are 3 different types of hyperlinks that the operator can utilize:
● Linking to Other DNA Pages
● Linking to External Programs
● Linking to a Web Site
To create a hyperlink:
1. Right-click the object you wish to link and select Object Properties / Hyperlink.
The Graphics Object Properties dialog will display.
Graphic Maps
2. Select the options based on the type of hyperlink.
3. Save the page upon completion by selecting File / DNA / Save from the Main Menu.
Linking to Other DNA Pages
1. Select Load Graphics Page and browse to the selected graphics page/map using the Browse button.
2. Click OK.
Linking to External Programs
1. Select Run Program and enter the file name and location of the program’s executable file.
2. Click OK.
Linking to a Web Site
1. Select Go to Web Page and enter the web address for the web site.
2. Click OK.
Fusion User Manual Page 18-9
Graphic Maps
Page Conversion Utility
To expedite the development of multiple pages of similar construction, a Page Conversion utility has been added to DNA. The following instruction explains how to use this tool.
1. Load a configured graphics map.
2. Select File / Save As and enter a new page name.
3. Place the page in Design Mode by selecting from the Graphics Toolbar.
4. Select Graphics / Hardware Linkage / Page Conversion from the Main Menu.
The Page Conversion Utility dialog will open.
5. Select the objects to convert by checking on the appropriate checkboxes.
6. Enter the Site # to Convert From.
7. Enter the Site, SSP, Point, Subcontroller and/or Point/Reader to Convert To.
8. Select the Convert button to convert the addresses of all objects.
9. Select Cancel to close the utility upon completion.
10. Save the page again to save the new addresses by selecting File / Save from the Main Menu.
Page 18-10 Fusion User Manual
Graphic Maps
Linked Page Objects
There are a number of objects that are useful when placed on a graphic map. Below are a few common items that may be helpful when designing maps. For a list of all the graphic map objects, see the Graphics Toolbar on page 18-1.
Buttons
A button can be used to link to other pages but is especially handy when linked to a hardware object for control purposes.
1. Select the Button Tool Icon from the Graphic Toolbar.
2. Draw the Button on the map.
3. Right-click on the button and select one of the following options:
● Link to Graphics Page - Provides options for linking to other graphic pages. See page 18-9.
● Link Hardware - Select the hardware object to link to the button and the Linked Object Properties dialog opens to allow for configuration. See page 18-7 for more information.
4. Format and configure the button as desired.
5. Click OK to close the dialog.
Hi-Lite Tool
The hi-lite tool will show state changes based on color.
1. Select the Hi-Lite Tool Icon from the Graphic Toolbar.
2. Draw the Hi-Lite area on the map.
3. Link the Hi-Lite area to a hardware object as described on page 18-7.
4. Right-click on the Hi-Lite area and select Linked Object Properties.
5. Select the Action for the object (see page 18-7 for more information).
6. Select the Link Type (this is the state being monitored by this object).
7. Select State Properties from the Linked Object menu and configure the different states.
The State Properties are defined by the Link Type selected in step 6.
8. Select a Background color for each state.
9. Click OK to close the dialog.
Point Tool
The point tool can show state changes using a file such as a bmp, jpg, or icon. The pushpin can also be used to link a camera to a graphics map; see Viewing Cameras on a Graphics Map.
1. Select the Point Tool Icon from the Graphic Toolbar.
2. Place the Point Tool on the map.
3. Link the Point Tool to a hardware object as described on page 18-7.
4. Right-click on the Point Tool area and select Linked Object Properties.
5. Select the Action Type for the object (see page 18-7 for more information).
6. Select the Link Type (this is the state being monitored by this object).
7. Select State Properties from the Linked Object menu and configure the different states.
The State Properties are defined by the Link Type selected in step 6.
8. Click the Browse button to locate the graphic file for each state.
9. Click OK to close the dialog.
Fusion User Manual Page 18-11
Graphic Maps
Pushpin Tool Icon
The pushpin tool can show a number of items including the cardholder’s photo and event text.
1. Select the Pushpin Tool Icon from the Graphic Toolbar.
2. Draw the Pushpin area on the map.
3. Link the Pushpin Tool to a hardware object as described on page 18-7.
4. Right-click on the Pushpin Tool area and select Linked Object Properties.
5. Select the Action Type for the object (see page 18-7 for more information).
6. Select the Link Type (this is the state being monitored by this object).
● Photo Detail Combo - Displays the cardholder’s photo as well as any configured event text.
7. Select State Properties from the Linked Object menu and configure the different states.
The State Properties are defined by the Link Type selected in step 6.
8. Click the Browse button enter the Replacement Text (see Appendix D).
9. Click OK to close the dialog.
Viewing Cameras on a Graphic Map
There are two ways a camera can be displayed on a graphic map: send the video to a static container or display via a tooltip. DVR/NVR Cameras must be integrated with the Fusion system in order for this option to be available.
1. If sending to a graphic container, select the Redact Tool Icon from the Graphic Toolbar.
If displaying via a tooltip, skip to step 5.
2. Draw the Video Container area on the map.
3. Right-click on the Redact Tool area and select Link Hardware / Make Video Container.
The Video Container dialog opens.
4. Enter a name for the Video Container and click OK.
5. Select the Point Tool Icon from the Graphic Toolbar.
6. Right-click on the Point Tool area and select Link Hardware / Link Camera.
The Camera Link dialog will appear.
7. Select the camera from the Selected Camera drop down.
8. Click the Browse button next to the Graphic File field and select a graphic to display on the map.
9. In the On Hover: Display Type drop down, select the location to display the camera.
● On Tooltip - Camera video will be displayed in a tooltip when hovered over. Configure the Tooltip
Width and Height fields.
● To Graphic Container - Select the desired Graphic Container from the Display Container drop down list.
10. If desired, in the On Click: Display Type drop down, select To Graphic Container and specify the desired
Display Container to display the video when the selected graphic is clicked.
11. Click OK to save the settings.
Page 18-12 Fusion User Manual
Graphic Maps
Working with Existing Maps
Opening a Map
1. Select the File / Graphics Map / Open item from the Main Menu.
This will bring up the Open dialog.
2. Browse for the desired .dng file and click Open.
The file will open in the window.
Editing a Map
If the original background file changes, simply replace the image with a file named the same as the original background and the image will automatically be updated in the .dng file.
1. Load a graphics file from disk by selecting the File / Graphic Maps / Open item from the Main Menu.
This will bring up the Open dialog.
2. Browse for the desired .dng file and click Open.
The file will open in the window.
3. Select the Design Tool from the Graphics Toolbar.
The tools on the Graphics Toolbar will become available for selection.
4. Configure the graphic map using the Graphics Toolbar and the Graphics Alignment Toolbar.
Select
the appropriate tool and draw the object in the chosen location. The tool selected will remain active until another object is selected.
5. Right-click on the object to configure each object’s properties such as foreground/background.
6. After the object is visually complete, you have the following options.
● Leave the object as a simple visual presentation object.
● Link the object to a live hardware point. See page 18-7.
● Link the object to a hyperlink object such as a external website or program. See page 18-9.
● Link to another DNA Fusion graphic’s map. See page 18-9.
7. When the map is complete, select File / DNA / Save to save the changes.
Fusion User Manual Page 18-13
Graphic Maps
NOTES:
Page 18-14 Fusion User Manual
Graphic Maps
Using the Graphics Map
From a configured graphics map, you can control a linked object, respond to alarms, and edit object properties. The Graphics Map must be placed in Run Mode in order to use the map.
Live Graphics Toolbar
DNA provides a Graphics Alignment toolbar for easier manipulation of the graphics. Graphic alignment commands are available from the Graphics Alignment Toolbar.
Locate Tool Icon - Searches for the hardware based on address or description. Opens the Locate
Graphics Object dialog box.
Download Tool Icon - Displays the Download Manager dialog box for downloading the database information to the SSP.
Disarm All Tool Icon - Disarms all points.
Arm All Tool Icon - Arms all points.
Acknowledge All Tool Icon - Acknowledges all alarms.
You can zoom in and out of a graphics page by using the “-” and “+” keys.
Object Status
Hovering over a linked object will show you the status of the object in the form of a tooltip.
Controlling a Linked Object
1. With the graphic map open, right-click on the object.
2. Select Direct Control from the resulting menu.
The Direct Control dialog for that object will open.
3. Select the option to control the point.
Acknowledging/Dismissing an Alarm
See Chapter 14 for more information on alarms.
1. With the graphic map open, right-click on the object.
2. Select Acknowledge or Acknowledge All from the resulting menu.
The ALARM! Acknowledgement Dialog appears.
3. If dispatch text is required, enter the Dispatch Text and click Ack.
The Alarmed Objects state will become Acknowledged. If the Alarmed
Objects state has Returned to Normal, the Clear option will become available.
4. Select Clear to complete the Alarm response process.
Fusion User Manual Page 18-15
Graphic Maps
If the Alarmed Objects state has not returned to normal, the Dismiss option maybe selected. Dismiss does require the alarm to be Acknowledged or Return to Normal to complete the Alarm response cycle.
All objects on the Graphics map that are in alarm can be Acknowledged by right-clicking
on an object and selecting the Acknowledge All option.
5. If desired, click the Point Properties button to view the following options:
● Open the object’s Home Page
● Access the associated camera (if any)
● Open the Direct Control dialog
● View any Alarm Text for the object
Arming/Disarming Linked Objects
1. With the graphic map open, right-click on the object.
2. Select Arm All Inputs or Disarm All Inputs from the resulting menu.
If Arm All Inputs is selected, the Input(s) will be armed.
If Disarm All Inputs is selected, the Input(s) will be disarmed.
Object Properties
1. With the graphic map open, right-click on the object.
2. Select Point Properties from the resulting menu.
The Properties dialog for that object will open.
3. Edit the object properties.
For more information on object properties, see the Chapter 8: Hardware Features.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Page 18-16 Fusion User Manual
Scheduling
19
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
Creating and Editing Archive Data Schedules
Creating and Editing Batch File Schedules
Creating and Editing Download Schedules
Creating and Editing Report Schedules
System users may find some of the tasks in DNA to be repetitive. Many of these tasks can be automated and scheduled to perform on a one-time or regular recurring basis.
The Scheduling function is designed to eliminate such repetitive tasks, making it a great timesaver.
Scheduling also serves the purpose of completing a task automatically when the operator is unavailable to do so manually; however the host DNA application must be open.
Schedules
There are four types of scheduling:
● Archive Data - The Data Archive Schedule Configuration features the ability to simultaneously configure three different categories: audit trails, acknowledged alarms, and transactions (event history) for archiving at different times.
● Batch Files - The Batch File Configuration allows for additional flexibility under specific situations.
Contact Open Options for more information on Batch Files.
● Downloads - The Download Schedule Configuration features the ability to download specific download properties for a scheduled time.
● Reports - The Report Schedule Configuration features the ability to set the Date/Time Parameters range for the report to be scheduled.
The scheduling process remains virtually identical regardless of the task to be scheduled.
In order for Scheduled Tasks to run, the host DNA application must be open. If DNA is closed, the Scheduled Task will not run and the user will be prompted for an action the next time a user logs into DNA. Contact Open Options Technical Support for other scheduling options.
Fusion User Manual Page 19-1
Scheduling
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 19-2 Fusion User Manual
Scheduling
Archive Data
The Data Archive Schedule Configuration features the ability to simultaneously configure three different categories (audit trails, acknowledged alarms, and transactions) for archiving at different times.
As more event information is sent to the database, it grows larger. Archiving data allows you to remove old data from your database and keeps it from growing to large; creating room to store new information.
Creating a New Schedule
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Archive Data in the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Archives appears.
2. Click the Add button.
The Archive Data Schedule Configuration dialog opens.
3. Enter a Name and Description for the event.
4. To modify the recurrence of the schedule, click the Recurrent Schedule radio button.
The Date Recurrence Pattern dialog will open.
5. Configure the recurrence schedule.
Use the drop-down menus, radio buttons, fields and checkboxes to configure the recurrence schedule.
The administrator may also wish to establish a later Ends By date such as 5 years future. Be aware that projecting dates into the distant future with a frequently recurring pattern will draw heavily upon system resources and could take a long time to complete.
6. Click OK to save the recurrence schedule and close the window.
7. Enable the desired Archive Data Properties buttons and enter the desired number of days to keep.
8. Click OK to save the schedule.
The event will appear in the Schedule Manager for Archives dialog.
Fusion User Manual Page 19-3
Scheduling
Editing a Schedule
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Archive Data in the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Archives appears.
2. Select the Event and click Edit.
The Archive Data Schedule Configuration for the selected event will appear.
3. Modify the schedule as desired.
4. Click OK to save the changes.
Deleting a Schedule
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Archive Data in the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Archives appears.
2. Select the event and click the Remove button.
The schedule will no longer appear in the Schedule Manager.
Copying a Schedule
The purpose of copying a schedule is to allow the administrator to create a new schedule similar to the copied schedule and then edit the copy.
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Archive Data in the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Archives appears.
2. Select the Event and click Copy.
The event will appear in the Schedule Manager.
3. Select the Event and continue with Editing a Schedule.
Page 19-4 Fusion User Manual
Scheduling
Batch Files
The Batch File Configuration allows for additional flexibility under specific situations. Contact Open Options for more information on Batch Files.
Creating a New Schedule
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Batch Files in the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Batch Files appears.
2. Click the Add button.
The Batch File Schedule Configuration dialog opens.
3. Enter a Name and Description for the schedule.
4. To modify the recurrence of the schedule, click the Recurrent Schedule radio button.
The Date Recurrence Pattern dialog will open.
5. Configure the recurrence schedule.
Use the drop-down menus, radio buttons, fields and checkboxes to configure the recurrence schedule.
6. Click OK to save the recurrence schedule and close the window.
7. Locate the batch file by selecting the Browse button.
The Open dialog will appear.
8. Select the file and click OK.
9. Select the Site from the drop-down list.
10. Click OK to save the schedule.
The event will appear in the Schedule Manager for Batch Files dialog.
Editing a Schedule
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Batch Files in the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Batch Files appears.
2. Select the Event and click Edit.
The Batch Files Schedule Configuration for the selected event will appear.
3. Modify the schedule as desired.
4. Click OK to save the changes.
Deleting a Schedule
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Batch Files in the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Batch Files appears.
2. Select the Event and click the Remove button.
The schedule will no longer appear in the Schedule Manager.
Fusion User Manual Page 19-5
Scheduling
Copying a Schedule
The purpose of copying a schedule is to allow the administrator to create a new schedule similar to the copied schedule and then edit the copy.
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Batch Files in the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Batch Files appears.
2. Select the Event and click Copy.
The event will appear in the Schedule Manager.
3. Select the Event and continue with Editing a Schedule.
Page 19-6 Fusion User Manual
Scheduling
Downloads
The Download Schedule Configuration features the ability to download specific properties for a scheduled time.
Creating a New Schedule
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Downloads in the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Downloads appears.
2. Click the Add button.
The Download Schedule Configuration dialog opens.
3. Enter a Name and Description for the schedule.
4. To modify the recurrence of the schedule, click the Recurrent Schedule radio button.
The Date Recurrence Pattern dialog will open.
5. Configure the recurrence schedule.
Use the drop-down menus, radio buttons, fields and checkboxes to configure the recurrence schedule.
6. Click OK to save the recurrence schedule and close the window.
7. Select the Download Properties.
8. Select the Sites/Controllers from the list.
9. Click OK to save the schedule.
The event will appear in the Schedule Manager for Downloads dialog.
Editing a Schedule
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Downloads in the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Downloads appears.
2. Select the Event and click Edit.
The Downloads Schedule Configuration for the selected event will appear.
3. Modify the schedule as desired.
4. Click OK to save the changes.
Fusion User Manual Page 19-7
Scheduling
Deleting a Schedule
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Downloads from the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Downloads appears.
2. Select the Event and click the Remove button.
The schedule will no longer appear in the Schedule Manager.
Copying a Schedule
The purpose of copying a schedule is to allow the administrator to create a new schedule similar to the copied schedule and then edit the copy.
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Downloads from the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Downloads appears.
2. Select the Event and click Copy.
The event will appear in the Schedule Manager.
3. Select the Event and continue with Editing a Schedule.
Page 19-8 Fusion User Manual
Scheduling
Reports
The Report Schedule Configuration features the ability to set the Date/Time Parameters range for the report to be scheduled. This is extremely useful for Custom Reports.
Creating a New Schedule
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Reports in the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Reports appears.
2. Click the Add button.
The Reports Schedule Configuration dialog opens.
3. Enter a Name and Description for the schedule.
4. Expand the Selected Reports tree and select the desired report by checking the appropriate checkbox.
5. To modify the recurrence of the schedule, click the Recurrent Schedule radio button.
The Date Recurrence Pattern dialog will open.
6. Configure the recurrence schedule.
Use the drop-down menus, radio buttons, fields and checkboxes to configure the recurrence schedule.
7. Click OK to save the recurrence schedule and close the window.
8. If desired, select Report Site and Tenant Parameters from the drop-down list.
9. Select the Report Date/Time Range Parameters using the drop-down menus for the From Date: Year/
Month/Day and the To Date: Year/Month/Day.
When capturing a time frame, the parameter is determined from the date of the report, so that the parameters will be selected in terms of “report date minus x,” i.e., From Date: -3 years, -6 months, or
-2 days to To Date: –1 year, -5 months, or -1 day.
The Year parameters reach from –20 years to 2025; the Month parameters reach from –11 months to any of the specific months of the year; and the Day parameters reach from –30 days to the 31st day of the month or can be set simply to “the last day of the month
(Last DOM).”
Click
the Use Run Time checkbox to use the scheduled run time as the basis for the report.
The example above displays a scheduled report that will run weekly, based upon the Recurrent Schedule, and provide information for the previous 7 days of activity.
Fusion User Manual Page 19-9
Scheduling
10. Enter the Owner and Description if desired.
The default owner is the current person logged on to the system and the description will appear as entered in the Schedule Title Properties.
11. Select the delivery method in the Report Destination Properties: Destination field.
● Printer - Sends the report to the specified printer. See Printing information below.
● Export/Email - Opens the Export dialog. See Export information below.
12. Click OK to save the schedule.
The event will appear in the Schedule Manager for Reports dialog.
Printing a Scheduled Report
1. Check the Printer option in the Destination area.
2. Select the desired printer from the drop-down list in the Printer Settings area.
3. Select the Number of Copies.
Exporting a Scheduled Report
1. Select the Export/Email option in the Destination area.
The Printer Settings area will become the Export Settings area.
2. Select the Export Settings button.
The Export dialog will open.
3. Select the File Format from the drop-down list and enter the Parameters for the selected format.
4. Select the Destination from the drop-down list.
For more information on File Formats and Destinations, see Chapter 17: Reports page 17-7.
5. Click OK.
Whether exporting a report to an e-mail destination either manually or via the schedule feature, the e-mail application must be running simultaneously with DNA at the time the e-mail is configured AND at the time the e-mail is to be sent, in order for the e-mail feature to function. Contact Open Options Technical Support for other email options.
Editing a Schedule
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Reports in the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Reports appears.
2. Select the Event and click Edit.
The Reports Schedule Configuration for the selected event will appear.
3. Modify the schedule as desired.
4. Click OK to save the changes.
Page 19-10 Fusion User Manual
Scheduling
Deleting a Schedule
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Reports in the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Reports appears.
2. Select the Event and click the Remove button.
The schedule will no longer appear in the Schedule Manager.
Copying a Schedule
The purpose of copying a schedule is to allow the administrator to create a new schedule similar to the copied schedule and then edit the copy.
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Scheduling / Reports in the Main Menu.
The Schedule Manager for Reports appears.
2. Select the Event and click Copy.
The event will appear in the Schedule Manager.
3. Select the Event and continue with Editing a Schedule.
Fusion User Manual Page 19-11
Scheduling
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 19-12 Fusion User Manual
System Settings
& Maintenance
20
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
√
√
DNA Directories
Driver Setup
Data Archiving Options
System Backup Files Types
Software Upgrades
Batch Processing
System Settings
The system settings in Fusion include driver settings as well as configuring the directories.
Configuring Directories
DNA stores various objects in default folders, including photos, various templates, and graphic map files.
Client machines will need access to the files in order to view photos and retrieve archived data.
Server and client directories should be configured if any of the following apply:
● Clients will be connected to the server (Clients only if default location is used on server)
● Files are stored on the server in a location other than the default folders (Both server and clients)
● Files will be stored on a network drive (Both server and clients)
Remember to share the folders so that clients can access the information.
To configure the directories:
1. With Fusion open, select DNA / Administrative / DNA Directories from the Main Menu.
The DNA Directories dialog opens.
The Backup, Graphic Maps, Photos and Template directories can be directed to another location.
Fusion User Manual Page 20-1
System Maintenance
2. Select the Directory Type and click the Browse button.
The Browse for Folder dialog opens.
See page 20-10 for more information on the directory files.
3. Locate the folder and click the OK button.
The server and all client machines must have access and permission to the location specified.
4. Repeat steps 2 through 3 until all the directories have been configured.
5. Repeat the above steps on the server and all clients.
Page 20-2 Fusion User Manual
System Maintenance
Driver Setup
The Driver Setup dialog includes a number of high level settings including Site Driver Behaviour and E-mail
Authentication.
Caution should be used when making changes to the Driver Setup dialog. The operator should be aware of the ramifications of the changes.
Setting up Email Authentication
Email Authentication through the Driver Setup allows Fusion to send emails even if the application is not running. Please note the DNA driver must be running in order for emails to be delivered.
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Driver Setup from the Main Menu.
The DNA Site (Driver) Configuration dialog opens.
2. Enter a Windows user name in the Username field.
3. Enter the Password for the designated user.
4. Enter the Mail Servers Name in the SMTP Server field.
If configured, the Mail Server’s Name and Outbound Port information can be obtained by entering the following command from the Windows Command Prompt.
Netsh diag connect mail
If successful, the email configuration information will be returned.
Example:
Mailer Server Name
OutboundMailPort = 25
5. Select the Authentication mode from the drop down list.
6. Enter a From Address for the emails.
7. Click OK to save the settings.
8. Verify that the computer can connect to the Mail Server’s port (25).
If no connection to port 25, see the system administrator and request that SMTP be enabled and /or modify any anti-virus software to allow the dnafusion.exe to email 3rd party emails.
Download on Demand
The Download on Demand option will only download cardholder information when an access request is received at the SSP. This will reduce the number of cards downloaded to the SSP since no cards will be downloaded to the SSP until an access request is received. By default, this option is turned off. If this option is used, SSPs can individually be set to Exempt.
1. Select DNA / Administrative / Driver Setup from the Main Menu.
The DNA Site (Driver) Configuration dialog opens.
2. Check the Download on Demand option.
When a Card is presented with valid access but no record is stored in the SSP for the cardholder (Access
Denied: Not In Card File), the cardholders information will be downloaded to the SSP. Upon presentation of the card a second time, the cardholder will be granted access.
3. To designate an SSP as exempt, open the SSP Properties, select the Download on Demand Exempt checkbox and click OK.
All cardholders with access will be downloaded to the SSP.
Fusion User Manual Page 20-3
System Maintenance
NOTES:
Page 20-4 Fusion User Manual
System Maintenance
System Maintenance
DNA Fusion provides a quick and easy way to conduct regular preventive maintenance tasks that need to be performed for optimal performance of the system.
Archiving Data
As more event information is sent to the database, it grows larger. Room to store new information must be made available.
All Data
This archive feature archives data on the fly and pulls data immediately out of the database. Unlike the
Schedule Archive feature which runs based on a specified schedule Archive All Data is executed on demand.
To set the number of days to store event information:
1. Select DNA / Administrative / DNA Data Management / Archive Data from the Main Menu.
The Archive dialog box will display.
2. From the drop-down menu, select the Number of Days to Keep in the database.
Information older than the number selected (i.e., prior to that # of days) will be saved to an archive file.
The operator may retrieve the file using the archive retrieval utility, see below.
3. Click OK.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
4. Click OK to close the confirmation dialog.
5. Click OK or Cancel to close the Archive dialog box.
By Event Type
Specific events can be either archived or purged at different times.
1. Select DNA / Administrative / DNA Data Management / Archive by Event Type from the Main Menu.
The Archive Data by Event Type dialog box will display.
2. Select the Event Type to archive by checking the box next to the event.
3. Check the Purge box if desired.
Checking the Purge box will delete the files from the current Events database and the event(s) will not be archived.
4. Select the number of Days to keep in the database.
Information older than the number selected (i.e., prior to that number of days) will be saved to an archive file. The operator may retrieve the file later using the archive retrieval utility, see page 20-6 for more information.
5. Click OK to save the configuration.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
6. Click OK to close the dialog.
7. Click OK or Cancel to close the Archive Data by Event Type dialog.
Fusion User Manual Page 20-5
System Maintenance
Retrieving Archived Data
1. Select DNA / Administrative / DNA Data Management / Restore Data from the Main Menu.
The Archive Restoration Dialog box will display.
2. Select the Restore Type from the drop-down list.
3. Select from the Available Dates.
4. Enter a Start and Stop Date.
5. Click OK.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
6. Click OK to close the dialog.
7. Click OK or Cancel to close the Archive Restoration Dialog box.
A report can now be run against the Restored Archived Data. See Chapter 17: Reports for more information.
Once a set of archives is restored, the previously restored archives are removed from the database.
Keep this in mind when retrieving data.
Page 20-6 Fusion User Manual
System Maintenance
Backup & Restore
As each company, business, or organization has different system maintenance needs and desires, it is not possible for Open Options, Inc. to prescribe specific recommendations for backing up a given access control system. Therefore, the responsibility of deciding how best to protect system data must rest with the system administrator.
It is important that backups are run at a time when there is minimal activity in the database.
SQL Server 2008 Express
It is very important you backup your SQL 2008 Express database. If the site is running SQL Server Express, use the Backup files provided with the Fusion installation and schedule the via Windows Task Scheduler.
1. From the Control Panel, select Accessories\System Tools\Task Scheduler.
The Task Schedule opens.
2. Select the Create Basic Task option from the menu.
The Create a Basic Task dialog opens.
3. Enter a Name and if desired, enter a Description and click Next.
The Task Trigger dialog opens.
4. Select the Task Trigger and click the Next button.
5. Depending on the selection in step 6, configure the Recurrence options and click Next.
6. Select the Start a Program option from the Action dialog and click the Next button.
7. From the Start a Program screen, click the Browse button and locate the Backup file.
Default location: C:\Program Files\NPowerDNA\Tools
8. Click the Next button to continue scheduling.
The Summary screen is displayed.
9. Click the Finish button.
The backup will be stored in the following location: C:\Program Files\nPowerDNA\MSGS\Backup\
NPowerDNA.bak. By default the account that runs the SQL Server is NT AUTHORITY\NetworkServer. This account does not have rights to the Backup folder in the nPowerDNA path mentioned above.
Open Options recommends that the path be changed to C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\
MSSQL\Backup or that the account that runs the SQL Server Driver be changed to Local System since it has rights to all folders.
To specify a different location, right-click on the Backup Batch file, select Edit and change the location.
If the Backup file location is changed, the Restore file location must be changed to match the Backup file location.
The default network service account does not have permissions to the C:\Program Files\ nPowerDNA\MSGS\Backup path.
Fusion User Manual Page 20-7
System Maintenance
Restore
To restore a backup:
1. Double-click the Restore file that was copied to the Tools folder.
The last backup will be restored.
Default location: C:\Program Files\NPowerDNA\Tools
Page 20-8 Fusion User Manual
System Maintenance
SQL Server Maintenance Plan
If you using SQL server, complete your backup and restore activities by setting up a Maintenance Plan for the DNA Fusion database.
1. Open SQL Server Management Studio.
2. Right-click on the Maintenance Plans option and select Maintenance Plan Wizard.
3. Right-click on the nPowerDna database option and select All Tasks / Maintenance Plan.
The Maintenance Plan Wizard will open.
4. Click the Next button to begin the process.
The Select Plan Properties page opens.
5. Enter a Name and if desired, enter a Description and click Next.
6. Click the Change button to set the Maintenance Plan on a schedule.
The Job Schedule Properties - Maintenance Plan dialog opens.
7. Select the desired Frequency and configure the Recurrence options.
Depending on the Frequency selection, each option provides a different set of options.
8. If desired, specify the Duration and click the OK button.
The Select Plan Properties page opens.
9. Click Next to specify the Maintenance Tasks.
10. From the Maintenance Tasks dialog, select the Back Up Database (Full) option and click the Next button.
The Maintenance Task Order dialog opens.
11. Click the Next button to specify the database.
12. Select the Database(s) drop down list, check the NPowerDNA database and
click
the OK button.
13. Check the Verify backup integrity option and if desired, change the Folder path.
14. Click the Next button to configure the Report Options.
15. Select the desired Report Options and click Next.
The Summary Page is displayed.
16. Click the Finish button.
If the Maintenance fails to run, check the Permission Settings for the database.
Fusion User Manual Page 20-9
System Maintenance
System Backup Files
IT administrators should be aware of some specific files that do not reside in the database and therefore the directories need to shared to provide access for client workstations.
All the items listed in the DNA Directories menu (listed below) are not saved to the database so another method for backing those items must be considered.
F ile
D escription
Msgs
Photos
Biometrics
DNA Maps
Signatures
Reports
Archive
Templates
HTML
This directory houses the .bin and .pwd files as well as the Backup, Log and Schedules folders.
This directory houses the personnel photos when the photos are captured through a camera attached to DNA Badging Station. The Photos directory is located in the Graphics folder.
This directory houses the personnel biometric data. The Biometrics directory is located in the Graphics folder.
This directory houses the graphic maps the have been configured. The DNA Maps directory is located in the Graphics folder.
This directory houses the personnel signatures. The Signatures directory is located in the
Graphics folder.
This directory houses the default and custom reports.
This directory houses the archived data files. The Archive directory is a subfolder of the
Backup directory which is located in the Msgs folder.
This directory houses the badge templates as well as .gax files which contain the default access level information for a Personnel Group.
This file stores the HTML Tree configuration as well as the help files. The file resides on the server.
Schedule*.dat
(All Scheduling
.dat files)
Registry
These files contain information regarding scheduling configurations for each of the functions indicated: archives, batch files, downloads, and reports. The files reside on the server and are typically located in the Msgs folder in the Schedules folder.
The registry contains the application settings. The registry is part of the operating system; the operator should consult the documentation for the backup utility being used for details concerning backing up the registry.
All of the folders listed above should be configured to a drive that is shared and regularly backed up.
Since DNA stores various objects in default folders, including photos, templates, and graphic map files.
Client machines will need access to the files in order to view photos and retrieve archived data.
Remember to share the folders so that clients can access the information.
Page 20-10 Fusion User Manual
System Maintenance
Software Upgrades
DNA software upgrades in and of themselves do not require additional licenses. After receiving an upgrade
CD (or download) from Open Options, Inc., the upgrade executable file should be run at the server. Any clients connected to the system will be upgraded the first time they connect to the server after the server has been upgraded.
If the DNA system is being upgraded from NPower DNA to DNA Fusion, the upgrade will need to be performed at the server as well as at each client workstation.
To upgrade DNA:
If there are clients connected to the server, be sure to run the Setup.exe. This update will push the current version to the clients. The Service Pack only updates the workstation.
1. Close DNA Fusion.
2. In Windows Explorer, double-click the upgrade executable file.
The Upgrade Welcome Screen will appear.
3. Click Next.
4. Follow the resulting install wizard.
Fusion User Manual Page 20-11
System Maintenance
NOTES:
Page 20-12 Fusion User Manual
System Maintenance
Firmware Updates
Firmware plays the middleman between the software and hardware. The most recent firmware updates will result in the best possible results for your system.
Firmware should be updated after any changes to the system, including the following:
● Installing a new system
● Upgrading to a new DNA version
● Adding a new SSP
● Replacing an SSP
● Connecting to a SSP the first time
Controller
To update the firmware:
1. With the Hardware Browser open, right-click on the SSP and select Status from the list.
The SSP Status dialog opens.
2. Click the Reload button.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
3. Click Yes to load the firmware.
The Reload button will become grayed out and the Firmware Status will say Loading.
When the firmware download is complete, OK will display in the Firmware Status box.
4. Click OK to close the SSP Status dialog.
Subcontrollers
The Subcontrollers (RSC1/RSC2/RSC-DT/ISC16/OSC16/NSC-100) firmware can be updated from the
Hardware Browser.
1. Right-click on the Subcontroller and select Reload Firmware from the menu.
Depending on the subcontroller, a dialog will appear.
2. Follow the directions on the screen.
The subcontrollers firmware is reloaded.
Fusion User Manual Page 20-13
System Maintenance
Batch Processing
Batch Processing allows command files to be sent to an SSP. A command file is a text file that is formatted with commands and parameters. For instance, a batch process can be used to load a LED Mode table to a reader so that the LED lights behave in manner other than default.
1. Select DNA\Administrative\Batch Processing from the Main Menu.
The Configuration File Dialog will open.
2. Click the Browse button and locate the desired command file.
Command files should be placed in the following location: C:\Program Files\NPowerDNA\ Batch
3. If needed, select the Site from the drop down list.
4. Click OK to download the file to the controller(s).
Page 20-14 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
21
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
√
√
Installing & Configuring Fusion Web
Monitoring Events
Viewing and Editing Cardholders
Controlling Hardware
Responding to Alarms
Controlling Time Schedules
Fusion Web is a internet based interface for the DNA Fusion Access Control system. It allows you to manage the basic functions of the access control system.
This includes:
● Managing cardholders
● Configuring card access
● Controlling hardware
● Generating commonly used personnel and hardware reports
● Monitoring events
Installation & Configuration
Pre-Requisites
● The Fusion Web Interface uses the Windows IIS application. See page 21-5 for information on enabling the IIS application.
● Access to Port 80 or the Fusion Web application configured to use another port.
● FusionWeb must be installed on the DNA Fusion server running version 5.3.2 and above.
Installing Fusion Web
1. Obtain the DNAFusionWeb install from Open Options Technical Support.
2.
Double click the DNAFusionWeb file to start the installation.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-1
Fusion Web
3.
Click the Next button.
The I nstall the DNA Fusion Transactions Plugin option is checked by default. This will install the plugins needed to communicate with the DNA driver.
4.
Verify that the Transactions Plugin checkbox is selected and click Next.
5.
Click the Install button to begin the installation.
6. When the installation is complete,
click the Finish button.
The
FusionWeb setup page will open.
7.
Continue to Setting Up Fusion Web on page 21-3.
Page 21-2 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Setting Up Fusion Web
The setup page can also be accessed by opening an Internet browser and entering localhost/dnafusion. Once
Fusion Web has been configured, the setup screen will no longer be available without authentication.
1. Close the Initial Configuration page.
The Initial Configuration page displays the default User Name and Password.
User Name: Admin / Password: OOAdmin
2. From the menu on the left,
select the Account option.
Account Configuration information is displayed. If needed, enter a new User Name and Password
click the Save Changes button.
3.
Select the Database menu option.
4.
Enter the Server Instance name.
If needed,
enter the SQL Authentication User Name and
Password.
5.
Click the Test Connection button.
If the test is successful, continue to step 6.
If the test failed, verify the Server Instance information as well as the User Name and Password.
6.
Click the Save Changes button to save the database information.
7. Click the Logging link.
If needed, enable the Logging feature and edit the TCP/IP information or select the File Directory option
locate the desired file. Click the Save Changes button to save the update information.
8.
Click the Photos link on the menu.
If required, enter the photo path and if desired, change the Photo Not Available image. Click the Save
Changes button to save the new settings.
9. If needed,
select the Transactions Plugin link.
This plugin is installed when the FusionWeb application is installed. A link is provided in case the server is changed and the plugin needs to be installed on the new server.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-3
Fusion Web
NOTES:
Page 21-4 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Configuring the Windows IIS Application
Fusion Web IIS utilizes the Windows Internet Information Services (IIS) web server application. The IIS application needs to be enabled in order for Fusion Web to function.
To enable the IIS application:
1. From the
Start Menu, select the Control Panel.
2.
Click the Programs and Features link.
3. From the menu on the left, select the Turn Windows features on or off link.
4.
Check the Internet Information Services checkbox to enable the feature.
The default options are generally sufficient for most installations.
5. Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.
If the
DNA Driver (DNAdrvr32) service is running under a named account, the account will need to be added to the IIS Admin Service. Continue to step 6.
If the DNA Driver is not running under a named account,
close the Control Panel and continue the
FusionWeb installation and configuration.
6. From the
Control Panel, select the Administrative Tools option.
7. Double click on the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager.
8. Click the desired Connection to expand the connections objects.
9.
Double click on the Application Pools object.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-5
Fusion Web
10.
Right click on the DNA Fusion AppPool and select Advanced Settings.
11. In the
Process Model section, select the Identity field and click the Browse button.
12. Select the Custom Account radio button and click the Set button.
13. Enter the User Name and Password fields.
14.
Click OK to save the settings.
15. Close the open dialogs.
Page 21-6 Fusion User Manual
Opening & Logging In to Fusion Web
Setting Operator Permissions
Before an operator can log in to Fusion Web, they must be granted Web Access in DNA Fusion.
1. From
DNA Fusion, open the Operators Privileges Editor.
See Chapter 4: Operators for more information.
2.
Select the desired Operator from the drop down list.
Fusion Web
3. Check the Allow Web Access checkbox.
The designated operator(s) will now be able to log in to the Fusion Web application using their Operator
Name and Password.
Opening Fusion Web
1. Open an Internet Browser.
2.
Enter the following in the address bar: http://localhost/dnafusion.
Logging into Fusion Web
1. When the Fusion Web main page is displayed,
select the desired tab (Events, Personnel, Alarms or
Hardware) at the top of the main page.
2.
Enter the User Name and Password and click the Login button.
The requested page will open.
If the operator is already logged into another web session, the following dialog will appear.
The operator can
select the Reset all sessions checkbox to release the other session. This will allow a new session to be created and the operator can log in.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-7
Fusion Web
NOTES:
Page 21-8 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Monitoring Events
An Event is the report of an incident that has occurred on the system. For example, when a user presents their card and is permitted access at the door, an event is sent to the host(s). The event documents the user concerned, the reader at which they presented their card as well as the time and date of the event.
The Events tab shows the events in date/time order with the most recent events displayed at the top. Date/ time, user and location are recorded as well as a description of the event. The Events tab lists all system activity designated as an event.
To display the Events tab:
1.
Click the Events tab on the Toolbar.
If an event is cardholder related, hovering over the event will produce a call-out with the cardholder’s
photo.
To group the events:
1. Drag the desired column header(s) to the Group By box.
To sort the events:
1.
Click the desired column header to the sort the grid.
Click once to sort ascending and click again to sort descending.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-9
Fusion Web
NOTES:
Page 21-10 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Handling Alarms
Fusion Web offers a very sophisticated set of alarm monitoring tools. This section covers the basic capabilities of the alarm grid, alarm monitoring commands, and the handling alarms.
Alarms signal a specific and “user-defined” change of state on system hardware. These changes in state are reported through the system to display on the alarm grid.
The Alarm Grid
The alarm grid is a data window comprised of a “matrix” or spreadsheet record of alarm events and displays any alarms that have not been acknowledged and cleared or dismissed.
To display the Alarms grid:
1. Click the Alarms tab on the Toolbar.
To group the alarms:
The Alarm Grid can be grouped by any header column including Alarm Status and Priority.
1. Drag the desired column header(s) to the Group By box.
To sort the alarms:
1.
Click the desired column header to the sort the grid.
Click once to sort ascending and click again to sort descending.
Managing Alarms
Alarm handling involves multiple steps for the operator and they can be accomplished by
right clicking on the Alarm.
There are two alarm states to be aware of:
● Active – When the point has changed state from its normal state to an alarm state.
● Inactive – When the points state has not changed or it has returned to its normal state.
In working with the alarms, there are basically four conditions of an alarm:
● Unacknowledged Alarm - A new alarm message. A change of state was detected.
● Acknowledged Alarm - An alarm that has been recognized by the operator.
● Cleared Alarm - An alarm that has been acknowledged, and cleared from the alarm grid.
● Dismissed Alarm - An alarm that has been dismissed by the operator.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-11
Fusion Web
Under normal operations the process of state and condition on any given alarm point would be as follows:
S tep
1.
2.
3.
4.
Operator clears alarm
A ction
The alarm comes to the grid
Operator recognizes the alarm
The alarm returns to normal state
S tAte
Active
Active
Inactive
Inactive
c ondition
Unacknowledged
Acknowledged
Acknowledged
Cleared
Alarm Status
In providing the various avenues for the direction and control of alarm commands, the operator can effectively and effortlessly view, acknowledge, respond to, and clear all alarm activities from the alarm grid.
A lArm
S tAtuS
/i con d efinition of
A lArm
S tAtuS o perAtor
A ction o perAtor
S yStem
A ction
A change has occurred to a normal condition that has resulted in an alarm.
The condition that resulted in the alarm has returned to its normal state, but still must be acknowledged by the operator.
The operator should acknowledge the alarm.
The operator should acknowledge the alarm.
Acknowledge the Alarm
(F5)
Acknowledge the Alarm
(F5)
The alarm has been recognized by the operator, but the condition has not returned to normal.
No action is required to by the operator but the physical condition causing the alarm may need to be addressed.
No action is required however, the operator may need to change the physical condition of the problem in order for the condition to return to normal.
The alarm has been recognized by the operator and the condition has returned to normal and awaits clearing by the operator.
The operator should clear the alarm.
Clear the Alarm (F8)
Responding to an Alarm
Use the table above to determine the appropriate action for the alarm.
To respond to an alarm:
1.
Select the desired alarm.
2.
Right click on the alarm and select the action from the list.
Page 21-12 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Managing Cardholders
Fusion Web allows you to add and edit cardholders, configure their access as well as generate reports. The
Personnel window is where all cardholder information is managed.
To open the Personnel Window:
1. Select the Personnel tab on the Toolbar.
Opening a Cardholder’s Record
1. From the
Personnel tab, enter the cardholder’s information in the Search Box.
As text is entered, a list of results if displayed.
2. Select the cardholders name when it appears and click the Search button.
The Cardholders record will open.
The Cardholder’s Main Window consists of 3 tabs.
● Direct Control: Tab - Provides access to card related options such as use limit settings, and the ability to activate and deactivate the associated cards. See page 21-21 for more information.
● More Info: Tab - Opens the Cardholder’s Record. See page 21-17 for more information.
● Reports: Tab - Allows access to the Info Ready Personnel Reports. See page 21-22 for more information.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-13
Fusion Web
NOTES:
Page 21-14 Fusion User Manual
Adding Cardholders
1. From the
Personnel window, click the Add Cardholder button.
A new cardholder record will open.
Fusion Web
● Employee Info: Tab - General employee information.
● Personal Info: Tab - Personal employee information.
● Custom Fields: Tab - Contains custom fields (optional).
● Photo: Tab - Associated photos will be visible in this window.
● Access Control: Tab - Card information, settings, and access levels.
2.
Populate the desired fields in each tab. See the following pages for tab options.
3.
Add a card to the record. See below for information on adding cards.
4.
Add Access Level(s) to the card. See page 21-23 for information on adding access levels.
5.
Click the Save button to save the record.
!
It is very important to make sure that all personnel entries, whether new or simply changes to existing data, are Saved to the database before the information will be available for retrieval. If the information is not saved, it will be lost upon the program timing out or exiting the application.
Adding Cards
To add a card to a cardholder’s record:
1. From the
Access Control tab, click the Add Card button.
2. Enter the card number and click the OK button.
The card number is added to the record.
To undo the card addition, click the Undo button.
3.
Click the Save button to save the record.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-15
Fusion Web
Removing Cards
To remove a card to a cardholder’s record:
1. From the Access Control tab, click the Remove Card button.
The Card number appears in red.
To undo the card addition,
click the Undo button.
2. Click the Save button to save the record.
Removing a Cardholder
1.
Open the Cardholder’s Record as described on page 21-13.
2. Select More Info from the cardholders main window.
3.
Click the Delete button on the toolbar.
A confirmation dialog will appear.
4.
Click Yes to delete the cardholder’s record.
Page 21-16 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Employee Info Tab
Employee
● First - Enter cardholders first name.
● Middle - Enter cardholders middle name.
● Last - Enter cardholders last name.
● E-Mail - Enter cardholders e-mail address.
● Type - Select the type of cardholder.
Normal
Visitor
Temp
Disabled
Contractor
Vendor
Custom 1 through 5
● Tenant (If applicable) - Select the cardholders tenant location.
Employment
● Location - Enter cardholder’s location
● Department - Enter cardholder’s department
● Site - Enter cardholder’s site
● Title - Enter cardholder’s title
● Work Phone - Enter cardholder’s work phone number
● Hire Date - Enter cardholder’s hire date
● Employee ID - Enter the cardholder’s employee ID number.
● Employee # - Enter the cardholder’s employee number.
● Company - Select the Company from the drop-down list.
● Address - If Company selected from the drop-down list, address information will auto populate.
● City - If Company selected from the drop-down list, city information will auto populate.
● State - If Company selected from the drop-down list, state information will auto populate.
● Country - If Company selected from the drop-down list, information will auto populate.
● Zip - If Company selected from the drop-down list, zip code information will auto populate.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-17
Fusion Web
Personal Information Tab
● Personal Information Fields - Enter cardholder’s personal information.
● Notes - Enter various cardholder information.
Custom Fields Tab
● Custom String 1 through 16 - Enter alphanumerical information in the fields.
● Custom Value 1 through 3 - Enter numerical information in the fields.
Photos Tab
● Associated photos will be displayed on the Photos Tab.
Page 21-18 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Access Control Tab
● Card Number - The actual card number that the system will read from the card; hard-coded on the card. Employee records may be maintained in the system without being assigned a card.
● Card Type - Normal, Visitor, Temp, Disabled, Contractor, Vendor, Custom 1 through 5. If Disabled is selected, a Why? drop-down appears and the Disabled Reason field appears.
● Disabled Reason - List of disabled options.
● Activation - The date that the card is or has become active.
● Deactivation - The date that the card is or will be deactivated. Automatically sets card deactivation to 1 year from issue date.
● Vacation - The date field is used to deactivate a card temporarily for a specified amount of time while the cardholder is on vacation. See page 7-12 for more information.
● Upgrade Start/For - The date field is used to temporarily upgrade a cardholder’s access. See page
7-21 for more information.
● Issue Code - The number used with magstripe cards that indicates the number of times a card has been issued to the company by the manufacturer (i.e. as a replacement for a lost card). It is an internal number that is programmed on the card.
● PIN - The PIN number for the cardholder.
● APB Location - Number representing the cardholder’s APB area.
● Use Limit - Maximum number of times a card may be used. The default is Unlimited.
● Activate Card - Toggle that activates or deactivates the card. Must be checked for card to be active.
● PIN Exempt Card - Toggle that overrides the requirement for a PIN. Leave unchecked if not using
PINs.
● VIP (APB Exempt) - Toggle that allows card to be APB exempt, e.g. CEOs, presidents, owners.
● Don’t Change Use Count - Toggle that overrides the Use Limit setting. Leave unchecked if Use Limit is set to unlimited.
● Don’t Change APB Location - Toggle that overrides the APB Location. Leave unchecked if not using
APB.
● Always Download - Enabling this checkbox will force this specific card to be downloaded to the SSP prior to the first time the card is presented on any SSP, regardless of the Download Personnel on
Demand Setting in the Driver Configuration dialog.
● Auto Activate Card - Used in conjunction with a door set as an Auto Activate Door. If checked and the card is presented at the door, the card will automatically activate.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-19
Fusion Web
● Auto Deactivate Card - Used in conjunction with a door set as an Auto Deactivate Door. If checked and the card is presented at the door, the card will automatically disable.
● Time/Attendance Card - Used in conjunction with doors set as Time & Attendance In and Out Doors. If checked and the card is presented at the doors, the information is sent to a separate database table with the date, time, card number and whether the transaction was In or Out.
● ADA Mode - Toggle that prompts card to use ADA settings at door, granting extra time at door for disabled or impaired persons.
● One Free APB Pass - Toggle that allows one APB infraction before denying access. Leave unchecked if using VIP (APB exempt).
Page 21-20 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Cardholder Features
A number of options are available for managing cardholders within the Fusion Web application.
Direct Control
The Direct Control drop down allows operators to set a cards use limit and activate or deactivate cards.
Use Limit
You can set the maximum number of times a card may be used for a single card or for all cardholders.
1.
Select Direct Control / Use Limit from the cardholder’s main window.
2.
Select the desired option from the drop-down list.
● Disabled - Use Limit feature is not being used.
● Limit - If selected, set the number of times the card can be used.
● Unlimited - Allows unlimited number of card uses.
If desired,
check Apply to All Cards or select the specific card.
3. Click OK to apply the change.
Issue Free Pass
1.
Select Direct Control / Issue Free Pass from the cardholder’s main window.
2.
Select the desired option from the drop-down list.
If desired, check Apply to All Cards or select the specific card.
3.
Select the desired Area and click OK.
If desired,
check Apply to all access areas.
Activate a Card
Cards can be easily be activated from the Personnel Record.
1. Open the cardholder’s record as described on page 21-13.
2.
Select Direct Control / Activate Cards.
3. If needed,
select the specific card or check Apply Limit to All Cards.
4. Click OK.
Deactivate a Card
Operators can quickly deactivate cards from a Personnel Record.
1.
Open the cardholder’s record as described on page 21-13.
2. Select Direct Control / Deactivate Cards.
3. If needed,
select the specific card or check Apply Limit to All Cards.
If desired, check the Supply Disabled Reason? checkbox and select reason from the drop down list.
4.
Click OK.
More Info
Select More Info from the cardholder’s main window to open the cardholder’s record. See page 21-17 for more information.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-21
Fusion Web
InfoReady Reports
The Reports option on the cardholder’s main window provides access to the Personnel InfoReady Reports.
Has Access To
This report allows you to view which doors the cardholder can access.
1.
Open the cardholder’s record as described on page 21-13.
2.
Select Reports / Has Access To?.
Trace History
You can view the last transactions for the selected cardholder by running a trace history report.
1.
Open the Cardholder’s Record as described on page 21-13.
2.
Select Reports / Trace History.
3.
Select a Start and End Date from the calendar drop down.
4.
Click the Preview button.
The report is generated.
Page 21-22 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Assigning & Removing Access Levels
An employee may be assigned at least one card (or access “key”) which contains the access level for that employee. The access level defines what entry points the employee has access to and what times he/she may have that access. Other types of access credentials, such as fobs, are referred to as “cards” throughout the system. For more information on Access Levels see Chapter 6.
Assigning an Access Level
1. From the
Access Control tab of the Cardholder’s Record, select the desired card from the Card Number drop down.
The card information will populate the record.
2.
Click the Add Access Level button.
3. Click the Add button next to the desired Access Level(s).
If desired,
click the Undo button to remove the Access Level.
4.
Click OK to add the Access Level(s) to the card.
The Access Levels will appear in the
Access To section.
5.
Click the Save button to save the record.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-23
Fusion Web
Removing an Access Level
1. From the
Access Control tab of the cardholder’s record, select the desired card from the Card Number drop down.
The card information will populate the record.
2. Locate the desired
Access Level in the Access To section and click the Delete Access Level button.
The removed Access Level appears in red.
To undo the card addition, click the Undo button.
3.
Click the Save button to save the record.
Page 21-24 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Controlling Hardware
Fusion Web offers a number of different hardware features as well as ability to control various hardware objects. Hardware features vary based on the selected object.
The Hardware window offers a graphical layout of the field devices that make up the system. The window also displays the status of hardware through status indicators.
To open the Hardware window:
1.
Select the Hardware tab on the Toolbar.
The Fusion Sites and their status will be displayed:
The
Web Server is not currently communicating with the DNA Site Driver. If the
Web Server is not communicating, no events will be received, hardware cannot be controlled and status will not be updated.
The
Web Server is currently communicating with the DNA Site Driver.
There are also links to the following:
Controllers - Displays the site’s controllers with access to the controller’s doors, elevators, time schedules and subcontrollers. See page 21-26.
All Doors - Provides visibility and control to all doors from all controllers on the site as well the ability to generate Info Ready Reports. See page 21-27.
2. Select the desired Link.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-25
Fusion Web
Controllers
The Controllers section displays all the controllers assigned to the selected Site. It also provides controller status as well as access to the controller’s doors, elevators, time schedules and subcontrollers.
1. From the
Hardware Site window, select the Controller item.
The Site Controllers and their status will be displayed:
The
DNA Site Driver is not currently communicating with the controller. If the
Driver is not communicating, no events will be received, hardware cannot be controlled and status will not be updated for the selected controller.
The
DNA Site Driver is currently communicating with the controller.
There are also links to the following:
Doors - Provides visibility and control to the doors on the selected controller as well the ability to generate Info Ready Reports. See page 21-27.
Elevators - Provides visibility and control to the elevators on the selected controller as well the ability to generate
Info Ready Reports. See page 21-31.
Time Schedules - Allows access to the time schedules on the selected controller as well the ability to control the schedules. See page 21-35.
Subcontrollers - Displays the status of the subcontrollers associated with the selected controller as well as providing access to the points on the subcontroller. See page 21-37.
2.
Select the desired Link.
Page 21-26 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Doors
The Doors page will display all the doors for the selected site or all the doors for the selected controller; this is dependant on how the Doors page was accessed; through the Site page or through the Controller page.
The Doors page provides the door’s status, ability to change to door mode, momentarily unlock the door as well as arm and disarm the door forced and held states. InfoReady reports can be generated quickly from the Door page.
1. From the Hardware Site window, select the Door item.
Or
From the
Controller window, select the Door item.
i con
S tAte
Door State
d eScription
The Door is currently open.
Door State
Door Held State
Door Held State
Door Held State
Door Held State
The Door is currently closed.
The Door is being Held Open.
Masked: The Door is being Held Open.
The Door is not Held Open.
Masked: The Door is not Held Open.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-27
Fusion Web
i con
S tAte
Door Forced State
Door Forced State
d eScription
The Door has been Forced Open.
Masked: The Door has been Forced Open.
Door Forced State The Door has not been Forced Open.
Door Forced State
Masked: The Door has not been Forced
Open.
The following control links are available:
Door Mode - Indicates the current door mode for the door and displays the door mode selector; allowing the operator to set the reader mode. This setting determines the type of access the reader will allow. See Changing Door Modes on page 21-29.
Momentary Unlock - Unlocks the door for the programmed time. See page 21-29.
Arm/Disarm - The Arm/Disarm Door Held/Forced allows the operator to arm the forced door alarm on a disarmed door or disarm the door held alarm on an armed door held alarm. See page 21-29.
The Doors page also provides access to
InfoReady Reports . See page 21-30.
2.
Select the desired Link.
Page 21-28 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Changing Door Modes
The Door Modes setting determines the type of access the reader will allow.
1. From the Doors page, click the Door Modes drop down.
2.
Select the desired Mode from the list.
The Door will change to the selected mode and the door status will be updated.
The following door modes are available from the Door Modes drop down.
Reader Mode: Disabled
Disables the reader and the door remains locked with no REX capability.
Reader Mode: Unlocked
Unlocks the selected point and allows unlimited access.
Reader Mode: Locked
Locks the selected point. No access is allowed but the door can be used from the inside, using the REX button.
Reader Mode: Facility Code Matches the facility code to approve entry.
Requires a card with the correct format be presented.
Reader Mode: Card Only
Reader Mode: PIN
Reader Mode: Card & PIN
Reader Mode: Card or PIN
Point requires a PIN code be entered to gain access.
Point requires that both the card be presented and a PIN code entered to gain access.
Point requires either a card be presented or a PIN code be entered to gain access.
Momentary Unlock
Unlocks the door for the programmed strike time.
1. From the
Doors page, click the Momentary Unlock button.
The Door is unlocked for the programmed time.
Arm Door Held/Door Forced
A check will appear by the Held Open and Forced Open options if they are armed.
To arm the door’s held or forced states:
1.
Select the Arm/Disarm drop down for the door to be armed.
● Held Open - Arms the door held alarm on a disarmed door.
● Forced Open - Arms the door forced alarm on a disarmed door.
A check will appear next to the item indicating that it is armed.
Disarm Door Held/Door Forced
If a door has been disarmed, a check will not appear by the Held Open and Forced Open options.
To disarm the door’s held or forced states:
1.
Select the Arm/Disarm drop down for the door to be disarmed.
● Held Open - Disarms the door held alarm on a armed door.
● Forced Open - Disarms the door forced alarm on a armed door.
The check will be removed from the item, indicating that it is disarmed.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-29
Fusion Web
Reports
The Reports option on the Doors page provides access to the Door InfoReady Reports.
Who Has Access
This report allows you to view which cardholders have access to the selected door.
1. From the
Door page and select the InfoReady Reports drop down.
2.
Select the Who Has Access? report from the list.
Trace History
You can view the last transactions for the selected door by running a trace history report.
1. From the
Door page and select the InfoReady Reports drop down.
2. Select the Trace History report from the list.
3. Select a Start and End Date from the calendar drop down.
4.
Click the Preview button.
The report is generated.
Page 21-30 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Elevators
The Elevators page displays all the elevators for the selected controller. The Elevators page provides the elevator’s status and the ability to change to elevator mode as well as access to the InfoReady reports.
1. From the
Controller window, select the Elevator item.
The Elevators and their options will be displayed.
The following control links are available:
Floors - Opens the Elevator’s Floors page. See Floors below.
Elevator Mode - Indicates the current mode for the elevator and displays the mode selector; allowing the operator to set the reader mode. This setting determines the type of access the reader will allow. See page 21-32.
The Elevators page also provides access to InfoReady Reports. See page 21-33.
2.
Select the desired Link.
Floors
The Floors page displays all the floors for the selected Elevator as well as providing control for the floors.
1. From the Elevator window, select the Floors item.
The following control links are available:
Momentary Unlock - Unlocks the floor for the programmed time.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-31
Fusion Web
Changing the Elevator Mode
The Elevator Modes setting determines the type of access the reader will allow.
1. From the Elevators page, click the Elevator Modes drop down.
2.
Select the desired Mode from the list.
The Elevator will change to the selected mode and the elevator status will be updated.
The following elevator modes are available from the Elevator Modes drop down.
Reader Mode: Disabled
Disables the reader and the elevator remains locked with no REX capability.
Reader Mode: Unlocked
Unlocks the selected point and allows unlimited access.
Reader Mode: Locked
Locks the selected point. No access is allowed but the point can be used from the inside, using the REX button.
Reader Mode: Facility Code Matches the facility code to approve entry.
Requires a card with the correct format be presented.
Reader Mode: Card Only
Reader Mode: PIN
Reader Mode: Card & PIN
Reader Mode: Card or PIN
Point requires a PIN code be entered to gain access.
Point requires that both the card be presented and a PIN code entered to gain access.
Point requires either a card be presented or a PIN code be entered to gain access.
Page 21-32 Fusion User Manual
Reports
The Reports option on the Elevators page provides access to the Elevator InfoReady Reports.
Who Has Access
This report allows you to view which cardholders have access to the selected elevator.
1. From the
Elevator page and select the InfoReady Reports drop down.
2.
Select the Who Has Access? report from the list.
Fusion Web
Trace History
You can view the last transactions for the selected elevator by running a trace history report.
1. From the
Elevator page and select the InfoReady Reports drop down.
2. Select the Trace History report from the list.
3.
Select a Start and End Date from the calendar drop down.
4. Click the Preview button.
The report is generated.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-33
Fusion Web
NOTES:
Page 21-34 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Handling Time Schedules
The Time Schedules page displays the current status of the time schedule and provides control options.
1. From the
Controller window, select the Time Schedule item.
The Time Schedules and their status will be displayed:
Green icon indicates that the
Time Schedule is currently active. If linked to cardholders through an access level, cardholders will be granted access. If linked to a door, the door will follow the programmed mode for the Active state of the schedule.
Red icon indicates that the Time Schedule is currently inactive. If linked to cardholders through an access level, cardholders will be denied access based on Time. If linked to a door, the door will follow the programmed mode for the Deactivated state of the schedule.
There are also a Control link:
TS Control - Displays the Time Schedule Control drop down allowing the operator to control the selected time schedule. See page 21-36.
2. Select the desired Link.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-35
Fusion Web
Controlling Time Schedules
1. From the
Time Schedule page, select the TS Control drop down.
2.
Select the desired Command from the drop-down menu.
● Temporary OFF – Temporarily sets the time schedule mode to OFF. The next time interval edge will return the schedule to its normal time-based state. Use the
Resume Normal Status command to restore the time schedule to the time-based control prior to the next interval edge.
● Temporary ON - Temporarily sets the time schedule mode to ON. The next time interval edge will return the schedule to its normal time-based state. Use the Resume Normal Status command to restore the time schedule to the time-based control prior to the next interval edge.
● Override OFF - Sets the time schedule mode to OFF overriding the time-based control. Basically the
Scan Mode is being overridden and time intervals have no effect when this command is used. Use the Resume Normal Status command to restore the time schedule to the time-based control.
● Override ON - Sets the time schedule mode to ON overriding the time-based control. Basically the
Scan Mode is being overridden and time intervals have no effect when this command is used. Use the Resume Normal Status command to restore the time schedule to the time-based control.
● Resume Normal State – Puts the time schedule into the state as defined time-based rules. Use this command to remove the temporary clear/set and override clear/set commands. This command will return the time schedule to its normal state.
● Refresh Status – Logs the current time schedule modes into the transaction log. Use this command to test triggers that are activated based on time schedule events.
Page 21-36 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Accessing Subcontrollers
The Subcontrollers page provides the real-time status of the subcontrollers associated to the selected controller. It also provides access to the components on the subcontrollers.
1. From the
Controller window, select the Subcontroller item.
The Subcontrollers and their status will be displayed:
The subcontroller is offline and not currently communicating with the controller.
If the subcontroller is not communicating, no events will be received from this device and hardware cannot be controlled.
The subcontroller is online and is currently communicating with the controller.
The following link is also provided:
More Information - Opens the Subcontroller Objects page. See Subcontroller
Objects on page 21-39.
2. Select the desired Link.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-37
Fusion Web
NOTES:
Page 21-38 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Subcontroller Objects
The Subcontroller Objects page displays the current status of the inputs and outputs not associated to a door. The page also provides control and reporting options.
1. From the
Subcontroller window, select the More Information item.
The Inputs / Outputs and their status will be displayed:
The Point is currently in an active or alarm state.
Masked: The Point is currently in an active or alarm state and is disarmed.
The Point is currently in an inactive state.
Masked: The Point is currently in an inactive and is disarmed.
The Point is currently in a fault state. The fault reason will appear on the tooltip on a hover over.
Masked: The Point is currently in a fault state and is disarmed. The fault reason will appear on a hover over.
The following Control links are available:
Input Masking - The Arm/Disarm input allows the operator to arm the input on a disarmed point or disarm the input on a armed point. See page 21-40.
Output Control - Displays the output control drop down allowing the operator to activate or deactivate the selected output point. See page 21-40.
The Inputs / Outputs page also provides access to InfoReady Reports. See page 21-41.
2.
Select the desired Link.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-39
Fusion Web
Arming / Disarming Inputs
If an input is armed, alarms will be generated from the point; input point can be disarmed (or masked) so that they do not produce alarms.
To disarm an input:
1. From the
More Information page, select the Input Masking drop down for the input to be disarmed.
2. Select the Disarm option from the menu.
The point will be disarmed and the status icon will change.
To arm an input:
1. From the
More Information page, select the Input Masking drop down for the input to be disarmed.
2.
Select the Arm option from the menu.
The point will be armed and the status icon will change.
Activating / Deactivating Outputs
Output point may be activated (turned on), deactivated (turned off) or activated momentarily.
To activate an output:
1. From the
More Information page, select the Output Control drop down for the output to be activated.
2.
Select the Activate option from the menu.
The point will be activated and the status icon will change.
To deactivate an output:
1. From the
More Information page, select the Output Control drop down for the output to be deactivated.
2.
Select the Deactivate option from the menu.
The point will be deactivated and the status icon will change.
To momentarily activate an output:
1. From the
More Information page, select the Output Control drop down for the output to be momentarily
activated.
2. Select the Momentary option from the menu.
The point will be momentarily activated and the status icon will change.
Page 21-40 Fusion User Manual
Fusion Web
Reports
The Reports option on the More Information page provides access to the Input / Output Points InfoReady
Reports.
Trace History
You can view the last transactions for the selected point by running a trace history report.
1. From the
More Information page and select the InfoReady Reports drop down.
2.
Select the Trace History report from the list.
3. Select a Start and End Date from the calendar drop down.
4. Click the Preview button.
The report is generated.
Fusion User Manual Page 21-41
Fusion Web
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 21-42 Fusion User Manual
ID Badging
22
In This Chapter
√
√
√
√
√
Creating a Badge Template
Configuring Badge Types
Setting up ID Badging in DNA
Taking a Photo
Previewing & Printing a Badge
For the purposes of clarification, it will be assumed that the processes discussed in this section will be performed on a station enabled as an ID Badging station. (See page 3-2 for more information on enabling the ID Badging for a station.)
An ID Badging station is comprised of two modules:
● The Badge Designer
● The Badge Manager
The Badge Designer is where the template for the badges is actually designed. Component objects (graphic, text field, and bar code placeholders) are placed on the badge model to fashion how the badges will appear.
The template is then named and saved to the operator’s local hard drive or a common shared folder if more than one badging station is utilized. The placeholders will be populated by specific information from the database to create individual badges.
In the Badge Manager, a badge template is selected, the photo is taken, and the badge is printed. The Badge
Manager is contained in a personnel record tab.
Fusion User Manual Page 22-1
ID Badging
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 22-2 Fusion User Manual
ID Badging
Badge Designer
Opening Badge Designer
1. Open the Windows Explorer and double-click C:\ Program Files \ DNA Fusion \ BadgeDesigner.exe
Badge Designer opens.
The Badge Designer Environment
The Badge Designer Module program has a relatively simple and user-friendly interface.
The Main Screen consists of the following four principal elements:
● The Badge Designer Module Window
● The Badge Template
● The Object Inspection Window
● Editor Dialogs
Fusion User Manual Page 22-3
ID Badging
Main Menu
From the Main Menu, a badge file is managed, the template is constructed, and the display is controlled. It is also from the Main Menu that the badge shape, size, and color can be configured and components can be inserted onto the badge template.
File Edit Insert View Help
New
Open
Recent
Save
Save As
Import
Close
Close All
Exit
Copy
Cut
Paste
Delete
Text
Static Text
Bar Code
Image
Static Image
Shape
Create Back Side
Object Inspector
Alignment Palette
Menu Look_Feel
Enhanced
Flat
Standard
XP
Office
About
File
● Various options related to a badging file.
Edit
● Various options related to the editing of a badging file.
Insert
● Text - Inserts a text field placeholder onto the template.
● Static Text - Inserts text onto the template that will remain the same for each badge.
● Bar Code - Inserts a bar code placeholder on the template.
● Image - Inserts an image placeholder on the template.
● Static Image - Inserts an unchanging graphic onto the template from a stated file path.
● Shape - Inserts a resizable, colorable white box onto the template. The shape can be changed using the Object Inspector.
View
● Create Back Side - Inserts a back side area below the existing badge area.
● Object Inspector - Displays the Object Inspector Window for the selected area.
● Alignment Palette - Displays the Alignment Palette.
● Menu Look_Feel - Selection of various window setup options.
Help
● About - Displays version information.
Page 22-4 Fusion User Manual
ID Badging
Control Toolbar
Badge Designer provides a Control toolbar for easier manipulation of the badge templates. Control commands are available from the Control Toolbar.
New Icon - Opens the New Template dialog to create a new template.
Open Icon - Displays the Open dialog to open an existing badge template file.
Open Recent Icon - Displays a list of the files recently opened in the application.
Save Icon - Saves a existing file or opens the Save As dialog if the file is new.
Save As Icon - Displays the Save As dialog to save the current file.
Object Inspector Icon - Displays the Object Inspector Window.
Show Alignment Palette Icon - Displays the Alignment Palette.
Align Icon - Displays the Alignment dialog for configuration of vertical and horizontal alignment.
Align to Grid Icon - Aligns selected object with grid lines.
Size Icon - Displays the Size dialog for configuration of width and height.
Select All Icon - Selects all the objects on the template.
Toggle Grid Lines Icon - Displays/hides the template grid lines.
Grid Lines Color Icon - Drop-down menu of grid line colors.
Custom Grid Color Icon - Displays the Color dialog box.
Copy Icon - Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
Cut Icon - Cuts the selected object and places it on the clipboard.
Paste Icon - Pastes the contents of the clipboard.
Delete Icon - Deletes the selected object.
About Icon - Displays the About Badge Designer window.
Fusion User Manual Page 22-5
ID Badging
Insert/Component Toolbar
Badge Designer provides a Component toolbar for easier manipulation of the badge template. Insert/
Component commands are available from the Insert Toolbar.
Select Icon - Select objects on the template.
Text Icon - Inserts a text field placeholder on the template. The text will be determined by the database field assigned to the text object.
Static Text Icon - Inserts a text object that will remain the same for each badge.
Bar Code Icon - Inserts a bar code placeholder on the template. Bar code font must be installed on the workstation.
Image Icon - Inserts an image placeholder on the template. The image will be determined by the database field assigned to the image object.
Static Image Icon- Inserts an image that will remain the same for each badge.
Shape Icon - Inserts a user-defined shape on the template.
Page 22-6 Fusion User Manual
ID Badging
Designing a Badge Template
The Badge Designer software can store any number of badge template designs. Templates define the physical layout of the badge. This includes the size and shape of the badge as well of the format of the various text, photos, and graphic data to be displayed on the badge.
Badge Designer gives you many design options. The key is to include the necessary elements and create an attractive badge. Achieving this balance may take some work. Here are the design elements that should be considered.
● Photos: Color or Black & White
● Text: Names, ID Numbers, etc.
● Logos: Placement
● Type: Bar Codes, Magnetic Strips, Smart Cards
Begin the design process by choosing the elements you want to include from the list above. Then sketch a few layouts in an area the size of a credit card. Remember if you are including a magnetic stripe, design your badge so they can be swiped through a reader. And remember, if you use bar codes, leave a 0.25 inch border on either side of the image.
To start the design:
1. With Badge Manager open, select File / New.
The New Template dialog opens.
2. Specify the badge Orientation and Size.
3. Select One or Two Sided.
4. If desired, select a Background Color by clicking the Select Color button.
The Color dialog opens.
Select
the colored square of your choice and click OK.
In order for the color to be visible, the Print Background must be set to True. See page 22-18 for more information.
5. Click OK.
The blank template will open in the window.
Adding a Color Block
A color block can be added to highlight an image or to incorporate issuer’s colors.
1. Select the Shape Icon from the Component Toolbar and click in the badge area.
A square will appear.
2. Move and size the shape.
3. With the object selected, click on the Object Inspector on the Control Toolbar.
See page 22-15 for more information on using the Object Inspector.
4. Configure the object as needed.
Fusion User Manual Page 22-7
ID Badging
Adding a Photo Placeholder
A photo placeholder is used to insert a photo (or other image) from a cardholder’s record.
1. Click the Image Icon on the Component Toolbar and click in the badge area.
The photo placeholder box will appear on the badge.
2. Move and size the Photo Placeholder as needed.
3. Double-click the Photo Placeholder.
The Image Editor opens. See page 22-13 for more information on the Image Editor.
4. Select the Photo Index from the drop down list.
The Photo Index determines which photo database field (1-4) in the cardholder record will be inserted as the badge photo.
5. Configure the Photo Placeholder as needed.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
When the badge is previewed in DNA Fusion, the specified image will appear in the placeholder.
Adding a Text Placeholder
A text holder can be used to place any information from a cardholder’s record onto the badge. Each text holder can have various aspects of its appearance set during the design process. These aspects include the character font, character size, and character foreground and background colors.
1. Click the Text Icon on the Component Toolbar and left-click in the badge background.
A Text Placeholder appears on the badge.
2. Move and size the text placeholder as needed.
3. Add the database field to the text placeholder.
● Double-click the Text Placeholder.
When the Text Editor opens, select the Database Field from the drop-down list. See page 22-11 for more information on the Text Editor.
● Right-click on the Text Placeholder and select Concatenate Wizard.
When the Concatenate Wizard appears, select the Database Fields and Field Separators for each field. See page 22-12 for more information on the Concatenate Wizard.
4. Configure the Text Placeholder as needed.
5. Click OK to save the settings.
The Caption text appears in the BadgeText.
Page 22-8 Fusion User Manual
ID Badging
Adding Static Graphics
Static graphics are images that will remain the same for each badge, such as a logo.
1. Click the Static Image Icon on the Component Toolbar and click in the badge background.
A Graphic Box will appear.
2. Move and size the Graphic Box as needed.
3. Double-click the Graphic Box.
The Image Editor opens.
See page 22-13 for more information on the Image Editor.
4. Click the Insert Image button.
The Open dialog appears.
5. Browse to the desired graphic and click Open.
6. Configure the Graphic Box as needed.
7. Click OK to save the settings.
The selected image appears in the square.
Adding Static Text
Just like static graphics, static text remains the same for each badge.
1. Click the Static Text Icon on the Component Toolbar and click in the badge background.
BadgeStaticText will appear.
2. Move and size the Text Box as needed.
3. Double-click the Text Box.
The Text Editor opens.
See page 22-11 for more information on the Text Editor.
4. Select the Display Text tab and enter the text.
5. Configure the Text Box as needed.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
The text appears in the BadgeStaticText.
Fusion User Manual Page 22-9
ID Badging
Adding a Bar Code
A bar code holder can display textual information in a wide variety of bar code formats. Special leading and trailing characters as required by each bar code are added automatically.
1. Click the Bar Code Icon on the Component Toolbar and click in the badge background.
BadgeBarCode will appear.
2. Move and size the Text Box as needed.
3. Double-click the Text Box.
The Text Editor opens.
See page 22-11 for more information on the Text Editor.
4. Select the Database Field from the drop-down list.
The field will be used to pull information from a cardholder’s record onto the badge.
5. Select the Bar Code Font from the drop down list and configure the
Text Box as needed.
BadgeDesigner does not come with a Bar Code font. If using the Bar Code option, the required bar code font will need to be loaded in the Windows Fonts folder on the computer.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
The bar code appears in the BadgeBarCode.
Adding a Background Image
An image can used for the background of the badge and then other objects layered on top.
1. Double-click the badge background.
The Image Editor opens.
See page 22-13 for more information on the Image Editor.
2. Click the Insert Image button.
The Open dialog appears.
3. Browse to the desired graphic and click Open.
4. Configure the graphic as needed.
5. Click OK to save the settings.
6. On the Object Inspector, select the PrintBackground field, click the drop down and select True.
The image appears on the badge.
See page 22-18 for more information on the Object Inspector.
Page 22-10 Fusion User Manual
ID Badging
Configuration Dialogs
Text Editor Dialogs
Text objects can be configured using the Text Editor dialog as an alternative to using the Object Inspector.
The dialog provides a conventional dialog interface for the user to define the selected text object.
To display the Text Editor dialog:
1. Double-click the desired Text Object.
The Text Editor dialog opens. There are two tabs at the top of the window: Display/Sample Text and
Preview.
● Sample/Display Text - User-defined text. This text serves as a Sample Value placeholder in the template to be replaced later with text from the database field. For Static Text objects, the caption serves as the Display Text.
● Preview - Displays sample of how the text object will appear on the badge template.
Additionally there are two tabs located at the bottom of the window: Text Style and Option which are used to configure the text; these options are defined below.
Text Style
● Font - Font drop-down menu that allows you to select the desired font.
● Size - Move pointer right or left to select font size.
● Font Color - Color drop-down menu that allows you to select the desired font color.
● Database Field - Drop-down menu of database fields in the personnel record. Select the database field that will populate this text object. (Only available for Text Placeholder objects)
● Background Color - Select the Background Color from the drop-down list. Check the Transparent checkbox to make the background transparent.
● Alignment - Select alignment radiobuttons to position text.
● Word Wrap - Wraps text in the preview panel to allow user to view all text without scrolling. Wrap only applies to the preview panel.
● Text Style - Text character attribute radiobuttons.
● Font Style - Font attribute checkboxes.
● Light Style - Lightens the text during printing. Does not affect designer.
● Transparent/Editing Mode Only - If background color is set to Transparent, this enable button will display transparent area as checkerboard.
Fusion User Manual Page 22-11
ID Badging
Options
● Inner Border - Displays inner border for edges selected in Sides checkboxes.
● Outer Border - Displays outer border for edges selected in Sides checkboxes.
● Sides Border - Determines which border edges will display or hide.
● Restrict Angle - Disable text rotation
● Highlight Color - Drop-down menu to select highlight color, if either Raised or Recessed option is selected in Text Style tab.
● Shadow Color - Drop-down menu to select shadow color, if Shadow option is selected in Text Style tab.
● Shadow - Move slider right to increase the amount of shadow, if Shadow option is selected in Text
Style tab.
The editor dialogs for a Static Text object are identical to the dialogs for a Text object, except that the Text
Style tab for a Static Text object has no database field drop-down menu since the Static Text will not vary from badge to badge and is determined by what is entered in the Caption field.
There are a number of options that can not be set through the Text Editor dialog
(such as SizeToFit) and must be set in the Object Inspector. See page 22-15 for more information on the Object Inspector.
Concatenate Wizard
The wizard allows you to select numerous database fields to display on one line as well as separators.
To open the Concatenate Wizard:
1. Right-click on the Text Placeholder and select Concatenate Wizard.
The Concatenate Wizard appears.
2. Select the Database Fields and Separators to include in the text placeholder by double-clicking the name or clicking one of the Selection buttons.
3. Click OK to save the selections.
4. Configure the text by double-clicking the Concatenated Text.
The Text Editor opens.
See page 22-11 for more information on the Text Editor dialog.
Page 22-12 Fusion User Manual
ID Badging
Image Editor Dialogs
Image objects can be configured using the Image Editor dialog as an alternative to using the Object Inspector.
The dialog provides a conventional dialog interface for the user to define the selected image object.
To display an Image Editor dialog:
1. Double-click the desired image object.
The Image Editor dialog opens.
There are two tabs located at the bottom of the window: Settings and Options.
Image Settings
● Insert Image - Displays a navigation box to browse to desired graphic/photo file. This graphic/photo serves only as a placeholder. For the badge, this image will be determined by the Photo Index database field.
To match the preview graphic to the image size, right-click on the Sample image and select Match
Object Size. The image will resize to match the image size on the badge.
● Stretch Filter - Drop-down menu listing filter options. These options affect the graphic registration.
● Photo Index - Drop-down menu listing numeric value that determines which photo database field in the cardholder record to use.
● Background Color - Background color drop-down menu. Check the Checked Background checkbox to make the background transparent (displayed as checkerboard).
● Scale Mode - Drop-down menu that determines how photo will display in the preview panel.
These settings also determine how the photo will appear on the badge.
Normal - Displays the photo without changing it.
Resize - Fits the photo to the preview window vertically, but maintains the photo’s proportion.
Scale - Enables the slider in order to allow the operator to alter the photo size.
Stretch - Stretches the proportion of the photo to fit in the preview panel.
● Scale - If Scale is selected in the Scale Mode menu, the slider becomes active and increases the size of the picture in the preview panel as the slider is moved right. Use Spinedit buttons for more precise control.
● Draw Mode - Toggle menu determining whether transparency effect is active.
● Transparency Level - If Transparent is selected in the Draw Mode menu, the slider becomes active and increasingly fades the picture in the preview panel as the slider is moved right. Use Spinedit buttons for more precise control.
Fusion User Manual Page 22-13
ID Badging
● Scaled Rotation - Scales the image during rotation, maintaining the aspect ratio of the image to fit the original boundaries of the image as it is rotated.
● Rotate - Rotates the image. Use Spinedit buttons for more precise control.
Image Options
● Inner Border - Displays inner border for edges selected in Sides checkboxes.
● Outer Border - Displays outer border for edges selected in Sides checkboxes.
● Sides Border - Determines which border edges will display or hide.
● Alignment - Drop-down menu to select alignment settings.
● Vertical Offset - If Custom is selected in the Alignment drop-down menu, the Vertical Offset becomes active. Use the Spinedit button to precisely control vertical positioning of the picture.
● Horizontal Offset - If Custom is selected in the Alignment drop-down menu, the Horizontal Offset becomes active. Use the Spinedit button to precisely control horizontal positioning of the picture.
● Transparent - Activates the Transparent Color drop-down.
● Transparent Color - Allows you to select a color in the image to become transparent.
Page 22-14 Fusion User Manual
ID Badging
Object Inspectors
The Object Inspector is a window containing the property settings allowing the user to configure the attributes of the objects placed on the template.
The operator may elect to use the Editor Dialogs instead of the Object Inspector; however there are options that can only be configured using the Object Inspector. (See
22-11 for more information on Editor Dialogs.)
The Object Inventory drop-down list contains a listing of all the objects currently placed on the template as well as the template background. Selecting an object from this list redefines the Property and Value columns for the object selected.
When an individual property field is selected, the corresponding Value field display will change to indicate whether and how the value field is configurable. Some of the properties are simply labels and not configurable such as Type and Name, and the values are read only.
Properties that have a choice of values will have the values displayed with a drop-down button. This is true for properties that have only a simple True/False selection, as well as for properties with more value choices.
In the example above, the DBField property was selected prompting the value field to become a drop-down list from which to choose the appropriate value.
Properties with a plus sign in a white box indicate that the property can be expanded to reveal property options. Click the plus icon (+) to expand the property and display the options.
Date Time Format
If the information in the database field for a Text object or a Static Text object are to be represented on the badge as a DateTimeFormat, the following will apply.
Click
the DateTimeFormat property field to display a value field with a default Date Time
Format string of hh:ss:nn mm/dd/yyyy with hh=hours, ss=minutes, nn=seconds, mm=month, dd=day, and yyyy=4-digit year.
The Date Time Format strings are composed from specifiers that represent values to be inserted into the formatted string. Some specifiers (such as “d”) simply format numbers or strings. Other specifiers (such as “/”) refer to locale-specific strings from global variables.
In the following table are the specifiers available for use in the Date Time Format strings. The specifiers are given in lower case. Case is ignored in formats, except for the “am/pm” and “a/p” specifiers.
Fusion User Manual Page 22-15
ID Badging
S pecifier f ormat
c d
Displays the date using the format given by the ShortDateFormat global variable, followed by the time using the format given by the LongTimeFormat global variable. The time is not displayed if the date-time value indicates midnight precisely.
Displays the day as a number without a leading zero (1-31).
dd dd
Displays the day as a number with a leading zero (01-31).
Displays the day as an abbreviation (Sun-Sat) using the strings given by the ShortDayNames global variable.
dddd
Displays the day as a full name using the strings given by the LongDayNames global variable.
ddddd Displays the date using the format given by the ShortDateFormat global variable.
dddddd Displays the date using the format given by the LongDateFormat global variable.
e ee g gg m mm mmm
Displays the year in the current period/era as a number without a leading zero (Japanese,
Korean and Taiwanese locales only).
Displays the year in the current period/era as a number with a leading zero (Japanese, Korean and Taiwanese locales only).
Displays the period/era as an abbreviation (Japanese and Taiwanese locales only).
Displays the period/era as a full name. (Japanese and Taiwanese locales only).
Displays the month as a number without a leading zero (1-12). If the m specifier immediately follows an h or hh specifier, the minute rather than the month is displayed.
Displays the month as a number with a leading zero (01-12). If the mm specifier immediately follows an h or hh specifier, the minute rather than the month is displayed.
Displays the month as an abbreviation using the strings given by the ShortMonthNames global variable.
yy yyyy hh n nn s ss
Displays the year as a two-digit number (00-99).
Displays the year as a four-digit number (0000-9999).
Displays the hour with a leading zero (00-23).
Displays the minute without a leading zero (0-59).
Displays the minute with a leading zero (00-59).
Displays the second without a leading zero (0-59).
Displays the second with a leading zero (00-59).
Displays the millisecond without a leading zero (0-999).
z zzz t tt am/pm a/p
Displays the millisecond with a leading zero (000-999).
Displays the time using the format given by the ShortTimeFormat global variable.
Displays the time using the format given by the LongTimeFormat global variable.
Uses the 12-hour clock for the preceding h or hh specifier, and displays ‘am’ for any hour before noon, and ‘pm’ for any hour after noon. The am/pm specifier can use lower, upper, or mixed case, and the result is displayed accordingly.
Uses the 12-hour clock for the preceding h or hh specifier, and displays ‘a’ for any hour before noon, and ‘p’ for any hour after noon. The a/p specifier can use lower, upper, or mixed case, and the result is displayed accordingly.
ampm
Uses the 12-hour clock for the preceding h or hh specifier, and displays the contents of the
TimeAMString global variable for any hour before noon, and the contents of the TimePMString global variable for any hour after noon.
/
:
Displays the date separator character given by the DateSeparator global variable.
Displays the time separator character given by the TimeSeparator global variable.
xx’/”xx” Characters enclosed in single or double quotes are displayed as-is, and do not affect formatting.
Page 22-16 Fusion User Manual
ID Badging
Photo Index
An Image object can be configured to retrieve any of the 4 display photos associated with a personnel record.
To perform this function:
1. Select one of the four PhotoIndex listings in the PhotoIndex drop-down menu.
2. Press the Enter key after selecting the numeric value.
Print Background
If badge’s background will be an image or set to a specific color, the Print Background field will need to be set to True in order for the image or color to be visible.
Sample Value Property
Text, Image and Barcode objects have a Sample Value property in the Object Inspector Window.
Sample Value properties allow the user to place a value to use as a placeholder. This has no effect on the template other than to allow the user to view the field with this placeholder sample to get an idea of what the badge will look like.
Text and Barcode objects values can be typed in the SampleValue field.
In the case of Image objects, the SampleValue requires a file. In such cases, the SampleValue field will display a Browse button. Clicking the Browse button displays the Open dialog allowing the operator to navigate to the desired file.
Scripting
The Object Inspector provides a scripting feature that allows an operator to write program scripts.
1. Click the plus + icon to expand the scripting options.
The list will display and the icon will become a minus.
2. Select the Browse button to display the script editor where the operator may create scripts.
!
The Scripting functionality is considered an advanced feature. For additional assistance regarding this feature, contact Open Options Technical Support or e-mail: oosupport@ openoptionsinc.com.
Fusion User Manual Page 22-17
ID Badging
Size To Fit
If enabled the text in the selected object will either grow or shrink to fit the size of the object.
1. Click the down arrow beside the SizeToFit option.
2. Select True to enable the feature.
Signature Settings
If a signature will be utilized on a badge, there are a number of settings that may need to be changed.
It may be easier to edit the badge template file in notepad for setting some of the signature object properties.
Badge Template files are located in the C:\Program Files\NPowerDNA\Templates\ folder and end with .bdg
(TemplateName.bdg).
1. Insert a Photo Placeholder.
See page 22-8 for more information.
2. In the Object Inspector, locate DB Field and select Signature from the drop down list.
3. Verify that the Auto Size field is set to False.
4. Expand the Bitmap option by clicking the plus (+) sign and select the Stretch
Filter that best meets the projects requirements.
5. Click the ScaleMode down arrow and select the desired resize option.
6. Click the Save button and preview the badge in Fusion.
Page 22-18 Fusion User Manual
ID Badging
Configuring the Badge Type
There are three card options that you can configure:
● Magnetic Stripe Card
● Proximity Card
● Smart Card
To configure a card:
1. Open the Object Inspector dialog and select Front Side TBadgeLayout from the drop-down list.
The Badge Layout dialog will be displayed.
2. Enter the values for the selected card type.
Saving a Badge Template
Badge Template files will be saved as a .bdg file. The default location is Program Files / NPowerID/ Templates.
After a badge template has been configured, save the Badge Template by one of the following methods:
● Click File / Save from the Main Menu.
● Click the Save button.
● Click Save As to change the file name and save the file to the default directory.
If a client workstation will be utilized for badging, a shared directory for templates should be created. This will allow the client access to the badge templates.
Fusion User Manual Page 22-19
ID Badging
Magnetic Stripe Card
U.S. Standards
Magnetic Stripe Encoding
3.375" (0.030 Thick)
Magnetic
Stripe
Card Data Format - Track 1
2.125"
Card Data Format - Track 2
Card Data Format - Track 3
Page 22-20 Fusion User Manual
ID Badging
Badge Manager
The Badging functionality for DNA is contained in the ID Badging tab found in the personnel record. Click this tab to display the DNA Badge Manager.
The DNA Badge Manager is an easy-to-use, straight-forward interface that enables the operator to take a photograph, apply the appropriate data from the personnel record to the selected badge template, and preview and prints the badge on command.
The Badge Manager Environment
The Badge Manager consists of the following:
● Five Operation Buttons
● The Badge Template Selection Panel
● The Static Preview Panel
These elements function as follows:
● Setup - Displays a drop down list: Printer Setup, Camera Setup dialog, and Advanced Setup. Depending on the selection, a setup dialog box will open.
● Take Photo - Displays the camera interface (Capture Photo) dialog.
● Preview Badge - Displays the interactive (zoom-able) preview window. Use the drop-down menu, and the plus and minus symbols along the top of the dialog to zoom in and out.
● Print Badge - Prints the badge at the card printer.
● Capture Signature - Opens the Capture Signature dialog and allows for the capturing of cardholders signatures. For use with ePad devices.
● Badge Template Selection Panel - Selectable list of pre-constructed templates. Select the desired template. The static preview panel will display a static preview of the template configured with the appropriate data of the current record.
● Static Preview Panel - Static badge preview automatically displayed upon selection of template.
Differs from the Preview Badge window in that it is not interactive and automatic.
Fusion User Manual Page 22-21
ID Badging
NOTES:
Page 22-22 Fusion User Manual
Setup Dialogs
The Setup dialogs allow you to configure the different object parameters.
To open a dialog:
1. Click Set Up from the ID Badging tab panel.
A drop-down list appears.
2. Select the object to configure.
The Setup dialog for that object will open.
Printer Setup
1. Select Printer Setup from the list.
The Print Setup dialog is displayed.
2. Select the Printer from the drop-down list.
3. Click OK to close the window.
Camera Setup
1. Select the Camera Type from the list.
2. Select the Camera/Device from the list.
3. Select the device from the list.
Advanced Setup
1. Select Advanced Setup from the drop-down list.
The Advanced Setting dialog opens.
ID Badging
2. Configure the badge options.
● Card Formats - Select the Card format by selecting the radiobutton next to the format. If Custom is selected, the Custom Card Format section must be completed.
● Printer COM Ports - Specify the printer port for each device as well as the Timeout.
● Printer Reader Type - If the printer is equipped with a reader, select the printer reader type by selecting the radiobutton next to the desired type.
● Custom Card Format - If Custom Card was selected for Card Format, enter the format information for the custom card.
● Debug Options - Select the debug option by selecting the radiobutton next to the desired option.
● Crop Type - Sets the crop option when a photo is taken with a camera attached to DNA. See page
22-28 for more information on Crop Type. The Default Easy setting, is recommended for operators that are inexperienced with graphic programs.
Fusion User Manual Page 22-23
ID Badging
Easy - Simplest crop method. Offers a presized crop box.
Medium - Cropping is achieved via four configurable crop lines.
Advanced - Opens the Image Editor to allow for cropping and editing.
3. Click OK to save the settings.
Page 22-24 Fusion User Manual
Taking a Photo
1. Verify the camera is attached to the computer and that it is ON and set to Play.
2. Click the Take Photo button.
The Capture Photo dialog opens.
ID Badging
Depending on the camera, the options above may be different.
Release Control
Photo Name Configuration must be setup in Host Settings / Personnel Properties / Photo ID in order for the photo to be saved. See page 3-20 for more information.
● Take Picture/Capture - Takes the photo.
● View Finder - Toggles the view finder on and off.
Camera
● Zoom - Increases or decreases the zoom in one increment.
● Focus - Automatically focuses the lens for manual focus cameras.
● White Balance - The default setting is automatic. Under most circumstances the automatic setting does an adequate job of adjusting to different sources of light. However, there are times when this setting needs to be manually changed.
The white balance settings are:
Daylight - For use in direct, bright sunlight.
Cloudy - Use when shooting under overcast or in shade.
Tungsten - Use under tungsten and bulb-type 3-wavelength fluorescent lighting
Fluorescent - Use when fluorescent lamps are the main source of light.
Fluorescent H - Designed to work in newer daylight-calibrated fluorescent lighting.
Custom - For setting a custom value with a white sheet of paper, etc., to obtain the optimal white balance for the conditions.
● Flash - Select the flash setting from the drop-down list. Auto (Red Eye) is the default setting.
● Exposure Compensation - Adjust the exposure compensation setting to avoid making the subject too dark when it is backlit or shot against a bright background. The settings can be adjusted in 1/3-stops in the range of -2 to +2 stops.
● Image Size - Select the image size from the drop-down list. Small is the default setting.
● Image Quality - Select the image quality from the drop-down list. Normal is the default setting.
Photos should be limited to 1 megabyte in size. Fusion defaults the Image Size to small
and sets the Image Quality to normal to achieve a high quality photo while maintaining
a manageable file size.
Fusion User Manual Page 22-25
ID Badging
Crop
● Photo Size - Specifies the photo size based on the image size configuration. Read only.
● Crop Width - Enter a width or use the arrows to indicate a crop width.
● Crop Height - Enter a height or use the arrows to indicate a crop height.
About
● General information including the Software License Agreement.
3. When you are ready to take the photo, click the Take Photo/Capture button on the Release Control tab.
The Crop dialog will appear.
The view inside the crop window (blue rectangle) is how the photo will appear. Click inside the view panel to center the crop window around the click point.
Select
the Crop Settings tab to adjust the crop width and height.
4. Click OK to save the photo.
Previewing a Badge
To preview the badge in a zoom-able viewer:
1. Click the Preview Badge button.
The Preview Badge viewer will display.
● Use the forward/reverse arrows to move between pages of a 2-sided badge.
● Use the + and – (plus and minus) signs and drop–down menu to zoom in and out.
● Click the Print Setup button to display the Print Setup dialog.
2. Click the X to close the dialog box.
Printing a Badge
1. Click the Print Badge button.
The Page Setup dialog will appear.
2. Click OK to print the badge.
Page 22-26 Fusion User Manual
Menu Structure
File
Graphics Maps
Design (New)
Open
HTML Viewer
DNA Homepage
Print Preview
Set Password
Recent Files List
1
2
3
Log Out
Exit
Edit
Cut
Copy
Paste
Paste Special
Find
Replace
Lock
Group
Fusion Tech Manual
View
Windows
Watch
Text Message
Pan Window
IP Video
IP Video 1-4
Photo Recall
Photo Recall 1-4
Single DVR
Quad DVR
Information
Status Bar
Application Look
Office 2000
Office XP
Office 2003
Visual Studio 2005
Windows XP
Carbon
Office 2007
Visual Studio 2008
Office 2010
Visual Studio 2010
Tab Flat Borders
Refresh
Toolbars
Standard
Personnel
Door Modes
Events Filters
Events
Graphics
Graphic Alignment
Alarms
Hardware
Photo Recall
Live Graphics
Situation Level Manager
Reports
Video Manager
Customize
Explorers
Access Levels
Personnel
Hardware
Triggers & Macros
DNA DVR
Time Schedules
Operators & Hosts
A
DNA
Administrative
Properties
Operator Maintenance
Save View Setting
Edit View Setting
Operator Privileges
Alarms & Events
Clear All Alarms
Dispatch Text
Logging
Edit HTML Tree
Batch Processing
Tenants
Setup Filters
Setup Escalation
Setup Internal Schedules
Setup Custom Personnel Properties
Driver Setup
DNA Directories
SSP Communications File
1 Capture File
2 Capture Files
DNA Data Management
Archive Data
Restore Data
Archive by Event Type
Export
Scheduling
Archive Data
Batch Files
Downloads
Reports
Client Setup
Create Database Package
Journal Entry Types
Station Statistics
Journal
New Entry
View
Page A-1
Menu Structure
Hardware
Download
Control
Direct Commands
Add
Edit
Remove
Properties
Add
Channel
Camera
Door
Elevator
MPG
Subcontoller
SSP
Keypad Commands
Camera
Open View
Open in Window
DNA Video Window 1-4
Disable Popup
Normal
High
Medium
Low
View Hardware
Status
ACM Status
Open
New Report
Defaults
Card Formats
Trigger Codes
Homepage
Personnel
Properties
Add Cardholder
Remove Cardholder
Update
Add Record From Scanner
Scanner Options
Calibrate Scanner
Clean Scanner
Watch Item
Add Personnel Group
Download
Set Use Limit
Photo Recall
Goto Photo
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Stop Cycling
Personnel Record
Get Note
Pause
Other Photos
Remove
Clear
Email Photo
Set up
Reports
Alarms
Alarms History
Acknowledged Alarms
Pending Alarms
Events
Event History
Event Log Settings
Restored Archive Data
Acknowledged Alarms
Audit Trail
Event History
Access
Access Levels
Access Level Descriptions
Floors
Door Access Profile
Elevator Access Profile
Personnel
Companies
Personnel - Card Information
Personnel - General
Personnel - Access
Personnel - Groups
Hardware Settings
Sites
Channels
Controllers (SSP)
Sub-controllers (SIO)
Monitor Points
Control Points
Readers
Elevators
Cameras
MPGs
Doors
Door Contacts
REX
Door Strikes
APB Doors
System
Audit Trail
Holidays
Macros
Time Schedules
Triggers
Auto Armed Secured Areas
Door Follows Time Schedule
Operators
Custom Reports
Add
Manager
Custom 1-20
Page A-2 Fusion Tech Manual
Events
Time and Date
Hardware Object
Operator
Tenant
Cardholder
Personnel Type
Contractor
Disabled
Normal
Temp
Visitor
Vendor
Custom 1-5
Card Type
Contractor
Disabled
Normal
Temp
Visitor
Vendor
Custom 1-5
Toggle Filtered
Clear All Filters
Filters
Doors
Door
Mode Change
Access Granted
Access Denied
Hardware
Comm Events
Arm
Disarm
Secure or Inactive
Alarm or Active
Access Areas
MPGs (Monitor Point Groups)
Time, Triggers, Macros
Miscellaneous
Operator
Operator Commands
Alarm Handling
Index
Secondary Filters
Tools
User Defined Tools
Fusion Tech Manual
Hardware
Object Properties
Control Point
Launch Camera
Show Video Window
Load Homepage
Trace History
Watch Item
Personnel
Photo Recall
Personnel Rec
Get/Set Note
Trace History
Activate Card
Deactivate Card
Set Use Limit
Free Pass
Watch Item
E-mail Event
Reports
Events History
Logging
Grid
Grid Properties
Save Settings
Load Settings
Pause Scrolling
Print Preview
Auto Fit Grid
Events Grid
Menu Structure
Alarms
Select All
Alarm Information
Acknowledge
Acknowledge All Selected
Clear
Clear All Selected
Dismiss
Hardware
Point Properties
Control
Launch Camera
DVR Recordings
Load Homepage
Move Up
Move Down
Grid Setup
Field Chooser
Group By Box
Window
MDI Tab Groups
Cascade
Tile Horizontal
Tile Vertical
Arrange Icons
Open Windows 1-9
Windows
Help
Index
Search
Open Options Help on the Web
About DNA
Page A-3
Menu Structure
Reports
Alarms
Alarms History
Acknowledged Alarms
Pending Alarms
Events
Event History
Event Log Settings
Restored Archive Data
Acknowledged Alarms
Audit Trail
Event History
Access
Access Levels
Access Level Descriptions
Floors
Door Access Profile
Elevator Access Profile
Personnel
Companies
Personnel - Card Information
Personnel - General
Personnel - Access
Personnel - Groups
Hardware Settings
Sites
Channels
Controllers (SSP)
Sub-controllers (SIO)
Monitor Points
Control Points
Readers
Elevators
Cameras
MPGs
Doors
Door Contacts
REX
Door Strikes
APB Doors
System
Audit Trail
Holidays
Macros
Time Schedules
Triggers
Auto Armed Secured Areas
Door Follows Time Schedule
Operators
Custom Reports
Add
Manager
Custom 1-20
Page A-4
Graphics
Graphic Mode
Design
Run
Page Objects
Lock Objects
Unlock Objects
Show Locked Objects
Align
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Center
Spacing
Space Evenly Vertically
Space Evenly Horizontally
Sizing
Same Height
Same Width
Size Same
Orientation
Flip
Rotate
Rotate 90
Rotate 180
Rotate 270
Hardware Linkage
Page Conversion
View Page List
Clean Broken Links
Draw
Select
Audio
Button
Ellipse
Freehand
Hilite
Hotspot
Line
Note
Pointer
Polygon
Polyline
Rect
Redact
Stamp
Text
Ruler
Cross Product
Point
Protractor
Video
Pushpin
Freehand Hotspot
Rubber Stamp
Approved
Assigned
Checked
Client Attorney Privilege
Copy
Draft
Extended
Fax
Faxed
Important
Invoice
Notice
Official
Onfile
Paid
Passed
Pending
Processed
Received
Rejected
Release
Sent
Shipped
Top Secret
Urgent
Void
Fusion Tech Manual
Process Diagrams
B
See Chapter 4 for more information on Operators and Operator Profiles.
Adding a New Operator and Assigning a Profile
Open the Operator
Browser and right-click the
Operators object on the explorer tree.
Select Properties… from the context menu.
OR
Select
DNA / Administrative /
Operator Maintenance /
Operator Privileges… from the Main Menu.
OR
Select DNA /
Administrative /
Properties… from the Main Menu.
Select the Edit Operators object on the dialog explorer tree.
The Operator Privileges Editor dialog will display.
Add a new operator
Adding a new operator or editing an existing operator?
Edit an existing operator
Click the New
Operator button.
Select the
Operator to be edited from the drop-down menu.
Enter name, password, password verification, and if desired, the operator level.
Click the Add
Operator button.
YES
Select the profile from the
Operator Profile drop down list.
Click the Apply Changes button.
Is the desired
profile listed in the
Operator Profile list?
NO
Create a new
Operator Profile with the desired privileges.
Click OK.
Fusion Tech Manual Page B-1
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 4 for more information on Operators and Operator Profiles.
Configuring Operator Profiles
Open the Operator
Browser and right-click the Operators object on the explorer tree.
Select Properties… from the context menu.
OR
Select DNA /
Administrative /
Operator Maintenance /
Operator Privileges… from the Main Menu.
OR
Select the Operator Profiles object on the dialog explorer tree.
Select DNA /
Administrative /
Properties… from the Main Menu.
Click the Add New
Profile button.
Enter a Profile Name and click Add.
The name appears in the
Operator Profile drop-down.
New
Is this a new or existing
Profile?
Existing
Select the Profile using the Operator Profile drop-down menu.
Configure the profile.
Expand each item in the menu and the profiles specific privileges.
Expand the Operator
Settings heading and set the operator DNA
Administrator level.
Click Apply Changes or OK to save the configuration.
If an operator is logged in when a profile is changed, the changes will take effect the next time the operator logs into DNA.
Anyone designated as an admin can add operators, configure operator profiles and access.
The Apply Changes button must be selected in order for changes to be saved. If not, changes will be lost when selecting another operator or closing the dialog box.
Page B-2 Fusion Tech Manual
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 5 for more information on Time and Holiday Schedules.
Adding and Editing Time Schedules
Open the Time Schedule Browser.
Right-click the area inside the Time Schedule explorer and select New Time
Schedule from the menu.
Add
A Time Intervals dialog will display.
Adding a new time schedule or editing an existing time schedule?
Edit
Expand the objects in the browser tree and right click on the Time Schedule to be edited.
The Time Intervals dialog with the selected time schedule will display.
Configure the time schedule as desired.
Click OK.
Download the new time schedule.
Right-click inside the
Time Schedule Browser and select Download from the menu.
Fusion Tech Manual Page B-3
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 5 for more information on Time and Holiday Schedules.
Designating a Holiday in the System
Open the Time Schedule Browser.
Select the Holiday tab at the bottom the Time
Schedule Browser.
Right-click inside the
Time Schedule Browser and select Add… from the menu.
Define the holiday date(s) and enter a description.
If needed, select a
Holiday Type.
Click OK.
Download the new time schedule.
Right-click inside the
Time Schedule Browser and select Download from the menu.
Page B-4 Fusion Tech Manual
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 6 for more information on Access Levels.
Creating a Basic Access Level
Open the Access Levels
Browser from the Standard
Toolbar button.
OR
Select View / Explorers /
Access Levels from the Main Menu.
Expand the tree to locate the desired SSP.
Right-click on the SSP and select Add Access Level.
New
Enter a description for the Access Level.
Is this a new or existing
Profile?
Existing
Right-click on the Access
Level and select Properties.
Edit the description for the Access Level.
In the Time Schedule section, select a time schedule from the drop-down menu.
In the Access Control Model section, select the desired entry point(s).
Expand the Doors or Elevators objects to
select an individual entry point.
Click OK.
Download the
Access Level.
Fusion Tech Manual Page B-5
Process Diagrams
NOTES:
Page B-6 Fusion Tech Manual
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 7 for more information on Cardholders.
Adding a New Cardholder
Open the Personnel
Browser from the Standard
Toolbar button.
OR
Select View / Explorers /
Personnel from the Main Menu.
Right-click inside the Personnel Browser.
Select the New Individual item from the context menu.
Populate the desired fields in Cardholder’s
Record.
NO
Right-click in the record and select Update.
When the confirmation dialog appears, click the No button.
Will this individual be assigned a card?
If Personnel Groups have been created, a dialog will appear prompting for the addition.
YES
Select the
New Card tab.
Enter a card number in the Card #: field.
Right-click in the record and select Update.
Download the cardholder.
Fusion Tech Manual Page B-7
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 7 for more information on Cardholders.
Adding a Photo to a Personnel Record
Right-click inside the Cardholder’s
Record and select Photo Properties from the menu.
Select an existing photo from the photo list.
Edit an existing photo
Adding a new photo or
Editing an existing photo
Move the photo using the Up and Down arrows.
Check the Displayed and/or
Set Default boxes.
Enter a description, if desired.
Click OK.
Save the Cardholder’s record.
Add a new photo
Click the New button.
Browse to the desired photo file and click the Open button.
Page B-8 Fusion Tech Manual
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 8 for more information on Hardware.
Creating a Direct Command
STEP #1:
Create the
Direct
Control
Command
Select Hardware / Direct Commands /
Add from the Main Menu.
In the User Commands Editor dialog:
§
Enter a name (short description) for the command in the User Command
Title field.
§
Select the Add button to display the Add Direct Command Editor dialog.
In the Add Direct Command Editor dialog:
§
Enter a description for the command in the Title field.
§
Select the desired options from the Command, Address and Operation drop-down menus.
§
If the command involves a control point, the user may need to configure
On Time, Off Time and Repeat.
§
If desired, select the desired Site and/or SSP from the drop-down list.
§
Click OK.
If desired, click the Add button to associate more commands.
STEP #2:
Drag custom direct control to new toolbar
In the User Commands Editor dialog:
§
CLICK OK.
Open the Customize dialog.
Select the Direct Control option, locate the
Command and drag it to the desired toolbar.
STEP #3:
Configure new direct control button
With the Customize dialog still open, right-click on the new toolbar button and select Button Appearance… from the menu. Configure the button as desired.
Fusion Tech Manual Page B-9
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 8 for more information on Hardware.
STEP #1:
CREATE A CARD
FORMAT
Configuring Card Formats
RIGHT-CLICK on the SSP and select Card
Formats from the context menu.
The Card Formats dialog will display.
CREATING A
NEW CARD
FORMAT
Select the New button to create a new card format without overwriting an existing format.
Creating a new card format or editing an existing card format?
COPYING AN
EXISTING CARD
FORMAT
Select the correct format from the
Description drop down list and click the
Copy button to copy the format.
Enter a name in the Description field.
If needed, enter or edit the desired values in the Facility Code and Card Format fields.
Click the Save button to save the configuration.
******************************************************************************
STEP #2:
ASSIGN
CARD
FORMAT
TO THE CONTROLLER
In the Hardware Browser, right-click the SSP and select Properties from the context menu.
Select the Card and Dual Comm link from the dialog tree.
In the resulting dialog, select up to 8 card formats in the drop-down menus.
Click OK.
Page B-10 Fusion Tech Manual
See Chapter 10 for more information on Triggers & Macros.
Basic Trigger and Macro Process
Create a Macro.
Add a Macro Command(s) to the Macro.
Add a Trigger and assign the
Macro to the Trigger.
Download the
Trigger & Macro to the SSP.
Process Diagrams
Fusion Tech Manual Page B-11
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 10 for more information on Triggers & Macros.
Creating a Macro
From the Triggers & Macros
Browser, expand the Macros header and locate the desired SSP.
Right-click or double-click the
SSP icon and select Add Macro.
The Macro Editor dialog will display.
Macros are created and downloaded to the specific SSP that contains objects associated to the macro. It is important to select the appropriate SSP when adding a macro.
Enter a Description for the Macro and click OK.
The newly created macro will appear in the Triggers &
Macros Browser.
(CLICK the + to expand the macros object.)
Add Macro Commands to the Macro.
Page B-12 Fusion Tech Manual
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 10 for more information on Triggers & Macros.
Adding a Macro Command
From the Triggers & Macros
Browser, expand the Macros header and locate the desired SSP.
Right-click on the appropriate
Macro and select Macro
Commands / Add Command.
The Macro Command dialog will display.
Configure the following items to complete the macro command.
· Command - Select the command from the drop-down list of available commands.
· Device - This field will change depending on the Command that is chosen.
For example: if the command is Control Point Activate, this will change to Control Point and display a list of available control points in the drop-down list.
· Action Type - Configure the action type (1-4).
Type 1 (Default)
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Click OK.
Using this process, add as many macro commands as desired.
Right-click inside the Triggers and
Macros Browser and select Download from the menu.
Macro command Action
Types are conditions and/or states attributed to a given command. If unfamiliar with this functionality, use Type
1, which is the default.
Fusion Tech Manual Page B-13
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 10 for more information on Triggers & Macros.
Adding a Trigger
From the Triggers & Macros
Browser, expand the Triggers header and locate the desired SSP.
Right-click or double-click the
SSP icon and select Add Trigger.
The Triggers Editor dialog box will display.
Triggers are created and downloaded to the specific SSP that contains objects associated to the trigger.
It is important to select the appropriate SSP when adding a trigger.
Enter data and use the drop-down menus to configure the
fields in the Triggers Editor dialog. Complete the following
information fields:
·
Description - Enter a description for the trigger..
·
Trigger Event - Select the event to use as the trigger to
execute the desired Macro.
·
Object - This field description will change based on the
type of Trigger Event selected for the object.
·
Time Schedule - Select the time schedule to limit the
trigger to a specific timeframe.
·
Macro - Select the macro from the drop-down list of
available macros.
·
Macro Command - Select the macro command from the
drop-down list. The default is Execute Type 1 (Default) and will be used most of the time.
Using this process, add as many macro commands as desired.
Click OK.
Right-click the Trigger and select Download from the menu.
Page B-14 Fusion Tech Manual
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 10 for more information on Triggers & Macros.
Configuring Host Based Macros
STEP #1:
Select macro object and configure object relationships
Open the Triggers & Macros Browser and select the Host Based Macros tab.
Right-click the Site object and select
Add Host Macro from the menu.
The Host Based Macro (Global I/O) dialog will display.
Enter a name/description in the Description field.
If desired, select an Internal Time Schedule.
Select the Local (Controlling Object) Object from the drop-down menu.
Select the Events Action(s) for each Controlling Object.
Select the Remote (Controlled Object) Object from the drop-down menu.
Select the Action(s) for each Controlled Object.
Enter the physical address properties of the Remote object to be controlled when the Local Object triggers.
Click OK.
*****************************************************************
STEP #2:
Select trigger object and assign macro
From the Hardware browser, double-click the specific Hardware
Object to associate with the Host Based Macro.
(This is the specific object that will act as the trigger.)
The Properties dialog for the object will display.
Select the appropriate properties page object from the dialog tree.
In the resulting dialog, select the host based macro from the Host Based Macro drop-down menu.
Click OK.
Fusion Tech Manual Page B-15
Process Diagrams
NOTES:
Page B-16 Fusion Tech Manual
See Chapter 11 for more information on Access Areas and Anti-Pass Back.
Create and Configure an Access Area
Open the Hardware Browser.
Right-click the desired SSP and select
Add / Add Access Area.
Enter a Description and configure the Access Area.
Click OK.
Right-click on the desired Door and select Properties from the menu.
Select the Advanced link.
Select the Access Area from the From and/or To areas in the drop-down menus. Configure the remainder of the door dialog.
Click OK.
Process Diagrams
Fusion Tech Manual Page B-17
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 11 for more information on Access Areas and Anti-Pass Back.
Configuring the System for Anti-Pass Back (APB)
Select the Store APB Locations controller flag in the SSP/Properties/Stored Quantities dialog for each involved SSP.
If Area Based Anti-Pass Back is to be used without the Timed Option, make sure that the
Support Timed Anti-Pass Back controller flag is
NOT checked in each.
Create an Access
Area for each of the
APB locations.
Configure door requirements for each door location.
In the Access Areas dialog: (Double-click the appropriate SSP In
the Access Areas browser.)
1. Select Area Number.
2. Enter a Description for the area.
3. Select Enabled from the Access Control drop-down menu.
4. Leave Require 2 or more in area checkbox unchecked.
5. Set Initial Occupancy to zero.
6. Set Maximum to more than the total number of cards.
7. Set Upper Warning to 5% less than the total number of cards.
8. Set Lower Warning to zero.
9. Click OK.
In the Advanced page of the Door Properties dialog for each desired door:
A. Anti-Pass Back Settings: Select an option from the Option dropdown menu.
1. Do not alter APB location
2. Accept any location, change on entry. (Area Based Anti-Pass Back)
3. Check location, change on entry. (Area-based Hard Anti-Pass Back)
4. Check last valid user. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
5. Check last ACR used, no location changed. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
6. Check current location, change on entry. (Area-based Soft Anti-Pass Back)
B. From Area: The number designating the area the user must be in.
C. To Area: The number designating the area the user will be moved to.
D. Delay: The number of minutes that need to elapse before this card can be used again. A current request beyond this delay is not rejected for APB. Used in the following options:
1. Check last valid user. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
2. Check last ACR used, no location changed. (Reader-based Anti-Pass Back)
3. Check current location, change on entry. (Area-based Soft Anti-Pass Back)
E. Door Parameters: Make sure that Log all requests as used is NOT selected.
F. Click OK to save.
Page B-18 Fusion Tech Manual
See Chapter 13 for more information on Tenants.
Configuring Tenants
Enable Tenants in the Host
Settings / Properties dialog.
Configure tenants in the Host
Settings/Personnel/Tenants dialog.
Create the Tenants.
Right-click inside the
Personnel Browser and select
Tenant/Add from the menu.
Assign Tenants to specific operators in the Host Settings /
Operator Profiles dialog.
Enter a Name and select the desired Controllers.
Click OK.
Add Cardholders to the correct Tenant.
Enable Tenants on all desired workstations.
Process Diagrams
Fusion Tech Manual Page B-19
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 14 for more information on Events and Alarms.
Assigning a Sound to an Alarm Priority
Right-click in the Alarm Grid and select Grid Setup.
The Alarm Grid Settings dialog will display.
Select the Enable checkbox next to the Priority setting.
Browse button the desired wav file and click the Open button.
Upon activation, should the sound repeat until the alarm state changes?
YES
Select the Loop checkbox next to the desired Priority.
NO
Click OK.
Page B-20 Fusion Tech Manual
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 17 for more information on Reports.
Configuring a Report
From the Main Menu, select Reports /
[Report Category] /[Specific Report].
The Report Parameter
Configuration dialog will display.
Select each tab and configure each parameter as desired.
Click OK.
For instance, to open the
Events History report from the Events category, Select
Reports / Events / Events
History from the Main Menu.
Fusion Tech Manual Page B-21
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 17 for more information on Reports.
Creating a Custom Report
Configure the desired report and select
Reports / Create Custom Report from the Main Menu.
Enter the Report Name and click OK.
The Custom Report
Configuration dialog will display.
Enter a menu name for the custom report and select the desired
Report Parameter checkboxes.
Click OK.
The Custom Reports
Manager dialog will display.
Add, edit, and delete reports as desired.
When satisfied with the custom reports configuration, click OK.
Display the custom report in the Reports
Viewer by selecting
Reports / Custom
Reports / [Specific
Custom Report] from the Main Menu.
Page B-22 Fusion Tech Manual
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 18 for more information on Graphic Maps.
Creating Graphic Maps and Applying Graphic Objects
Select File / Graphic Maps / New from the Main Menu.
The Open dialog will display.
The graphics maps may be in any directory accessible to the computer. Care should be taken to assure that the chosen location is always available when requested and does not require special mappings and network identifications.
Browse to the file and click the Open button.
Select Graphics / Graphics
Mode / Design from the
Main Menu.
Linking Graphic
Objects to Hardware
Place drawing objects onto the page at desired locations using the special drawing tools from the Graphics toolbar.
Leave object as
graphic presentation, link object to live hardware point, link object to a hyperlink object such as an external web site, or external program, or link object to another DNA graphics map.
Right-click on the object to expose properties such as foreground/background colors, background style, etc.
Configure the appropriate properties.
To link an object to an external program, right-click on the object and select
Properties / Hyperlink. Select
Run Program and browse to the location of the program's executable. Select OK.
To link an object to another
DNA Page, right-click on the object and select Properties /
Hyperlink. Select Load Graphics page and browse to the location of the graphic file.
Select OK.
To link an object to a web site, right-click on the object and select Properties / Hyperlink.
Select Go to web page and enter the web page address or
URL. Select OK.
Select File / Save from
the Main Menu.
Fusion Tech Manual Page B-23
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 18 for more information on Graphic Maps.
Linking Graphic Objects to Hardware
With the graphic map in Design mode, right-click the graphic map object and select
Link Hardware / Link [Specific Hardware Object]. Optionally, these may be
linked by dragging the
The Linked Object dialog box will display.
object from the hardware tree onto the graphic object (in Design mode).
Configure the address of the object by selecting the Site, SSP and Object Address from the drop-down lists.
If desired, select the Make this Object’s Home Page checkbox.
What will happen when the item is selected?
This page will be the hardware object's homepage and will display automatically whenever an alarm occurs at that address.
The available options are: o None - Take no action upon
selection.
o Control/Ack (default) -
Opens the Direct Control dialog
when not in alarm and the
Acknowledge dialog when in
alarm.
o Control - Always open the
Direct Control dialog.
o Acknowledge - Always open
the Acknowledge dialog.
o Page Zoom - Moves to specified
page upon selection o Hyperlink - Open web page
or run an external program.
What type of link will this graphic map object display?
Select the State Properties object in the explorer.
This dialog depends on the selected Link Type.
Configure the Properties and click OK.
Select File / Save from the
Main Menu.
Page B-24 Fusion Tech Manual
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 18 for more information on Graphic Maps.
Assigning a Sound to a Graphic Map Object
Place the map in Design mode and right click on the desired map object.
Select the Linked Object Properties item from the menu.
The Linked Object dialog will display.
Select the State Properties item on the explorer tree.
Select the sound from the drop-down list next to the action or event to which the desired sound will be associated.
Upon activation, does the sound need to repeat until the event changes?
YES
NO
Select the Loop checkbox.
Click OK.
Fusion Tech Manual Page B-25
Process Diagrams
See Chapter 22 for more information on Badging.
Basic Badge Design Process
Open the Badge Designer.
Select New from the
Main Menu.
Yes Is this a new design?
No
Select Open from the Main Menu and locate the desired .bdg file.
Configure the template orientation, size and color.
Insert desired text and image objects.
Double-click each object to display the
Editor dialog or use the Object Inspector to configure the badge template
Select Save or Save As from the Main Menu.
Page B-26 Fusion Tech Manual
Shortcut Keys
C
Shortcut keys help provide an easier and usually quicker method of navigating and using DNA Fusion.
Shortcut keys are commonly accessed by using the Alt, Ctrl, and/or Shift in conjunction with a single letter.
The standard for listing a shortcut is listing the modifi er key, a plus symbol, and the single character. Or in other words “ALT+S” is telling you to press the Alt key and while continuing to hold the Alt key pressing the S key to perform the shortcut.
In addition to the shortcuts listed on this page users can fi nd the shortcut keys by looking for underlined letters in their menus.
Space has been provided for you to enter any custom keyboard shortcuts that you create.
F eature
Access Level Browser
Acknowledge All Selected Alarms
Acknowledge Alarm
Alarm Grid
Clear All Selected Alarms
Clear Alarm
Copy
Cut
DNA Homepage
Events Grid
Hardware Browser
HTML Viewer
IP Video 1
IP Video 2
IP Video 3
IP Video 4
New Journal Entry (for selected object)
Paste
Personnel Browser
Photo Recall 1
Photo Recall 2
Photo Recall 3
Photo Recall 4
Save Settings (Active Document)
Select All Alarm Items
View DNA Journal Entries
Watch Window
F9
F11
Shift+F11
Ctrl+F11
Alt+F11
Ctrl+P
Ctrl+S
F4
Shift+F10
Shift+F9
S hortcut
Shift+F7
Shift+F5
F5
F2
Shift+F8
F8
Ctrl+C or Ctrl+Insert
Ctrl+X or Shift+Delete
Shift+F3
Shift+F2
F7
F3
F12
Shift+F12
Ctrl+F12
Alt+F12
F10
Ctrl+V or Shift+Insert
K ey
Fusion Tech Manual Page C-1
Shortcut Keys
F eature
S hortcut
K ey
Page C-2 Fusion Tech Manual
Replacement Text
D
R eplacement
%ALARMCARD%
%CARD%
%CARDFLAG%
%CARDTYPE%
%DATE%
%EVENTDATA%
%EVENTGROUP%
%FIRSTNAME%
%FLOOR%
%MESSAGE%
%MSG%
%PERSON%
%PERSONTYPE%
%PHOTO1%
%PHOTO2%
%PHOTO3%
%PHOTO4%
%PRIORITY%
%SECURITYLEVEL%
%SOURCENUMBER%
%SOURCETYPE%
%TENANT%
%TENANTNAME%
%TIME%
%TIMEDATE%
%WATCH%
%ADDR%
%ADDRESS%
%ALARM%
%ALARMINFO%
%AREA%
%ARMSTATE%
%CAMERA%
%CAMERAID%
%DOOR%
%FOREIGNACM%
c ategoRy
D escRiption
Event
Defines Alarm Card State
Event
Card Number
Event
Card flags associated with card
Event
Card Type as Text
Event Event Date
Event Event Data from DNA Event
Event
Event Grouping
Event Cardholder’s First Name
Event
Elevator Floor
Event Event Message
Event
Event Message
Event Cardholder’s Name
Event
Person Type as Text
Event Cardholder’s Photo 1 Image
Event
Cardholder’s Photo 2 Image
Event Cardholder’s Photo 3 Image
Event
Cardholder’s Photo 4 Image
Event
Alarm Object Priority
Event
Hardware Object Security Level
Event
Hardware Event Source Number
Event
Hardware Event Source Type
Event
Tenant Number
Event
Tenant Name
Event
Event Time
Event Event Time & Date
Event
Watched Status of Card
Hardware Hardware Object Address String
Hardware Hardware Object Description
Hardware Alarm Status in Text Form
Hardware Hardware Specific Alarm Text
Hardware Event’s Area as Number
Hardware Arm or Disarm State
Hardware Camera Name
Hardware Camera Number
Hardware Event’s Door as Number
e xample
Alarm Card or NOT Alarm Card
256
Watched, Alarm Card, etc.
Visitor, Normal, etc.
2/24/2004
MPG Controlled by Operator
1, 2, 3, etc.
John
5
Became Active
Index 18
Smith, John
Visitor, Normal, etc.
\\Server\Photos\JSmith1.jpg
\\Server\Photos\JSmith2.jpg
\\Server\Photos\JSmith3.jpg
\\Server\Photos\JSmith4.jpg
1, 2, 3, etc.
High, Medium, Low, Normal
1, 2, 3, etc.
1, 2, 3, etc.
1
Student Hall
2:15:03 PM
2/24/2004 14:15
Watched or Clear
1.1.1.I6
Front Entrance
Alarm, RTN, ACK, etc.
If this is in alarm, call...
1
Armed, Disarmed, etc.
Motion1
1
1
1
Fusion Tech Manual Page D-1
Replacement Text
R eplacement
%FOREIGNADDR%
c ategoRy
D escRiption
Associated Hardware Object
%FOREIGNAREA%
%FOREIGNSIO%
1
%FOREIGNMACRO% Hardware Macro # of the Macros Associated
%FOREIGNPOINT%
1
1
1
1.4.D2
Front Door
e xample
%FOREIGNSITE%
1
%FOREIGNSSP%
1 sociated Hardware Object
-
Main Building Controller
%FOREIGNTRIGGER% Hardware Trigger # of the Macro’s Associated
%HOMEPAGE%
%LEDMODE%
Hardware Home Page Associated w/Object
Hardware Door LED Mode
%MODE%
%PDATE%
%PTIME%
%PTIMEDATE%
Hardware Door Mode
Hardware Panel Transaction Date
Hardware Panel Transaction Time
Hardware Panel Transaction Date and Time
%LASTCARDTIME%
%MACRO%
%MPG%
%POINT%
%SIO%
%SITE%
%SITENAME%
%SSP%
%SSPNAME%
%STATE%
%STATEOPEN%
%STATEFORCED%
%STATEHELD%
%STATUS%
%TRIGGER%
%ALARMCOUNT%
%ALARMCOUNTOP%
%EVENTCOUNT%
%EVENTCOUNTOP%
%IPADDRESS%
Hardware Last Card Read at Door Time/Date
Hardware Event’s Macro as Number
Hardware Event’s MPG as Number
Hardware Event’s Point as Number
Hardware Event’s SIO as Number
Hardware Site Number
Hardware Site Name
Hardware Event’s SSP as Number
Hardware Event’s SSP as Description
Hardware Hardware Object State
Hardware Door Open Status
Hardware Door Forced Status
Hardware Door Held Status
Hardware Hardware Object Status
Hardware Event’s Trigger as Number
System Alarm Count Since Startup
System Alarm Count Since Last Login
System
System
System
Event Count Since Startup
Event Count Since Last Login
Stations Current IP Address
1 c:\ProgramFiles\Map\Bldg1
2
Card Only
2/12/2011
2:00:00 PM
2/12/2011 2:00:00 PM
2/24/2004 14:15
1
1
1
1
1
Oklahoma Office
1
Main Building Controller
Active, Inactive, etc.
Open, Closed, Unknown
Forced, Normal, Unknown
Held, Normal, Unknown
Armed, Disarmed, etc.
1
12
6
240
120
10.0.30.93
Page D-2 Fusion Tech Manual
Replacement Text
R eplacement
%OP%
%OPTIME%
%RUNTIME%
%STATION%
%STATIONNAME%
%TRANSCOUNT%
%TRANSCOUNTOP%
c ategoRy
D escRiption e xample
System Current DNA Operator
System
Time host has been running since login
Admin
1:24:12
System Time host has been running
System Station Number
System Station Name
System Transaction Count Since Startup
2:08:52
12
Guard Station
70
System Transaction Count Since Last Login 35
Page D-3 Fusion Tech Manual
Replacement Text
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page D-4 Fusion Tech Manual
Glossary
E
Access Area
A specific defined area wherein all access points to the area are secured by the system, and the access points can be configured and adjusted to set parameters on occupancy and permission attributes.
Access Control Model (ACM)
A group of objects that when associated together form a point of entry that is normally associated with a door or elevator.
Access Credential
A medium that contains encoded information (which is recognized by the access control system) such as ID cards, key fobs, biometrics, and smart chips.
Access Level
A logical group of doors paired with a time schedule used to determine when and where a card is granted access in the system.
Acknowledge Alarm
The action taken by an operator to indicate that he/she is aware of a specific alarm or tamper state.
Administrator
Person responsible for adding operators and assigning the specific privileges to the operators’ profiles, and determining operator levels.
Alarm Condition
Alarms signal a specific and “user-defined” change of state on system hardware. These changes in state are reported through the system to display on the alarm grid.
American Disabilities Act (ADA)
Indicates that a setting or card designation is compliant with the American Disabilities Act, which provides specific parameters for access for personnel with disabilities. Cards with the ADA setting checked, enable
ADA parameters to take effect when the card is badged.
Anti Pass Back (APB)
Control prohibiting a card from entering an access area more than once without the system recognizing that the card has first exited the access area.
Badge
An identification card usually displaying a cardholder’s photo, signature or other specific identifying characteristics.
Badging Station
A hardware and software system used to obtain and save personal data about a cardholder (e.g., photo or signature).
Bar Code
A array of machine readable rectangular bars and spaces arranged in a specific way to represent letters, numbers, and other human readable symbols.
Biometrics
A machine readable technology that allows for the unique identification of individuals by reading biological features (fingerprints, retina scans, etc.).
Fusion Tech Manual Page E-1
Glossary
Bumping
Sending an alarm to an alternate site or station following a user-defined time during which the alarm is unacknowledged.
Cardholder
A person who has been issued an access credential.
Channel
The path in which the SSP controller communicates with the host or driver.
Clear Alarm
The action taken by an operator to respond to an alarm condition once the alarm has been acknowledged, responded to, and cleared from the alarm grid.
Client
A computer connected to the DNA system that can be utilized for the management or monitoring of the system.
Command
An operator-initiated event that causes a change or action within the access control system.
Controller
The data-gathering panel that makes local access decisions. Includes the SSP, SSP-C, and SSP-E.
Download
An “update” action to send saved information to a controller for the purposes of making access decisions or system actions without the intervention of the DNA Server. Also See Save.
Driver
The service that provides the connection from the DNA Fusion application to the field controllers for the management of system configuration information and system event transactions.
Facility Code
A coded number, in addition to the individual card number, stored within each credential which uniquely identifies the facility at which the card is valid.
Group
A logical set of common data objects such as cardholders or hardware points.
Host
Generally, it is the machine on which the driver resides. Sometimes refers to a given client machine, e.g. in reference to a host-based macro.
Host Settings
The settings which determine the behavior of the application at the host or workstation.
Input Point
Monitors the status of a device. This can be a DPS, motion detector or output of another device. Also referred to as a Monitor Point.
Landscape
Horizontal orientation of pages, screen displays or badges.
Logo
A graphic symbol used to represent a company or organization.
Machine Readable
A code or characters that can be read by machines.
Magnetic Stripe
Magnetic material, usually applied as a stripe on a card, used to encode cardholder information.
Macro
A defined set of actions/commands that is based on a trigger event. Macros can also be manually executed.
Page E-2 Fusion Tech Manual
Glossary
Masking
Hiding or suppressing alarms that the operator does not wish to be viewed.
Monitor Point Group (MPG)
A collection of monitor points that typically have been grouped for common manageability.
Off-line
A condition in which a controller is not in communication with the DNA driver. In the off-line mode, the controller continues to make access decisions and process events according to the information stored in the local memory.
Operator
Anyone with access to the application. The Administrator is also an Operator, though generally distinguished in the documentation due to the difference in responsibility and permissions.
Output
Supplying a contact or relay change of state to control a device, for example door locks, HVAC, etc. Also referred to as a Control Point.
Panel
Synonymous with an SSP. See Controller.
Password
The permission level of the operator environment. Required for permissions to log on to the application.
Portrait
Vertical orientation of pages, screen display or badges.
Pre-Alarm Held
An alert given before an opened door reports “held open” alarm.
Proximity
A non-contact system for reading cards. Data is exchanged between card and reader by radio frequency, fiber optics, induction, laser or other non-mechanical contact technology.
Reader
A device that can read the encoding on a card or badge.
Save
An action to record information in the database. See Download.
Secured Area
A physical location within a facility to which monitor points, control points and card readers can be grouped and then controlled via card reads, keypad interaction or commands initiated by the operator. Typically used to define Monitor Point Groups.
Security System Processor (SSP)
Synonymous with panel and controller. See Controller.
Shunt
Length of time an input will be ignored when it goes active during an access granted event. This only applies to inputs that are specified as the Door Contact.
Smart Card
A plastic card with an embedded microchip, which can be used to store information about the cardholder or record card transactions as they occur.
Sub-controller
One of a series of circuit boards that communicates information about field devices like readers, contacts, motion detectors, etc., upstream to the SSP. (RSC-1, RSC-2, RSC-T, ISC-16, and OSC-16)
Tamper1
A digital input that, if open, signals a cabinet tamper alarm at the device.
Page E-3 Fusion Tech Manual
Glossary
Tamper2
A digital input that signals power loss alarm at the device.
Time Schedules
Consist of time ranges that are associated with days or holidays. Time Schedules are used in connection with access levels and often as trigger events.
Trigger
A system event that causes another event or macro to occur.
Trouble
A condition within the circuitry of a monitored point that indicates that an equipment malfunction and/or a single break, a single fault or a wire-to-wire short exists. This only applies to supervised points.
Workstation
A computer connected to the DNA system that can be utilized for the management or monitoring of the system. Also referred to as a Client.
Page E-4 Fusion Tech Manual
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 25 Introduction to DNA Fusion
- 25 What is DNA Fusion?
- 25 DNA Advantages
- 25 System Configuration Overview
- 25 TCP/IP
- 25 Services
- 25 Requirements & Specifications
- 25 Installation Types
- 25 Network Requirements for DNA
- 25 Server Specifications
- 25 DNA Server (Stand Alone) w/SQL Express Database
- 25 DNA Server PC w/SQL Express Database 1 to 4 Clients
- 25 DNA Enterprise Server PC w/SQL Server Database
- 25 Client Specifications
- 25 DNA Client Workstation
- 25 DNA Client Workstation w/Photo ID
- 25 Open Options Resources
- 25 World Wide Web
- 26 Starting DNAFusion
- 26 Logging In
- 26 Initial Workstation Logon
- 26 Changing Operators
- 26 The Fusion Environment
- 26 Toolbars
- 26 Standard Toolbar
- 26 Secondary Toolbars
- 26 Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons
- 26 Explorer (Browser Panes)
- 26 Data Windows
- 26 Status Bar
- 26 The Customize Dialog
- 26 Commands
- 26 Toolbars
- 26 Tools
- 26 Keyboard
- 43 Mouse
- 43 Options
- 43 Customizing the DNA Environment
- 43 Changing the Desktop Appearance
- 43 Changing the Data Window Appearance
- 43 Hiding a Main Menu Item
- 43 Adding Toolbar Buttons
- 43 Hiding Toolbar Buttons
- 43 Modifying Toolbar Buttons
- 43 Downloading
- 44 The Properties Dialog
- 44 Station Settings
- 44 Appearance: Information Bar
- 44 Tooltip Settings
- 44 Alarms & Events
- 44 Situation Manager
- 44 Situation Manager Settings
- 44 Edit Operators
- 44 Operator Statistics
- 44 Options
- 44 Operator Profiles
- 44 Options
- 44 E-Mail Enable
- 44 Settings
- 44 SMTP Properties
- 44 E-Mail Recipients List
- 44 E-Mail Editor
- 44 Watchbar Settings
- 44 Tab Captions
- 44 Grid Lines
- 44 Personnel Properties
- 44 Operation
- 44 New Cards
- 44 Drivers License Scanner Fields
- 44 Photo Recall
- 44 Displayed Text
- 44 Photo Sizing
- 44 Text Attributes
- 44 Cycling
- 44 Text Colors
- 68 Display On
- 68 Tree Properties
- 68 Personnel Tree Tooltips
- 68 Personnel Tree Defaults
- 68 Refresh from Client Updates
- 68 Personnel Tree Search Tabs
- 68 Personnel SQL Builder
- 68 Tenant Settings
- 68 Photo ID
- 68 Photo Name Configuration
- 68 Photo ID Settings
- 68 Custom Fields and Types
- 68 Personnel Custom Fields (Embedded)
- 68 Custom Personnel Types
- 68 Custom Access Levels
- 68 Edit Card Types
- 68 Edit Disable Reasons
- 68 Hardware Tree Behavior
- 68 Personnel Tree Tooltips
- 68 Hardware Tree Tabs
- 68 “All Objects” Tree Items
- 68 Refresh from Current Updates
- 68 DNA Video Window Settings
- 68 Video Window
- 68 ASSA Settings
- 68 Credential Settings
- 68 Magnetic Encoding Minimum Lengths
- 69 Configuring Operators
- 69 Changing Operator’s Password
- 69 Configuring Operator Profiles
- 69 Adding a Profile
- 69 Removing a Profile
- 69 Editing a Profile
- 69 Configuring a Profile
- 69 Hardware
- 69 Access Levels
- 69 Views